New Holland T7.235 (EN)

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS - according to Directives 2006/42/EC, Annex I 1.7.4.
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
T7.220
T7.235
T7.250
T7.260
T7.270
Sidewinder ll™
Auto Command - Power Command
Part Number 84411172

2nd edition English
January 2011
xx
SECTION SUMMARY
1 -- General Information and Safety
2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation
3 -- Field operation
4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance
5 -- Fault Finding
6 -- Accessories
7 -- Specifications
8 -- First 50 hour Service Forms
9 -- Index
NOTES
CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DOCUMENT
1
On page 1--4 is provided copy of the ”EC” Declaration of Conformity (EC Declaration of Conformity
acc to 2006/42/EC).
The EC Declaration of Conformity is the manufacturer’s declaration about equipment compliance to
relevant EU provisions.
Please keep the original document in a safe place. Local authorities may require you to show this docu-
ment in order to assure compliance of your equipment.
Translation of this declaration in your own country language is provided on the original document
For your better and easier understanding of the document you’ll find original text reproduced hereafter
together with some notes
Clause of EN
EC Declaration of conformity
2006/42/EC According to Directive 2006/42/EC.
Annex II
We, [1]
1.A.1
Represented by Giuseppe Gavioli,

1.A.2 CNH Europe Holding S.A.
13, Rue Aldringen
L--1118 Luxembourg
1.A.3 declare under our sole responsibility, that
the product:
Agricultural tractor
Trade Name: [2]
Model: [3]
Type: [4]
Serial Number: [5]
to which this declaration relates, fulfils all
the relevant provisions of the Directive
1.A.4 2006/42/EC, amended by [6].
For the relevant implementation of the
1.A.7 provisions of the Directive, the following
(harmonised) standards have been
applied:
 ISO 26322--1 part 1 or 2
Other standards: see Operators Manual
Place and date of the declaration: [7]
1.A.9
Name and signature of the authorised per-

1.A.10 son: [8]
HEALTH AND SAFETY RELATED STANDARDS APPLIED TO YOUR TRACTOR

 FOPS level on your tractor cab is certified according to OECD Code 10.
 HVAC (Heating, ventilation Air Conditioning ) CAB is certified Category 2 according to EN 15695- 1.
 NOISE EMISSION LEVELS are rated according to 77/311/EEC.
 VIBRATION LEVELS are rated according to 78/764/EEC.
 ROPS PROTECTION is certified according to EN 15694.
NOTE: See safety section 1 in this manual for further explanation and details on above mentioned stand-
ards and specific terminology.
CONTENTS
Title Page
Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

To the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3
Ecology and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24
Airborne Noise Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--25
Tractor Vibration Level Information Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--26
Machine Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--27
Protection Offered by the Tractor Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--31
Intended Use Of Your Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--34
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--37
Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Integrated Control Panel (ICP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--2
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5
Electrical Power Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--22
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--26
Instrument Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--33
Analogue/Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--37
Brake Controls and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--85
Power Command Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--92
Auto Command Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--115
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--136
Front Axle Suspesion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--139
Section 3 -- Field Operation

Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
Boosting the Tractor Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
Engine Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
Engine Speed Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--18
Headland Turn Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--22
Fast Steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--41
Rear Power Take--Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--43
Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--62
Electronic Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--87
Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--102
Three--point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--135
Quick Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--141
Linkage Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--145
Drawbars and Towing Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--149
Trailer Braking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--165
Front Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--172
Dynamic Front Fenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--177
Rear Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--180
Ballasting and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--192
Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
General Diesel Fuel, and Bio--Diesel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
Guard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11
Lubrication and Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--15
Servicing: When Warning Lights Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--18
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--21
50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--22
100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--35
300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--34
600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--39
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--49
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--58
Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--65
General Maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--68
Fuses and Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--83
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--92
Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
3-point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--11
Section 6 -- Accessories
ISO Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Auto Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Rotating Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
Auxiliary Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
Battery Isolator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--4
Section 7 -- Specification
General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
Lubricant and Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Maximum Operating Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11
Rear Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11
Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
Rear Three-Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
Front 3--Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
Front Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--19
Hardware Torque Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--20
Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1

METRIC AND IMPERIAL UNITS ABBREVIATIONS
RECOMMENDED SI (METRIC) UNITS IMPERIAL UNIT

TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS NAME SYMBOL NAME SYMBOL
AREA
Land area hectare ha acre ha
square meter m2 square foot ft2
square inch in2
square millimetre mm2 square inch in2
ELECTRICITY
ampere A ampere A
volt V volt V
microfarad F microfarad F
ohm  ohm 
FORCE
kilonewton kN pound Ib
newton N pound Ib
FORCE PER LENGTH
newton per metre N/m pound per inch Ib/in
FREQUENCY
megahertz MHz Megahertz MHz
kilohertz kHz kilohertz kHz
hertz Hz hertz Hz
FREQUENCY -- ROTATIONAL
revolution per minute r/min revolution per minute r/min (a)
rpm rpm
LENGTH
kilometre km mile mi
meter m foot ft
centimetre cm inch in
millimetre mm inch in
micrometer m
MASS
kilogram kg pound Ib
gram g ounce oz
milligram mg
TYPICAL
POWER
kilowatt kW horsepower Hp
watt W Btu per hour Btu/hr
Btu per minute Btu/min
PRESSURE or STRESS (FORCE PER AREA)

kilopascal kPa pound per square inch psi
inch of mercury inHg
pascal Pa inch of water inH2O
megapascal Mpa pound per square inch psi
TEMPERATURE (other than THERMODYNAMIC)
degrees Celsius C degrees Fahrenheit F

TIME
hour h hour h
minute min minute min
second s second s
TORQUE (includes BENDING MOMENT, MOMENT OF FORCE, and MOMENT OF A COUPLE)

newton meter Nm pound foot Ib ft
Nm pound inch Ib in
VELOCITY
kilometre per hour km/h mile per hour mph
meter per second m/s foot per second ft/s
millimetre per second mm/s inch per second in/s
meter per minute m/min foot per minute ft/min
VOLUME (includes CAPACITY)
cubic meter m3 cubic yard yd3
cu yd
litre l cubic inch in3
litre l US gallon US gal
UK gallon UK gal
US quart US qt
UK quart UK qt
millimetre ml fluid ounce fl oz
TYPICAL
VOLUME PER TIME (includes DISCHARGE and FLOW RATE)

cubic meter per minute m3/min cubic foot per minute ft3/min
litre per minute l/min US gallon per minute US
gal/min
millilitre per minute ml/min UK gallon per minute UK
gal/min
SOUND POWER LEVEL and SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

decibel dB decibel dB
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TO THE OWNER CLEANING THE TRACTOR
GENERAL Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with

sophisticated, electronic controls. This should be
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the taken into consideration when cleaning the tractor,
correct procedure for running--in, driving and particularly if using a high pressure washer. Even
operating and for the maintenance of your new though every precaution has been taken to
tractor. Read this Manual carefully. Your tractor is safeguard electronic components and connections,
intended for use in normal and customary the pressure generated by some of these machines
agricultural applications. is such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
If at any time you require advice concerning your
tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorised When using a high pressure washer, do not stand too
dealer. He has factory trained personnel, genuine close to the tractor and avoid directing the jet at
manufacturers’ parts and the necessary equipment electronic components, electrical connections,
to carry out all your service requirements. breathers, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold
water jet at a hot engine or exhaust.
Your tractor has been designed and built to give
maximum performance, economy and ease of Electro-magnetic Interference (EMC)
operation under a wide variety of operating
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully This tractor complies strictly with the European
inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer to Regulations on electro-magnetic emissions.
ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To However, interference may arise as a result of
maintain this condition and ensure trouble--free add-on equipment which may not necessarily meet
operation, it is important that the routine services, as the required standards. As such interference can
specified in Section 4 of this Manual, are carried out result in serious malfunction of the unit and/or create
at the recommended intervals. unsafe situations, you must observe the following:
OPERATORS MANUAL Ensure that each piece of non-New Holland

equipment fitted to the tractor bears the CE
The Operators Manual supplied with your tractor is mark.
an important source of information and should be
stored safely. The maximum power of emission equipment (radio,
telephones, etc.) must not exceed the limits
The manual is prepared specifically for your tractor imposed by the national authorities of the country
so it is important that you make a note of the print where you use the tractor.
number and issue date which can be found on the
cover. In the event the manual is lost or damaged it The electro-magnetic field generated by the add-on
can be replaced with the correct version. system should not exceed 24 V/m at any time
and at any location in the proximity of electronic
A storage pocket for the Operators Manual can be components.
found on the rear of the seat. The manual should be
kept in this pocket at all times when not in use. Failure to comply with these rules will render the New
Holland warranty null and void.
SAFETY
FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE
Pages 1--8 to 1--36 inclusive list the precautions to
be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of In Section 8, at the back of this Manual, you will find
others. Read the safety precautions and follow the the 50--hour service reports.
advice offered before operating the tractor.
1--1
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
IMPORTANT: It is important the 50 hour service is WARRANTY

carried out as recommended to ensure your tractor
provides optimum performance and efficiency. Your tractor is warranted according to legal rights in
your country and the contractual agreement with the
After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take selling dealer. No warranty shall, however, apply if
your tractor, together with this Manual, to your the tractor has not been used, adjusted and
dealer. He will then perform the factory maintained according to the instructions given in the
recommended 50 hour service and complete the Operator’s Manual.
service report sheets (pages 8--1 and 8--3). The first
sheet (page 9--1) is the dealer’s copy and should be BIODIESEL FUELS
removed by the dealer after the service has been
carried out. The second sheet (page 8--3) is your
IMPORTANT: Before using Biodiesel fuels in your
copy of the service performed. Ensure that you and
tractor, refer to the information on page 4--5
the dealer sign both copies.
regarding the storage and use of Biodiesel fuels.
SERVICE PARTS
EMISSION CONTROLS
It should be pointed out that genuine parts have been
examined and approved by the Company. The ATTENTION:The engine and fuel system on your
installation and/or use of ‘non-genuine’ products machine is designed and built to government
could have negative effects upon the design emissions standards. Tampering by dealers,
customers, operators and users is strictly
characteristics of your tractor and thereby affect it’s
prohibited by law. Failure to comply could result in
safety. The Company is not liable for any damage
government fines, rework charges, invalid warranty,
caused by the use of ‘non--genuine’ parts and
legal action and possible confiscation of the machine
accessories. Only genuine New Holland
replacement parts should be used. The use of until rework to original condition is completed.
non-genuine parts may invalidate legal approvals Engine service and/or repairs must be done by a
associated with this product. certified technician only!
It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the

tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by
the After Sales Service department of the Company.
1--2
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and major components are identified
using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.
Tractor identification data must be supplied to the

dealer when requesting parts or service and will also
be needed to aid in identifying the tractor if it is ever
stolen.
The following provides the locations of the

identification data.
Vehicle Identification Plate
The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 2 is

located on the left-hand radiator support. Record the
information on the sample identification plate.
Tractor Identification
The serial number and model identification

information is stamped on the right--hand side of the
front support (1). These numbers are also repeated
on the vehicle identification plate reproduced above.
1--3
Engine Information
The engine serial number and date of manufacture

are stamped on the right--hand side of engine block
(1), below the manifold. Record the number below.
Engine Serial No.
The details are repeated on the information plate

located on the left side of the engine oil pan.
Further information relating to engine adjustments

and emission level compliance are also shown on the
engine information plate.
NOTE: The details displayed on the engine

information plate may change according to the
country in which the tractor is sold.
1--4
Driveline Identification
Power Command Transmission
The serial number plate (1) is located on the

right--hand side of the transmission casing behind
the the battery carrier. This number is repeated on
the vehicle identification plate. Record the
information below for quick reference.
Driveline Serial No.
Auto Command Transmission
A serial number plate (1) is located on top of the

transmission casing on the right--hand side of the
tractor.
The plate can be found adjacent to the rear of the

hydrostatic drive unit. This number is repeated on the
vehicle identification plate and should be recorded
below for quick reference.
Driveline Serial No.
Cab Identification
The cab serial number and other information is on the

OECD certification plate. This plate can be found on
the right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the
rear window. Record the cab serial number below for
quick reference. 9
Cab Serial No.
Product Identification Plate
The Product Identification Number plate provides

important information on tractor and towed
equipment weight combinations. This plate can be
found on the right--hand side of the cab exterior trim
panel, below the rear window.
The figures shown are the maximum permissible

vehicle and towing weights and should not be
exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of
the tractor. See Drawbars and Towing Attachments
in Section 3.
10
1--5
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture and 4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine
life in general. Where legislation does not yet rule the coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic
treatment of some of the substances which are oils, brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake
required by advanced technology, common sense fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely
should govern the use and disposal of products of a until they can be disposed of in a proper way to
chemical and petrochemical nature. comply with local legislation and available
resources.
The following are recommendations which may be of
assistance: 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and
other additives, should be replaced every two
Become acquainted with and ensure that you years. They should not be allowed to get into the
understand the relative legislation applicable to soil but should be collected and disposed of
your country. safely.
Where no legislation exists, obtain information from 6. Do not open the air-conditioning system yourself.
suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti It contains gases which should not be released
freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to their into the atmosphere. Your dealer or air
effect on man and nature and how to safely store, conditioning specialist has a special extractor for
use and dispose of these substances. this purpose and will have to recharge the
Agricultural consultants will, in many cases, be system anyway.
able to help you as well.
7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling
HELPFUL HINTS or hydraulic system immediately.
1. Avoid filling tanks using unsuitable containers or 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
inappropriate pressurised fuel delivery systems circuit as this may lead to the components
which may cause considerable spillage. exploding.
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, 9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken them,
substances which can be harmful to your health. causing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn 10. Do not adjust the setting of the fuel delivery
contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary system as this will alter the emission of exhaust
heating systems. fumes.
NOTE: The engines installed on the tractors

comply with anti--pollution legislation.
1--6
PRECAUTIONARY
STATEMENTS
PERSONAL SAFETY
Throughout this manual and on machine decals, you will find precautionary statements (“DANGER”,
“WARNING”, and “CAUTION”) followed by specific instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal
safety of you and those working with you. Please take the time to read them.
DANGER
This word “DANGER” indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury. The color associated with Danger is RED.
M1169
WARNING
This word “WARNING” indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.
M1170
CAUTION
This word “CAUTION” indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated
with Caution is YELLOW.
M1171
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE “DANGER”, “WARNING”, AND “CAUTION” INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.
MACHINE SAFETY
The precautionary statement (“NOTICE”) is followed by specific instructions. This statement is intended for
machine safety.
NOTICE: The word “NOTICE” is used to inform the reader of something he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
INFORMATION
NOTICE: Instructions used to identify and present supplementary information.
ASAE S441.3 FEB04

ISO 11684
VERSION -- FEB ’08
1--7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and
can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily
help prevent accidents, read and take the following injury or even death.
precautions before driving, operating or servicing the
tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those THE TRACTOR
who are responsible and instructed to do so.
1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge
can lead to accidents.
Throughout this Manual you will see text, preceded
by the words NOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT, 2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons
CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. Such text has to operate the tractor.
the following significance:
3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step
Machine Safety plates when getting on and off the tractor. Keep
steps and platform clear of mud and debris.
NOTE: This text stresses a correct operating
technique or procedure. 4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety
decals.
ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential
machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed. 5. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.
IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

something that he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not
followed.
Personal Safety
CAUTION
The word CAUTION is used where a safe
behavioural practice, according to operating and
maintenance instructions and common safety
practices will protect the operator and others from
accident involvement.
6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on

WARNING the tractor except for driver training or
The word WARNING denotes a potential or hidden instruction. When used for these purposes an
hazard which could possibly cause serious injury. It additional seat may be fitted in the cab.
is used to warn operators and others to exercise due Passengers should not be carried on the tractor
care and attention to avoid a surprise accident with at any time.
machinery.
7. Keep children away from the tractor and farm
machinery at all times.
DANGER
The word DANGER denotes a forbidden practice in
connection with a serious hazard.
1--8
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to 6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front
modify or alter the tractor or any of its axle is automatically engaged, to provide four
components or any tractor function without first wheel braking, when both footbrakes are
consulting your dealer. applied. Owners should be aware of the
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly
9. Install all guards before starting the engine or enhances braking performance. Appropriate
operating the tractor. care should be exercised during fierce braking.
DRIVING THE TRACTOR 7. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application
of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at
road speeds.
1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or
driving the tractor.
2. When driving on public roads, have

consideration for other road users. Pull in to the
side of the road occasionally to allow any
following traffic to pass. Do not exceed the legal
speed limit set in your country for agricultural
tractors.
3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

Vehicle warning when driving on public roads to
indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and is a
possible hazard.
4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at

night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to
prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming
vehicle.
5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the

brakes. Brake both wheels simultaneously when
making an emergency stop. Ensure that both
brake pedals are locked together when travelling
at road speeds or when on public roads to ensure
correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced
operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel
braking (4WD tractors only).
1--9
OPERATING THE TRACTOR
1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

in the ‘OFF’ position, the lift control lever in the
down position, the remote control valve levers in
the neutral position and the transmission levers
in neutral before starting the tractor.
2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

than externally located hydraulic lift or P.T.O.
switches, if fitted) while standing beside the
tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat when
starting the engine or operating the controls.
8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going 3. Do not bypass the transmission and P.T.O.
downhill as would be used when going uphill. Do neutral start switches. Consult your authorised
not coast or freewheel down hills. dealer if your neutral start controls malfunction.
Use jump leads only in the recommended
9. For safe operation any towed vehicle whose total manner. Improper use can result in a tractor
weight exceeds that of the towing tractor must be runaway.
equipped with a braking system that complies
with the legal requirements of that country.
10. Never apply the differential lock when turning.

When engaged, the differential lock will prevent
the tractor from turning.
11. Always check overhead clearance, especially

when transporting the tractor. Watch where you
are going, especially at row ends, on roads and
around trees and low overhanging obstacles.
12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and

at speeds compatible with safety, especially
when operating over rough ground, when
crossing ditches or slopes and when turning
corners. 4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift
levers while the engine is running. Unexpected
tractor movement can result from such contact.
5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.
6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating,

stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be
more difficult to control.
7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on

level ground, apply the parking brake, lower
attached implements to the ground, disengage
the P.T.O. and stop the engine.
13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep

slopes.
14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres are

frozen to the ground, reverse the tractor out to
prevent overturning.
1--10
sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted

and will disconnect safely in case of accidental
detachment of the implement.
8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum

noise level at the operator’s ears and meets or
exceeds applicable standards in this respect. 13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when
However, noise (sound pressure level) in the heavy implements are attached to the
workplace can exceed 85 dB(A) when working three--point hitch, install front end or front wheel
between buildings or in confined spaces, with weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light
cab windows open. Therefore, it is front end.
recommended that operators wear suitable ear
protectors when operating in high noise level
conditions. 14. Engage the clutch slowly when driving out of a
ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage the
clutch promptly if the front wheels rise off the
ground.
15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories

are correctly installed, are approved for use with
the tractor, do not overload the tractor and are
operated and maintained in accordance with the
instructions issued by the equipment or
accessory manufacturer.
16. Remember that your tractor, if abused or

incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become
a hazard both to the operator and to bystanders.
Do not overload or operate with attached
equipment which is unsafe, not designed for the
10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed particular task or is poorly maintained.
building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
fumes are toxic and can cause death. 17. Do not leave equipment in the raised position
when the vehicle is stopped or unattended.
11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging
drawbar or the lower link drawbar in the lowered
position. Use only a drawbar pin that locks in 18. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any
point above the axle may cause the tractor to 19. Always wear a protective mask when working
overturn. with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions
on the chemical container.
12. Always select Position Control when attaching
equipment and when transporting equipment. Be
1--11
OPERATING THE P.T.O. SERVICING THE TRACTOR
1. When operating P.T.O.- driven equipment, shut

off the engine, switch off the P.T.O. and wait until
the P.T.O. stops before getting off the tractor and
disconnecting the equipment.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure

which is controlled by the expansion tank cap. It
is dangerous to remove the cap while the system
is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop
and allow the pressure to escape before
2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the removing the cap entirely. Never remove the cap
power take-off or especially when near rotating from the top of the radiator unless the expansion
equipment. tank pressure cap has first been removed.
3. When operating stationary P.T.O.-driven 2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep
equipment, always apply the tractor parking any type of open flame away.
brake and block the rear wheels front and back.
3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and
satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and
comply with legal requirements.
4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames

away from battery or cold weather starting aids.
To prevent sparks which could cause explosion,
use jumper cables according to instructions.
5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning

system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten
or injured by escaping refrigerant. Special
equipment and instruments are required to
service the air conditioning system. See your
authorised dealer for service.
4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or
service P.T.O. driven equipment when the tractor
6. Stop the engine before performing any service
engine is running. Ensure that the P.T.O. is
on the tractor.
switched off.
7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel oil in the injection system
5. Make sure the P.T.O. guard is in position at all
operate under high pressure. Escaping hydraulic
times and always replace the P.T.O. cap when
the P.T.O. is not in use.
1--12
fluid or fuel oil under pressure can penetrate the 10. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained.
skin causing serious injury.
11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters
Unqualified persons should not remove or properly.
attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or any
other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic 12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care
systems. Failure to follow these instructions can and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple
result in serious injury. and cause injury.
Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a piece PREVENTION OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION
of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
1. Due to the flammable nature of some crop
Stop the engine and relieve pressure before materials, the risk of tractor fire can be high. This
connecting or disconnecting lines. risk can be minimised by frequent removal of
accumulated crop material from the tractor. If oil
leaks appear, correct the fault by re--torquing the
bolts or replacing the gaskets as necessary.
2. When operating in flammable crop conditions,

check and remove all trash or debris from the
tractor each day, especially around the engine
area and exhaust system.
Tighten all connections before starting the engine or

pressurising lines.
If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical

attention immediately or gangrene may result.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to

modify or alter the tractor or any of its
3. Sparks or open flame can cause the hydrogen
components or any tractor function without first
gas in a battery to explode. To prevent an
consulting an authorised dealer.
explosion carry out the following:
9. Continuous long term contact with used engine When disconnecting the battery cables, remove the
oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged negative (--) cable first. When re--connecting the
contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly battery cables, connect the negative (--) cable
with soap and water. It is recommended to wear last.
suitable gloves or use a rag.
When using jumper cables to start the engine, use
only the procedure shown in Section 3 of this
IMPORTANT: Wear suitable personal protective
manual.
equipment (PPE) and clothing to suit the conditions
and regulations in your country. This equates but not Do not short circuit the battery terminals with a metal
limited to protection of eyes, lungs, ears, head, object.
hands and feet when operating, servicing or
repairing the equipment. Always keep hair and Do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery.
clothing away from moving parts. Do not wear loose
clothing, jewellery or other items that could entangle
with levers and or moving parts.
1--13
4. Periodically check the tractor electrical system 7. A fire can cause injury or death. It is advisable to
for loose connections or frayed insulation. Repair have a fire extinguisher near or on the tractor
or replace any damaged parts. when operating in conditions where a fire may
occur. Ensure fire extinguishers are serviced
5. Sparks from the electrical system or engine according to the manufacturers instructions.
exhaust can cause an explosion and fire. Before
you operate the tractor in an area with flammable 8. If a fire extinguisher has been used, always
dust or vapours, use a good ventilation system recharge or replace the extinguisher before
the remove the flammable dust or vapours. operating the tractor in conditions where a fire
may occur.
6. Use a non flammable cleaning solvent when
cleaning parts on the tractor. 9. DO NOT store flammable materials (oil soaked
rags etc.) on the tractor.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Only operate your tractor when an approved fire -- Pull the Pin at the top of the extinguisher.
extinguisher is installed.
The fire extinguisher designed location is identified -- Aim at the base of the fire, not the flames.
on your tractor with the decal shown in the accompa-
nying image. -- Squeeze the lever slowly. This will release the
extinguishing agent;extinguishing agent; If the
CAUTION handle is released, the discharge will stop
Please ensure to install an appropriate and certified
fire extinguisher; -- Sweep from side to side. Using a sweeping
motion, move the fire extinguisher back and forth
Never alter its position or remove it. until the fire is completely out.
Ensure to replace it or have it checked or refilled after -- Check for re--ignition of fire.
every usage and/or date of expiry according to
manufacturer’s maintenance prescriptions.
It is not intended for use on an out--of--control fire,

such as one which has reached the ceiling, or the
operator ; it is meant only to help you
To check if the extinguisher is still under

pressure,proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the pressure gauge from the valve
2. The needle will go from the green area to ”0” in
thered area
3. Rescrew the pressure gauge on the valve. The
needle will go from ”0” in the red field to the 11
greenfield
-- Operate the extinguisher from a safe distance.
1--14
DIESEL FUEL Diesel and biodiesel fuel specifications

Diesel fuel specifications are covered by the
1. Under no circumstances should gasoline, following:
alcohol or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel.
These combinations can create an increased fire Europe: EN 590 -- Specification of Diesel fuel.
or explosive hazard. In a closed container such (10ppm sulfur maximum).
as a fuel tank these blends are more explosive United States: ASTM D975--08A, Standard
than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends. Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils. (15ppm sulfur
maximum).
2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the
engine running or hot. Biodiesel blends are covered by:
3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when European Diesel Fuel Specification EN 590 allows
standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame up to 7% biodiesel since 2009. European fuel
away. suppliers are allowed to use up to 7% biodiesel
fuel (B7) to supply the network.
4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when
filling the tank. United States Diesel Fuel Specification ASTM
D6751--09A allows up to 7% biodiesel since
2009. United States fuel suppliers are allowed to
5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Fill only to the use up to 7% biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the
bottom of the filler neck to allow room for network.
expansion.
United States Biodiesel Fuel Specification ASTM
D7467--09A provides specifications for diesel
6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately. and biodiesel blends from B6 to B20.
7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.
8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with

an approved cap. A non--approved cap may not
be safe.
9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
10. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade

fuels are not held over and used in the winter.
WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS: ATTENTION!

BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
1--15
SAFETY DECALS
The decals reproduced on the following pages were installed on your tractor in the positions indicated in the drawings
below. They are intended for your safety and for those working with you. Please take this Manual and walk around
your tractor, noting the location of the decals and their significance. Review the decals and operating instructions
detailed in this Manual with the machine operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If they become damaged or
illegible, obtain replacements from your authorised dealer.
17 1
2
19
21
1
22
4
3
6
25
26 5
16 23
13 7
14
15 8
12
24
10
11
18 11
20
1--16
1. Location:
Left and right-hand side of fan guard
To prevent serious injury, keep hands and clothing

away from rotating fan and drive belt.
Part No. 84269904
2. Location:
Left and right--hand side of radiator
Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to cool

then remove cap carefully. Using a cloth, turn cap to
the first stop and allow pressure to subside before
removing cap completely.
Part No.84269938
3. Location:
Air conditioning compressor
Warning! Fluid under pressure, do not disconnect

any lines. Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No.84386047 1050g
(1050g)
84386047 A
4. Location:
Radar sensor mounting bracket
To avoid possible eye damage from micro-wave

signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look
directly into the sensor face.
Part No.84270897
1--17
5. Location:
Top of battery
Danger! Corrosive acid. Explosive gas. Wear eye

protection. Avoid producing sparks. See Operator’s
Manual.
6. Location:
Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab
Warning! De--activate Turn Assist system before

travelling on the highway. Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No.87331567
7. Location:
Front of right--hand control console
Caution! Always use grab handles when entering or

leaving the platform/cab
Part No.81871702
8. Location:
Right--hand access door (where fitted)
Cab exit door only, cannot be opened from outside.

Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No.87390270
1--18
9. Location:
Right hand rear cab pillar
Part No.84269928
Always turn the key to OFF position before

performing any intervention or service on the tractor;
always refer to the Operator’s manual for specific
information.
10.Location:
Left hand rear cab pillar
Wear close fitting clothing and use all the PPE

(Personal Protective Equipment) appropriate for the
task.
Part No.84275352
11.Location:
Rear of both fenders (with external power
controls only)
To avoid injury, do not stand on the implement or

between the implement and tractor while operating
the external lift or P.T.O. controls.
Part No.84269906
12.Location:
Parking Brake Lever
Read the Operator’s Manual.
1--19
13.Location:
Left--hand ‘A’ pillar inside the cab
General Warning.
Read and understand all the warning notes printed
in the Operator’s Manual. In particular, read the
General Information and Safety section in the
Operator’s Manual.
Part No.84270888
14.Location:
Towing the Tractor.

Caution! Read the Operator’s Manual before
attempting to tow the tractor.
Part No.84270901
15.Location:
Caution! The ROPS structure is providing partial

protection in case of roll--over; use always seat belt
(seat retaining system ) provided and hold steering
whell tight in case of roll over.
Part No.84269915
16.Location:
Top of toolbox
Do not stand on toolbox.
Part No.84269908
1--20
17.Location:
Left--hand side of front hitch
To avoid injury, do not stand between the implement

and tractor while operating the external controls.
Part No.84269906
18.Location:
On the left hand door
This decal identifies the instructor’s seat provided

only for training purpose, refer to information
provided along selection 1 in this manual for its usage
and related risks.
Part No.84270900
19.Location:
Hydraulic accumulator/s
Caution! High pressure hydraulic/gas accumulator.

Follow service manual instructions for removal or
repair.
Part No.82029751
NOTE: The number and position of the hydraulic

accumulators may change according to tractor
specification.
20.Location:
Rear window
The decal identifies the emergency exit on your

tractor; use the hammer provided, located on the
rear right hand pillar, to break the rear window glass.
Part No.84276198
1--21
21.Location:
Starter Motor
Warning! Do not start engine by shorting across

starter terminals. Machine will start in gear if normal
circuitry is bypassed. NEVER starter engine while
staying on ground. Start engine only from operator’s
seat, with transmission in neutral.
Part No.84270895
22.Location:
Left--hand side of radiator
Warning! Heater Grid cold start aid. Do not use ether

or risk of explosion will occur.
Part No.8603095
23.Location:
Rear Axle
When parking on a slope, push a wheel chock in front

of or behind one wheel.
24. Part No 84269927, Located right hand side of

seat on cab floor.
WARNING
Always carry a fire extinguisher at the space

provided for your own and others safety.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious

injury.
12
1--22
25.Location: Left hand side on the DEF/AdBlue

tank
Only fill the DEF/AdBlue tank with approved

DEF/AdBlue solution. Do not fill with diesel fuel or
water. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
Part No.84284896C
26.Location: Left hand side on the DEF/AdBlue

tank DEF/AdBlue tank
Only use diesel fuel with a sulfur content of less than

10mg/kg according to standards ASTM D975 or
EN590.
Part No. 84319035 A
1--23
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilised on the instruments,
controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning.
Engine cold
Turn signals Parking brake Fast steer
start aid
Alternator Turn signals Draft

Brake lock
charge trailer 1 control
Turn signals Position

Fuel level Trailer brake
trailer 2 control
Engine speed Windscreen Check parking Rear hitch

(rev min x 100) wiper brake lower
Windscreen Rear hitch

Hours recorded Exhaust brake
washer raise
Engine oil Rear screen Brake fluid Rear hitch

pressure wiper level float
Engine coolant Rear screen Rear hitch

temperature washer N Neutral
height limit
Heated rear Fast or high Front hitch

Coolant level
screen setting height limit
Engine air filter Heated front Slow or low

PTO
blocked screen setting
Creeper Remote valve

Tractor lights Horn
speeds retract
Heater
Headlamp high Forward Remote valve
temperature
beam direction extend
control
Headlamp Reverse Remote valve

Blower fan
dipped beam direction float
Tractor Air conditioning Warning

% wheel slip
sidelamps control STOP
Work lamps Variable control Differential lock Attention!
Malfunction
Hazard warning
Radio 4WD engaged See Operators
lamps
manual
Front Malfunction
Flashing Keep alive
KAM suspension See Operators
beacon memory
locked manual
1--24
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION
In accordance with E.E.C. directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows:
Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen with Air Cleaner Extraction System
Noise level at operators ear Drive by noise level

Closed (1) Open (2)
Model Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex VI**

T7.220 Power Command 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)
* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at the operators ear with:
1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load
2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load.
** Test results are in accordance with directive 74/151/EEC Annex VI.
Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen with Air Cleaner Extraction System
Noise level at operators ear Drive by noise level

Closed (1) Open (2)
Model Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex VI**
T7.220 Auto Command 69.0 dB(A) 81.0 dB(A) 83.0 dB(A)
* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at the operators ear with:
1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load
2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load.
** Test results are in accordance with directive 74/151/EEC Annex VI.
1--25
TRACTOR VIBRATION LEVEL INFORMATION SHEET
HAZARDS RELATED TO VIBRATION EXPOSURE

WARNING
The Whole Body Vibration level will depend on a lot NOTE: More information about Whole Body Vibra-
of parameters, some of them machine related, oth- tion (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found on
ers terrain related and many driver related. The prop- specific publications and maybe covered by local
erties of the track or field surface and the driving regulations; in order to correctly estimate statistics
speed will be the predominant parameters. values based on your everyday activity please use a
triaxial seat accelerometer.
WARNING NOTE: Documentation can be downloaded from
Machine vibrations cause discomfort to the operator website http://www.cema--agri.org/WBV
and in some cases his health and safety may be at
risk.
Make sure the machine is in good condition and that

the service interval work has been carried out
correctly.
Check the tyre pressure, the steering and the brake

system.
Check that the operator’s seat and adjustment

controls are in good condition and then adjust the
seat to suit the operator’s size and weight.
Operate all controls consistently so the machine

works smoothly and modify your driving to suit
working conditions.
During travel, adjust your speed and slow down if

necessary.
In compliance with EU standard, 78/764/EEC you can find in the table below the vibration levels measured for
seats used on your tractor model.
Seat model / type Vibration* m/s2 (ft/s2) at (testing mass)

Light weight operator Heavy weight operator
SEARS / Series 5000 1.21 ( 3.96) 0.96 (3.14)
SEARS / Series D5000 1.13 (3.70) 0.9 (2.95
GRAMMER / MSG 95G/741 1.24 (4.06) 1.1 (3.60)
GRAMMER / MSG 95GL/741 0.91 (2.98) 1.06 (3.47)
* Corrected weighted vibration acceleration
1--26
MACHINE STABILITY The following procedure and calculation is based on

the machine on even ground.
The following procedure describes the requirements
for machine stability, and how to calculate the
required front mounted and rear mounted ballast. WARNING
For the ballast refer also to the ballast Not taking into consideration the influence of strong
recommendations in this manual. inclinations and steep hills can result in instability of
the machine. Risk of severe injury and death. Ballast
weights and driving speed have to be adjusted
For the maximum permitted operating weights refer
accordingly to ensure stable and accurate steering
to the vehicle weights in this manual. and to ensure the required brake performance in
critical situations.
WARNING
Not following the machine stability requirements, can

result in in stability of the machine. Risk of severe
injury or death. Always consider and follow the
machine stability requirements.
1--27
NECESSARY DATA TO EVALUATE

STABILITY
Legend
To get this Value

Refer to:
MT Mass of the unladen tract- This
or = Tractor with standard manual
equipment, minimum fuel,
no weights or liquid bal-
last, no operator, and
single wheel equipment
MF Front axle load unladen This
tractor Manual
MR Rear axle load unladen This
tractor Manual
a Distance Centre of Gravity Manual of
front load to front axle the equip-
centre ment or to
measure
b Wheelbase This
Manual
c Distance rear axle centre This
to lower hitch point of Manual or
three point linkage to meas-
ure 13
d Distance Centre of Gravity Manual of
rear load to lower hitch the equip- NOTE:
point of three point linkage ment or to
measure 1. Equipment weight together with its filling must be
added to laden values (seed drills, fertilizer
e Distance rear axle centre To calcu-
spreaders, etc).
to centre of gravity (COG) late (For-
of MT (mass of unladen mula on
tractor) following 2. Ballasting weight in the centre of the front or rear
pages) tires, either solid or liquid, must be added to MF,
MR and MT.
BF Mass of front mounted Manual of
equipment or front moun- the equip- 3. In case of an unbalanced trailer, the value c is the
ted ballast ment or to distance between the centre of the rear axle and
measure the hitching point, the value d is 0, and BR is the
BR Mass of rear mounted Manual of vertical load of the trailer on the hitch.
equipment or rear moun- the equip-
ted ballast ment or to
measure
MPT Maximum permissible This
max mass of the laden tractor manual
MPF Maximum permissible This
max front axle load manual
MPR Maximum permissible rear This
max axle load manual
1--28
CONSTANT PARAMETERS
0.2 Minimum ratio: actually Legal re-

axle load of laden front quirement
axle/mass of the unladen
tractor
0.45 Minimum ratio: actually Legal re-
axle load of laden rear quirement
axle/mass of the unladen
tractor
REQUIRED FRONT BALLAST
TO CALCULATE
BFr Ballast required at the front when carry-
ing a load BR at the rear
CALCULATION OF BFr
MT*e = MF * b
e = (MF * b) / MT
BR*(c+d) -- (MT * e)+(MPF * b) = BFr * (a+b)
MPF > 0.2* MT
MPF value must be higher than 0.2*MT
BFr >[ BR*(c+d)--(MF*b)+(0.2*MT*b)] / (a+b)
14
REQUIRED REAR BALLAST
TO CALCULATE
BRr Ballast required at the rear when carry-
ing a load BF at the front
CALCULATION OF BRr
MT*b (b--e) = MR * b
BF*a -- MT * (b--e) + (MPR*b) = BRr *
(b+c+d)
MPR > 0.45* MT
MPR value must be higher than 0.45*MT
BRr > [(BF*a) -- (MR *b)+(0.45 * MT *
b)]/(b+c+d)
1--29
AXLE LOAD LIMITS
TO CALCULATE
MPF MPF < MPF max
MPR MPR < MPR max
MPT MPT < MPT max
CALCULATION OF MPF
(MPF*B) -- BF*(A + B) -- (MT*E) + BR*(C + D)
MPF = [BF * (a+b) + (MF*b) -- BR*(c+d)]/b <
MPF max
CALCULATION OF MPT
MPT = BF + MT + BR < MPTmax
CALCULATION OF MPR
MRT = MPT -- MPF < MPR max
MF Front axle load unladen This

tractor manual
15
1--30
PROTECTION OFFERED BY THE TRACTOR CAB
COMFORT AND SAFETY INSIDE THE CAB protection, a partial protection can be achieved by
following some basic rules:
Definition of Cab Category 1 Keep doors, windows and hatches closed during the
Cab is meeting the requirements defined in EN spraying operation
15695--1. This means that the air delivery and filtra-
tion system does not provide a specified level of pro-
tection against hazardous substances but only from Keep the cab interior clean
external atmospheric conditions (e.g. rain, wind,
snow .. etc)
Do not enter the cab with contaminated shoes and/or
Definition of Cab Category 2 clothing
Cab is meeting the requirements defined in EN
15695--1. This means that the air delivery and filtra-
Keep all used personal protective equipment outside
tion system provides protection against dust and that
the minimum differential pressure. Necessary the cab
filtered fresh air flow rate can be obtained using A/C
system and adjusting the maximum fan speed,
Bring the wire harness of the remote sprayer control
provided that doors, windows and hatches are
box into the tractor cab
closed and recirculation device is deactivated
Remove the outside air delivery cab filter after the

spraying operation and store it in a dry, dust free
CAUTION room, and reserve it for a next spraying opera-
tion; replace with a service part filter.
The cab category 1 does not guarantee a full protec-
tion against dust, aerosols and vapours. The cab cat- Active carbon filters must be properly stored in a
egory 2 cab is offering protection against dust but sealed plastic bag to preserve their functionality.
only partially from aerosols and vapours; for applica-
tion of plant protection products (e.g. pesticides, fun-
gicides, herbicides.....), please refer to the instruc- Use only genuine CNH filters and ensure that the fil-
tions provided by the supplier of the chemical agent ter is correctly installed.
as well as instructions provided by the sprayer’s
manufacturer.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) must be used Check the condition of the sealing material and have
when specified by these instructions, also when it repaired when required.
being inside the cab as well as for tractors without a
cab
Although the air delivery system cannot offer a full
1--31
ROPS, FOPS, OPS PROTECTION
ROPS (roll over protection system)

This tractor is provided with a ROPS cab, offering conditions, the tractor may roll over earlier than
protection against roll over related hazards, all the expected
same please consider the following:
CAUTION
Do not use the tractor beyond its limits of terrain
WARNING
gradient and stability as outlined further in this The Protective Structure is a special safety
manual. Using the tractor beyond these limits component of your machine.
may result in a roll over or a tip over. Observe the
recommendations in this manual when going DO NOT attach any device to the Protective
down steep hills in a loaded condition Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes to
the Protective Structure.
Do not use the tractor near or on soft verges of canals
and brooks or banks and verges that are under- The Protective Structure and interconnecting
mined by rodents. The tractor may sink sideways components are a certified system. Any damage,
and roll over. fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the
structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs,
Do not use the tractor on unstable bridge heads and
poor bridge floors. These constructions may col- the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so
lapse and cause roll over of the tractor. Always that it will provide the same protection as a new
inspect the condition and carrying capacity of Protective Structure. Contact your dealer for
bridges and ramps prior to crossing. Protective Structure inspection and replacement.
Do not use the tractor without wearing the seat re- After an accident, fire, tip or roll over, the following
straint system (seat belt) during activities where MUST be performed by a qualified technician before
roll--over or tip--over hazards exist. The ROPS returning the machine to field or job site operation.
cab or ROPS structure will only be fully effective
when the driver remains attached to his seat The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.
Do not use the tractor beyond its limits of dynamic The mounting or suspension for the Protective
stability. High speed, abrupt manoeuvres and Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat
fast and tight cornering will increase the risk of belts and mounting components and wiring
roll over. within the operator’s protective system MUST be
Do not use the tractor for pulling work, in cases where carefully inspected for damage.
you do not know whether the load will yield, for
All damaged parts MUST be replaced.
instance when pulling stumps. The tractor may
flip over backwards when the stump is not yield- DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO
ing STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE
Be extremely cautious when working with the tractor STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN
on forage silos without side concrete walls. Dual REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF
wheels or a wide track setting may improve the THE STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE
sideways stability of the tractor. DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
Be cautious that the centre of gravity of the tractor FIRE, TIP, ROLL OVER, COLLISION OR
may increase when loads on the front end loader ACCIDENT.
or the three point linkage are raised. In these
1--32
FOPS (FALLING OBJECTS PROTECTION GENERAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE FOL-

SYSTEM) LOWED WHEN WORKING WITH A FRONT--
FOPS certified cab is providing protection against END LOADER
falling objects according to OECD code 10 standard; WARNING
it is recommended to use a certified FOPS structure
Do not allow bystanders in the manoeuvring zone of
when working with front--end loaders or in forestry
the tractor equipped with a front--end loader. Do
applications; a cab not FOPS certified is offering
not allow bystanders to stand near or under the
insufficient protection against falling rocks, bricks or
lifted bucket of a front – end loader
pieces of concrete.
Do not use the front – end loader as a lift for persons
for activities that must be done at a certain
height. (e.g. cleaning gutters)
FOPS level on your tractor cab is certified according
to OECD Code 10. Do not use the front – end loader in an area with over-
head power lines. In case of contact with over-
head power lines, jump from the tractor without
making instant contact between tractor and
ground. When possible, disconnect the power
lines from the grounds
INSTALLATION AND WORKING WITH
FRONT--END LOADER ON TRACTORS
EQUIPPED WITH CAB
CAUTION OPS (objects--penetrating--system)

This tractor is not provided with OPS structure;
Do not use the front – end loader, without taking pre- please carefully read the following important inform-
cautions against falling objects. ation especially when working in a forestry environ-
Please consider following precautions when working ment.
with a front end loader:
Do not lift the front – end loader to a height from which
objects may fall or roll on the driver.
Always use the correct attachment (grab forks, buck- FORESTRY APPLICATIONS
ets.. etc) for the specific task to ensure that the
load is securely kept in place. WARNING
It is recommended to install a front – end loader with This tractor is not designed for heavy forestry
a parallel guidance system and use it all the time; applications; usage is prohibited unless a certified
this system will ensure that the load in the bucket FORESTRY KIT is installed; contact your dealer to
will remain horizontal, regardless of the height of verify whether a forestry kit exists for this tractor
the lifting booms. model. Only a forestry specific kit will provide
necessary protection against falling trees and
penetrating objects (OPS).
Protection against penetrating objects (OPS) can be
obtained with additional grid--guard protection
installed on the tubular structure; contact your dealer
to check whether an OPS certified KIT exists.
1--33
INTENDED USE OF YOUR TRACTOR Do not use equipment mounted on the tractor which
is not correctly matching and firmly fixed. Such
WARNING
equipment may increase the risk for roll over and
Your tractor is designed according to European
hit the tractor when coming loose. Ensure that
directives related to health and safety risks; though the dimensions of the three – point linkage inter-
it has been designed to minimize all the potential face of both the tractor and the equipment are
risks it is mandatory to carefully read, understand matching according to the categories defined in
and observe all the decals and labels of the PPP ISO 730. Ensure that the dimensions and speed
of the PTO shaft on the tractors are matching
(Plant Protection Product) and to always refer to those of the equipment.
information and descriptions outlined in this manual
Do not use the tractor in combination with equi-
to prevent all residual potential risks . In case you pment, without having consulted the specific
may need further assistance please do not hesitate Operator’s Manual provided with the equipment.
to contact your dealer. The tractor is a universal tool to carry, tow and
drive a variety of equipment. This manual alone
cannot provide you with all the information requi-
red for the safe operation of the combination.
Your tractor is designed and made to pull, to carry Do not use the tractor for pulling work, in cases where
and to power a variety of mounted or towed you do not know whether the load will yield, for
equipment, although within some physical limits. The instance when pulling stumps; the tractor may
working speed and performance may depend on a flip over when the stump is not yielding.
number of various parameters, such as weather and Be cautious that the centre of gravity of the tractor
terrain conditions. Though the tractor is designed to may increase when loads on the front – end loa-
perform in combination with a variety of equipment, der or the three point linkage are raised. In these
there may be a number of combinations of above conditions, the tractor may roll over earlier than
parameters, for which there is severe degradation of expected.
performance of the tractor and/or its mounted or
Do not step down from the tractor without shutting
trailed equipment. If you notice degradation of
down the PTO, shifting the transmission to park
performance, contact your dealer for assistance, he
or neutral and applying the park brake, unless
may have useful information for improvements, or a
continued PTO operation is required for some
kit may be available to enhance the performance.
equipment, such as pumps or wood chippers.
Please carefully read and consider following The latter equipment may have an emergency
precautions: stop device on the equipment itself, as human
Do not use the tractor for another purpose other than intervention is needed during operation. But
that intended by the manufacturer and outlined other equipment, engaged and driven by the
in this manual tractor will have no means to stop the power tran-
smission, other than the PTO clutch of the
Do not use the tractor beyond its limits of terrain gra- tractor.
dient and stability. Using the tractor beyond
You shall take the necessary precautions (e.g. assi-
these limits may result in roll over or tip over.
Observe the recommendations in this manual. stance) to always be aware of the possible pre-
sence of bystanders, certainly when manoeu-
Do not use the tractor on higher speeds than allowed vring in confined areas, such as the farm yard
by the load and the environment. A wet surface and sheds.
or other low adherence conditions may increase Keep people away from the tractor during work.
the braking distance or result in vehicle instabili- Ask bystanders to leave the field. There is not
ty. Always adapt your traveling speed according only the risk to be overrun by the tractor, but
to the load of the vehicle and the characteristics objects ejected by some equipment mounted on
of the road the tractor, such as a rotary mower, may cause
Do not use the tractor near or on soft verges of canals harm. Stones may be thrown further than the
and brooks or banks and verges that are under- mowed crop. Pay the necessary attention while
mined by rodents. The tractor may sink sideways operating next to public roads or footpaths.
and roll over. Thrown objects can get projected outside the
Do not use the tractor on brittle bridge – heads and field and hit unprotected people like bikers or
poor bridge floors. These constructions may col- pedestrians. Wait to cut the edge of the field till
lapse and cause roll over of the tractor. Always it is clear of bystanders
inspect the condition and carrying capacity of
bridges and ramps prior to crossing.
1--34
INSTRUCTOR’S SEAT
The extra seat provided in the cab of the tractor is
installed in order to allow only a trainer or a trainee
to be seated safely while teaching a new Operator or
by dealer personnel when monitoring the function of
the tractor. It is not meant for road transportation of
a passenger.
WARNING
The instructor’s seat is not intended for use in trans-
ferring passengers between fields, or during opera-
tion in the field. While a passenger is seated, the dri-
ver’s view to the left will be significantly obstructed.
A passenger must not be allowed in the tractor in
conditions where roll–over hazards may occur, as
the ROPS may not provide sufficient protection for
the occupant of the seat.
1--35
ABOUT THIS MANUAL with the tractor characteristics and complying

with the information for routine service and safe
This manual gives information for use of your practices, as specified by the manufacturer in
machine, as intended and under the conditions this manual and by decals on the tractor, in order
foreseen by the manufacturer during normal operat to maintain its proper function.
ion and routine service and maintenance. Routine service includes activities such as
fueling, cleaning, washing, topping up fluid
Read and understand; keep it in good condition and
levels, greasing, replacing of consumable arti-
always safely store it in the provided pocket in the
cles such as lamp bulbs.
back of your seat for later easy retrieval.
Converting, periodical service and repair
This manual does not contain all the information
related to periodical service, converting and repairs Periodical service means activities that must be
to be carried out by professional service personnel. done at defined intervals by trained personnel
The Table of Contents page(s) are provided to have familiar with the tractor characteristics and which
an overview of main manual’s topics. A detailed are complying with the information for periodical
alphabetic index is available at the end of this manual service and safe practices, as partly specified by
for locating specific items. the manufacturer in this manual and in other
Normal operation Company literature, in order to maintain the
expected life time of the tractor.
Converting means activities that must be done by
Normal operation means the use of the tractor for the
professional service personnel familiar with the
purpose intended by the manufacturer by an
tractor characteristics and complying with the
operator familiar with the tractor and the moun-
information for converting, as partly specified by
ted or towed equipment and complying with the
the manufacturer in this manual, in assembly
information for operation and safe practices, as
instructions or in other Company literature, in
specified by the manufacturer in this manual and
order to fit the tractor to a specific configuration.
by the decals on the tractor and the equipment.
Repair means activities that must be done by profes-
Normal operation includes the preparation and sto-
sional service personnel only familiar with the
rage of the tractor, swinging components into
tractor characteristics and complying with the
work position and vice versa, adding or removing
information for repair, as specified by the manu-
ballast and picking up and setting off attach-
facturer in the dealer’s workshop manual, in
ments.
order to restore the proper function of the tractor
Normal operation includes the adjustment and set- after a failure or degradation of performance.
ting of the tractor and equipment, for the specific
condition of the field and/or the crop.
Routine service
Routine service and maintenance means activities

that must be done daily by an operator familiar
1--36
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION (SCR)

What is Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)?
Your machine is equipped with additional components to comply with national and local exhaust emissions
requirements. The main components of the SCR system include the SCR catalyst, the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF)/AdBlue injection unit, the DEF/AdBlue tank, and the DEF/AdBlue dosing control unit.
How does Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)

work?
During combustion, harmful Nitrogen Oxide (NOx) molecules are formed in the exhaust. By injecting a
DEF/AdBlue solution into the exhaust prior to a catalyst, the NOx can be converted to harmless elemental
Nitrogen and water. This happens when the NOx molecules react inside the catalyst with the heat generated
by the engine and the ammonia in the DEF/AdBlue solution.
During cold engine operation at low engine coolant and ambient air temperatures, water vapor will be visible from
the exhaust when the engine operates. This water vapor will resemble steam or light white smoke and will
dissipate as the engine and machine components warm and is considered normal.
What is Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue ?

DEF/AdBlue is a non--toxic aqueous urea solution (32.5 %) with a slight ammonia odor used to chemically
reduce NOx emissions from heavy--duty diesel powered vehicles. DEF/AdBlue is neither explosive nor
harmful to the environment and is classified under the minimum--risk category of transportable fluids.
DEF/AdBlue quality is defined by ISO 22241--1. The American Petroleum Institute (API) has a voluntary
certification program for DEF/AdBlue. To ensure DEF/AdBlue satisfies the requirements of ISO 22241, look
for the API DEF Certification Markt whenever you purchase DEF/AdBlue.
1--37
Finding Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue

Your dealer is fully equipped to accomodate all your (DEF)/AdBlue needs.
New Holland Agriculture

Toll free number: 00800 64111111
Country Toll free fax Local number E-mail
Italy (0039) 800872693 02 44412 246 [email protected]
La chiamata è gratuita. Tuttavia, con alcuni gestori europei le chiamate da telefono cellulare sono a
pagamento. Per qualsiasi informazione sulle tariffe, consultare in anticipo il proprio gestore telefonico. In caso
di difficoltà a chiamare il numero verde, è possibile rivolgersi anche al numero 0244412246.

United Kingdom 8003457995 02030245590 [email protected]
(0044)
The call is free. However some European Operators may apply a charge, if the call is made from a mobile
phone. For any information about charge rate, please enquire in advance from your provider. Should you have
difficulties getting through to the free phone number, you can also call 02030245590.

Republic of Ireland 1800409702 012421881 [email protected]
(00353)
In the Republic of Ireland please only use 00800 64 111 111 if calling from a land line. The call will be free of
charge. However, to call using a mobile telephone please dial 01 2421881. A call made from a mobile telephone
will not be free but will be charged to you. For information about charge rates, please contact your service
provider before making the call.

France (0033) 0800909540 0157323206 [email protected]
L’appel est gratuit. Toutefois, certains opérateurs européens peuvent facturer l’appel s’il provient d’un
téléphone portable. Pour plus d’informations sur les tarifs, veuillez vous renseigner à l’avance auprès de votre
opérateur. Si vous rencontrez des difficultés à joindre la ligne téléphonique gratuite, vous pouvez également
appeler le 0157323206.

Spain (0034) 900954480 912754407 [email protected]
La llamada es gratuita. No obstante, con algunos operadores europeos la llamada puede ser de pago si se
efectúa desde un teléfono móvil. Para obtener mayor información acerca de las tarifas, consulte previamente
a su proveedor. Si tiene problemas para comunicar con el número de teléfono gratuito, puede llamar al número
de pago 912754407.

Germany (0049) 08001812449 06951709289 [email protected]
Der Anruf ist gebührenfrei. Bei Anruf aus dem Mobilnetz könnten einige europäische Netzbetreiber Gebühren
berechnen. Bitte erfragen Sie die Tarife zuvor bei Ihrem Anbieter. Falls Sie Probleme bei der Anwahl der
Freecall-Nummer haben sollten, empfehlen wir Ihnen den Anruf unter unserer kostenpflichtigen Rufnummer
06951709289.
1--38

Austria (0043) 0800298170 0179567160 [email protected]
Der Anruf ist gebührenfrei. Bei Anruf aus dem Mobilnetz könnten einige europäische Netzbetreiber Gebühren
berechnen. Bitte erfragen Sie die Tarife zuvor bei Ihrem Anbieter. Falls Sie Probleme bei der Anwahl der
Freecall-Nummer haben sollten, empfehlen wir Ihnen den Anruf unter unserer kostenpflichtigen Rufnummer
0179567160.

Belgium 0032) 080080602 022006116 [email protected]
Benelux - NLO
Dit is een gratis nummer. Als u echter met een GSM vanuit België of Luxemburg telefoneert, kiest u 022006116
voor België en 03420808585 voor Luxemburg. Merk op dat telefoneren met een GSM niet gratis is, maar voor
eigen rekening gebeurt. Voor informatie in verband met het prijstarief neemt u best vooraf contact op met uw
provider.
Benelux - BFO
Si vous appelez de Belgique ou du Luxembourg l’appel est gratuit. Toutefois, à partir d’un téléphone portable,
veuillez appeler le 022006116 pour la Belgique et le 03420808585 pour le Luxembourg. Veuillez noter qu’un
appel à partir d’un téléphone portable ne sera pas gratuit mais vous sera facturé. Pour plus d’informations sur
le tarif, veuillez vous renseigner à l’avance auprès de votre opérateur.

Luxembourg 80027825 03420808585 [email protected]
(00352) m
Benelux - NLO
provider.
Benelux - BFO

Denmark (0045) 80887959 038323003 [email protected]
Opkaldet er gratis ved opkald fra fastnet telefon. Visse europæiske udbydere pålægger et gebyr, hvis opkaldet
sker fra en mobiltelefon. Kontakt venligst dit telefonselskab for oplysninger om takster. Hvis der er problemer
med at komme igennem på det gratis telefonnummer, kan du også ringe på 038323003.
1--39

Netherlands (0031) 0800 6411111 0202008278 [email protected]
Benelux - NLO
provider.
Benelux - BFO

Portugal (00351) 800 207592 0217616019 [email protected]
A chamada é grátis. Contudo, alguns operadores europeus podem aplicar uma taxa, se a chamada for feita
de um telemóvel. Para mais informações sobre as taxas, informe-se antecipadamente, junto do seu
fornecedor.

Poland (0048) 0223060103 [email protected]
1--40
For countries outside of the toll free access area, please use the table below:
For countries outside of the toll free access area, please use the table below:
New Holland Agriculture
Country Toll Number Spoken Language
Norway (0047) 0044 2030245590 English
Sweden (0046) 0044 2030245590 English
Finland (00358) 0044 2030245590 English
Iceland (00354) 0044 2030245590 English
Estonia (00372) 0044 2030245590 English
Latvia (00371) 0044 2030245590 English
Lithuania (00370) 0044 2030245590 English
Czech Republic (00420) 00800 64111111 Czech
Slovenia (00386) 0044 2030245590 English
Croatia (00385) 0044 2030245590 English
Republic of Serbia (00381) 0044 2030245590 English
Bosnia & Herzegovina (00387) 0044 2030245590 English
Albania (00355) 0044 2030245590 English
Macedonia (00389 0044 2030245590 English
Greece (0030) 0044 2030245590 English
Bulgaria (00359) 0044 2030245590 English
Romania (0040) 0044 2030245590 English
Hungary (0036) 0044 2030245590 English
Cyprus (00357) 0044 2030245590 English
Malta (00356) 0044 2030245590 English
Switzerland (0041) 00800 64111111 German, French, Italian
Maintenance requirements
The operator must maintain appropriate DEF/AdBlue levels at all times. No additional maintenance is required.
NOTE: See your dealer for replacement components and cleaning agents.
Refer to section 4, Lubrication and Maintenance, for lubrication oil quality, maximum lubrication oil consumption
ratings, and fuel requirements. Your SCR system is suitable for use with Biodiesel up to B7 rating. Do not use
Biodiesel higher than B7 as this will damage the SCR functionality.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue

consumption
NOTE: DEF/AdBlue consumption is highly dependent on engine loads, humidity levels, DEF/AdBlue fluid
concentration, and engine speed. The “typical” consumption is only a guideline to verify proper function of the
SCR system. CNH recommends to fill the DEF/AdBlue tanks at every fuel refilling interval.
1--41
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue

instrumentation warning
ATTENTION: The fuel system, exhaust after--treatment system, and engine on your machine are designed and
built to government emissions standards. Tampering by dealers, customers, operators, and users is strictly
prohibited by law. Failure to comply could result in government fines, rework charges, invalid warranty, legal
action, and possible confiscation of the machine until rework to original condition is completed. Engine service
and/or repairs must be done by a certified technician only!
Your machine is equipped with a warning system to inform the operator of the DEF/AdBlue level, system
malfunctions, and engine power loss that may result from the SCR system for reducing exhaust emissions.
Engine Power Loss occur- Emission system test in progress

ring
Engine stop Low DEF/AdBlue level
Poor DEF/AdBlue quality Engine start
Engine to be operated to increase

SCR Technical failure temperature
Right hand LCD -- Diesel Exhaust Fluid

(DEF)/AdBlue instrumentation warning
A. DEF/Adblue / SCR system icon

B. SCR Technical failure
C. DEF/Adblue level indicator
During normal operation of your machine, the
instrument cluster displays the DEF/AdBlue fluid
level (C) at all times.
Warning lights and indicators will be illuminated with

a warning on the visual display. The display changes
automatically to allow the operator to view the 16
warning indicator and display message.
1--42
SECTION 2
CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
BEFORE OPERATING PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
CAUTION Your tractor is equipped with CAN BUS (Controlled

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the Area Network), a system that utilises electronic
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. memory facilities to programme and control various
operating functions. An operating memory
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made
Read this section thoroughly. It details the location while operating the tractor and these are transferred
and operation of the various instruments, switches to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate
other tractors, you should thoroughly read this If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data
section of the manual and ensure that you are is being transferred between the operating and main
familiar with the location and function of all the memories, some of the data may be lost or
features of the tractor. corrupted.
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate If changes have been made to any memorised
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is seconds between key--off and key--on to provide
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of sufficient time for the data to transfer between the
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer. operating memory and the main memory. Once
transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged
Pay particular attention to the recommendations for until they are re--programmed.
running-in to ensure that your tractor will give the
long and dependable service for which it was Subject Page
designed.
Cab 2--5
This section is split into various subjects, as follows.
Where a feature requires setting up and running Electrical Power Sockets 2--22
adjustments in the field, detailed instructions will be
found in Section 3, Field Operation. Instructions for Seats 2--26
the operation of various optional accessories will be
Steering Column Controls 2--33
found in Section 6.
Analogue/Digital Instruments 2--37
Lubrication and maintenance requirements will be
found in Section 4. Tractor specifications are listed in Power Command Transmission
Section 7. (18 x 6 and 19 x 6) 2--92
A comprehensive index is provided at the end of this Auto Command Transmission 2--115
manual.
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive 2--136
Integrated Control Panels (ICP)
Front Axle Suspension 2--140
The grouping of the switches on the ICP in your
tractor may appear different to those shown in some
illustrations in Operator’s Manual. However, their
operation will be identical to that described.
2--1
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
INTEGRATED CONTROL PANEL

POWER COMMAND TRANSMISSION
13
Your tractor is equipped with a number of electronic control switches located on the right--hand side of the cab.
Depending on the options fitted to your tractor, some of these switches may have more than one function. A full
explanation of individual switch operation can be found in the relevant pages of this manual.
1. Front/rear joystick control selector 8. Wheel slip engagement
2. Reversible engine fan control 9. Rear axle differential lock, Auto/Manual

engagement
3. Engine Speed Management settings
10. 4WD Auto or Manual engagement
4. HTS Record/Auto/Manual select
11. Front axle suspension lock
5. Hydraulic top link/lift rod controls
12. Front 3--point hitch operation
6. Rear 3--point hitch EDC operation
13. Auto front PTO
7. Rear Auto PTO control
2--2
AUTO COMMAND TRANSMISSION
15
Your tractor is equipped with a number of electronic control switches located on the right--hand side of the cab.
Depending on the options fitted to your tractor, some of these switches may have more than one function.
A full explanation of individual switch operation can be found in the relevant pages of this manual.
1. Front/rear joystick control selector 9. Rear Auto PTO control
2. Auto Command acceleration rate control 10. Wheel slip engagement
3. Auto Command manual operation 11. Rear axle differential lock, Auto/Manual
engagement
4. Reversible engine fan control
12. 4WD Auto or Manual engagement
5. Engine Speed Management settings
13. Front axle suspension lock
6. HTS Record/Auto/Manual select
14. Front 3--point hitch operation
7. Hydraulic top link/lift rod controls
15. Auto front PTO
8. Rear 3--point hitch EDC operation
2--3
ADDITIONAL SWITCH PANELS

Right--Hand Cab ’C’ Pillar
1. EDC/EHR transport lock
2. Auxiliary headlamps (accessory)
3. Heated front and/or rear screens
4. Fast steer or Autoguidance master switch
5. External mirror heater control
6. Electronic battery isolator
Cab Roof, Right--Hand Side
1. Hood mounted worklights
2. Grab rail worklights
3. Roof mounted worklights (front)
4. Rotating beacon switch
5. Roof mounted worklights (rear)
6. Rear pillar or fender mounted worklights
2--4
CAB
Introduction
The cab has been designed for operator protection,

comfort and convenience. Inside, the frame, roof,
and floor are insulated to reduce noise to a minimum.
*Two wide opening doors permit entry to the cab from

either side, aided by convenient grab handles and
footsteps with anti-slip treads. The doors and rear
window are fitted with gas struts to hold them in the fully
open position. Additionally, the rear window may be
retained in the partially open position for increased
ventilation during operation.
5
*Depending on specification, some models may be
equipped with an emergency exit in place of the
standard door on the right--hand side of the cab. The
emergency exit does not have an external handle and
therefore cannot be opened from the outside.
The cab features include a fresh air heater/defroster

with recirculation, air conditioning, sun visor, tinted
glass, interior light, auxiliary power socket, storage
facilities, interior/exterior rear view mirrors and a choice
of comfortable seats.
Options include automatic climate control, high visibility

roof panel, radio cassette, CD player, rear windscreen
wash/wipe, electrically operated external rear view
mirrors and heated front and/or rear screens.
External Door Handle
Each door has an external handle with a push button

(1). The door may be locked from the outside using
the key provided. Insert the key and rotate clockwise
a half turn to lock.
2--5
Interior Door Handle
To open a door from inside the cab, squeeze up the

trigger (2) on the underside of the grab handle (1).
Use the grab handle to push the door open.
Right--Hand Emergency Door

(where fitted)
The right--hand door can be used in an emergency

to exit the cab. To open the door, lift the locking lever
until it clears the retaining pin and push the door
open.
NOTE: The door cannot be unlatched from outside

the tractor.
Opening this door also provides easier access to the

fuse and relay panels located inside the removable
trim panels on the lower part of the right--hand fender 8
immeadiately below the armrest.
When closing the door, ensure the slot in the locking

lever is correctly positioned above the retaining pin
then push fully down until it the lever is locked.
2--6
Entering and Exiting the Cab
Wherever possible, the cab should be entered from

the left side. Where fitted, the right--hand access
door should only be used in emergencies to exit the
cab.
CAUTION
When entering the cab from the right-hand side, use
only the grab handles to assist in climbing the steps.
If the gear levers are grasped inadvertently, a tractor
runaway may result.
To enter the cab, face the door, then open it. Place
one foot on the lowest step plate and, using the grab 9
handles on the ‘A’ post and inside the door, climb the
steps and enter the cab.
Sit in the seat and, where necessary, adjust the seat

controls to provide a comfortable working position.
Fasten the seat belt.
To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,
grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and
descend the steps using the grab handles.
IMPORTANT: When entering or exiting the cab using

the right--hand door, do not use the colour display
support as a grab handle.
Rear Window
The rear window may be locked in the closed position

or retained in the partially open or fully open
positions.
To open the window, lift the central locking handle (1)

up to the vertical position. Allow the window to open
a little then push the handle down so that the locking
tongue engages the slot (2) in the framework.
Alternatively, the window may be allowed to swing
fully open supported by two gas-filled struts.
IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely. 10
Using the grab handle, pull the window closed and

push the handle down to lock the window.
2--7
High Visibility Roof Panel (where fitted)
The high visibility roof panel provides the operator

with a view to the bucket or grab when the loader is
in the raised position.
For extra ventilation the roof panel may be opened

in one of three ways. Using the grab handles (1),
push up at the front or rear to angle the panel or,
alternatively, push up in the centre of the grab
handles to fully open the panel.
To close the panel, grasp both handles and pull the

panel down, the spring action of the handles will hold 11
the panel in the closed position.
NOTE: When transporting the tractor on a truck or

trailer at speeds above 50 K/mh (31 MPH) ensure the
roof panel is secured to prevent accidental opening.
See page 3--3 for more information.
A sliding panel may be adjusted to reduce glare or

can be fully closed if required.
12
Front Screen Sun Visor
Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes
from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the
chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
13
2--8
Rear Screen Sun Visor

(where fitted)
Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes
from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the
chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
14
Heated Front Screen

(where fitted)
As an aid to visibility in damp or freezing conditions,

your tractor may be equipped with the optional
heated front screen.
Depress the top of the switch (1) to activate the

heater element in the screen. This will provide rapid
de--icing of the front screen or will clear heavy misting
from inside the screen which can occur in humid
conditions.
NOTE: For the front screen heater to operate, the 15

tractor engine must be running.
To assist in defrosting or demisting the screen, the

cab heating and air conditioning systems can be
used in conjunction with the screen heater.
To clear the screen quickly, set the cab heater control

to maximum, turn on the air conditioning and select
a high speed on the blower fan.
Where ATC is installed, select the Max Demist

setting.
It is recommended the heater element is turned off

when the screen has been cleared and visibility
restored.
2--9
Heated Rear Screen

(where fitted)
As an aid to visibility in damp or freezing conditions,

your tractor may be equipped with the optional
heated rear screen.
Depress the bottom of the switch (2) to activate the

rear screen heater element. This will provide
de--icing of the rear screen or will clear heavy misting
which can occur on the inside of the rear screen in
humid conditions.
NOTE: For the rear screen heater to operate, the 16

tractor engine must be running.
It is recommended the heater element is turned off

when the screen has been cleared and visibility
restored.
2--10
External Rear View Mirrors
With extending arm
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best

rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended, as shown. This
feature will be beneficial when towing wide trailers or
equipment. To adjust the angle of the mirror head,
loosen the knob (2). Ensure both knobs are fully
tightened when the mirror is correctly positioned.
The mirror arm may be swivelled forward to clear
obstructions if necessary.
17
With Power adjustment
With the optional power adjust mirrors the position of

the mirror head may be adjusted electrically.
Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the switch

(1) to the left or right. Then, using the 4--way control
(2) move it sideways to adjust the lateral view or up
and down to adjust the vertical position.
With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the

power adjustment function will be de--activated.
18
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best
rearward view. When the knob (2) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended or retracted.
To make initial adjustment to the vertical position of

the mirror assembly, remove the four self--tapping
screws and take off the rear cover.
Loosen the clamp screws (1), re--position the mirror

head and re--tighten the screws. Replace the cover.
19
The power adjust mirrors are also electrically heated.
Momentarily depress the switch to turn on the
heating element. The mirror heater will automatically
switch off after 10 -- 14 minutes.
20
2--11
Interior Light
The interior light, 2, has three operating positions.

Depress the left hand side and the light will remain
on, depress the right hand side and the light will
illuminate when either of the doors are opened.
When the switch is in the central position, the light is

off, irrespective of the position of the doors.
The step light (1) operates in conjunction with the

interior light. This light provides illumination of the
step area when the door is opened.
21
Console Light
The light (3) provides a soft glow to the gear levers

and hydraulic console. The light is illuminated when 3
the tractor lights are turned on.
22
Heater Temperature Control
Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase the

temperature of the air from the heater. Turn fully
anti-clockwise to obtain unheated air from the heater
vents.
Blower Control
A 4-speed blower is installed for the heater (and air

conditioner, where fitted). Turn the switch (1)
clockwise to the first position for low speed. Further
rotation of the switch in a clockwise direction will
increase the fan speed. 23
With the windows closed, the blower may be used to

pressurise the cab to exclude dust etc. Provided that
the cab air filters are serviced correctly, maximum
pressurisation and optimum dust exclusion may be
achieved by operating the blower at maximum fan
speed.
2--12
Adjustable Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are provided throughout the cab

for even distribution of heated or cooled air. Vents are
located each side of the operators seat and on the
instrument console. Each vent may be
independently adjusted to direct the air flow (with the
blower control actuated) onto the side windows or the
operator. The two vents located on the upper part of
the instrument console may be adjusted to demist
the windscreen.
To open the circular vents (1) each side of the

instrument console, press one side of the disc and 24
then turn it, as required, to direct the air flow.
Lift the tag on the rectangular vents to open, and then

adjust for air flow and direction as required.
Air Conditioner Switch
Depress the switch (3), to activate the air conditioner

compressor and lower the temperature of the air
within the cab. The air conditioner will only operate
with the blower (1) switched on.
IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

R134A refrigerant. Do not mix with other refrigerants.
To quickly reduce in cab temperature operate the air

conditioner with the blower speed set to maximum
and the heater control fully off. When the air has
cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower control to
maintain the desired temperature. The windows and
doors should remain closed.
25
Under certain conditions, it may be desirable to
operate both the air conditioner and heater together,
e.g. to demist the windscreen and interior door glass
on a cold morning. (The air conditioner, as well as
cooling, also removes moisture from the air). Run the
engine to normal operating temperature, turn the
heater temperature control (2) and blower control (1)
to the maximum settings (fully clockwise). Turn on
the air conditioner (3) and adjust the air vents to
direct the air flow, as required.
2--13
When the windows are clear, turn the air conditioner

off and adjust the heater controls to maintain the
desired cab air temperature.
IMPORTANT: Run the engine at idle speed for at

least 3 minutes after switching on the air conditioner,
if the air conditioner has been out of use for more
than 30 days.
IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off

when cooled or de-humified air is not required. For
proper operation of the air conditioner, ensure that the
cab air filters are serviced regularly. See section 4.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12 C (10 F).
 Never expose any part of the air conditioner

system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
 Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the

air conditioner system. Escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
 If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the

same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38 C
(90 --100 F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
 If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. Consult a doctor immediately.
NOTE: It is the normal function of the air conditioner

to extract water from the air. Drain hoses lead from
the air conditioner unit to a point beneath the cab. Do
not be concerned if a pool of water collects beneath
the drain hose outlets when the engine is stopped.
2--14
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

(where fitted)
Automatic Control
With Automatic Temperature Control the operator

can set the temperature inside the cab to maintain a
comfortable working environment. By automatically
adjusting the output of the heating and air
conditioning systems, ATC will provide a stable cab
temperature between 16 C (61 F) and 29 C (84
F).
The blower control switch (1) has five positions, off,

ATC and three blower speeds. With ATC selected
the speed of the blower fan is controlled
automatically.
To set the cab interior temperature, align the mark on 26

the control knob (2) with the desired figure. If
required, the control can be set to the intermediate
positions between the figures to provide additional
temperature levels.
If the temperature in the cab remains within 1.1 C (2

F) of that set on the control, the blower fan will
maintain a low speed. As the differential between the
control setting and the in cab temperature increases,
the blower speed will be raised to re--stabilise the
temperature.
Selecting ’HI’ or ’LO’ on the temperature control will

override the automatic system to provide a maximum
heating or cooling effect.
2--15
Manual Control
To manually set the cab temperature, switch the

blower control to position I, II or III and select a
suitable setting on the temperature control. This will
disable the ATC function.
Although the in cab temperature will be maintained

within limits, it will not be as efficient as ATC.
Switching to ’LO’ will provide maximum air
conditioning output with temperature adjustment
through the blower control only.
Economy and Defrost Switch
The economy and defrost switch has three positions:

1. Left side depressed. ECONomy mode on, air
conditioner off.
2. Central position. ECON and MAX DEF off, air
conditioner on.
3. Right side depressed. MAX DEFrost on.
When the external air temperature is low, operating

the air conditioner may not be necessary to maintain
a constant temperature inside the cab. To turn off the
air conditioner, depress the ECON side of the switch. 27
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor uses engine

horsepower to drive it. Turning off the air conditioner
when not required will aid fuel economy.
The cab temperature will be maintained within the

specified limits unless the external air temperature
rises above that set on the control. Should this occur,
select the central switch position to turn on the air
conditioner.
In very cold conditions where the outside of the cab

windows become covered in ice, depress the MAX
DEF side of the switch. This will automatically set the
heater temperature to maximum, activate the air
conditioner (if not already switched on), and select
the highest speed setting on the blower fan.
This function may also be used to clear heavy misting

on the inside of the cab windows.
2--16
Air Recirculation
The cab ventilation system has three filters, two

external filters through which fresh air is drawn into
the cab, and one internal air re--circulation filter (2).
Move the slider control (1) fully to the right for
maximum air re--circulation.
WARNING
The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the
air but will not exclude chemical vapour. Follow the
chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding
protection from hazardous chemicals.
28
Cab Air Filters
When operating in conditions where chemical

vapours may be present, the external cab air filters
(2) may be replaced with carbonised filters to help
reduce the ingress of some chemical vapours.
Consult your authorised dealer.
CAUTION
Use only genuine New Holland filter elements when
renewing cab air filters. When replacing used filters,
follow local regulations in the disposal of
contaminated elements.
29
Safety Precautions
Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior

to reduce ingress of chemical vapour, the
recommended safety procedures, as stipulated by
the chemical manufacturer, should be observed at all
times.
Protective clothing worn when filling the sprayer with

pesticides or when carrying out external
adjustments, should be removed and stored away
carefully before re--entering the tractor cab.
To prevent build--up of chemical residue inside the

cab, the interior trim and floor covering should be
wiped clean with a damp cloth on a regular basis.
2--17
Cab Pressurisation Monitor

(where fitted)
To help reduce the amount of dust and chemical

vapours entering the cab, the blower can be used to
raise the air pressure inside the cab above that of the
external air pressure. Ensure all cab apertures are
fully closed. To monitor the internal pressure, a
gauge is mounted inside the cab.
Cab Air Pressurisation Gauge
Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. If the

lower edge (1) of the yellow indicator centres in the
green area you have an adequate differential
between the internal and external air pressure.
Adjust the blower speed to maintain that reading. If
the yellow indicator rises into the red area, increase
blower speed to raise the internal cab pressure.
CAUTION
If the lower edge of the yellow indicator enters the red
section of the gauge, carry out the checks below for
safe operation. 30
With the blower in the off position the yellow indicator

should move into the red area. If the indicator does
not register correctly, the gauge should be replaced.
If the blower is unable to maintain the correct

pressure inside the cab then the following checks
should be made to determine the cause.
1. Check blower is on maximum speed.
NOTE: If Automatic Temperature Control is

activated it may be necessary to switch to manual
control to increase blower speed.
2. Ensure all doors, windows and roof panel are
fully closed.
3. Check external air filters for blockage or
restriction.
4. Examine all cab aperture seals for damage.
5. Check sealing around linkages and levers where
they pass through the cab panels.
If, after all the checks have been made the cab
interior pressure cannot be maintained, consult your
authorised dealer.
2--18
Radio/Cassette/CD Player
(where fitted)
The cab is pre-wired and has two speakers installed

in the roof (four speakers are available as a dealer
installed accessory). A choice of stereo radio/CD
players (1) are available as a factory option or dealer
installed accessory.
Separate operating instructions will be supplied with

the radio.
NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start

switch in the on or accessories position. 31
WARNING
Ensure the aerial is positioned so it cannot touch
overhead power lines.
If the aerial is removed from the tractor, do not use

tools to tighten the aerial when re--fitting, hand
tighten only. The design of the aerial mast and base
will ensure a self tightening action is applied once the
mast has been attached to the base.
Work Lamp and Beacon Switch Panel
NOTE: The work lamps will only operate with the

tractor lights switched on.
The switches are located on a panel mounted in the

roof console (1). Individual switches control the front
and rear work lamps and the rotating beacon (see
accessories section). Depress the switches once to
illuminate, depress again to turn the lamps off.
When the key-start switch is turned on, the switches

will be internally illuminated. The light intensity will
increase as each switch is activated.
32
2--19
Mobile Telephone Usage
A storage bracket (1) is provided on the left--hand

cab ’C’ pillar for a mobile telephone. Auxiliary power
for the telephone may be taken from the cigarette
lighter socket above.
33
Implement Monitor Installation
To facilitate installation of an implement monitor, two

mounting points are provided:
To meet SAE standards, captive bolts (1), protected

by plastic covers, are provided on the the right-hand
cab ’C’ pillar.
It is recommended that a bracket be screwed to the

‘C’ pillar to mount the monitor. A suitable bracket is
available from your authorised dealer.
34
An alternative monitor mounting position (1) is

provided on the inner face of the right-hand ‘A’ pillar.
35
2--20
Cable and Harness Routing
So the operating cable from the monitor may be

conveniently routed to the equipment, a small
aperture is provided in the filler plate each side of the
lower rear window frame. By making a small incision
in the rubber at (1), cables or wiring can be easily
routed through the filler plate.
36
In Cab Storage (where fitted)
A storage box with a hinged lid (1) is located on the

left-hand side of the cab. The lid also incorporates a
drinks holder.
A recessed tray (2) is provided to the rear of the

storage box to hold small tools, oddments, etc.
37
Cup Holder
A cup holder is incorporated in the trim panel to the

right of the operator’s seat.
CAUTION
Care should be taken if cups containing hot liquids
are placed in the holder when operating on
undulating surfaces as the liquid could spill.
38
2--21
ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTORS
INTERNAL POWER CONNECTORS
Depending on tractor specification there are a

number of electrical power connectors provided for
various applications. These are as follows:
1. ISO/JD implement power socket. Provides

constant and key--start switched live feeds.
Rating.
With round connectors -- 25 amps (Europe).
With square connectors -- 30 amps (North
America).
2. 7 Pole Din/ISO implement socket (with radar

option only) provides the information below.
39
Pin 1. True ground speed. (Radar Sensed)

Pin 2. Theoretical ground speed.
(Wheel Sensed)
Pin 3. Rear P.T.O. speed.
Pin 4. Rear 3--point hitch, in work/out of work.
Pin 5. Not used
Pin 6. 5 amp. power supply.
Pin 7. Common ground connection.
3. 8 amp. Screw terminals, Figure 39. Connect

power wires to the red terminal (positive),
connect ground wires (earth) to the black
terminal (negative). 40
4. Auxiliary power socket for mobile telephone or

cooler box (where fitted). This socket may also
be used with a cigarette lighter as shown, consult
your authorised dealer.
5. 8 amp Single pole auxiliary power socket. Live

with key--start in ’on’ position.
IMPORTANT: To ensure that the screw terminals

and connecting cables do not get excessively hot
when loaded with near maximum current it is
important to make secure, tight connections to
prevent overheating and damage. Ensure that
equipment is connected to the terminals with cables
of suitable gauge and insulation thickness and fitted 41
with appropriate terminal connectors.
2--22
Multi--Pin Diagnostic Sockets
Your tractor is fitted with two diagnostic sockets (1)

on the rear trim panel behind the seat and on the right
C--pillar.
WARNING
For Dealer use only. The sockets are provided for
dealers to connect diagnostic equipment to the
tractor electrical control systems. Any attempt to
connect other equipment to the diagnostic sockets
may cause damage to the tractor electrical system
or its components.
42
43
2--23
EXTERNAL POWER CONNECTORS
Three Pin Implement Socket (all locations)

A 3-pin socket (1) is standard on all tractors with cab.
Rating.
With round connectors -- 25 amps (Europe).
With square connectors -- 30 amps (North America).
NOTE: The Operator should be aware that the screw

terminals (4) Figure 39, share the same fuse as the
3--pin socket. Therefore, the combined output of the
3-pin socket and the screw terminals is limited to the
amperage shown above (25 or 30 amps).
44
Beacon Power Socket
Two power sockets for the rotating beacon are

provided at the rear of the cab, one on each side.
45
2--24
Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(except North America)
A standard 7-pin trailer lighting socket (1), is provided
and is mounted at the rear of the tractor. With
reference to the picture inset, the socket connections
(viewed from the front of the socket) are as follows:
Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
2. Not Used --
3. White Earth (Ground)
4. Green R.H. Turn Signal
5. Black R.H. Parking Light
6. Red Brake Lights
7. Brown L.H. Parking Light
46
Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(North America only)
A standard SAE 7-pin connector (1) is provided, to
operate the electrical system on implements and
trailers. With reference to the picture inset, the pin
connections (viewed from the front of the socket) are
as follows:
Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. White Earth (Ground)
2. Black R.H. Parking Light
3. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
4. Red Brake Lights
5. Green R.H. Turn Signal
6. Brown L.H. Parking Light
7. Not Used --
47
2--25
SEATS
Two types of air suspension seats are available for

your tractor. Whichever seat is installed, you will find
that it has a comprehensive range of adjustments.
NOTE: Depending on model specification, some

seat functions may not be available on the seat fitted
to your tractor.
Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust

the seat to the most comfortable position. Seat
adjusters are colour coded grey. See the following
text and illustrations for details.
AIR SUSPENSION SEAT
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made while

sitting in the seat.
Storage pocket
A pocket for storing documents, etc., is provided on

the back of the seat.
48
Height/weight adjustment
The standard air suspension seat has electrically

controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust
seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start
switch on. Lift the lever (1) and a compressor will
raise the seat. When the lever is released the seat
will stop at the height selected. Push the lever down
to release air and lower the seat.
Backrest adjustment
Lift the lever (2) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The 49
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
2--26
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (1) and move the seat
forward or backward, as required. The seat will lock
in position when the lever is released.
Swivel adjustment
To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat

may be allowed to swivel. The seat may be locked in
one of three positions at 7, 14 and 21 to the right
of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (2), then rotate the 50
seat to the required position. When the lever is
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Armrest adjustments
Right--hand Armrest Position
The power adjust switch is located on the inside of

the armrest. Depress the front of the switch to move
the armrest forwards, press the rear of the switch to
move the armrest rearwards.
As the armrest is mounted on an inclined track, it will

move upwards as it travels forward.
NOTE: When the armrest has reached the limit of its

travel, release the switch. 51
Left--hand armrest angle adjustment
Rotate the knurled wheel (1) on the underside of the

left--hand armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest.
When not required, the armrest may be lifted to the
vertical position.
Left--hand armrest height adjustment
The left--hand armrest may also be adjusted for

height by loosening the two clamp bolts (2). Move the
armrest to a comfortable height and re--tighten the
clamp bolts.
52
2--27
DELUXE AIR SUSPENSION SEAT
The deluxe air suspension seat offers a full range of

adjustments for driver comfort. Optional heating
elements in the seat cushion and backrest are
provided for additional comfort in low temperatures.
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made with the

tractor stationary and the parking brake applied.
Storage pocket
A storage pocket for documents, etc., is provided on

the back of the seat. 53
Armrest Controls
Seat height adjustment
The deluxe air suspension seat has electrically

controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust
seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start
switch on. Press and hold the top of the rocker switch
(2) and a compressor will raise the seat. When the
switch is released the seat will stop at the height
selected. Press the bottom of the switch to release
air and lower the seat.
Heating element (where fitted)
The heating elements in the seat are controlled by a 54

two position switch (1), on the left--hand armrest.
Depressing the upper part of the switch will energise
the heat setting. Depress the lower part of the switch
to turn off. When energised, a red warning light on the
switch will illuminate. The temperature of the seat is
controlled by internal sensors within the seat.
2--28
Ride firmness selector (where fitted)
The optional Semi--Active suspension system

utilises an advanced damper system to reduce
vertical jolts and vibrations caused by operating on
rough terrain.
An electronic controller constantly monitors the

motion of the suspension and updates the damping
effect to significantly improve operator comfort.
A selector switch (3) allows the operator to choose

the most comfortable damping position consistent
with their weight and the movement of the tractor. 55
With the switch in the central position, the firmness

of the ride will suit most average conditions.
Depress the top of the switch to increase the

damping effect.
To reduce the damping effect, depress the bottom of

the switch.
Seat Controls
Cushion tilt
The angle of the seat cushion may be adjusted to

three positions. Lift the lever (1) and pull or push the
front of the seat cushion up or down, as required. The
seat cushion will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Cushion extension
To suit drivers of differing heights, the length of the

seat cushion may be adjusted by up to 60 mm (2.4
in). Lift the lever (3) and move the cushion forward or
rearward, as required. The cushion will lock in 56
position when the lever is released.
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (2) and move the

complete seat forward or backward, as required. The
seat will lock in position when the lever is released.
2--29
Swivel adjustment
To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat

may be allowed to swivel. The seat may be locked in
one of three positions at 7, 14 and 21 to the right
of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (4), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
57
Backrest inclination adjustment
Lift the lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Travel isolator
Having selected the required fore/aft position, the

seat is permitted a limited, spring controlled, fore/aft
movement (float) if the travel isolator (2) is pulled up.
This, in conjunction with the air suspension, will
provide the optimum in ride comfort. To cancel the
float movement, push the travel isolator down while
slowly moving the seat fore and aft until the seat
locks in position.
Suspension damper
Turn the knob (3) clockwise (toward the rear) for a

softer ride. Turn anti-clockwise if a firmer ride is
required.
NOTE: The suspension damper is not fitted to

tractors with Ride Firmness control.
58
2--30
Right--hand Armrest Position
The power adjust switch is located on the inside of

the armrest. Depress the front of the switch to move
the armrest forwards, press the rear of the switch to
move the armrest rearwards.
NOTE: When the armrest has reached the limit of its

travel, release the switch.
59
Left--hand armrest height adjustment
The left--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust the
height of the armrest, loosen the two bolts (3). Grasp
the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the two bolts
securely.
Left--hand armrest angle adjustment
Rotate the knurled wheel (4) on the underside of the

armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest to a
comfortable position. When not required, the 60
left--hand armrest may be lifted to the vertical
position.
Shoulder support
The deluxe seat features an integrated shoulder

support (1) (upper backrest). The support may be
adjusted vertically by using the handgrip at the rear
of the cushion. Push down on the top of the support
to lower.
Lumbar adjustment
The seat has a built-in lumbar support actuated by a

thumb wheel (2) located at the rear of the seat on the
left--hand side.
To increase lumbar support, rotate the thumbwheel

upwards, to decrease support rotate downwards.
2--31
SEAT BELT AND OPERATOR PRESENCE

SWITCH (where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab and
retractable seat belt. Always use the seat belt when
operating the tractor. If any part of the seat belt
becomes worn or damaged it must be replaced
immeadiately.
To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push
the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a ‘click’
indicates it is properly engaged. To disengage, press 61
the red release button (3) on the buckle and remove
the tongue from the buckle.
The operator presence switch, installed beneath the

seat, is connected to an audible alarm which will
sound if the operator leaves the seat with the P.T.O.
engaged or without applying the parking brake.
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT
(where fitted)
A folding instructional seat is available where local

legislation permits. To raise the seat backrest, lift to
the upright position. The seat will be retained in the
upright position by the gas strut (1). When not
required fold the upper part of the seat down to reveal
the drinks holder.
WARNING
Always use the seat belt when operating the tractor.
If any part of the seat belt becomes worn or damaged
it must be replaced immeadiately. 62
IMPORTANT: The fold down seat is fitted for

operator training or instructional purposes only, it is
not intended for passenger conveyance.
Passengers should not be carried in the cab at any
time.
2--32
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS
The following text describes the use of the various

controls mounted on the steering column.
Steering Column Adjustment
The steering column on your tractor may be tilted and

telescoped. Pull the end of the clamp lever (2) up
(toward you). Move the steering column/wheel to the
most convenient position and return the clamp lever
to the fully down position to lock the steering column
assembly.
To alter the steering column height, loosen the centre

boss (1) on the steering wheel by turning
anti--clockwise. Move the steering wheel to the most
convenient position and re--tighten the centre boss.
63
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with
hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering
wheel at full left or right lock (wheels against the
steering stops) for more than 10 seconds or for more
than a total of 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure
to observe this precaution may result in damage to
steering system components.
Key-start Switch
The key-start switch activates the grid heater cold

start device, accessories and the starting motor. See
‘Starting the Engine’ in Section 3.
64
2--33
Multi-function Switch
The stalk-type switch is mounted on the left-hand

side of the steering column. The switch controls the
tractor lights, horn and turn signals.
The end of the multi--function switch rotates. With

reference to Figure 65, turn the switch away from
you, to position (2), to turn on the instrument and
position lights. Turn the switch to position (1) to select
the headlights.
With the headlights on, push the stalk away from you,
position (3), to change from dipped to high beam. Pull
the stalk toward you, position (4), to change back to 65
dipped beam. With high beam selected, the blue
indicator light on the instrument panel is illuminated.
Pull the stalk towards you, position (5), against

spring pressure, to flash the headlight high beam.
The stalk will return to the central position when
released.
Move the stalk to position (6) to operate the right turn

signals, position (7) will activate the left turn signals.
Indicator lights on the instrument panel will also flash
when the turn signals are activated. A warning
buzzer will sound if the indicators are not cancelled
within 20 seconds when moving, or 5 minutes when
stationary.
NOTE: The turn signals will only operate with the

key-start switch turned on. 66
Press in the end of the stalk, position (8), to sound the

horn.
2--34
Follow You Home Lights
When leaving the tractor at night, external

illumination can be provided for a limited period by
operating the headlight flasher switch within 30
seconds of key--off. This will illuminate the dip beam
headlights and, depending on switch status, one of
the worklamps.
Each movement of the headlight flasher (5)

Figure 65, will provide 30 seconds of illumination up
to a maximum of 31/2 minutes after which the lights
will automatically extinguish.
Hazard Warning Lights Switch
Press the left-hand side of the switch (1) to operate

all the turn signals simultaneously. The switch will
flash with the turn signals.
67
2--35
Windscreen Wipe/Wash Control
The stalk-type control on the right-hand side of the

steering column controls the front and rear screen
wipe and wash functions.
With the key-start switch on, move the stalk

rearward, to position (2) and the front wiper will
operate at the slower of the two wiper speeds, move
to position (3) for the faster speed. Press in the end
of the stalk, position (1) to operate the electric screen
wash.
68
From the centre ’off’ position move the stalk

downward to position (4) for intermittent front wipe,
Move the stalk upward against spring pressure for

single sweep operation, position (3). On release, the
switch will return to the off position.
To operate the rear screen wiper, rotate the centre

collar anti--clockwise to position (1) for intermittent
rear wipe and to position (2) for rear screen wash.
The switch will return automatically to the intermittent
mode when released.
NOTE: Windscreen washer jets are mounted in the 69

cab frame, immediately beneath the roof. Insert a pin
into the jet nozzle to adjust the angle of the jet.
2--36
ANALOGUE/DIGITAL INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
The instrument panel consists of three analogue

gauges , three liquid crystal displays (LCD’s) and a
dot matrix display (DMD).
In addition to the gauges and LCD displays there are

a number of coloured lights providing other operating
information or warning of system malfunction.
The lower left button on the instrument panel controls

the intensity of back lighting for the LCD’s and dot
matrix displays, the two right--hand buttons are used 70
during diagnostic functions.
GAUGES
Engine Tachometer
The tachometer (1) indicates engine revolutions per

minute. Each division on the scale represents 100
rev/min., therefore with the needle indicating ‘20’ the
engine is running at 2000 rev/min.
71
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge (2) indicates the

temperature of the engine coolant. If the needle
enters the upper (red) section of the gauge while the
engine is running, stop the engine and investigate
the cause.
Fuel Level Gauge
The gauge (3) indicates the level of fuel in the tank

and is only operative with the key-start switch turned
on. See Section 7 for fuel capacities.
72
2--37
73
INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS
The coloured lights provide operating information or 4. Four wheel drive -- Light will illuminate when the
give warning of system malfunction. Illumination of a drive to the front wheels is engaged.
warning light may be accompanied by an audible
alarm. NOTE: In auto four wheel drive mode, this light will
flash when four wheel drive has been automatically
NOTE: All indicator and warning lights will illuminate disengaged.
for a short period at ’key--on’ as the electrical
systems carry out a self diagnostic check. 5. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
tractor/trailer turn signals when a second trailer
1. Fast Steer -- Green light will illuminate when Fast is attached.
Steer system is energised (isolator switch ’ON’).
6. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
2. Fast Steer -- Orange light will illuminate when tractor/trailer turn signals when a trailer is
steering wheel ring is depressed to engage Fast attached
Steer function.
7. Parking lights -- Light will illuminate when the
3. Rear differential lock -- Light will illuminate when tractor lights are switched on.
the differential lock is engaged.
8. Headlight high beam -- Light will illuminate when
NOTE: In auto diff lock mode, this light will flash the tractor lights are switched to high beam.
when the diff lock is automatically dis--engaged.
2--38
74
Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)
9. Red Stop light -- If Stop light comes on stop the 14. Trailer brake pressure
tractor immediately and investigate the cause. A
warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Italy only -- Light will illuminate to indicate that
Display to confirm the location of the fault. hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit
is low. Stop the tractor and investigate the cause.
10. Engine power boost activated -- Light will
NOTE: Light will also illuminate when the handbrake
illuminate when power boost is activated.
is applied as this will release pressure in the trailer
11. Amber Warning light -- Illumination of this light will brake circuit.
be accompanied by a warning symbol in the Dot All air braking systems -- Light will illuminate to
Matrix Display. Stop the tractor and investigate indicate the pressure in the air brake system has
the cause. fallen below 4.5 bar (65.2 lbf.in2). Stop the tractor
and investigate the cause.
12. Front suspension -- Light will illuminate to
indicate front suspension switch is in the locked
position (suspension de--activated). 15. Brake pedals not latched -- Light will illuminate to
show when pedal latch is unlocked (Japan only).
13. Parking brake -- Light will flash with key-start
switch on and parking brake applied. If the 16. Engine oil pressure low -- Steady light
key-start switch is turned off and the parking accompanied by the Red Stop light will indicate
brake not applied, or the operator leaves the seat low engine oil pressure. Stop the engine and
without applying the parking brake, a warning investigate the cause.
buzzer will sound and the parking brake lamp will
flash for approximately 10 seconds or until the
parking brake has been applied.
2--39
75
Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)
17. Not Used. 22. Engine Speed Management -- Light will

illuminate when Engine Speed Management is
18. Rear Auto P.T.O. function -- The light will activated.
illuminate when the Auto P.T.O. function is
enabled. Each time the implement is raised and 23. Left turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor
the P.T.O. is stopped, the light will flash. When left-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will
the implement is lowered into work and the P.T.O. sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
engages, the light will cease to flash and become seconds (5 minutes with tractor stationary).
steady.
24. Engine exhaust brake -- Light will illuminate when
19. Fuel level low -- Light will be illuminated when the exhaust brake system is activated.
tractor requires re--fuelling. See Section 8 for fuel
capacities. 25. Cold start device -- Light will illuminate when the
grid heater is activated using the key--start
20. Brake warning light -- Apply handbrake or switch.
electronic park brake.
26. Alternator -- Light continuously illuminated
21. Right turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor indicates that the alternator is not charging the
right-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will battery.
sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
seconds (tractor moving) or 5 minutes (tractor
Stationary).
2--40
INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with the optional

Intelliview II Monitor, a number of displays and
setting procedures will change. Consult the
Intelliview II Monitor Operator’s Manual for details.
DOT MATRIX DISPLAY
A number of tractor operating and set--up functions

may be shown in the Dot Matrix Display (DMD). The
different functions are selected using the Enhanced
Keypad. A symbol will appear to confirm the function
selected.
If an error occurs in the instrument panel or tractor

systems circuits, a malfunction warning symbol will
appear in this display accompanied by an error code.
Consult your authorised dealer.
76
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAYS
The information displayed in the centre LCD, will vary

depending on tractor specification. Use the
Enhanced Keypad to toggle between the displays.
The following information may be displayed in the

centre LCD.
1. Rear wheel slip (with radar option only)

2. Power Take Off speed (front or rear)
3. 3--point hitch position (front or rear)
77
Rear Wheel Slip
If your tractor is equipped with optional ground speed

radar, the percentage (%) of rear wheel slip may be
displayed. The slip figure is calculated from
information provided by the transmission speed
sensor (theoretical ground speed) and the radar (true
ground speed).
78
2--41
Power Take Off Speed
When operating the rear Power Take Off the display

may be used to monitor the output shaft speed. Use
the Enhanced Keypad to select either rear P.T.O.
speed or front P.T.O. speed (where fitted).
79
3--Point Hitch Position
If your tractor is equipped with Electronic Draft

Control (EDC) the display may be used to show the
position of the 3--point hitch (and implement) by
means of numbers ranging from ’0’ (fully lowered
position) to ’100’ (maximum lift height).
When a front hitch is installed, the display may be

used to show the height of the front lift arms. ’0’ will
represent the fully lowered position, ’100’ the
maximum lift height.
80
Dimming Control
The brightness of the liquid crystal (LCD) and dot

matrix displays (DMD) may be varied by using the
dimming control button (1). Momentarily depressing
the button will alter the backlighting in steps. Depress
and hold the button to cycle through the full range of
backlighting from low to high intensity. Release the
button when the required setting is obtained.
81
Right hand LCD -- Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF)/AdBlue instrumentation warning
A. DEF/Adblue / SCR system icon
B. SCR Technical failure
C. DEF/Adblue level indicator
82
2--42
ARMREST COLOUR DISPLAY
The armrest colour display provides the operator

with a comprehensive range of detailed operating
information including Precision Farming. For those
requiring a higher level of operating functions,
Autoguidance is available as an option.
83
The armrest display is touch sensitive and has five
main information displays which can be accessed
simply by touching the appropriate area of the
display.
1. Status Display. Various symbols relating to

tractor functions will appear in this area. This
would include hydraulic applications,
(EHR/EDC) Virtual Terminal and Autoguidance
status (where fitted) and service period
warnings.
2. HTS Display. When in record and play--back

modes, HTS symbols will appear in this display.
These will be accompanied by a text description
to the right of the symbol when the main HTS
operating screen is in use.
2--43
3. Main Screen Display. This is the main display

area in which the various information screens will
appear. Information screens can be created,
edited, saved and deleted through this part of the
colour display.
4. Function Select. Use the touch area to display

the required screen.
5. Transmission Display. In this area, details

regarding transmission operation, direction and
speed are shown. The illustration shown depicts
details of the Auto Command transmission.
These will be different for Power Command
models (see Power Command transmission later
in this section).
The position of the colour display can be altered to

suit the individual operator. Loosen the knurled knob
at the rear of the display and tilt to the most suitable
position.
Where applicable, programming and operating

instructions for both Enhanced Keypad and the
colour display are included in the relevant sections of
this manual.
In the following pages, where . is shown in the text,

touch the relevant part of the screen display to
access information or pop--up screens.
84
NOTE: For clarity, all displays featured in this manual
are Mixed/Text (text and icons).
2--44
Pop--up Screens
Pop--up screens may contain text or figures allowing

the operator to input programming information,
implement details and working conditions.
Other pop--up screens allow the operator to activate

or deactivate functions, edit saved information and
update work conditions.
Where a text or number pop--up screen appears, the

operator simply touches the relevant letter or number
to enter the character in the description box.
85
To save the description, touch Enter, the pop--up will
automatically close and the display will return to the
application screen, in this case Implement setup.
To exit a pop--up screen without making changes,

touch X to return to the application screen.
86
When making adjustments using pop--up screens,
setting changes can be made by touching A" or,
alternatively touching the bar graph.
To quickly increase a setting touch the screen at (2),

to decrease touch at (1). The bar graph will
automatically go to the spot where the screen was
1 2
touched.
After making the intitial adjustment, use A" to

make finer adjustments where required.
87
2--45
Setting Colour Display Operating Parameters
Before operating with the colour display, a number of

basic settings must be applied. These settings are
accessed through Display Setup and Operator
Setup screens.
. Toolbox
. Disp (Display Setup)
By touching each ’box’ on the screen a pop--up will

appear allowing the operator to enter information.
Where a pop--up is accessed without making a
change, touch X to exit and return to the setup
screen.
Display setup information includes:

Month, day and year.
Hour and minute.
Language.
88
Backlight. (illumination level for the colour
display).
Current Vehicle. Will provide information on the
the tractor model in which the colour display is
installed.
Interface Level. Allows the operator to select a
basic or advanced level of information on the
Profile Setup screen in Performance displays.
. Oper (Operator setup)
Operator setup information includes:

Operator name/identification.
Units. Select the appropriate unit from Metric,
USA or Imperial. This setting will control all units
of measurement within the colour display.
Grid Lines. This adds or removes the grid lines
dividing some display areas.
Time format. AM/PM or 24 hour format.
Display mode. Allows the operator to choose the
most suitable display heading from a choice of 89
text/text, text/icon or icon/icon.
NOTE: For clarity, all displays featured in this manual
are Mixed/Text (text and icons).
2--46
Date Format. In this screen the operator can

choose the way the date is appears in the colour
display.
Decimal Symbol. This screen allows the operator

to seletect either Point (.) or Comma (,).
Display Volume. Changes the sound level of

programming ’beeps’ and alarms in the colour
display.
90
Colour Display Backlighting
The level of backlighting in the colour display can be

adjusted as follows:
. Toolbox
. Disp
. Backlight
91
Touch A" to adjust the light level, the bar graph will
confirm the setting between 1 and 100, touch Enter
to save the setting
92
2--47
Setting the clock
Where a tractor is equipped with the colour display,

setting the time clock in the display and instrument
panel can be done using the touch screen.
The Display Setup screen also allows the operator to

set the Month, Day, Year and select the appropriate
Language.
. Toolbox
. Disp
93
. Hour or Minute
Using the pop--up screen, set the correct time for the
hour or minute then touch Enter to save the setting
and return to the Display Setup screen.
To exit the pop--up menu without making a change

touch X.
94
2--48
Setting Alarm Reminder
NOTE: To exit pop--up screens without making

changes touch X.
. Utilities
. Alarms
The alarm function provides up to five programmable
timer alarms that can be used as a reminder where
it is necessary to carry out a task at a specific time.
1. Current Date. 95
2. Current Time.
3. Alarm Symbol
The alarm symbol confirms alarm status, OFF, ON

or MUTE.
4. . Time Display
Touch YB to set the desired time at which the

alarm will sound, touch Ok to set.
5. . Memo
Touch MEMO to create a description of the timed

event. Use pop--up screen to enter the description,
a maximum of 18 characters may be used. To toggle
between upper and lower case, touch the arrow
symbol. Touch Enter to set.
6. . Alarm Mode
Touch B to set ON, OFF and MUTE. The alarm

icon will confirm selection.
7. . Del/Set. Touch Del to delete current alarm

setting, touch Set to create a new alarm setting.
At the set time the alarm pop--up will appear in the

display showing the memo text. With MUTE selected
there is no audible alarm.
. Back to return to the main display.
2--49
Calculator
. Calc.
The calculator screen allows a maximum of 10 digits
to be entered.
. Back to return to the main display.
96
Setting the Work Condition

changes touch X.
NOTE: Changing the descriptions for Implement or

Work Condition in any screen will automatically
update all Work Condition screens.
Implement Setup
. Work condition
. Impl
97
The implement screen allows the operator to select,
edit or create implement descriptions and working
conditions.
. Implement (1)
Select an implement from the pop--up list, modify a

current implement description or add a new
implement category to the list.
NOTE: A more comprehensive implement setup list

can be found in Toolbox, Implement setup.
. Work Condition (2)
Select the current work condition from the pop--up

list, modify the current condition or add a new work
category to the list.
2--50
ENHANCED KEYPAD AND

PERFORMANCE MONITOR
98
The enhanced keypad consists of 16 buttons or 3. Engine Oil Pressure (D). This key will display the
’keys’ that select, control or programme various engine oil pressure bargraph.
functions and displays in the central and dot matrix
screens. Keys 5, 6, 10 and 11 are used to set--up and 4. Programmed Maintenance Reminder (D). The
programme many of the enhanced keypad functions. maintenance schedule key provides two levels of
reminder identified as ’Heavy’ and Light.
Unless otherwise described, depress the keys once
to obtain the appropriate display. A symbol will 5. Menu Enter (D). Depress to select set--up and
appear in the display to confirm the function programming modes.
selected.
6. Menu Scroll Up or Digit Value (D). Depress this
key repeatedly to scroll upwards through the
Legend: (D) = Dot Matrix Display
menu or change the value of a number.
(C) = Centre Digital Display
7. P.T.O. Speed (C). Depress once to display rear
1. Hourmeter (D). Touch the key to view total Power Take Off speed, press again and hold for
number of hours that the tractor has operated. 3 seconds to show front P.T.O. speed (where
The hours recorded should be used as a guide to fitted).
the service intervals for the tractor.
8. Rear Wheel Slip (C). The level of rear wheel slip
2. Odometer (D). The odometer provides a visual will appear as a one or two digit percentage (%)
record of the distance travelled in kilometres or figure (with radar option only).
miles depending on the ground speed unit
selected. Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’.
2--51
Enhanced Keypad (continued)
99
9. Hitch Height Position (C). Depress once to 14. Area Accumulator (D). The total area worked will
display the rear hitch height, press again and be displayed in hectares or acres depending on
hold for 3 seconds to show front linkage height the ground speed unit selected.
(where fitted). The display will show a figure
between ’0’ (fully lowered) and ’100’ (maximum 15. Area Per Hour Forecaster (D). Touch this key
raised position). and the area/hour symbol will display together
with a forecast of the area that will be worked in
10. Exit/Cancel (D). Use this key to Exit or cancel one hour if the current rate of work is continued.
set--up and programming modes.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per
11. Menu Scroll Down or Digit Select (D). Depress hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
this key to scroll downwards through the menu or subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
select an alternative digit in the Dot Matrix may occur.
Display.
16. Remote Valve Operation (D). The display will
12. Battery Voltage (D). With the engine running, show the flow rate through each valve as a
touch the key to display the battery symbol percentage (%), the direction of cylinder
together with a digital display of the battery movement (extend or retract) and the number of
voltage. the valve selected. (See Electronic Remote
Control Valves in Section 3).
13. Trailer Brake Air Pressure (D). Depress to
display the trailer brake air pressure bargraph.
2--52
Ground Speed Display
The lower left--hand LCD provides a permanent

display of ground speed (1) in Km/h or MPH
dependent upon the country in which the tractor is to
be used. If required, the display may be changed to
read an alternate ground speed unit from that set at
the factory.
NOTE: If the tractor rear tyre size is changed, the

ground speed display may require re--calibrating to
suit the radius of the new tyre.
NOTE: Illustration shows all displays activated. 100
NOTE: The groundspeed is also shown in the

transmission display.
Change Ground Speed Units
 With the key start ON, depress and hold the

Menu/Enter key (2). SETUP MENU will appear
in the DMD but this will change to the Clock
Menu. Release the Menu/Enter key.
 Using the Menu Up key (1), scroll through the

menu until the Km/h MPH screen appears.
 Momentarily depress the Menu/Enter key (2)

and, using the Menu Up/Down keys, select the
required speed reading. To store the setting and
return to the main menu depress the Menu/Enter 101
key again. Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return
to the original display.
Selecting the appropriate unit will automatically set

the unit for both instrument panel and colour display
(where fitted).
2--53
Calibrating the Ground Speed Display
Should you wish to install alternative rear tyre

equipment that would provide a radius difference of
more than 13 mm (0.5 in), then the electronic control
module should be re--calibrated to display an
accurate ground speed figure. To re--calibrate use
one of the following methods:
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.
 Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for the

load being carried. (See Tyre Load/Inflation
tables in Section 3 of this manual).
 Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.
Auto Calibration
 Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.
 With the the tractor stationary and the engine

running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key
(4). SETUP_MENU will appear in the DMD but
this will change to the Clock Menu. Release the
Menu/Enter key.
 Using the menu up/down keys, select CAL. 102
 With CAL displayed, depress the Menu/Enter

key to select CAL manual then use the Menu Up
key (1), and scroll through the menu screen until
CAL auto is displayed.
2--54
 Depress the Menu/Enter key again and CAL

auto READY will appear in the DMD. Select a
suitable transmission ratio to provide a forward
speed above 3 Km/h (1.8 MPH). As the centre of
the front tyres pass over the start line, press and
release the Menu/Enter key. The speed display
will start to flash CAL and the central LCD will show
a four digit figure that will increase as the tractor
moves forward. The DMD will change to display
CAL auto ON.
 As the centre of the front tyres pass over the

finish line, press and release the Menu/Enter
key. CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. Depress the Menu/Enter key to store the 103
setting. Press and release the Exit/Cancel key (2)
Figure 102, to return to the original display.
Manual Calibration

Menu/Enter key (2). SETUP MENU will appear
in the DMD but this will change to the Clock
 Using the menu up/down keys, select CAL. With

CAL displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key and
CAL manual will appear.
 Depress the Menu/Enter key again to change the

DMD display to CAL_Man_000.0. (The figure
000.0 may differ if a calibration number has 104
previously been entered). CAL will flash in the
speed display.
 Using the Digit Select key (3) move the cursor to

the first digit to be set, enter the number using the
Digit Value key (1). CAL will appear in the speed
display and start to flash. Repeat the procedure
to set the remaining calibration figures that
correspond to the size of rear tyre fitted to your
tractor.
IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--56.
 Depress the Exit/Cancel key twice to store the 105

setting and return to the main menu screen,
depress again to exit set up and return to the
original display.
2--55
Ground Speed Calibration Numbers Rear Tyre Rolling Circumferences
The rolling circumference for any given tyre size will Tyre Size Tyre Rolling Circumference
vary depending on tyre manufacturer. The figures
shown in the table are an average based on rolling Centimetres Inches
circumference data supplied by several 20.8R -- 38 550.1 216.6
manufacturers. To obtain an accurate figure for your 580/70R -- 38 543.6 214.0
rear tyres, consult your authorised dealer or tyre 650/65R -- 38 545.3 214.7
supplier.
650/75R -- 38 581.1 228.8
710/70R -- 38 576.2 226.8
If the size of tyre on your tractor is not listed, then the
road speed calibration may be carried out using one 710/60R -- 42 567.5 223.4
of the following procedures. 18.4R -- 42 555.7 218.8
20.8R -- 42 581.5 228.9
Carry out the Auto calibration as previously 580/70R -- 42 569.0 224.0
described or measure the rear tyre rolling 650/65R -- 42 577.6 227.4
circumference. 620/70R -- 42 580.9 228.7
14.9R -- 46 554.2 218.2
1. To measure the rolling circumference of the rear 420/80R -- 46 555.5 218.7
tyre, park the tractor on a level surface and make
480/80R -- 46 587.2 231.2
a vertical chalk mark on the sidewall where the
tyre tread contacts the ground. Make a second 520/85R -- 46 608.8 239.7
chalk mark on the ground aligning with the mark 18.4R -- 46 587.0 231.1
on the tyre. 320/90R -- 50 559.0 220.1
320/90R -- 54 529.0 208.3
2. Slowly drive the tractor forward until the rear
wheel has made one revolution and the chalk
mark on the sidewall is again in contact with the
ground. Mark the ground again and measure the
distance between the two chalk marks.
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor emits a low intensity
microwave signal which will not cause any ill effects
in normal use. Although the signal intensity is low, do
not look directly into the face of the sensor while in
operation so as to avoid eye damage.
2--56
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(with Enhanced Keypad)
Odometer (Distance Record)
The odometer provides a visual record of the

distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending
on the ground speed unit selected.
Two displays are available and may be used to

provide a total for all journeys travelled and for
individual journeys or to record distances in work.
Both displays may be reset to zero.
Touch the key once to select the total distance

display, touch again to select the distance in work
screen ’W’. Keeping the key depressed for more than
3 seconds will re--set the selected odometer to zero.
The journey distance in the display will appear in

steps of:
0 to 19.999 Km/Miles 0.001 Km/Miles

2000 to 19999 Km/Miles 1.0 Km/Miles
106
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, distance
calculations are based on axle rotation and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur.
Area per Hour Forecaster
Touch the AREA/HOUR key (1). The ‘AREA/HOUR’

symbol will display, together with a forecast (2) of the
area that will be worked in one hour if the current rate
of work is continued.
The area per hour will appear in steps of 0.01

Ha/Acre.

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
may occur. 107
2--57
Area Accumulator
NOTE: Before activating the area accumulator

function ensure the correct implement width has
been entered into the TPM memory.
The accumulated area (total area worked) can be

displayed by depressing the AREA key (1).
Depending on the unit set in the tractor speed display
(K/mh or MPH) the reading will be in hectares or
acres.
Depress the area accumulator key repeatedly to

toggle through the three displays in the dot matrix
screen:
1. OFF. The area accumulator is off.
2. ON. Area accumulator on. Area will be

accumulated as the tractor moves irrespective of
the position of the implement.
3. A. Area accumulation will start recording

when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop accumulating when the
implement is raised.
The area accumulator symbol (2) will appear in the

display along with the area figure.
With trailed equipment, area accumulation may be 108

temporarily interrupted, for example, at the
headland, by means of a switch connected into the
implement status socket (where fitted). See
‘Electrical Power Panel’ on page 2--22.
The area measurement in the display (3) will appear

in steps of:
0 to 199.99 Ha/acre 0.01 Ha/acre

200 to 1999.9 Ha/acre 0.1 Ha/acre
2000 to 19999 Ha/acre 1.0 Ha/acre
Area accumulation can be reset to zero at any time

by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key (1)
Figure 108, until the display returns to zero.

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are 109
may occur.
2--58
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor, located in front of
the right-hand footsteps, emits a low intensity
microwave signal which is completely safe in normal
use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look
directly into the face of the sensor while in operation
so as to avoid eye damage.
Programming Keys
Four keys are used to select, change or memorise

the various functions related to the Performance
Monitor and Enhanced Keypad. All programme
information will appear in the Dot Matrix Display
(DMD) along with the relevant symbol for the function
selected.
1. Menu Up/Digit Value Key. Use this key to scroll

upwards through the function menu or to
increase the value of a selected digit during a
calibration procedure. Values will increase by
one digit each time the key is depressed.
2. Exit/Cancel Key. Depress this key to exit the

calibration mode. The key may be used at any
time during a set--up procedure to cancel and exit
the calibration mode, however, information not
saved will be lost.
3. Menu Down/Digit Select Key. In the calibration

mode depress this key to scroll downwards
through the menu or to select a digit for 110
re--calibration. Each time the key is depressed
the flashing cursor showing the current digit
selected will move one space to the right.
4. Menu/Enter Key. Depress and hold this key to

enter the programme mode. SETUP/MENU will
appear in the display but this will change to the
Clock Menu. Release the Menu/Enter key.
Using the Menu Up/Down keys, the various
display screens can now be accessed.
2--59
Using the Menu Up/Down keys, select the function

to be calibrated. Depressing the Menu Up key will
select the following screens in the Dot Matrix
Display:
Clock setup
MPH or Km/h select
Beep on/off
Warning symbol
Auto engine stop
When the appropriate function screen has been

selected, depress the Menu/Enter key again to
access the calibration mode.
Audible Beep
Each time one of the keys is pressed, an audible

’beep’ sound will be heard. The beep can be switched
off if required.

Menu/Enter key. SETUP MENU will appear in
the DMD but this will change to the Clock Menu.
Release the Menu/Enter key.
 Using the Menu Up/Down keys, scroll through

the menu until BEEP ON/OFF is displayed.
111
 Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the
set--up screen. Using the Menu Up/Down keys,
align the arrow (1) with ON or OFF as required.
 Touch the Menu/Enter key to store the setting

and return to the main menu. Depress the
Exit/Cancel key to return to the original display.
2--60
Setting the Implement Width

In order that the micro-processor may calculate the
cumulative area, the working width of the implement
must be entered into the memory. For example, to
enter an implement working width of 4.5 metres
(14.76 ft.) carry out the following procedure.


the menu until the Implement width symbol is 112
displayed.

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’0’ then move the cursor one space to
the right with the Digit Select key and enter ’4’.
Move the cursor to the right of the decimal point
and enter ’5’. The reading displayed should now
be 04.50 mtrs (14.76 ft.).
NOTE: The micro--processor cannot calculate the
area worked unless the correct implement width is 113
entered.
2--61
Calibrating for Wheel Slip

Before setting the slip alarm point, a zero wheel slip
factor has to be determined. This calibration must be
carried out on a hard level surface where wheel slip
is unlikely to occur.
NOTE: The Electronic Draft Control auto slip
function (see EDC operation) will not operate unless
this procedure is carried out.
 With the tractor stationary and the engine
running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key.
SETUP MENU will appear in the DMD but this
will change to the Clock Menu. Release the
114
Menu/Enter key.
the menu screens until the wheel slip symbol is
displayed.
 Drive the tractor at a constant speed above 5
Km/h (3.1 MPH). When a steady speed has been
reached, depress the Menu Enter key, CAL ON
will appear in the display. After a short distance
touch the Menu Enter key again, the display will
change to CAL OK.
2--62
Setting the Slip Alarm Point
NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the

slip alarm function will be omitted from the display.
The slip alarm point may be set as a one or two digit

figure that, if exceeded, will cause an audible alarm
to sound. To set a wheel slip limit of 15% carry out the
following procedure.

Release the Menu/Enter key. 115

the menu until the wheel slip symbol (1) is
displayed.

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’1’, move the cursor to the right with the
Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value key,
enter ’5’. The slip alarm point is now set at 15%.
 Depress the Menu/Enter key to memorise the

setting and return to the main menu. Depress the
If wheel slip exceeds the pre--set limit, the slip symbol

will appear in the DMD and the amber warning light
will illuminate on the instrument console.
2--63
Programming the Service Reminder
The service reminder function allows the operator to

programme two service interval reminders using the
Enhanced Keypad. The following procedure is the
same for LIGHT and HEAVY service intervals.


the menu until the service reminder symbol (1) 116
appears in the display.
Setting a Light Service Reminder

Service Reminder sub--menu. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys display ’LIGHT’, touch the
Menu/Enter key and a flashing cursor (1) will
appear at the first number to be set.
 Using the Digit Value key enter the first number

to be set, move the cursor one space to the right
with the Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value
key, enter the second digit, repeat for the third
digit. The display will now read LIGHT ------
(where ------ will be the selected hours). 117
 Touch the Menu/Enter key to memorise the

setting and return to the main menu. Depress the
The service reminder is now set for the selected
period.
Two hours before the service is due the Light Service

symbol and the hours remaining will appear in the
DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for 4
seconds after the engine is started.
2--64
Setting a Heavy Service Reminder
Select HEAVY on the main menu and repeat the

procedure used for setting the LIGHT service
reminder.
Ten hours before the service is due the Heavy

Service symbol and the hours remaining will appear
in the DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for
4 seconds after the engine is started.
118
Time Expiry Warnings
As the time to service expires, the relevant symbol

will appear hourly in the display for 20 seconds. The
number of hours remaining before the service will
also be shown and this will be accompanied by the
Amber warning light. When time to service has
expired, only the symbol will appear hourly in the
display.
If required, the service time count--down may be

terminated by re--setting the Service Reminder
interval to zero or by changing the period until the
next service is due.
2--65
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(with Colour Display)

changes touch X.
Productivity Screen
The productivity screen displays work rates, timer

count--down and distance travelled.
. Performance
A number of different screens are available in the

performance folder, the main ones are as follows.
Details of other screens can be found in the Colour
Display Operator’s Manual.
. Prod
1. Work rate. The area per hour figure is displayed

here, depending on the measurement unit set in
Operator Setup, the reading will be in hectares or
acres per hour.
. work rate bar graph to enter or change the

work rate value. Set the target rate using the
pop--up menu. As work commences the bar
graph will fill to provide a visual display of the
actual rate per hour against the target set by the
red line.
Work rate will start recording when the tractor 119
moves and the implement is lowered. It will stop
when the implement is raised.
2. Area worked. This figure shows the

accumulative figure for the area worked during
the current operation.
. area worked bar graph to enter or change

the area value. Set the total area figure using the
pop--up menu. As work commences the bar
graph will fill to provide a visual display of the
accumulated area against the target set by the
red line.
Area accumulation will start recording when the
tractor moves and the implement is lowered. It
will stop when the implement is raised.
2--66
3. Time remaining. The count--down timer

displays the remaining time left to complete the
task. This figure is automatically calculated from
the area remaining, tractor speed and implement
width.
4. Distance.
Total distance travelled will start recording as
soon as the tractor starts to move.
5. Dist. in work.
Distance travelled in work, will start recording
when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop when the implement is 120
raised.
6. . Reset to clear both Dist. in work and

Distance figures.
Instant Performance Screen
. Instant
The Performance inst. display provides the current

operating figures for:
 Current work rate in ha/h (ac/h).

 Engine speed (r.p.m.).
 P.T.O. and hydraulic load (%).

 Current engine load (%).
 Fuel economy in Km/L (mi/gal).
 Fuel rate. Current fuel consumption in L/h 121
(gal/h).
 Fuel economy in L/ha (ac/gal).
 Fuel economy per kWh/L (kWh/gal).
 Current wheel slip (%).
2--67
Fuel Range
. Range
Displays figures for Distance, Time and Area left

before the tractor has to be re--fuelled. Figures are
based on current tractor performance settings and
fuel remaining in the tank.
122
Run Screens
. Run
A number of Run screens are available to the

operator in which tractor operating information can
be displayed.
Each screen can be constructed by the operator in

respect to the number of information displays, and
their content.
123
2--68
. Toolbox
. YB to access Layout screen.
. Layout
With the Run Layout screen displayed, the operator

can recall, edit and consruct new screens. In the
upper part of the screen there are three basic setup
displays, Current Layout, Run Screen and Number
of Windows.
1. . Current Layout 124
Select, edit or create a new name for a run screen by

using the pop--up menu.
2. . Run Screen
Select the number of the screen to be displayed.
3. . Number of Windows
Select the number of ’windows’ to be displayed in the

run screen. This can vary from 1 column x 4
’windows’ to 2 columns x 6 ’windows’.
. Information Window
A pop--up menu providing a large selection of

headings can be accessed by touching the relevant
’window’. Touch the appropriate heading and it will be
transferred to the display ’window’.
2--69
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor, located in front of
the right-hand footsteps, emits a low intensity
microwave signal which is completely safe in normal
use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look
directly into the face of the sensor while in operation
so as to avoid eye damage.
Setting the Implement Width
Selecting the implement setup screen allows the

operator to identify the implement type and operating
width, record the current working/ground conditions
and the width of the swath.
NOTE: The figures will be displayed will be in the unit

of measurement as selected in the Operator Setup
screen, consult your Intelliview Operator’s Manual.
. Toolbox
. YB to access Impl screen.
. Impl
1. . Operation to access a pop--up in order to

select a reference for the current operation from
a pre--installed list or to create a new description.
2. . Task to access a pop--up in order to select,

edit or create a task description. This can be
number or text based.
3. . Impl. width to set the width of the current

125
implement attached to the tractor. The pop--up
screen allows the operator to select a previously
stored figure, edit the current one or create a new
figure.
4. . Impl. offset allows the operator to enter the

offset between the tractor and implement centre
lines. For use where the implement operates in
an offset position to the tractor.
2--70
5. . Implement to specify implement type. A

pop--up menu allows the operator to select a
stored implement type, edit the description or
create a new implement type.
6. . Work Condition box to enter current

operating conditions. A pop--up menu permits
the operator to select a previously stored
condition, edit a current description or create a
new work condition.
7. . Swath width to set the width of the swath

for baler, forager or similar implement. Use the
pop--up screen to select a previously stored 126
figure, edit the current one or create a new figure.
8. . Max steer ang to enter details of the front

axle steering angle.
Setting the Slip Alarm Point
. Work condition
. Settings
. Settings
. Implement. Use the pop--up screen to select,

change or add a new implement category.
. Work condition. Use the pop--up screen to

select, change or add a new category of work 127
condition.
1. Percentage slip figure, this will change as wheel

slip increases and decreases.
2. Same as (1) above but in bar graph format.
3. . to set wheel slip alarm threshold. This figure

will remain constant indicating the setting made.
2--71
Programming a Service Reminder

changes touch X.
The service reminder function allows the operator to

monitor and programme service interval reminders.
. Toolbox
Touch YB to access Service screen.
. Service
1. Total engine hours.
2. Total transmission (driving) hours.
3. Operational hours accrued since counter last

reset.
4. Time duration and content of Service Interval. 128

. 10 h to access details of 10 hour service
requirements. Touch YB to toggle through list
of service items, touch Ok to return to main
service screen.
5. Set the service period.

. YB to select a service hours display or
disable service reminder (Off). Touch hour figure
to change time interval. Select Service done to
reset counter and update maintenance history.
Touch Off to disable service reminder function.
NOTE: Service Off cannot be selected for the 1200

hour service interval.
6. . YB to scroll through all service intervals.
2--72
ALARM FUNCTIONS
The illumination of a warning light may be

accompanied by an audible alarm. Depending on the
severity of the malfunction, one of the following
alarms may be heard.
Critical Alarm
A continuous pulse alarm accompanied by the red

warning light (1). The tractor must be stopped
immeadiately. The alarm will sound until the fault is
corrected or the engine switched off.
Non Critical Alarm
A 4 second pulsating alarm will be accompanied by

the amber warning light (2). A failure or error has
occurred but the operator may continue work. The
fault should be rectified as soon as possible.
129
Action Required
A two pulse alarm will sound for one second to advise

the operator that a certain action is required. The
alarm will continue to be present until the operator
carries out the appropriate action or the tractor
engine is switched off.
Safety and General Alarms
A continuous alarm will sound if the operator

attempts to carry out an inappropriate action i.e.
driving the tractor with the parking brake applied.
Parking Lights
A pulse alarm will sound for a short period if the

engine is switched off and the parking lights are left
on.
Status ’Beep’
A ’beep’ will sound each time a key is depressed on

the keypad. This sound may be disabled if required,
see page 2--60.
2--73
ERROR CODES AND WARNINGS
The advanced electronics on your tractor are able to

detect a malfunction or error occurring in key areas
such as engine, transmission, electrical and
hydraulic systems. Should a malfunction or error
occur, the relevant symbol and error code will appear
in the Dot Matrix Display.
NOTE: See page 2--77 to 2--84 for an explanation of

warning and advisory symbols.
This may be accompanied by the illumination of a

warning light and an audible alarm depending on the 130
severity of the fault. Consult your authorised dealer.
Active and Non Active Warnings
In addition to the error codes previously described,

there are a number of other warning symbols that
may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. These
symbols will be accompanied by either a Red
(critical) or Amber (non--critical) warning light.
Critical symbols appearing with a Red warning light

will remain permanently displayed until the tractor is
stopped and the fault rectified.
Depending on the severity of the fault, non critical

symbols accompanied by the Amber light will be
displayed for five seconds before the DMD defaults
to the symbol previously shown. The amber warning
light will continue to illuminate. However, if the fault
is of a simple nature then the Amber light may go out
when the fault code disappears from the display.
For more severe faults the Amber warning light may

remain illuminated until the fault is rectified.
Use the Enhanced Keypad to recall active warnings

that are not permanently displayed.
2--74
Accessing Stored Error Codes

(with Keypad)

the DMD but this will change to the active Clock
 By momentarily depressing the Menu/Enter key

again, the active symbol will be replaced with a
symbol corresponding to the fault detected.
 If more than one non--active symbol has been

stored, the display will cycle through each one in 131
turn.
 After the fault symbols have been displayed, the
screen will default back to the active warning
symbol.
Depress the Exit/Cancel key to exit and return to the

original display.
132
Accessing Stored Error Codes

(with Colour Display)
. Diagnostic
. Fault
. Display
From the pop--up menu touch Select List to view

stored error codes.
Touch Erase all to clear the memory. 133
If the list of error codes does not view correctly, touch

Refresh List to reformat.
Touch X to exit the fault code pop--up menu.
2--75
WARNING AND ADVISORY SYMBOLS
There are a number of warning/advisory symbols

that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. The
symbols can be categorised into four main groups.
1. Warning. These symbols advise of a fault that is

critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop the
tractor as soon as possible, investigate the
cause and rectify the fault.
2. Maintenance. These symbols tell the operator

there is a concern relating to the basic functions
of the tractor, ie. water contamination in the fuel,
alternator not charging etc.
134
3. System Fault. The system fault symbols relate
to an operational fault in one or more of the
tractors main components, either electrical or
mechanical. May be accompanied by a four or
five digit fault code. Consult your authorised
dealer.
4. Advisory. The advisory symbols are not

detrimental to the operation of the tractor but
should not be ignored. Take appropriate action
where necessary.
135
2--76
ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
DMD PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

LAMP LAMP
Amber Handbrake applied with

Safety Release handbrake.
flashing vehicle moving.
Operator leaves seat

Amber
Safety without Apply handbrake.
flashing
applying handbrake.
Handbrake not released

Action
-- during Release handbrake.
required
auto take--off.
Handbrake not applied

-- -- Safety Apply handbrake.
at key OFF
Action Drive engaged without

-- -- Cycle clutch pedal.
required depressing clutch pedal.
Action Place shuttle lever

-- -- Shuttle lever in drive.
required in neutral.
Action Transmission park lock

-- -- Engage park lock.
required not engaged.
Action Transmission park lock

-- -- Disengage park lock.
required engaged.
Action Transmission oil Run tractor until oil

-- --
required temperature too low. temperature increases.
Action Key ON, engine not Turn key OFF or start

-- --
required running. engine.
-- -- General Indicators not cancelled. Cancel indicators.
Parking Parking lights ON at

-- -- Turn parking lights OFF.
lights key--off.
Rear Power Take--Off

Amber If accompanied by critical
-- Safety engaged, operator not
flashing alarm apply parking brake.
present.
Front Power Take--Off

Amber If accompanied by critical
-- Safety engaged operator not
flashing alarm apply parking brake.
present.
2--77
ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION (continued)

LAMP LAMP
Amber Incorrect use of PTO Do not engage PTO until

-- Non critical
flashing control -- Timed Out. DMD symbol clears.
Amber Engine speed too low to Increase engine speed and

-- Non critical
flashing allow PTO engagement. re--engage PTO drive.
Amber
Reduce tractor or
-- flashing/ Non critical Wheel slip limit exceeded.
implement draft load.
continuous
Instrument display Adjust backlighting to

-- -- None
backlighting. required level.
Front remote valve Reduce oil flow

Amber not functioning due to requirements to other
-- flashing/ Non critical insufficient oil flow. services.
continuous Lever or joystick not in Move lever or joystick
neutral at key--on. control to neutral.
Rear remote valve Reduce oil flow
Amber not functioning due to requirements to other
-- flashing/ Non critical insufficient oil flow. services.
continuous Lever or joystick not in Move lever or joystick
neutral at key--on. control to neutral.
2--78
WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DMD
LAMP LAMP
Red Transmission oil

-- Critical
flashing pressure low.
Amber These symbols advise of a

Transmission oil fault that is critical to the
-- flashing/ --
temperature too high. operation of the tractor.
continuous
Red Engine coolant Stop the tractor as soon as

-- Critical possible, investigate the
flashing temperature too high.
Red Engine oil pressure If the fault cannot be easily

Critical rectified, consult your
flashing too low.
authorised dealer.
Red Power steering oil

-- Critical
flashing pressure too low.
Red Hydraulic pump charge

-- Non critical
flashing pressure too low.
Amber These symbols advise of

-- Non critical Network malfunction. a fault that may be critical
flashing
to the operation of the
tractor.
Amber
Non critical Air brake pressure low.
flashing Stop the tractor as soon as
possible, investigate the
Amber cause and rectify the fault.
-- flashing/ -- Battery voltage too high.
continuous If the fault cannot be easily
rectified, consult your
authorised dealer.
Amber
-- Non critical Battery voltage too low.
flashing
Red Brake boost pressure

-- Non critical
flashing too low.
2--79
WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION - WITH ENGINE SHUTDOWN ACTIVATED

LAMP LAMP
Red Engine oil pressure

Critical
flashing too low.
Red Transmission oil These symbols advise

-- Critical of a fault that is critical
flashing pressure low.
to the operation of the
tractor.
Red Transmission oil Automatic engine
-- Critical
flashing temperature too high. shutdown will be
activated and the engine
will STOP.
Red Engine coolant
-- Critical Investigate the cause
flashing temperature too high.
and rectify the fault.
If the fault cannot be

Red Engine control system easily rectified, consult
-- Critical
flashing malfunction. your authorised dealer.
Red Engine ECU control

-- Critical
flashing data compromised.
The Dot Matrix Display will cycle ENGINE STOP symbol with the appropriate warning symbol.
2--80
DEF/AdBlue level faults, failures and engine power loss levels

Visual Indicator Right LCD Audible Description
display light alarm
warning
’C’ flashing 4s pulsating DEF/AdBlue level is less than 10 % of tank
continuously volume, refill DEF/AdBlue and reset the system
by cycling the key switch OFF then ON. No
flashing 4s/
engine power loss.
continuously
’C’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue level is less than 5 % of tank

continuously volume, (0% will be displayed), refill
DEF/AdBlue immediately and reset the system
flashing by cycling the key switch OFF then ON.
Up to 65% torque reduction and 40% engine
speed reduction within 40 min of engine running
time.
’C’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue level has been empty for 60 min,
continuously refill DEF/AdBlueimmediately and reset the
system by cycling the key switch OFF then ON.
flashing Up to 80% torque reduction and 40% rated
engine speed within 30 min of engine running
time.
’C’ flashing pulsating Emergency re--start is active
continuously No engine power loss. Engine will shutdown after
30 s of continued operation. Refill DEF/AdBlue
immediately and reset the system by cycling the
30 flashing
key switch OFF then ON.
DEF/AdBlue quality faults, failures and engine power loss levels
’A’ flashing 4s pulsating DEF/AdBlue quality/concentration is

continuously questionable. Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean
and refill with approved DEF/AdBlue solution.
Contact your local authorised dealer if failure
flashing 4s/ persists.
continuously No engine power loss.
’A’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue quality/concentration is
continuously questionable 60 min after the initial warning.
Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean and refill with
approved DEF/AdBlue solution. Contact your
flashing 4s/
local authorised dealer if failure persists.
continuously Up to 65% torque reduction and 40% engine
speed reduction within 40 min of engine running
time.
’A’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue quality/concentration is
continuously questionable 220 min after the initial warning.
Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean and refill with
flashing
approved DEF/AdBlue solution. Contact your
local authorised dealer if failure persists.
Up to 80% torque reduction within 30 min of
engine running time.
’A’ flashing pulsating Emergency re--start is active.
continuously Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean and refill with
approved DEF/AdBlue solution.
No engine power loss. Engine will shutdown after
30 flashing
30 s of continued operation. Contact your local
authorised dealer if failure persists.
2--81
SCR system technical faults, failures and engine power loss levels
Visual Indicator Right LCD Audible Description
display light alarm
warning
’A’ + ’B’ 4s pulsating SCR fault/failure detected. Up to 25% torque
flashing reduction within 25 min of engine running time.
continuously Contact your local authorised dealer for repair.
flashing 4s/
continuously
’A’ + ’B’ pulsating SCR fault/failure detected 90 min after the initial
flashing warning. Up to 65% torque reduction and 40%
continuously engine speed reduction within 40 min of engine
flashing
running time. Contact your local authorised
dealer for repair.
’A’ + ’B’ pulsating SCR fault/failure detected 240 min after the
flashing initial warning.
continuously Up to 80% torque reduction within 30 min of
flashing engine running time. Contact your local
authorised dealer for repair.
’A’ + ’B’ pulsating Emergency re--start is active.
flashing No engine power loss. Engine will shutdown after
continuously 30 s of continued operation. Contact your local
flashing authorised dealer for repair.
30
SCR system reset symbols and validation re--start counter
Visual Indicator Indicator Audible Description

display light light status alarm
warning
-- -- Engine start required to perform system reset.
Validation re--start counter is enabled. Follow the
x/3 instructions on the machine display.
flashing 4s/
continuously
-- 3s pulsating Exhaust temperature is low.

x/3
Operate the machine for approximately 20 min.
at a minimum of 50% load to check SCR system
flashing 4s/ performance
continuously
-- 3s pulsating SCR system test in progress.

Maintain current operating conditions.
x/3 If all three validation re--starts have been used
and the system has not been reset, the machine
flashing 4s/
continuously
is limited to emergency re--starts only. Contact
your local authorised dealer for repair.
NOTE: x/3 denotes the number of remaining re--start attempts out of 3 possible validation re--starts.
2--82
Resetting the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system
After a failure or warning has been set, the SCR system must perform automatic tests to determine if failures
or warnings have been resolved. The system must perform the following actions in order to recognise the
resolved failures or warnings and reset itself.
 For DEF/Adblue level warnings:

 Key switch must be cycled OFF then ON.
 For poor DEF/Adblue quality warnings:
 Machine must be operated for approximately 20 min at a minimum of 50% load.
 For SCR system warnings, one of the following conditions must occur, depending on the exact cause of the
warning:
 Requires the machine to be operated for approximately 20 min at a minimum of 50% load to operate
the SCR system.
 Requires starting and running the engine, but does not require the SCR system to operate.
 Requires the key switch to be cycled OFF then ON.
Validation re--starts
Validation re--starts allow operation of the machine for up to 30 min without power loss after a poor DEF/Adblue
quality or SCR system fault has been detected . Up to three re--starts are permitted. Re--starts are counted if
either of the following conditions are met:
 Engine speed exceeds 1000 RPM
 Engine running time exceeds 5 min

Normal operation will resume if a reset is detected within the 30 min window.
If a reset is not detected within 30 min, power loss will occur as described in the table above.
If all three validation re--starts have been used and the system has not been reset, the machine is limited to
emergency re--starts only. Contact your local authorised dealer for repair.
Emergency re--start
NOTE: Emergency re--starts are only enabled after the allowable number of validation re--starts have expired.
If full power loss is experienced, it may be impossible for the machine to move under its own power. Emergency
re--starts are available to provide the capability to move the machine.
 Allows 30 s of operation without power loss.
 After 30 s the engine shuts down automatically.
 There is no limit to the number of emergency re--starts.
2--83
MAINTENANCE DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DMD
LAMP LAMP
Amber
flashing/ -- Alternator not charging.
continuous
Amber
Engine intake filter
-- flashing/ --
blocked.
continuous
Amber
Water contamination
-- flashing/ Non critical
in the fuel.
continuous
These symbols advise of
Amber a fault that may be critical
Transmission/Hydraulic
-- flashing/ -- to the operation of the
oil filter blocked.
continuous tractor.
Amber
Stop the tractor as soon as
-- flashing/ -- Vaccum switch blocked.
possible, investigate the
continuous
Amber
Transmission vane pump If the fault cannot be easily
-- flashing/ --
oil filter blocked (CVT). rectified, consult your
continuous
authorised dealer.
Red
Transmission piston pump
-- flashing/ Critical
boost pressure too low
continuous
Amber HEAVY maintenance
-- flashing/ -- schedule due in
continuous ’xx’ hours*.
LIGHT maintenance
-- -- -- schedule due in
’xx’ hours*.
* ’xx’ represents number of hours before next service.
2--84
BRAKE CONTROLS AND OPERATION
Tractor Brake Controls
The operation of the tractor brake controls is very

similar on both Power Command and Auto
Command transmissions. However, where there is a
difference in functionality, this is highlighted in the
specific transmission text.
Handbrake
A conventional handbrake lever is installed to the left

of the driver’s seat.
To apply the handbrake, pull the lever up. A warning

light will illuminate in the instrument panel when the
handbrake is applied. To release, ease the lever up
further, depress the button (1) on the end and lower
the lever fully.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the handbrake is fully

released before driving off.
136
Electronic Park Brake
In addition to the handbrake, the transmission on

your tractor may be fitted with an electronically
operated park brake (EPB). This is engaged using
the shuttle lever.
EPB will automatically engage at key--off irrespective

of the shuttle lever position or if the operator leaves
the seat . It will also be applied if the tractor has been
stationary for more than 45 seconds.
From the rest position (3), move the shuttle lever

downward against spring pressure and forward to 137
the park brake position (5).
Moving the shuttle lever to the electyronic park brake

position while the tractor is in motion will cause the
transmission to slow the tractor to a stop and then the
brake will be applied.
2--85
When the electronic park brake is engaged, ’P’ will

appear in the transmission display to confirm
engagement.
To disengage the brake, move the shuttle lever from

position (5) to the drive position. The symbol in the
display will disappear, the park brake will release and
drive will be engaged.
EPB can also be released by moving the shuttle lever

to the drive position with the clutch pedal depressed.
The symbol in the display will disappear and the park
brake will disengage. The tractor will drive when the
clutch pedal is released. 138
Alternatively, EPB may be released without selecting

drive by moving the shuttle lever to the rest position
(3) and simultaneously depressing the neutral button
and brake pedals. Before carrying out this
procedure, the handbrake MUST be applied as the
tractor may inadvertently move.
The park brake is automatically engaged in the

following situation.
 At engine stop (key--off).
 The operator leaves the seat for more than five
seconds.
 Tractor is stationary for more than 45 seconds.
To disengage the brake, sit in the seat, depress the

clutch pedal and move the shuttle lever into forward
or reverse drive.
2--86
Manual Release of the Electronic Park Brake
In the unlikely event that EPB cannot be disengaged

using the shuttle lever, it is possible to release the
brake manually. Before releasing the brake, apply
the handbrake and chock the rear wheels to prevent
unexpected tractor movement.
The park brake unit is located at the rear of the tractor

on the left--hand side of the cab. Access to the motor
drive can be gained through a hole in the bottom of
the guard.
NOTE: For clarity, the illustration shows the park 139

brake assembly with the cover removed.
Remove the rubber plug (1) from the end of the motor
drive and insert the special tool (2) upwards through
the guard until it connects with the motor drive shaft.
It may be necessary to rotate the tool slowly until it
is felt to engage with the motor drive.
NOTE: The release tool is attached to the handbrake

cover in the cab.
Rotate the tool clockwise until the park brake is

released. When it has been released, remove the
tool and re--attach to the handbrake cover. Replace
the rubber plug in the motor drive.
140
NOTE: After the park brake has been manually
released, tractor speed will be restricted to 2 Km/h
(1.2 MPH) until the fault is rectified and the park
brake has been re--programmed.
Re--Programme Electronic Park Brake

Operation
In the event EPB has to be mechanically released,

or if there has been a failure of the power supply to
the lock, operation of the park brake will need to be
re--configured.
Should a fault occur, the brake engaged symbol will

appear in transmission display, this will be
accompanied by the park brake and amber warning
lights flashing.
141
2--87
With the vehicle stationary, ensure the handbrake

lever is released then depress and hold the
footbrakes.
With the footbrakes applied, depress the neutral

button and move the shuttle lever to the engaged
position (5). The park brake symbol will appear in the
display to confirm engagement. Once the EPB is fully
engaged, normal operation will be reinstated.
If the fault does not clear, consult your authorised

dealer.
NOTE: In an emergency, the tractor may be driven 142

a short distance with the park brake engaged,
however the speed will be limited to a maximum of
2 Km/h (1.2 MPH).
Electronic Park Brake (EPB) -- Auto Apply Inhibit
Where it is necessary to leave the tractor in neutral

and temporarily prevent the self--engagement of
EPB or Park Lock (with engine running or for key--off)
with the operator out of the driver’s seat, this can be
achieved by carrying out the following procedures:
NOTICE: The following procedures are independent

of each other and must be selected individually.
1. EPB Auto Apply Inhibit -- Engine Off.
This allows the tractor to be maneuvered with engine

shut off and EPL temporarily released.
1. With the Key start in the ON position and EPB

released.
2. Press and hold the shuttle lever fully down (to
position 4) and depress the brake pedals for
more than 3 seconds.
143
2--88
3. The EPB inhibit symbol will be displayed and

park brake warning lamp will be displayed.
4. Key--off whilst holding shuttle lever and brake
pedals down. The EPB will not be applied.
5. If the tractor is keyed on again, standard
operation will be returned.
NOTICE: This procedure will not release the EPB
if already applied.
144
2. EPB Auto Apply Inhibit -- Engine Running.
With the engine running and the EPB released:
1. Press and hold the shuttle lever fully down (to

position 4) and depress the brake pedals for
2. The EPB inhibit symbol will be displayed and
park brake warning lamp will be displayed.
3. Release the shuttle lever to position 3 and
release the brake pedals.
The operator can now leave the seat. The EPB will
145
not be applied.
The instrument display will cycle between the
standard display information and the EPB inhibit icon
every 5 seconds.
If the key switch is turned OFF and ON standard

operation will be returned.
If the shuttle lever is shifted to park, forward or

reverse, standard operation will be returned. Driver
must be in the seat and cycle the clutch pedal to
engage drive.
NOTICE: This procedure will not release the EPB

if already applied.
146
2--89
Exhaust Brake (where fitted)
NOTE: The exhaust brake is an option on tractors

fitted with air braking systems only.
The exhaust brake is generally used in road transport

operations to gradually slow the tractor without using
the footbrakes. It is especially useful to reduce or
maintain a controlled speed when descending a long
hill with a heavy trailer or implement attached to the
tractor drawbar.
IMPORTANT: When using the exhaust brake to

control tractor speed do not allow the engine speed 147
to exceed 2400 r.p.m. Apply the footbrakes to slow
the tractor or, where appropriate, change to another
gear.
An exhaust brake works by restricting the flow of

gasses from the engine through the exhaust system.
When the exhaust brake pedal (1), is depressed, a
valve in the outlet from the exhaust manifold closes
and the resulting back pressure in the combustion
chamber slows the engine.
When the exhaust brake is activated the fuel system

is electronically shut down and the engine throttle
controls become inoperative. If the engine speed
falls below 1200 r.p.m., the exhaust brake is
electronically released and normal engine
performance is re--instated.
2--90
Footbrakes
The brakes on your tractor are power assisted and

actuated by the two foot pedals (1) and (2). When
operating in the field they may be unlocked and
operated independently, to aid turning in confined
spaces.
When independent braking is not required, ensure

both pedals are locked together to provide normal
braking.
WARNING
On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle 148
can be programmed to automatically engage at
speeds between 1 k/mh (0.62 MPH) and 8.5 Km/h (4
MPH) to provide four wheel braking when the brakes
are applied. Consult your authorised dealer.
Owners should be aware of the effectiveness of four
wheel braking which greatly enhances braking
performance. Appropriate care should be exercised
during heavy braking.
IMPORTANT: Hydraulic and air applied trailer

brakes will only operate when both brake pedals are
applied.
WARNING
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals
together when travelling at transport speeds or if a
hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor.
To lock the pedals together, engage the locking pin
in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1), over the left
pedal support to lock, as shown in Figure 148.
149
2--91
Clutch and Throttle Operation
Clutch/Inching Pedal
A clutch pedal (1) is provided but is not required for

gear changes or forward/reverse shuttle operations.
The clutch pedal is required only for positioning the

tractor to attach equipment or if operating in confined
spaces where the low ratios do not provide a slow
enough speed to give precise control.
NOTE: The clutch pedal incorporates a safety start

device and must be depressed when starting the
tractor engine.
150
IMPORTANT: To avoid premature wear, do not use
the clutch pedal as a footrest.
Foot Throttle
The foot throttle (1) may be used independently of

the hand throttle to control the speed of the engine.
It is recommended that you use the foot throttle when
driving on the highway.
NOTE: When the foot throttle is released, engine

speed will reduce to the level set by the hand throttle.
151
Hand Throttle
The hand throttle (1) may be used independently of

the foot throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
Move the throttle lever forward to increase engine
speed.
IMPORTANT: Always return the hand throttle to the

idle position when using the foot throttle for road
transport applications.
152
2--92
Transmission Operation
Power Command is an electronically controlled full

powershift transmission of an advanced design that
offers many automated functions for easier
operation.
IMPORTANT: In cold conditions where the

temperature of the transmission oil falls below 10C
(50F), upshifts may be restriced to the lower gears
until the transmission oil temperature is sufficienly
wamed for full operation. See page 3--5.
Subject to legal requirements in your country, the

following transmissions are available
50 Km/h (31.0 MPH) transmission.
19 forward and 6 reverse ratios
plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range
IMPORTANT: When travelling at high road speeds

with trailed or semi--mounted equipment attached to
the tractor, ensure the equipment is rated for 50 Km/h
operation in respect to its construction, brakes and
tyres.
40 Km/h (24.8 MPH) Economy transmission
plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range.
40 Km/h (24.8 MPH) transmission

35 Km/h (21.7 MPH) transmission

Details of creeper gear operation will be found on

page 2--108.
IMPORTANT: A tractor fitted with Power Command

transmission cannot be tow--started and must not be
towed other than to remove it from a field or onto a
trailer or truck. When towing the tractor, the speed
should not exceed 5k/mh (3.1 MPH) with the engine
switched off, or 10 k/mh (6.2 MPH) with the engine
running.
2--93
Powershift Control
Transmission shifts are selected by means of two

buttons the powershift control, the upshift button (2),
and downshift button (3). Changes can be made on
the move, under full power even when performing
heavy draft operations such as ploughing, etc.
Depress/hold the shift buttons to ramp up or down
through the gears.
A conveniently located shuttle switch (1) on the

powershift control can be used to select forward or
reverse drive.
Depress the top of the switch for forward drive or the

bottom of the switch for reverse drive. It is not
necessary to depress the clutch pedal when using 153
the switch.
NOTE: Initial drive direction must always be selected
using the shuttle lever. Subsequent direction
changes may be made using the switch on the
powershift control.
2--94
Shuttle Lever
To select the direction of travel, lift the shuttle lever

towards the steering wheel and move it to the forward
(1) or reverse position (2). Symbols in the
transmission display will confirm the direction of
travel selected.
If the optional electronic park brake (EPB) is fitted,

move the lever from position (5) and select drive
direction. On tractors not equipped with the optional
electronic park brake, the shuttle lever will not have
this position.
IMPORTANT: When moving the shuttle lever from

park to the drive position, the transmission will be in 154
neutral. Ensure the handbrake is applied or depress
the foot brakes before moving the shuttle lever.
NOTE: It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal

when operating the shuttle lever.
On releasing the shuttle lever, it will return to the rest

position (3) Figure 155. This is NOT the neutral
position. To select neutral, depress the button (1)
Figure 154 on the end of the lever. When neutral is
selected ’N’ will appear in the transmission display.
Where EPB is fitted, the shuttle lever is also used to

apply the park brake, position (5). See page 2--85.
NOTE: On tractors equipped with the optional

electronic park brake, ’P’ will be shown in the display
in place of ’N’.
To select forward or reverse drive from stationary the

operator must be in the tractor seat. If the shuttle
lever is moved from the mid position without the
operator in the seat, drive will not engage.
To re--engage drive, the operator must be in the seat

with neutral selected, then depress and release the 155
clutch pedal.
The shuttle lever can be operated when the tractor

is on the move without the driver being seated,
irrespective of speed.
2--95
WARNING
To prevent inadvertent tractor movement, always
place the shuttle lever in the rest position and
depress the neutral button. Firmly apply the
handbrake or, where fitted, engage the electronic
park brake. Switch off the engine before leaving the
tractor. The Power Command transmission will not
prevent the tractor from rolling when the engine is
shut off.
NOTE: If the shuttle lever is moved into the drive

position and the operator attempts to drive off with
the handbrake applied, a warning will appear in the
transmission display and an audible alarm will be
heard.
156
2--96
Transmission Display
The transmission display provides information on

transmission functions including tractor direction,
creeper speeds, auto functions, and the current gear
selected.
1. Currently selected gear marker (black).
2. Target gear marker (blue, flashing).
3. Currently selected gear (figure in bold).
4. Selected tractor direction.
5. Reverse gear (figure in light blue).
157
6. Auto Mode display. Where a transmission auto

function is engaged, the number of auto gears
available are indicated by the bracket on the left
of the marker display.
7. With Auto Transport engaged a trailer symbol will

appear in the display, in Auto Field this will be
replaced by a plough symbol.
158
2--97
Driving the Tractor
Before starting the engine, depress and hold the

clutch pedal, ensure the handbrake is applied and
the shuttle lever is in the neutral position. ’N’ will be
shown in the transmission display. Where the
optional electronic park brake is fitted, ’P’ will be
displayed.
With the engine idling, select forward travel by pulling

the shuttle lever toward the steering wheel, against
light spring-pressure, and move it up. The figure for
the start--off gear will shown in the transmission
display. 159
NOTE: When the tractor is initially started and the

shuttle lever moved into forward drive (1), the
transmission automatically selects 7th as the default
gear or, where programmed, the start--off gear.
The neutral symbol ’N’ will be replaced by a tractor

symbol with an arrow showing that forward drive has
been engaged. If reverse is selected the arrow will
appear behind the tractor. Each time a different
direction is selected, the arrow will confirm this
change.
On release, the shuttle lever will return to the rest

position (3). 160
NOTE: On tractors without electronic park brake,

shuttle lever positions (4) and (5) are not available.
Once moving, select the required gear using the

upshift button, as previously described. An example
of a gear display is shown in Figure 161 where the
tractor and arrow symbols indicate forward and ‘12’
indicates that 12th. gear is selected. The target gear
is 15th as indicated by the flashing marker.
The markers for gears 13 and 14 will change to black

as the transmission upshifts to 15th. At this point the
flashing blue marker will be replaced by a black
marker.
NOTE: The figure for the current gear/direction

selected will always appear in bold. 161
2--98
An alternative lower or higher gear may be

preselected before pulling away. However, if a gear
higher than 14th is selected then the transmission
ECU (electronic control unit) will select 12th, this
being the highest gear permissible when pulling
away from a standstill.
NOTE: In very cold conditions it may be necessary

to allow the transmission oil to warm up before
attempting to shift into the higher gears. Should this
occur, a ’snowflake’ warning symbol will appear in the
transmission display Figure 162. When the symbol
disappears from the display the transmission will
function normally. See page 2--77 for details.
162
To reverse the direction of travel, reduce engine

speed, pull the shuttle lever up towards the steering
wheel, then move it down. Alternatively, the shuttle
switch on the powershift lever can be used to change
direction.
NOTE: When changing from forward to reverse

travel, the nearest available ratio will be selected. As
there are six ratios available in reverse, the ground
speed in reverse gear may be different to the speed
in the selected forward gear.
When performing shuttle operations in a high gear,

for example with 15th. selected, moving the shuttle 163
lever to the reverse position, will cause the
transmission to select the highest available ratio in
reverse which is 6th. gear.
When the shuttle lever is moved forward again 12th.

gear will be selected.
2--99
Auto Shift Function
Engaging Auto shift permits automatic gear

changing in the forward ratios. Two auto shift ranges
are available:
Auto Transport (1) --

1 -- 18 (35 Km/h (21.7 MPH) transmission)
1 -- 18 (40 Km/h (24.8 MPH)transmission)
or, 1 -- 19 (50 Km/h (31.0 MPH) and
40Km/h (24.8 MPH) economy
transmissions)
Auto Field (2) --
a range of five gears may be selected between
ratios 1 and 14. This range of gears may be
expanded if required, see page 2--103. 164
Auto Shifting in Auto Transport
While travelling forward in any gear between 1st and

14th, press and release the Auto button twice (1)
Figure 164, this will provide Auto shifting from 1st
gear upwards. If the button is pressed once the
transmission will select Auto Field. When travelling
forward in 15th gear or higher, press Auto button
once to select “Auto Transport Shifting”. This will
provide Auto Shifting from 1st gear upwards.
Where required, the range of Auto shift gears can be

programmed to provide a higher Start Off Gear
(SOG) than the default gear (1st). Any gear between
1 and 12 can be selected as the Start Off Gear. To set 165
the SOG, proceed as follows.
. Work condition
. Driveline
Touch the Auto Trans. Lower Gear display (1), a

pop--up menu will appear listing the alternate SOG
gears. Select the new SOG by touching the
appropriate figure. The setting will be automatically
saved and the display will return to the Driveline
screen.
. Back to return to the main screen.
166
2--100
NOTE: If the Start Off Gear(SOG) is higher than 1st,

then the higher gear must be selected before Auto
Transport can be engaged.
Once selected, the transmission will make automatic

shifts, up and down from either the current gear or
the Start Off Gear(SOG) whichever is the minimum
to the highest gear, as dictated by engine torque,
speed, and the use of brakes and foot throttle.
NOTE: Where a situation demands, i.e moving off on

a steep hill with a fully loaded trailer, a lower start off
gear than the one programmed may be required. In
this instance, the tractor will move off in the SOG but
will quickly downshift to a lower gear for acceleration.
Once moving, the tractor will upshift again. This will
not affect the SOG setting.
If the tractor is brought to a halt by depressing the

clutch pedal with a gear below the SOG currently
engaged, then the tractor will move off in the same
gear when the clutch pedal is released. As the speed
increases the transmission will automatically upshift
and the SOG setting will not be affected.
The driver can, if required, use the upshift button to

manually select a higher gear to move off i.e. on a
downhill slope.
During road transport operations, it is possible to

override the auto function and manually select a
lower gear by depressing the downshift control.
To disengage the Auto shift function and return to

manual shifting, press and release the Auto button
(1).
Auto Transport goes into stand--by mode if reverse

direction is selected. Auto Transport is resumed
when forward is selected again.
167
2--101
Auto Shifting in Auto Field
While operating in any forward gear between 1 and

14, press and release the Auto button (1).
Dependent on load and speed, the transmission will
now make automatic shifts within a span of five
gears.
However, if the tractor is travelling in a high gear, then

the number of the upper gears may be restricted as
14th is the highest possible gear in Auto Field.
The gear currently selected will already be shown in

the transmission display. When Auto Field is 168
engaged a plough symbol will appear in the
transmission display along with the upper and lower
auto range gears.
Example 1: While operating in 6th. gear, depress the

Auto button (1), the marker bracket will indicate a
gear span of 5 gears, 4 to 8, as being the auto field
range. Automatic shifts can now be made between
gears 4 and 8.
Example 2: With 13th gear selected and displayed,

press the Auto button. The figures for gears 11 and
14 will appear indicating the transmission will make
automatic shifts between 11th and 14th gears.
169
Auto Shifting and ’Go To’ modes
If the transmission is already in ’Go To’ mode (see

page 2--105) when the Auto Field function is selected,
the lowest ’Go To’ gear will become the lowest gear
of the Auto span unless the current operating gear
is lower.
If the currently selected gear is lower, then it will

become the lowest ’Go To’ gear. With both Auto Field
and ’Go To’ modes selected, the lowest limit gear for
both functions will always be the same.
2--102
Changing the Gear Span
The range of five Auto Field gears may be expanded

both up and down on the move, using the shift
buttons (1) and (2).
Example 1:
Raising the Auto range upper gear limit:
While operating in the 5th to 9th gear range as
previously described, upshift to 9th gear. On
reaching 9th gear press the upshift button (1) once
to select 10th gear. When the tractor has upshifted
to 10th, press the button again to select 11th gear.
Auto shifting is now provided between 5th and 11th 170
gears. The figure 5 will continue to display identifying
this as the lowest gear currently available in Auto
Field.
Example 2:
Reducing the Auto range lower gear :
Assuming 5th has been selected as the lowest Auto
gear, slow the tractor until 5th gear has been
engaged. Then, using the downshift button (2),
select 4th gear and further reduce speed until 4th
gear engages. 3rd gear may now be selected if
required. Applying this technique it is possible to
select gears 1 to 14 as auto gears in Auto Field.
Reducing the number of Auto gears
If necessary, the number of gears available in Auto

Field may be reduced by using the upshift and
downshift buttons in the following way.
Example 1:
Reducing the upper Auto gear limit:
If the upper gear limit is set as 9th in the display, use
the downshift control (2) Figure 170, to slow the
tractor until the desired upper auto gear is engaged.
This now becomes the new upper limit auto gear as
confirmed in the Auto display.
171
Example 2: Raising the lower Auto gear limit:
With the tractor stopped and the engine running,
depress the Auto button (1). Momentarily depress
the upshift button (1) Figure 170, to raise the lower
auto gear limit. When the desired gear is selected
release the upshift, this now becomes the new lower
auto gear.
2--103
Standby mode
Auto Field and Auto Transport will be put into the

standby mode when:
 The 3 point hitch is raised.
 The clutch pedal is depressed.
 Shuttle lever is moved from the forward drive
position
While in the standby mode the upper and lower auto
gear figures will flash, this will not affect the
established shift parameters which will remain in the
Auto function memory.
To exit the programme
The Auto Field and Auto transport functions may be

exited in two ways:
1. Momentarily depress the Auto button while in
Auto Field or Auto Transport mode.
2. Engage creeper gears.
172
2--104
Go To Mode
An additional feature on your tractor is the ‘Go To’

mode. The ’Go To’ system can be programmed to
downshift to a lower gear below that of the working
gear whenever the implement is raised. This feature
can be further enhanced by selecting the Auto Field
function whereby the tractor will also automatically
upshift again on lowering the implement.
To programme ’Go To’ mode, proceed as follows.
Start the engine then press and hold the Auto button
(2).
Within one second, press and release the top of the

fast raise switch (1) to raise the implement. Release
the Auto button.
173
The transmission display will show the current auto
gear span.
Select the required ‘Go To’ gear using the upshift or

downshift control.
The figure for the ’Go To’ gear, if different to the

currently engaged gear, will flash in the display,
Press/release the Auto button to save the setting.
To activate ’Go To’ mode, lower the implement by

momentarily depressing the bottom of the switch (1).
When the fast raise switch is now used to raise the
implement the ’Go To’ gear will be engaged.
NOTE: Auto shift in the field range is disengaged

every time the implement is raised and re-engaged
when it is lowered.
174
2--105
To disengage ’Go To’ mode and return to normal

shifting, press and hold the Auto button. Within one
second depress the top of the fast raise switch (1),
to raise the implement.
NOTE: With Auto shift selected in conjunction with

the ’Go To’ mode, the lowest gear in the Auto function
becomes the ’Go To’ gear.
175
Speed Matching
When decelerating in the transport range of gears,

the transmission is able to automatically select a
gear to match engine speed and road speed.
As the tractor slows, depress and release the clutch

pedal. The transmission will automatically select a
lower gear to match engine speed with road speed.
NOTE: Speed Matching will function down to the

Start Off Gear.
If the clutch pedal is depressed and the tractor

stopped, Speed Matching will enter standby mode.
Releasing the clutch pedal will re--engage the Speed
Matching function.
If required, the operator can manually select a

different gear to move off. Providing the chosen gear
is within the auto shift range, Speed Matching will
continue to operate across the full range of gears
from the Start Off Gear to the highest gear.
2--106
Programming Reverse Gear Ratios
When changing from forward to reverse, the

transmission will normally select the same or closest
possible ratio in reverse as was selected for forward
travel.
For applications such as loader work, this

transmission offers the ability to set the reverse gear
up to three ratios higher or lower than the current
forward ratio.
To change the reverse ratio offset, proceed as

follows:
. Work condition
. Driveline
Touch the FWD/REV Gear Offset display (1) a

pop--up menu will appear from which the gear offset
can be selected. Choose the gear offset (+ or --) by
touching the appropriate figure. The setting will be
automatically saved and the display will return to the
Driveline screen.
176
To set the forward/reverse gear offset to standard (no
offset) touch +0.
. Back to return to the main screen.
NOTE: Remember that only six reverse gears are

available. Consequently, if travelling forward in ratio
F13 or above, the transmission will always behave as
if ratio F12 (the highest ratio in the field range) is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios lower in reverse, then
R4 will be selected.
Conversely, if travelling forward in ratios F1--6, the

transmission will always behave as if ratio 7 is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios higher in reverse, then
R3 will be selected.
2--107
CREEPER GEARS
(where fitted)
For operations requiring extra low ground speeds,

creeper gears are available.
With the reduction gears, an additional 10 forward

and 6 reverse creeper gear ratios are provided. The
reduction gear set has the effect of reducing the
ratios within the main transmission to provide very
low operating speeds.
The creeper gears are selected using the following

procedure.
Downshift to 1st gear and, with the engine running,

depress and hold the clutch and brake pedals.
Depress and hold the downshift button until the
transmission shifts to 10th gear in the creeper range.
The symbol for the creeper speeds will appear in the
Release the downshift button and the clutch and

brake pedals. The appropriate creeper speed can
now be selected using the upshift and downshift
buttons. 177
To re--engage the standard gear ratios, upshift to

10th creeper speed and depress/hold the clutch and
brake pedals. Hold down the transmission upshift
button until 1st gear is engaged, the creeper symbol
will disappear from the display.
IMPORTANT: The creeper gears offer very low

ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing
advantage to apply excessive draft loads to the
tractor.
2--108
Transmission Error Codes
In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in the

transmission controls or electronic circuit, a
malfunction symbol and a four-digit error code, will
appear in the dot matrix display. Error codes for the
transmission will start with the figure ’2’.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the

type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. In
this event, the tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become

disabled, contact your authorised dealer and report
the error code displayed. 178
There are a number of ’action required’ error codes

which can also appear in the transmission display,
these are listed below.
Error
Code Action Required
P Parking brake or park lock on, release to
move tractor.
CP Depress clutch pedal to enable
transmission (restore drive).
N Place the shuttle lever in neutral.
Transmission Calibration
Should transmission shifts become slow or jerky, the

clutches in the transmission may require
re--calibrating. Consult your authorised dealer.
2--109
Ground Speed Charts
The ground speed of your tractor may be displayed

on the instrument panel. If your tractor is equipped
with radar then the ground speed displayed will be a
true reading. Tractors without radar will display a
ground speed that is subject to minor inaccuracies
due to the effects of wheel slip, tyre pressures,
change of tyre size, etc. See Calibrating the Ground
Speed, page 2--54.
The charts starting on page 2--111 show the ground

speeds in Km/h and MPH. To find the road speed for
your tractor in any given gear ratio, use the column
with your rear tyre size in the heading.
IMPORTANT: The gear speeds shown in the charts

are approximate and will vary depending on the
make of tyre, pressure and load.
If tyres of a different size are fitted to your tractor,

ensure the Ground Speed Calibration procedure has
been carried out to provide an accurate ground
speed in the instrument panel display.
Calculating P.T.O. Speeds
The gear speeds shown in the ground speed charts

are calculated at a rated engine speed of 2200 r.p.m.
To determine the ground speeds for P.T.O.
operations divide the ground speeds in the chart by
the rated engine speed and multiply by the P.T.O.
engine speed.
For example, to determine the ground speed at 540

rev/min P.T.O. speed in gear F8 (6.4 Km/h) use the
following calculation:
6.4 (Km/h)  2200 (rated speed) x 1950 (P.T.O. erpm)

= 5.67 Km/h (3.52 MPH).
2--110
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h
(18 x 6) Transmissions, Models T7.220, T7.235, T7.250 and T7.260
Gear Ratio Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds
Km/h MPH Km/h MPH Km/h MPH
F1 1.7 1.0 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.1
F2 2.1 1.3 2.2 1.3 2.3 1.4
F3 2.5 1.5 2.6 1.6 2.8 1.7
F4 3.0 1.8 3.2 1.9 3.3 2.0
F5 3.5 2.1 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4
F6 4.3 2.6 4.5 2.7 4.8 2.9
F7 5.1 3.1 5.4 3.3 5.7 3.5
F8 6.1 3.7 6.4 3.9 6.8 4.2
F9 7.3 4.5 7.7 4.7 8.2 5.0
F10 8.7 5.4 9.3 5.7 9.8 6.0
F11 10.4 6.4 11.0 6.8 11.7 7.2
F12 12.4 7.7 13.2 8.2 13.9 8.6
F13 14.7 9.1 15.6 9.6 16.5 10.2
F14 17.6 10.9 18.7 11.6 19.7 12.2
F15 21.2 13.1 22.5 13.9 23.7 14.7
F16 25.3 15.7 26.8 16.6 28.4 17.6
F17 30.1 18.7 31.9 19.8 33.8 21.0
F18 36.0 22.3 38.2 23.7 40.4 25.1
NOTE: Ratio F18 is not available on 30 Km/h transmissions.
Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds

R1 3.9 2.4 4.1 2.5 4.3 2.6
R2 4.6 2.8 4.9 3.0 5.2 3.2
R3 5.6 3.4 5.9 3.6 6.2 3.8
R4 6.6 4.1 7.1 4.4 7.5 4.6
R5 7.9 4.9 8.4 5.2 8.9 5.5
R6 9.5 5.9 10.0 6.2 10.6 6.5
2--111
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears,
Models T7.220, T7.235, T7.250 and T7.260
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
F1 0.29 0.18 0.31 0.19 0.32 0.19
F2 0.35 0.21 0.37 0.22 0.39 0.24
F3 0.42 0.26 0.44 0.27 0.47 0.29
F4 0.50 0.31 0.53 0.32 0.56 0.34
F5 0.60 0.37 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41
F6 0.71 0.44 0.76 0.47 0.80 0.49
F7 0.85 0.52 0.90 0.55 0.95 0.59
F8 1.01 0.62 1.08 0.67 1.14 0.70
F9 1.22 0.75 1.29 0.80 1.37 0.85
F10 1.46 0.90 1.55 0.96 1.64 1.01
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
R1 0.65 0.40 0.69 0.42 0.72 0.44
R2 0.77 0.47 0.82 0.50 0.87 0.54
R3 0.93 0.57 0.99 0.61 1.04 0.64
R4 1.11 0.68 1.18 0.73 1.25 0.77
R5 1.32 0.82 1.40 0.86 1.48 0.91
R6 1.58 0.98 1.68 1.04 1.77 1.09
2--112
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 40 Km/h Economy and
50 Km/h Transmissions (19 x 6), Models T7.220, T7.235, T7.250 and T7.260
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds
F1 1.7 1.0 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.1
F2 2.1 1.3 2.2 1.3 2.3 1.4
F3 2.5 1.5 2.6 1.6 2.8 1.7
F4 3.0 1.8 3.2 1.9 3.3 2.0
F5 3.5 2.1 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4
F6 4.3 2.6 4.5 2.7 4.8 2.9
F7 5.1 3.1 5.4 3.3 5.7 3.5
F8 6.1 3.7 6.4 3.9 6.8 4.2
F9 7.3 4.5 7.7 4.7 8.2 5.0
F10 8.7 5.4 9.3 5.7 9.8 6.0
F11 10.4 6.4 11.0 6.8 11.7 7.2
F12 12.4 7.7 13.2 8.2 13.9 8.6
F13 14.7 9.1 15.6 9.6 16.5 10.2
F14 17.6 10.9 18.7 11.6 19.7 12.2
F15 21.2 13.1 22.5 13.9 23.7 14.7
F16 25.3 15.7 26.8 16.6 28.4 17.6
F17 30.1 18.7 31.9 19.8 33.8 21.0
F18 36.0 22.3 38.2 23.7 40.4 25.1
F19E (A) 42.9 26.6 42.9 26.6 42.9 26.6
F19E (B) 38.2 23.7 40.6 25.2 42.9 26.6
F19 (A) 49.9 31.0 49.9 31.0 49.9 31.0
F19 (B) 44.5 27.6 47.2 29.3 49.9 31.0
NOTE: Ratio F19E (A) maximum speed @ 1870 e.r.p.m. with valid radar signal.
NOTE: Ratio F19 (A) maximum speed @ 2176 e.r.p.m. with valid radar signal.
NOTE: Ratio F19E (B) and F19 (B) maximum speeds without valid radar signal.
Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds

R1 3.9 2.3 4.1 2.4 4.3 2.6
R2 4.6 2.8 4.9 2.9 5.2 3.1
R3 5.6 3.4 5.9 3.6 6.2 3.7
R4 6.6 4.1 7.1 4.3 7.5 4.5
R5 7.9 4.9 8.4 5.2 8.9 5.5
R6 9.5 5.9 10.0 6.2 10.6 6.6
2--113
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears,
Models T7.220, T7.235, T7.250 and T7.260
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
F1 0.29 0.18 0.31 0.19 0.32 0.19
F2 0.35 0.21 0.37 0.22 0.39 0.24
F3 0.42 0.26 0.44 0.27 0.47 0.29
F4 0.50 0.31 0.53 0.32 0.56 0.34
F5 0.60 0.37 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41
F6 0.71 0.44 0.76 0.47 0.80 0.49
F7 0.85 0.52 0.90 0.55 0.95 0.59
F8 1.01 0.62 1.08 0.67 1.14 0.70
F9 1.22 0.75 1.29 0.80 1.37 0.85
F10 1.46 0.90 1.55 0.96 1.64 1.01
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
R1 0.65 0.40 0.69 0.42 0.72 0.44
R2 0.77 0.47 0.82 0.50 0.87 0.54
R3 0.93 0.57 0.99 0.61 1.04 0.64
R4 1.11 0.68 1.18 0.73 1.25 0.77
R5 1.32 0.82 1.40 0.86 1.48 0.91
R6 1.58 0.98 1.68 1.04 1.77 1.09
2--114
Auto Command is an electronically controlled

continuously variable speed transmission. Both auto
and manual transmission modes are possible
allowing the operator to select the most suitable
mode for the task in hand.
The Auto Command transmission does not operate

with fixed ratios but allows the operator to choose a
combination of engine speed and transmission ratio
to maximise the power available or to operate in the
most economical way possible.
With an Auto Command transmission,

groundspeeds are not linked to engine speed i.e. a
specific groundspeed can be achieved at a high or
low engine r.p.m. provided it is within the current
speed range.
IMPORTANT: A tractor fitted with an Auto Command

transmission cannot be tow--started and must not be
towed other than to remove it from a field or onto a
trailer or truck. When towing the tractor, the speed
should not exceed 5k/mh (3.1 MPH) with the engine
switched off, or 10 k/mh (6.2 MPH) with the engine
running.
IMPORTANT: In cold conditions where the

temperature of the transmission oil falls below
specified limits, operation of the Auto Command
transmission is restricted and an automatic warm up
procedure is initiated. See page 3--5.
Footbrake, Clutch and Hand Throttle Controls
Auto Command Footbrake Operation
WARNING
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals
together when travelling at transport speeds or if a
pneumatic or hydraulically braked trailer is attached
to the tractor. To lock the pedals together, engage the
locking pin in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1),
over the left pedal support to lock, as shown.
179
2--115
When applying the footbrakes or electronic park

lock, the transmission ratio is automatically adjusted
to slow wheel speed and reduce the load on the
engine. This aids the braking effect and reduces
wear on the tractor brakes. On release of the brake,
the transmission will revert to normal operation.
Where it is found necessary to operate the tractor

under power and lightly apply the implement brakes
i.e. to prevent a jack--knife situation when crossing a
side slope with heavy trailer attached, depress and
hold shuttle switch and apply the footbrakes. When
travelling forward, depress the top of the switch (1)
or, if travelling rearwards, the bottom of the switch
(2).
IMPORTANT: The footbrakes must be applied within

five seconds of depressing the shuttle switch. If the
footbrakes are released for more than five seconds,
the shuttle switch must be released and depressed
again before re--applying the brakes.
180
Drive will return to normal when the footbrakes or
shuttle switch are released.
Auto Hold Function with Electronic Park Brake
The Auto Command transmission has an auto hold

function which allows the tractor to maintain a
stationary position on a slope without applying the
footbrakes, handbrake or park brake.
The Auto Hold function is activated automatically

and will hold the tractor on a slope for up to 45
seconds after which the electronic park brake will
automatically engage and ’P’ will appear in the
transmission display. To release the park brake move
the shuttle lever to select the required direction of
travel. 181
2--116
Clutch/Inching Pedal
A clutch pedal (1) is provided but is not required for

range changes or forward/reverse shuttle
operations.
The clutch pedal is required only for starting the

engine, positioning the tractor to attach equipment or
to give precise control of tractor speed when
operating in confined spaces.
With Auto Command, depressing the clutch pedal

can be used to assist when braking the tractor in
emergencies as it instantly disconnects power from 182
the wheels.
NOTE: The clutch pedal incorporates a safety start

device and must be depressed when starting the
tractor engine.
IMPORTANT: To avoid premature wear, do not use

the clutch pedal as a footrest.
2--117
Hand Throttle Controls
With Auto Command, two engine speed controls are

provided. The hand throttle (1) is used to set the
engine speed at the desired level. Move the lever
forward to increase engine speed, move it rearwards
to decrease the speed.
The engine droop control (2) is used to set a limit on

the maximum or minimum engine speeds depending
on operation. In normal operating modes the upper
r.p.m. can be limited, in P.T.O. mode the minimum
r.p.m can be set. These can be set to promote good
fuel economy or to keep the engine operating in a 183
specific power/torque band.
If the r.p.m is set is too high, or too low, the engine

may not be able to sustain this speed. When setting
the engine speed limit, the operator should always
take into account additional weight on the tractor
including the implement or attachment, and the
current operating conditions.
In Auto, Cruise and P.T.O. modes, the operation of

both controls can be combined to maintain a specific
speed or power level at which the engine is to be
operated. Either control can be used to set the lowest
engine ’lugging’ r.p.m.
NOTE: Both controls may be used independently of 184

the foot throttle to control engine speed.
IMPORTANT: It is always advisable to return the

hand throttle to the idle/off position when using the
foot throttle for road transport applications.
If the load on the tractor increases to a level where

performance cannot be maintained at the current
speed control settings, the engine will attempt to
compensate, within the set limits, for the additional
load. Should the load be too great for the engine to
overcome, then the transmission ratio will change to
reduce the load.
During operation it may be necessary to make fine

adjustments to both controls until the engine speed
remains within the required economy/power band.
By continually matching engine speed to

transmission ratio, Auto Command is able to
maintain a constant wheel speed.
2--118
Shuttle Lever
To select the direction of travel, lift the shuttle lever

towards the steering wheel and move it forwards or
rearwards. Symbols in the transmission display will
confirm the direction of travel selected.
As an alternative, the shuttle buttons on the travel

lever may be used for direction changes except in the
following circumstances:
 After initial start--up.
 If Neutral has been selected.
 If the electronic park brake has been applied. 185
Where a change of direction has been selected with

the tractor moving at speed, the arrow for the new
direction will appear and start to flash. When the
tractor changes direction the arrow will cease to flash
and will remain displayed.
On releasing the shuttle lever, it will return to the rest

position (3) Figure 186. With the lever In this position
transmission drive is still engaged and the tractor can
move, this is NOT the neutral position.
To select neutral, depress the button (1) Figure 185

on the end of the lever. When neutral is selected ’N’
will appear in the transmission display.
IMPORTANT: Always select the park brake position

(5) Figure 186, before leaving the seat.
The shuttle lever is also used to select the park brake

position (5). See page 2--85. 186
Each time the shuttle lever is used to change tractor

direction, direction arrows in the transmission display
will confirm the new direction.
2--119
NOTE: If the shuttle lever is moved from neutral to

drive with the handbrake applied, transmission drive
is engaged but the display will still show ’P’. Release
the handbrake and re--select drive direction with the
shuttle lever.
At start--up, or if the operator has left the seat for

more than five seconds, forward/reverse drive must
initially be selected using the shuttle lever.
Subsequent direction changes can be made using
the shuttle lever or the shuttle switch (1) on the travel
lever, Figure 187.
WARNING
Before the operator leaves the seat, the handbrake
and/or park brake MUST be engaged or the tractor
could inadvertently move.
If the operator leaves the seat for more than 5 187

seconds with the engine running and without
engaging the electronic park brake (EPB), the
transmission will not drive until the operator is
re--seated and the clutch pedal has been cycled
(depress/release).
Should the operator attempt to make a direction

change while not in the seat, transmission drive will
be disabled and the tractor will slow to a stop.To
re--enable drive, the operator must be in the seat with
the clutch pedal depressed before moving the shuttle
lever to engage drive.
NOTE: If drive is not re--enabled within 5 seconds,

EPB will automatically apply. Release the park brake
by selecting forward or reverse with the shuttle lever.
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the operator is in the seat
with the clutch pedal depressed, neutral engaged 188
and the shuttle lever held in the down position (4) or
placed in the park brake position (5).
2--120
Travel Lever
The Auto Command travel lever has two main

functions. It is used to adjust the forward and reverse
tractor speed and also acts as a shuttle control.
Lever movement is momentary, it will automatically
return to the rest position when released. If moved to
the full extent of its travel in the forward or reverse
direction the tractor will accelerate to the target
speed.
Move the lever forward against spring pressure to

engage forward drive, move rearwards to engage
reverse drive.
Operation of the travel lever is progressive, the

further the lever is moved before it is allowed to return
to the rest position, the higher the tractor speed will
be.
If the lever is moved a short distance from the rest

position the tractor will accelerate to the equivalent
speed for that position, further movement of the lever
beyond the first position will provide a faster speed.
189
To decelerate the tractor move the travel lever in the
opposite direction to which the tractor is travelling.
By moving the lever a short distance within the gate,
the tractor will decelerate slowly. When the desired
tractor speed is reached allow the lever to return to
the rest position and the tractor will maintain that
speed.
For rapid deceleration move the lever the full extent

of travel and hold in that position, the tractor will
decelerate quickly. For maximum deceleration also
apply the tractor footbrakes. When the desired
speed has been reached, allow the lever to return to
the rest position. When moving the lever to the
maximum deceleration position, front axle drive will
be engaged to enhance the deceleration process.
To bring the tractor to a complete stop, continue to

hold the lever in the maximum deceleration position
until the tractor comes to a halt then return the lever
to the rest position. To engage drive again, move the
travel lever from the rest position to the desired
direction of travel.
2--121
If tractor speed is being controlled by the foot pedal,

it is possible to transfer control to the travel lever in
the following way. Maintain pressure on the foot
pedal and move the travel lever in the direction of
travel until the tractor is felt to respond to the lever
movement. Hold the lever in that position and release
the foot pedal.
Allow the travel lever to return to the rest position and

the tractor will maintain the current speed.
Switches and buttons on the travel lever control the

main Auto Command functions.
1. Shuttle switch. Depress the top of the switch to

select the forward direction, depress the bottom
to select reverse direction. It is not necessary to
depress the clutch when operating the shuttle
switch.
2. Cruise mode button C. Engages/disengages

cruise mode. This button also sets the cruise
speed.
3. Speed range selector - . Depress this button to

190
select a lower speed range.
4. Speed range thumbwheel. Each speed range

can be adjusted to provide a specific target
(maximum) speed. Rotate the thumbwheel
upwards to increase the speed setting, rotate
downwards to decrease the setting.
The thumbwheel is speed sensitive, when turned

slowly the speed will gradually change. When
rotated quickly the speed increments will change
faster.
NOTE: The thumbwheel can be used to increase or

decrease the target speed when the tractor is in
motion.
5. Speed range selector +. Depress this button to

select a higher speed range.
If the tractor is stopped for more than 45 seconds, the

electronic park brake will automatically engage and
drive selection, using the travel lever or shuttle
switch, will be de--activated. To reactivate drive, the
shuttle lever must be used.
2--122
Rate of Acceleration Control
The Rate of Acceleration control allows the operator

to choose the rate at which the tractor will accelerate
when the travel lever is moved or foot pedal
depressed. It will also have an effect on shuttle
reaction when changing vehicle direction.
To change the rate of acceleration, depress the

switch (1). Each time the switch is depressed the
number of lights that will illuminate will change. With
a single light on, the acceleration rate will be at the
minimum setting, with three lights illuminated the
rate of acceleration wil be at the maximum setting. 191
NOTE: Where the rate of acceleration is limited by

the amount of engine power available, selecting a
higher rate will not increase the performance. Check
to ensure the throttle allowable setting, page 2--118,
is not affecting the acceleration rate.
The functionality of the acceleration control is the

same for all transmission modes.
2--123
Foot Pedal
With an Auto Command transmission, the foot pedal

can be used to control engine speed and/or tractor
ground speed. In Auto and Cruise modes, the foot
pedal is used to control tractor ground speed but not
engine speed.
Fully depressing the foot pedal will accelerate the

tractor to the target speed in the currently selected
speed range.
The foot pedal will revert to a conventional throttle

control when the transmission is in Manual mode, 192
Neutral, Park or when the clutch pedal is depressed.
When operating in Auto Command and Cruise

modes, initial movement of the pedal travel will
provide slow speed control of the tractor and can be
used to ’inch’ the tractor when attaching implements
or other equipment.
The foot pedal can also be used to increase tractor

speed above that set by the travel lever providing
lever speed is below the maximum for the selected
range.
However, depressing the foot pedal will override

travel lever operation and the tractor will slow to a
stop when the pedal is released.
NOTE: The automatic 4WD engagement feature for

rapid deceleration when using the travel lever is not
available on the foot pedal.
The foot pedal (1) may be used independently of the

hand throttle or travel lever to set the speed of the
tractor.
NOTE: When the foot pedal is released, tractor

speed will be reduced to that set by the hand throttle
and travel lever (Manual mode) or the programmed
cruise speed (Cruise mode). In Auto mode the
tractor will continue to slow to a stop unless the travel
lever is used to re--engage drive.
When the transmission is in neutral or in manual

mode, or when the shuttle lever is in park, the foot
pedal operates as a conventional foot throttle to
control engine speed.
2--124
Speed Ranges
Auto Command has three programmable speed

ranges selected by depressing the range switches
on the travel lever. Depress + (1) to select a higher
speed range, press -- (2) to select a lower range.
Within each of the three ranges, the speeds are

variable from zero to the target (maximum) permitted
tractor speed. Rotate the thumbwheel (3) clockwise
to increase the range speed, anti--clockwise to
decrease the speed.
The thumbwheel is always used to set the target 193

speed.
The thumbwheel is speed sensitive, when turned

slowly the speed will gradually change. When rotated
quickly the speed increments will change faster.
The transmission display shows the target speed for

each of the three ranges. When the tractor is moving
the actual speed is shown at the bottom of the
display.
When adjusting the speed ranges, the target speed

in each range should be set higher than the range
below. In Figure 194, the speeds are shown as
follows.
Range F3 -- 50.0 K/mh
If a speed in a lower range is adjusted to a higher 194

setting than the range above, then the speed in the
higher range will automatically increase to match the
speed in the lower range.
Conversely, if a speed in a high range is adjusted to

be less than the range below, then the speed in the
lower range will change to match the new high range
speed setting.
Once a speed has been set within a range, it then

becomes the target speed for that range. For
example, if a speed of 5 Km/h (3.1 MPH) is set as the
target speed for range 1, moving the travel lever fully
forward will accelerate the tractor to the target speed.
2--125
It is important to note that achieving the target speed

in any range will be dependant on available engine
power. Where the tractor is operating with a heavy
implement or trailer, or working in hilly terrain, a high
target speed may not be achievable until the load on
the tractor is reduced.
Where there is a need to temporarily reduce tractor

forward speed, the lever can be pulled into the
reverse gate to slow the tractor. When tractor speed
has reduced sufficiently, allow the lever to return to
the rest position. From the rest position push the
lever fully forward and the tractor will accelerate back
to 5 Km/h (3.1 MPH).
The opposite will apply when travelling in the reverse

direction.
Where the travel lever has been used to provide 50%

of target speed in one range, selecting an alternate
range will not change the 50% of target speed
setting. However, if the target speed for the new
range is higher than the previous range, then the
tractor will accelerate to 50% of the higher target
speed.
If a range is selected that has a target speed below

the current tractor speed, then the current travel
speed will become the new target speed for the lower
range.
Speed Increments
There are two sets of speed increments depending

on whether the transmission is operating in Km/h or
MPH. By slowly rotating the thumbwheel (3) the
speeds will be adjusted as shown below.
Speed Setting Increments (Km/h)

0.03 -- 0.10 Km/h, in 0.01 Km/h steps.
0.10 -- 0.22 Km/h, in 0.02 Km/h steps.
0.25 -- 1.0 Km/h, in 0.05 Km/h steps.
1.0 -- 10.0 Km/h, in 0.10 Km/h steps.
10.0 -- 15.0 Km/h, in 0.20 Km/h steps. 195
15.0 -- Maximum speed, in 1.0 Km/h steps.
2--126
Speed Setting Increments (MPH)

0.02 -- 0.10 MPH, in 0.01 MPH steps.
0.10 -- 0.22 MPH, in 0.02 MPH steps.
0.25 -- 1.0 MPH, in 0.05 MPH steps
1.0 -- 8.0 MPH, in 0.10 MPH steps
8.0 -- 15.0 MPH, in 0.20 MPH steps
15.0 MPH -- Maximum speed, in 1.0 MPH steps.
By turning the thumbwheel (1) quickly, some of the

above speed steps may be skipped.
The thumbwheel may also be used to adjust the

speed of the tractor whilst driving. By rotating the
thumbwheel upwards the target speed for the current
operating range will be increased.
Rotating the thumbwheel downwards will decrease

the target speed in the current range.
196
2--127
Transmission Display
The transmission display provides the operator with

information on tractor speed, direction and
transmission modes.
1. Forward Target Speed. Where the tractor is

being driven in a reverse direction, the maximum
speed attainable when selecting forward drive is
displayed here i.e. 20 MPH. When reverse is
selected the display will change to show the
target speed for reverse.
The operator is able to set the target speed for

each ’speed range’ using the thumbwheel on the
travel lever.
2. Current Range and Speed. The illustration

depicts that speed range F3 is engaged and the
maximum attainable speed in that range is 7
MPH (11.2 Km/h). When an alternate range is
selected, the frame surrounding the figures will
move to highlight the new range. When reverse
is selected the display will show R1, R2 and R3.
3. Control Position Bar Graph. The bar graph

displays the position of the transmission controls
as a percentage of total movement available on
the control currenlty being used to operate the
transmission. When the fill line in the graph
reaches mid--point the tractor will be travelling at
50% of the target speed in the currently selected
range.
IMPORTANT: If at any time a fill line is shown in the

graph at (3) then one of the transmission controls is
197
active and the tractor will move if the brakes are
released. When the bar graph is empty, the
transmission is not active.
4. Actual Ground Speed in Km/h or MPH.
5. Transmission Mode Display.

M = Manual Mode.
A = Auto Mode.
C = Cruise Mode.
= P.T.O. Active. (Auto and Cruise modes

only)
2--128
6. Reverse Target Speed. Where the tractor is

being driven in a forward direction, the maximum
speed attainable when selecting reverse drive is
displayed here i.e. 12 MPH.
7. b = Reverse drive engaged, this will appear

below the tractor symbol in transmission status.
8. Transmission Status. The symbol will change to

display the current transmission operating mode.
N = Transmission in neutral.
P = Electronic park brake applied.
= Transmission in travel mode, this will be

accompanied by one of the direction arrows 7
and 9.
9. y = Forward drive engaged, this will appear

above the tractor symbol in transmission status.
The direction arrows 7 and 9 are also used to confirm

a change of direction (shuttling) while the tractor is
moving. Where the tractor is travelling in the forward
direction and reverse is selected, the arrow for
reverse will appear flashing in the display. The
forward arrow will be continue to be shown in a solid
state.
198
When the tractor has changed direction the reverse
arrow will cease to flash and change to a solid state
and the forward arrow will disappear.
2--129
Transmission Operating Modes
Four operating modes are available with the Auto

Command transmission, these are:
1. Manual mode
2. Auto mode
3. Cruise mode
4. P.T.O. mode
NOTE: When activated, the corresponding symbol

for the mode selected will appear in the transmission
display.
Manual Mode (1)
In manual mode, the operator selects the

transmission range and the foot pedal and hand
throttle function in the normal way controlling engine
speed. Depress the switch (1) to engage manual
mode.
The current speed range, as selected by the

operator, will remain engaged until manually
changed. Engine speed is also maintained at the
current setting until changed by the operator.
However, should the engine speed fall below 1000
r.p.m. the transmission will automatically adjust the 199
ratio to prevent the engine from stalling.
In manual mode, the target speed for each range, as

set by the operator, can only be achieved at a rated
engine speed of 2200 e.r.p.m.. For example, if a
target speed of 5 Km/h (3.1 MPH) has been set in
Range F1, this speed can only be achieved at 2200
e.r.p.m.
NOTE: If operating below the target speed,

depressing the cruise switch will accelerate the
tractor to the target speed. This is providing the
engine speed is sufficient to allow this.
200
2--130
Where a transmission is operating at 50% of target

speed then selecting another range will have no
effect on this setting, the transmission will still
maintain 50% of the target speed. However, if the
target speed for the new range is higher or lower than
the previous one, then tractor speed will change to
50% of the new target speed.
In manual mode, the engine speed is controlled by

the foot throttle (1) or hand throttle (2).
NOTE: The engine droop control is inoperative in

Manual mode.
201
Auto Mode (2)
Auto mode is typically used for transport applications

where the automated functions will help to provide
optimum tractor performance at all times.
In Auto mode, tractor speed is controlled by the foot

pedal (2), or travel lever (1). The hand throttle (3) is
used to set the minimum engine speed.
Movement of the foot pedal or travel lever are in

direct relation to the target speed for each range.
Fully depressing the pedal or moving the lever the full
extent of its travel will provide a 100% of target speed 202
for the current range.
During operation, the Auto Command transmission

will always try to optimise engine speed within the
constraints of the hand throttle setting. To achieve
this, Auto Command will vary the transmission ratio
in order to maintain both wheel speed and engine
r.p.m. as close as possible to the set levels.
In Auto mode, it is possible to set the speed in range

F1 (or F2 and F3) to the maximum permitted speed
of the tractor. This will provide a totally automated
transmission speed function based on the position of
the foot pedal or travel lever.
2--131
Foot pedal travel is divided into two operating zones.

From rest (pedal up) to the mid point of pedal travel
(50% of target speed), the pedal acts as an
accelerator/decelerator in the normal way.
When the pedal is depressed beyond mid point the

tractor will continue to accelerate as the pedal is
depressed. When the desired speed has been
reached the pedal can be eased back to the mid
point, this will reduce engine r.p.m. but maintain
tractor speed.
Providing the pedal is not allowed to return beyond

mid point then tractor speed will remain constant. If 203
pedal is allowed to return above the mid point then
the tractor will begin to decelerate.
If the brake pedals are depressed while operating in

Auto mode the tractor will slow. When the brakes are
released the tractor will accelerate to the previous
speed.
If the speed has been set using the travel lever and
then the foot pedal is depressed to increase this
speed, the travel lever will be disabled and control of
tractor speed will revert to the foot pedal. Releasing
the pedal will slow the tractor to a stop.
It is possible to transfer speed control from the foot

pedal to the travel lever while the tractor is in motion.
Hold the foot pedal to maintain the desired tractor
speed then quickly move the travel lever to the full
speed position and back to the rest position.
If travelling forward move the lever forward, if in

reverse move the lever rearwards.
Where it is required to increase tractor speed,

holding the travel lever fully forwards (or reawards)
will cause the tractor to accelerate. When the desired
speed is reached, allow the travel lever to return to
the rest position.
Resetting Auto Mode
The current Auto mode settings can be reset by

engaging the park lock or by moving the travel lever
fully in the opposite direction to tractor travel. After
the tractor has come to a halt, new Auto mode
settings can be applied.
2--132
Cruise Mode (3)
Cruise mode is an extension of Auto mode. For

Cruise to operate the transmission must be in Auto
mode.
Cruise mode allows the operator to set a constant

wheel speed which is maintained by balancing
engine speed and transmission ratio. By
continuously monitoring engine and transmission
loads, Cruise will attempt to provide a constant travel
speed combined with good fuel economy.
In cruise mode the hand throttle is used to set the 204

minimum engine speed. Engine speeds above this
are controlled automatically.
By momentarily depressing the Cruise button (2), the

tractor will accelerate to the target speed set for the
current range. However, if the operator wishes to
maintain the present speed the button should be
depressed for one second before releasing. Cruise
will engage and the current tractor speed will be
maintained. The target speed for the selected range
will be updated to match the current speed.
The operator may increase or decrease the target

speed at any time with Cruise mode engaged. This
is achieved by rotating the thumbwheel (1). The new
speed will override the current setting to become the
new target speed.
With Cruise engaged, the foot pedal can be used to

temporarily override the speed setting by up to 10
Km/h (6.2 MPH). This will not affect the current
speed setting unless the increase in speed is above
the 10 Km/h (6.2 MPH) limit. Release the pedal and
the speed will return to the original setting.
In Auto and Cruise modes the tractor can be

accelerated from rest by holding the shuttle lever in
the direction of travel and simultaneously pressing
the Cruise button for more than 0.5 of a second.
Once moving, release the button and the tractor will
continue to accelerate to the target speed for the
current range.
2--133
Alternatively, the tractor can be moved from rest

using the foot pedal or travel lever. When the speed
is above 0.5 Km/h (0.31 MPH), depress the cruise
button and the tractor will accelerate to the target
speed.
Cancelling Cruise Mode
To cancel Cruise mode and return to pedal operation

carry out the following procedure. This applies to
both forward and reverse directions.
Depressing the Cruise button (2) will disengage

Cruise mode. However, if the operator wishes to
maintain tractor speed, depress the foot pedal to
maintain tractor speed then depress/release the
Cruise button.
Alternatively, move the travel lever the a minimum of

50% of its travel, in the opposite direction to tractor 205
travel and allow to return to the rest position. Cruise
will be disengaged but the tractor will maintain it’s
speed.
To slow the tractor, move the travel lever to the full

extent of its travel in the opposite direction and hold,
the tractor will decelerate.
Cruise mode may also be suspended by depressing

the brake pedals or by applying the handbrake or
park lock. Operating the exhaust brake will also
suspend Cruise mode. If the clutch pedal is
depressed after suspending cruise mode the tractor
will accelerate back to the original cruise speed
setting.
2--134
2nd Engine RPM Control
The function of the 2nd Engine RPM Control (1) is to

maintain an optimum engine speed as selected by
the operator.
By monitoring the 2nd Engine RPM Control will try to

maintain the most optimum engine speed for the task
in hand. If additional loads are imposed on the
engine, the 2nd Engine RPM Control will
automatically adjust the transmission ratio to
maintain engine speed.
A pop--up will appear in the colour display when the 206

as the 2nd Engine RPM Control is rotated for settings
to be made or adjusted. The pop--up will display both
hand throttle and 2nd Engine RPM Control settings
as r.p.m figures.
The amount of additional engine load which can be

applied before the 2nd Engine RPM Control is
activated is adjustable by the operator to provide a
speed ’band’ in which the engine will operate. This
figure can be shown in the colour display.
. Work condition
. Driveline
Normal Mode.
In normal mode the 2nd Engine RPM Control sets a

maximum engine speed as required for the task.
Select the desired engine speed using the hand
throttle. With the hand throttle set, rotate the 2nd
Engine RPM Control clockwise to set the maximum
permissible engine speed.
Once set, the engine will maintain r.p.m. within the

maximum and minimum speed settings.
P.T.O. Mode
In P.T.O. mode the 2nd Engine RPM Control,

controls the droop and sets a minimum r.p.m. below
which the transmission will change ratio to reduce
the load on the engine and thereby maintain r.p.m.
Set the hand throttle to the desired speed for correct
P.T.O. operation then rotate the engine droop control
anti--clockwise to set the minimum permissible
engine speed.
Once set, the engine will maintain r.p.m. within the

maximum and minimum speed settings.
2--135
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Four wheel drive tractors have a differential lock

installed in both front and rear axles to lock all four
wheels together in conditions where wheel slip may
occur.
The differential locks are controlled by two switches

on the control console to the right of the seat.
The differential lock(s) may be operated in manual

mode or automatic mode. To confirm operation, the
warning light in the switch will illuminate when
engaged. 207
WARNING
Avoid using the differential lock at speeds above
8Km/h (5 MPH) and never at speeds above 15 Km/h
(9 MPH) or at any time when turning the tractor.
When engaged, the differential lock will make
steering the tractor very difficult.
IMPORTANT: If wheel spin is encountered, reduce

engine speed before engaging the differential lock,
to avoid shock loads to the transmission.
Operating in Manual Mode (all models)

2
In slippery conditions, momentarily press the switch
(1) Figure 207, to lock both wheels together. The
differential lock(s) will engage and warning lights in
the switch and instrument panel (2) will light up.
When one or both brake pedals are applied or if the

switch is depressed again, disengagement will occur
and the warning lights in the switch and instrument
panel will go out. Press the switch again to
re--engage the differential locks.
208
2--136
Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage both front and rear differential locks in

automatic mode, press the AUTO switch (1). The
warning light in the switch will illuminate. The
indicator light (2) Figure 210 on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit while the
differential locks are engaged.
NOTE: If the differential lock is active when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain active when the
key--start is switched on again.
In automatic mode, disengagement of the locks will 209

occur as follows:
Fast raise switch Temporary

activated (to raise the disengagement, will 2
rear 3--point hitch) re--engage when
3--point hitch is lowered
Either brake pedal is Temporary
applied disengagement
Both brake pedals are Differential lock
applied simultaneously remains engaged
Tractor speed exceeds Differential locks will
15 Km/h (9 MPH) permanently disengage
Front steering angle Temporary
exceeds pre--set limits* disengagement, will
(where fitted) re--engage when 210
steering angle is
reduced
Momentarily press the Differential locks will
AUTO switch permanently disengage
*Wheel speed 0 -- 10 Km/h (0 -- 6.2 MPH) and

steering angle exceeding 15 right, 13.5 left (9 and
7.7 with Supersteer). Differential lock will
re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
*Wheel speed is between 10 and 15 Km/h (6.2 and

9.3 MPH) and steering angle exceeding 5 right, 4.5
left (2 and 1.6 with Supersteer). Differential lock will
re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
Where the dfferential locks are temporarily

disengaged, the warning light will flash until the locks
re--engage.
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during

manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is
required, consult your authorised dealer.
2--137
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (where fitted)
Four wheel drive greatly improves traction in difficult

conditions. The drive to the front wheels is designed
to be engaged or disengaged with the tractor
stationary or moving.
NOTE: The drive to the front wheels is actuated by

switches on the control panel. To confirm selection,
the warning light in the switch will illuminate when
engaged.
Operating in Manual Mode
Press the upper switch (1), to engage drive to the

front wheels. Warning lights in the switch and
instrument panel will illuminate when four wheel drive
is engaged. To disengage four wheel drive, depress
the switch again.
NOTE: If four wheel drive is engaged when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain engaged when
the key--start is switched on again.
211
Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage automatic four wheel drive mode, press

the AUTO switch (2), Figure 211. The warning light
in the switch will illuminate. The indicator light (1)
Figure 212 on the instrument panel will also
illuminate but will only remain lit while four wheel
drive is engaged. Press the AUTO switch again to
disengage four wheel drive.
Four wheel drive will remain permanently engaged

unless one of the following occurs:
 Wheel speed exceeds 20 Km/h (12.4 MPH). 212

Four wheel drive will re--engage when wheel
speed falls below 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)
2--138
NOTE: The following applies only to tractors fitted

with a steering angle sensor.
 Wheel speed falls below 10 Km/h (6.2 MPH) and

steering angle exceeds 15 right and 13.5 left
(9 and 7.75 with SuperSteer). Four wheel drive
will re--engage when the steering angle is
reduced.
 Wheel speed is between 10 and 20 Km/h (6.2

and 12.4 MPH) and steering angle exceeds 10
right and 9.25 left (5.5 and 4.75 with
Supersteer). Four wheel drive will re--engage
when the steering angle is reduced. 213
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during

manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is
required, consult your authorised dealer.
The indicator light (1) Figure 213 on the instrument

panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit when
four wheel drive is engaged.
4WD Operating Precautions NOTE: Keep the tractor in the same gear going
downhill as would be used when going uphill.
WARNING
Four wheel drive greatly increases traction. Extra CAUTION
caution is needed on slopes. Compared to two-wheel On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle is
drive, a 4WD tractor maintains traction on steeper automatically engaged when both brake pedals are
slopes, increasing the possibility of overturning. applied simultaneously to provide four wheel
braking. Additionally, you may have the optional front
disc brakes. The effectiveness of four wheel braking
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tyre wear when greatly enhances tractor braking performance
travelling on the public highway or any hard surface, therefore appropriate care should be exercised
it is recommended that four wheel drive be during heavy braking.
disengaged. Always use the specified front/rear tyre Front tyres should never be inflated above the
combinations to ensure acceptable tyre wear. recommended pressure. Ideally, rear tyre pressures
should be maintained at least 0.4 bar (6 lbf/in 2) above
front tyre pressures, provided the manufacturers’
WARNING
recommendations are not exceeded.
Tractors with four wheel drive engaged or
disengaged should not be allowed to exceed 50
Km/h (31 MPH) where permitted. Overspeeding by IMPORTANT: Never attempt to drive the tractor with
towing or coasting downhill with clutch depressed or the drive shaft removed, even if you have no intention
transmission in neutral may cause loss of control, of using four wheel drive. With the drive shaft
personal injury to the operator or bystanders or removed, application of the brakes will result in
mechanical failure. severe damage to transmission components.
2--139
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

(where fitted)
1
The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension will
provide improved stability, control, comfort and
traction. Front axle suspension is automatically
activated each time the tractor is started but will not
function at speeds below 1.5 k/mh (0.9 MPH).
When operating at speeds up to 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH),

the front axle suspension may be locked out if not
required.
To lock out the suspension, press the switch (1), a 214

warning light (2) on the instrument panel will
illuminate to confirm the suspension is locked. Press
the switch again to reactivate the suspension facility.
At speeds above 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH), the suspension

will automatically re--engage, overriding the axle
lock. However, the lock out warning light will remain
illuminated. To extinguish the light, depress the lock
out switch.
NOTE: Should the warning light in the switch start to

flash, this would indicate a malfunction of the
suspension system. Consult your authorised dealer.
IMPORTANT: See Ballasting and Tyres, page

3--192, regarding the use of front end weights with
front axle suspension.
215
WARNING
Hydraulic oil in the front axle suspension system
operates under very high pressure. Escaping
hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury. Unqualified persons should
not attempt to disconnect any pipework in the front
axle hydraulic system. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in serious injury.
WARNING
If a transmission ratio is engaged, with the engine
running and the tractor supported on axle stands, the
self-levelling function of the suspension may cause
the axle to make corrections (move up and down).
The suspension should be locked out to maintain
stability.
2--140
Adjusting the Suspension Setting
The front suspension on your tractor can be adjusted 1

to increase or decrease the level of damping. This
allows the operator to select the most comfortable
ride to suite the prevailing conditions or to
compensate for the weight of mounted equipment.
 Three damping levels are available. To adjust the

setting depress and hold the lockout switch for
more than 2 seconds, the current setting will
appear in the central display on the instrument
panel. Release the switch.
216
 Press/release the lockout switch again to cycle
through the settings, HArd, SOFt and NOr. With
the appropriate setting displayed depress/hold
the switch for 2 seconds to save the setting.
 When the screen reverts to it’s original display

the setting will have been saved, release the
switch.
217
2--141
2--142
SECTION 3
FIELD OPERATIONS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
BEFORE OPERATING THE TRACTOR Page Subject
Before operating your tractor in the field it is Important Information 3--1

important you read the following information.
Boosting the Tractor Battery 3--9
CAUTION Starting the Engine 3--10
Before driving or operating the tractor, study the
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. Stopping the Engine 3--13
Engine Power Management (EPM) 3--15
Read this section carefully for a thorough Engine Speed Management (ESM) 3--18
understanding of operational requirements. Even if
you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly Headland Turn Sequence (HTS) 3--22
read this section of the manual and ensure that you
Fast Steer 3--41
are familiar with the location and function of all the
features of your tractor. Rear Power Take--Off 3--43
Front Power Take--Off and 3--Point Hitch 3--62
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the Electronic Draft Control 3--87
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves 3--102
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer.
Hydraulic Power Beyond Port 3--130
PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS Three-point Hitch 3--135
Quick Hitch 3--141
Your tractor is equipped with a sophisticated
electronic network system which utilises various Linkage Stabilisers 3--143
memory facilities to programme and control many of
the tractor functions. The operating memory Drawbars and Towing Attachments 3--149
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made
while operating the tractor and these are transferred Trailer Braking Systems 3--165
to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
Front Wheel Track Adjustment 3--172
If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data Dynamic Front Fenders 3--177
is being transferred between the operating and main
memories, some of the data may be lost or Rear Wheel Track Adjustment 3--180
corrupted.
Ballasting and Tyres 3--192
If changes have been made to any memory settings

while operating the tractor, pause for five seconds
between key--off and key--on to allow sufficient time
for data to transfer between the operating memory
and the main memory. Once transferred, the new
settings will remain unchanged until they are
re--programmed.
3--1
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS
RUNNING--IN PROCEDURE  Engine and exhaust areas for accumulation of

debris
IMPORTANT: Your new tractor will provide long and
dependable service if given proper care during the 50  Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
hour running--in period and if serviced at the  Tyres for damage
recommended intervals.
 Hardware for looseness
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high
a gear under heavy load may cause excessive  Driveline and hydraulic pump/filter areas for
engine overloading. Overloading occurs when the leaks or debris accumulation
engine will not respond to a throttle increase.
Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.
Do not operate without a load on the engine. This can
be as harmful to the engine as overloading. Vary the PRESSURE WASHING THE TRACTOR
type of operation undertaken so that the engine is
subjected to heavy as well as light loads during the
Your tractor is fitted with a number of Electronic
running--in period.
Control Units (ECU’s) that are linked to various
sensors throughout the vehicle. These units
Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads
electronically control many tractor functions
and avoid continuous operation at constant engine
including engine, transmission, P.T.O. and hydraulic
speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with
systems.
a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You
will save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting
the correct transmision ratio for each particular It is very important therefore, when cleaning the
operation. tractor body or chassis with a high pressure water jet,
that care should be taken not to aim the jet directly
Check the instruments and warning lights frequently at any electrical component, wiring harness or
and keep the radiator and various oil reservoirs filled connector.
to the recommended levels.
CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A
PRE-OPERATION CHECKS TRANSPORTER
Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are Transport the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed
thoroughly familiar with the location and operation of trailer or truck. Securely chain the tractor to the
the controls. transporter.
Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel
operations in accordance with Section 4. drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle
or other components that could be damaged by
After completing the daily maintenance operations, contacting the chain or by heavy loading.
perform a walk around visual inspection of the
tractor. Pay particular attention to the following Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie
items: down point.
 Poly ’V’ belt for cracks or damage
IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the
wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage the
bearings. Turbocharger turbine freewheeling
(turning without engine running) must be avoided
since lubrication will not be provided to the
turbocharger bearings.
3--2
TOWING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a To avoid damaging the transmission or other
short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow components that turn but are not lubricated during
on roadways or as a method of transport. towing, observe the following:
 Only tow a short distance
IMPORTANT: Where the tractor is equipped with an  Keep speed below 5 MPH (8 K/mh)
Electronic Park Brake it is important the brake is
released before attempting to tow the tractor.  If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication
Instructions for releasing the park lock can be found and power steering.
in Section 2, Brake Controls and Operation.
IMPORTANT: The brakes on your tractor are
IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to tow the tractor, all hydraulically power assisted. With the engine off, the
transmission controls must be moved to the brakes will still function but with a higher pedal effort.
neutral position before stopping the engine
otherwise damage to transmission components may WARNING
occur during towing. If creeper gears are fitted, then Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the
the creeper gears must be disengaged before towing cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with
the tractor. sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using
a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side
facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down instead
Use a strong chain when towing the tractor. Tow the of flying up.
tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear tow
hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor from the
front using the tow pin in the front weights or front NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the engine
support. Have an operator steer and brake the is not running, regardless of the position of the 4WD
tractor. activation switch.
CAUTION
Do not tow the tractor faster than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
The steering is much slower and steering wheel
effort is much greater without the engine running.
TILTING HIGH VISIBILITY ROOF PANEL
Where road speeds in excess of 50 Km/h (31 MPH)

are likely to occur when transporting the tractor, it is
advisable to secure the high visibility roof panel with
ties to prevent it from opening.
Secure both handles to the sun--visor support using

a flexible strap such as a cable tie (1) as shown in the
illustration above. Do not use wire or metal straps as
these may damage the paintwork.
3--3
OPERATING IN COLD TEMPERATURES Maintaining Operating Temperatures
To start and operate your tractor during ambient IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures,
temperatures of --1 C (30 F) and below, observe the never run the engine at low idle speed for long
following instructions. periods of time or when the coolant temperature is
below normal.
 BATTERIES -- Ensure the batteries are fully
charged and the terminals are clean and tight. During cold ambient temperatures, the engine may
not reach or maintain the correct operating
 FUEL -- Must be clean and free of water. Consult temperature. Slow engine speeds in cold
your fuel supplier for cold weather fuel temperatures can cause damage to the engine. Use
requirements in your area. the following procedure to warm the engine and
transmission oils and to maintain the correct
 ENGINE OIL -- Ensure the oil is the correct operating temperatures.
viscosity for the ambient temperature range. See
page 4--13.
Warming the Engine
 TRANSMISSION/HYDRAULIC OIL -- Use low
ambient temperature transmission oil. See page  Start the engine using the procedure shown in
4--13. the ’Starting the Engine’ section of this manual.
NOTE: If continuous operation is required in NOTE: During engine warm up, an electronically
temperatures below --28 C (--20 F), change the controlled engine may not run smoothly until the
transmission/hydraulic oil to one of a lower temperature increases.
temperature rating, see page 4--13. This oil is more
fluid at extremely cold temperatures. NOTE: At low temperatures, the tractor must be run
until it warms up. Transmission response may be
 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM -- Must have a compromised and heavy steering may occur until the
minimum of 50% ethylene glycol solution for oil is warm. Always use a transmission oil heater and
system protection. engine coolant heater to reduce warm up time.
 TYRES -- If the tyres contain liquid ballast they Maintaining Engine Temperature
must be protected against temperatures below
0 C (32 F). Consult your dealer. When the engine is operating in cold ambient
temperatures without load, maintain correct
 CONDENSATION IN THE FUEL TANK -- To operating temperature as described below.
prevent condensation forming in the fuel tank
and water entering the fuel system, fill the fuel  Run the engine at approximately 1500 r.p.m.
tank at the end of each day.
 Cover the front grille of the tractor to control the
 WATER IN THE FUEL SYSTEM. Drain the amount of air passing through the engine
pre--filter and water separator on a regular basis radiator.
to prevent build up of water in the system.
 TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER. Use a Stopping the Engine When Hot
transmission oil heater to maintain oil
temperature when the tractor is not being used.  Run the engine at a slow speed for a short period
of time. This will permit the engine temperature
to decrease gradually before stopping the
engine.
3--4
Warming the Power Command Transmission

When operating in low temperatures, upshifting may
be restricted to the lower gears until the transmission
oil temperature reaches 10 C (50 F). Restricted
upshifting will be accompanied by a warning symbol
appearing in the transmission display, Figure 2.
With cold transmission oil, avoid shuttle operations, as

far as practicable, until the oil has warmed up.
2
Warming the Auto Command Transmission
The transmission on your tractor relies on oil for
operation and lubrication. In extremely cold
conditions it is important the oil is warmed before
operating the tractor.
Depending on the temperature, there are two stages
to the warm up procedure, both being fully
automated. In the initial stage where the
transmission oil temperature is below --15C (5F)
drive will be disabled and the warm up symbol shown
in Figure 2, will appear in the transmission display.
This will be accompanied by an audible alarm.
Also, during the initial warm up period engine speed

will be restricted,. the minimum engine speed will be
set at 1100 r.p.m. Depending on transmission oil
temperature the maximum engine speed will also be
limited to the following.
With oil temperatures between --20C to --10C (4F

to 14F) maximum engine speed will be 1300 r.p.m.
For every degree above --10C (14F) engine r.p.m.
will increase by 100. When the oil has heated
sufficiently to allow drive engagement, the warm up
symbol will disappear from the screen and the full
range of engine speeds will become available.
If, for example, the oil temperature is --20C (--4F)

it will take approximately 5 minutes for the oil to be
warmed sufficiently before drive can be engaged.
During this period, any attempt to engage drive will
be ignored and the warm up procedure will continue.
3--5
In the second stage of the warm up procedure the

tractor becomes driveable and the full range of
engine speeds are available. However, the number
of transmission controlled speed ranges and
maximum travel speeds are electronically restricted.
The speeds shown in the following chart are based

on the largest tyre size and are at a rated engine
speed of 2200 r.p.m. Where smaller tyres are fitted
the speeds will be correspondingly slower.
Temperature Forward Reverse

Speeds Speeds
Km/h (MPH) Km/h (MPH)
Below 0° C 12.0 (7.4) 15.0 (9.3)
(32° F)
0° C to 6° C 18.0 (11.18) 30.0 (18.6)
(32° F to 43° F)
6° C to 12° C 38.0* (23.6) 30.0 (18.6)
(43° F to 54° F)
Above 12° C 50.0(1) (31.0) 30.0 (18.6)
(54° F)
* Depending on model specification this may be

limited to 43 Km/h (26.7 MPH).
(1)Where local legislation permits.
Where maximum travel speeds are restricted, a

snowflake symbol Figure 2, will appear in the
When the snowflake symbol disappears, the

transmission is fully operable.
3--6
COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER

(where fitted)
WARNING
To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an
unearthed or inadequate extension lead with the
coolant or oil heater. Always use an earthed, three
core extension lead, which is rated for at least a 15
amp load, in conjunction with a residual current
circuit breaker or earth leakage trip device.
This accessory consists of a heating element fitted

into one of the core plug apertures on the right--hand
side of the block. The heater is available in 120 or 240
volts A.C only. This accessory provides easier
starting down to --29 C (--20 F).
3
To operate the heater, connect the heater extension

cable to the socket (1) adjacent to the right--hand cab
steps. Plug the free end of the heater cable into a
suitable outlet (using a voltage transformer, if
necessary) for up to four hours before carrying out
the cold weather starting procedure.
FUEL HEATER
(where fitted)
The fuel heater consists of a heating element

installed in the primary fuel filter. The heater operates
in conjunction with the grid heater in the engine inlet
manifold.
Operation of the grid heater/fuel heater is automatic

when the ambient temperature falls to --29 C (--20
F).
See Grid Heater Cold Start Aid on page 3--11.

4
3--7
TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER

(where fitted)
This accessory consists of a 120 volt or 240 volt A.C.

heating element installed in the transmission
housing.
This accessory provides for faster warm up of the

transmission/hydraulic oil when operating in low
ambient temperatures.
Connect the 120 volt heater extension cable to the

plug at (1), Figure 5.
5
Connect the 240 volt heater extension cable to the
plug at (1), Figure 6.
To operate the heater, connect the plug on the free

end of the heater cable to a suitable outlet (using a
voltage transformer, if necessary) for up to four hours
before starting the engine.
NOTE: Do not use the heater when the oil is very cold
as this may ’scorch’ the oil. Use the heater after the
tractor has been operated and the transmission oil is
still wram. This will maintain oil temperature for
easier starting in very cold weather.
6
3--8
BOOSTING THE TRACTOR BATTERY
Your tractor is equipped with remote jump terminals

installed on the right-hand side of the engine.
WARNING
Always sit in the driver’s seat to operate the starter
motor. If the key-start switch is by-passed and the
tractor has been left in gear, sudden and unexpected
movement of the tractor or a tractor runaway may
result which could cause serious injury. Wear eye
protection when starting the tractor with jump leads
or when charging the battery.
If it is necessary to use jump leads (booster cables)

to start the tractor, use only heavy duty leads.
Proceed as follows:
The positive terminal (1), mounts on the starter

solenoid, and is encased in an insulated housing.
The negative terminal (2) attaches to the upper

mounting bolt of the starter.
Connect one end of red jump lead, to the positive,

(+), remote jump terminal (1), and the other end to
the positive (+), terminal of the auxiliary battery.
7
Connect one end of black jump lead, to the negative,
(--), remote jump terminal (2), and the other end to
negative, (--), terminal of auxiliary battery. Follow the
starting procedure as described later in this Section.
When the engine starts allow it to run at idle speed,

turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the
connecting procedure. This will help protect the
alternator from possible damage due to extreme load
changes.
3--9
Turn off all electrical equipment and run the tractor

engine until the battery is fully charged.
IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to

start the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump
leads is correct -- positive to positive, negative to
negative, otherwise the alternator may be damaged.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the tractor batteries
are discharged. Excessive amperage (above 1600
cca) may damage the starting motor. In the event of
the batteries being severely discharged, such that
terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require
a special charging procedure. See your authorised
dealer.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting the engine, always carry out the

following procedure:
 Sit in the driver’s seat.
 Ensure the parking brake is firmly applied.
 Ensure the shuttle lever is in the neutral (3) or

park position (5).
 Ensure all P.T.O. controls are in the ‘off’ position.
 Place all remote control valve levers in neutral.
 Move the 3--point hitch Position Control lever
fully forward.
WARNING
Check the area beneath the equipment to ensure
that no injury or damage will be caused when
equipment is lowered.
8
 Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the

turbo-charger makes it essential that adequate
lubrication is assured when the engine is started.
Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for
approximately one minute before driving the tractor.
3--10
GRID HEATER COLD START AID

(where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor may be equipped with an electronic cold
weather starting aid. Do not use ether with the cold
start aid installed. It will explode in the intake
manifold. If any difficulty is experienced when trying
to start your tractor in cold temperatures, consult
The grid heater, which is effective in ambient

temperatures down to --18 C (0 F), consists of a
heating element installed in the intake manifold.
Operation of the grid heater is automatic when the
the engine coolant temperature falls to --3 C (26.6
F) or below.
A warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate
to confirm operation.
If temperatures below --18 C (0 F) are

encountered, a block coolant heater is available as
an accessory. The block coolant heater is effective
in ambient temperatures down to --29 C (--20 F)
when used in conjunction with the grid heater.
Key Start Switch
A five-position key-start switch is installed. The

key-start switch positions are as follows:
Position 1 Not used

Position 2 Off
Position 3 Accessories on
Position 4 Warning lights, instruments and
Grid Heater on
Position 5 Grid heater on, Starter motor
engaged
IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start 9

the engine. Use an auxiliary battery and jump leads.
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in the
neutral (N) position.
3--11
Starting in cold weather (with a cold engine)
 Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch clockwise to position (4). An
indicator light (1) Figure 11, on the instrument
panel will illuminate for 10 to 15 seconds to show
the grid heater has been activated.
 When the light extinguishes, turn the key fully

clockwise to position (5). Crank the engine until
it starts but do not operate the starting motor for
NOTE: If cranking is not carried out within 30 10

seconds of the light extinguishing, turn the key--start
to the ’off’ position, pause and re--start the sequence.
 If the engine fails to start, repeat the foregoing

procedure. If the engine still fails to start, allow
the battery to recover for 4 -- 5 minutes then
repeat the procedure.
 When the engine starts, return the throttle to the

idle position and check that all warning lights
extinguish and gauge readings are normal.
11
Starting in warm weather or when the engine is
hot
 Turn the key-start switch fully clockwise to

position (5) Figure 10, to operate the starting
motor. It is not necessary to open the throttle in
these conditions. Crank the engine until it starts
but do not operate the starting motor
continuously for more than 60 seconds.
NOTE: Once the starter motor has been operated,

it is necessary to return the key-start switch back to
the ‘off’ position before the starting motor can be
re-activated.
 Return the throttle to the idle position and check

that all warning lights extinguish and gauge
readings are normal.
3--12
STOPPING THE ENGINE
IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at

1000 rev/min for approximately one minute. This will
allow the turbo--charger and manifold to cool and
prevent possible distortion of components.
To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:
 Sit in the driver’s seat.

 Close the throttle.
 Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.
 Ensure the P.T.O. is disengaged.

 Place the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position.
 Lower 3--point hitch mounted equipment to the

ground.
 Turn the key--start switch off -- position (2).
AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an engine

that has automatically shutdown, trace and rectify
the fault that caused the engine to be stopped.
Automatic engine shutdown is operated through the

Engine Control Unit (ECU). In the unlikely event that
one or more of the following conditions occurs then
the engine will be shut down after 30 seconds.
 A critical error is detected within the engine
control system.
 The generated engine horsepower attempts to
exceed the specified design limit.
Should either of the above occur and the engine
shuts down, consult your authorised dealer before
attempting further operations with the tractor.
NOTE: Automatic engine shutdown function is

permanantly activated and cannot be switched off.
3--13
Automatic Engine Shutdown with Enhanced

Keypad (where fitted)
The automatic engine shutdown system on tractors

equipped with the optional Enhanced Keypad
provides a further level of protection. The system
monitors four key areas that are critical to the safe
operation of engine and driveline and, in the unlikely
event that one or more of these reaches a critical
condition, the engine will be shut down.
 Engine oil pressure falls below safe limits.

 Engine coolant temperature exceeds safe limits.
 Driveline oil pressure falls below safe limits.

 Driveline oil temperature rises above safe limits.
Prior to engine shutdown the red Stop light will start

to flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition,
the engine fault warning and malfunction symbols
will flash alternately in the dot matrix display. If, after
30 seconds, the operator has not stopped the
engine, the automatic shutdown feature will be
activated and the engine will be shut down.
12
After the engine has shut down, the red Stop light will
remain on but the alarm will cease to sound. Both
engine and malfunction symbols will continue to flash
alternately.
The automatic engine shutdown function may be

programmed by your authorised dealer to operate in
one of three modes:
1. No engine shutdown. In this mode the engine is

not capable of automatic shutdown.
2. Always engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown at any time if one or more of the
monitored conditions reaches a critical level.
3. Stationary engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown only during stationary operations if
one or more of the monitored conditions reaches
a critical level.
Although the Automatic Engine Shudown linked to

the Keypad can be disabled, the system monitored
by the Engine Control Unit will continue to function in
the normal way.
3--14
ENGINE POWER MANAGEMENT
Engine Power Management (EPM) is an

electronically controlled engine power boost function
which increases power levels where high loads may
compromise tractor performance.
When the system is activated, the EPM light (1) in the

instrument cluster will illuminate. As the power
requirement reduces and EPM is de--activated, the
light will extinguish.
PM boost levels are variable depending on engine

load, driveline torque and tractor speed. Dependent
on tractor model, the available power increase is
between 1 and 26 kW (1.3 and 35 hp) and will vary
as the load on the engine changes.
EPM is a totally automated function requiring no

input from the operator. Engine power boost can be
activated during P.T.O. operations, road transport
applications and when operating with externally
powered hydraulic equipment.
IMPORTANT: Engine Power Management will be

disabled if the engine coolant temperature exceeds
105C (221F). In this situation either increase the
engine speed or reduce the load on the engine until
the coolant temperature is reduced.
P.T.O. Operations
Engine Power Management will only function when

the following criteria are met:
Engine sped above 1300 e.r.p.m.

PTO fully engaged.
Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH).
PTO power output is above 27 kW (36.2 hp.).
PTO driveline torque is above 250 Nm.
Engine coolant temperature below 105 C
(221 F)
NOTE: Engine Power Management will operate at all

P.T.O. speeds. 13
With the tractor moving and the engine speed above

1300 r.p.m. engaging the rear P.T.O. will put EPM
into standby mode.
3--15
As the torque and load on the PTO reaches or

exceeds the above levels, the warning light (1) will
illuminate and Engine Power Management will be
activated.
As the load on the engine is reduced, boost levels will

gradually decrease until engine power levels are
within normal limits.
Road Transport Applications

With Power Command Transmission
Engine speed is above 1300 r.p.m.

16th gear or above is engaged.
(221 F)
EPM will be de--activated if the following occurs:

14
Engine speed falls below 1300 r.p.m.
Transmission downshifts below 16th gear
Engine coolant temperature exceeds 105 C
(221 F)
With Auto Command Transmission

Engine speed is above 1300 r.p.m.
Tractor speed above 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)
(221 F)

Tractor speed falls below 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)
(221 F)
3--16
External Hydraulic Operations

(Power Command only)
Engine Power Management monitors the load on the

main hydraulic pump and in situations where there is
significant increase in horsepower requirements to
operate external hydraulic services, EPM will
respond by boosting engine power.
To compensate for additional hydraulic loads, EPM

gradually increases engine power to maintain tractor
performance. As the load on the hydraulic system
decreases then the level of power boost will also be
reduced. 15

Engine speed above 1300 r.p.m.
Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH).
(221 F)

Tractor forward speed falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3
MPH).
(221 F)
3--17
ENGINE SPEED MANAGEMENT
With Engine Speed Management (CRPM), the

operator may pre--set one or two fixed engine speeds
appropriate to the work in hand. ESM will maintain a
fixed engine speed, it cannot be used to provide a
constant groundspeed (cruise control).
With ESM activated the indicator light on the

instrument panel (1), will illuminate when the system
is in operation.
When activated, ESM constantly monitors engine

load and speed for any change. If engine load 16
increases and the r.p.m. begins to fall, ESM will
electronically adjust the engine speed control unit to
compensate, thereby maintaining a constant engine
r.p.m.
Setting Engine Speed Management
ESM can be programmed in two ways, either by

using the four switches on the Integrated Control
Panel or through the colour display.
Setting with ICP Panel
Four switches control the ESM function.

1. Increase engind speed.
2. Store/activate programme 1.
3. Store/activate programme 2.
4. Decrease engine speed .
To create ESM programme 1, start the engine and

set the r.p.m. to the desired level using the hand
throttle or foot throttle. Depress/hold switch (2) for 2
seconds and the light in the switch will begin to flash. 17
This indicates the current engine speed is being
stored.
After 2 seconds the light will stop flashing and will

remain on. ESM is now active and operating at the
current engine speed.
3--18
NOTE: If the ESM programme key is released whilst

the light is flashing, Engine Speed Management will
reset to the default speed of 850 e.r.p.m., depress
the ESM programme switch again to re--start the
procedure.
To store a second ESM programme, repeat the

above process using switch (3) if required.
A programme can be de--activated at any time by

depressing the appropriate programme switch.
18
Setting with Colour Display
. Work condition
. Settings
. CRPM
The Constant RPM setting screen is used to set or

adjust engine speed settings for CRPM
programmes.
1. CRPM programme 1.
. CRPM 1. Adjust the engine speed in the 19

pop--up screen by touching A or ". When the
desired speed has been set, touch Enter to store
the setting.
2. CRPM programme 2.
. CRPM 2. Repeat the above procedure to

set a second CRPM speed.
3--19
Recalling Stored Programmes
Once stored, ESM programmes can be recalled at

any time.
NOTE: If the hand throttle is used to set a new engine

speed then the lever should not be moved again until
ESM has been de--activated as this will terminate the
programme. With ESM switched off the lever can
moved without affecting the setting.
At key--off, the setting remains in the ESM memory

for future use or until a new programme is entered.
20
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), programme
settings made during tractor operation are
transferred from the operating memory to the main
memory. To provide sufficient time for the data to
transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.
Operating with Engine Speed Management
A ESM programme can be re--called or engaged at

any time providing the engine is running.
Momentarily depress programme switch (2) or (3),
the ESM lights in the switch and lamp panel (1) will
illuminate. The engine speed will increase or
decrease to the pre--stored level.
When a ESM programme switch is depressed for the

first time after start--up, the rate at which the engine
speed changes will be slower than normal. In any
subsequent activation of ESM programmes the
speed will ramp up or down at the normal rate. 21
With a ESM programme activated it is possible to

change the speed setting for that programme.
Momentarily depressing speed adjustment switches
(1) and (4) will increase or decrease the speed in 10
r.p.m. increments.
Maintaining pressure on the switch will permit the

speed to ramp up or down at 100 r.p.m./second,
providing there is no load on the engine.
3--20
ESM speed settings may be temporarily over--ridden

using the foot throttle without affecting the
programme. This applies to Power Command
transmissions at any time or Auto Command
transmissions in neutral/park or when operating in
manual mode.
When operating in the field, shuttling between

programmes 1 and 2 may be achieved by depressing
the appropriate programme switch or, if more
convenient, the Headland Turn Sequence step
switch (1) Figure 22, providing HTS is not activated.
NOTE: Moving the hand throttle in ESM mode will

disable the speed settings and return engine speed
control to the hand or foot throttle.
To Exit Engine Speed Management:
Depress the ESM programme switch.

Move the hand throttle. 22
Turn the key--start to the off position.
3--21
HEADLAND TURN SEQUENCE
Quick Guide to Headland Turn Sequence (HTS)
Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of actions, such as those made during a headland turn, HTS can
be used to create, save and play--back these actions.
The following text is provided as a quick guide to the operation of Headland Turn Sequence. A more
comprehensive guide to the operation of HTS can be found beginning on page 3--24.
NOTE: For HTS to function in the record or play mode, the hand throttle must be set above 1000 e.r.p.m. HTS
recordings can be made with the tractor moving or stationary.
ACTION -- RECORDING CONTROL VISUAL

1. Depress and hold the record switch for three seconds. The
recording symbol will flash in the HTS display.
2. To start recording a sequence, momentarily depress the step

switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The recording symbol will cease
to flash and will remain displayed.
3. Carry out the headland manoevre in the normal way. As each

step in the sequence is recorded, the relevant symbol will
appear in the display.
When a step is completed and a new one begins, the symbol

for the completed step will scroll downwards to be replaced by
a new one.
To record a second HTS sequence go to paragraph 4. To end

the current recording go to paragraph 6.
4. To record a second sequence after the first one is completed,

depress and hold the step switch for three seconds, the
recording symbol will start to flash.
5. To start recording, depress the step switch again. The

recording symbol will cease to flash and will remain displayed,
the second sequence can now be started.
6. When the HTS recordings are completed, momentarily

depress the record switch to save the recorded sequences
and exit HTS.
3--22
ACTION -- PLAYBACK CONTROL VISUAL

1. To enter play--back mode, depress/hold the AUTO or
MANUAL play--back switch. A sequence number will appear
below the play--back symbol. 1
2. If a second sequence was recorded, continue to depress/hold
the AUTO or MANUAL play--back switch to cycle through the
sequence numbers. When the required number is displayed,
release the switch.
2
The sequence number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol indicating HTS is in stand--by mode.
3. To begin play--back, depress and hold the step switch for

approximately one second until a ’beep’ is heard. The
play--back symbol will stop flashing and will remain on.
NOTE: In MANUAL re--play the sequence will be paused after

each step is completed, momentarily depress the step switch
to re--play the next step.
3. During play--back, the function symbols will scroll upwards

towards the top of the HTS display.
4. After the current sequence has been re--played, the next

sequence will be held in standby mode (play--back symbol
flashing). Depress and hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is
heard, release the switch to begin play--back of the next
sequence.
5. To skip a play--back sequence it will be necessary to exit HTS

by depressing the appropriate play--back switch. To re--enter
HTS, start at paragraph 1 above.
See page 3--27 for an explanation of HTS symbols.
3--23
Headland Turn Sequence (HTS)
HTS is a system that is able to record a series of

actions or ’steps’ and play them back exactly as they
were recorded. Each ’step’ is created by operating a
control which is linked to the HTS system.
When in record mode, the movement of an HTS

linked control will be timed and by adding the
individual steps together an HTS sequence is
formed.
HTS Sequences may be re--played as a continuous

operation (AUTOMATIC) or as a series of individual
steps (MANUAL), each one initiated by depressing
the step switch.
Up to 32 individual steps may be recorded in each

sequence.
Four switches control the operation of HTS:

1. Record switch. This key is used to activate and
de--activate the recording mode.
2. Auto play--back switch. To activate the automatic
re--play function depress this key. Press again to
de--activate auto play--back.
3. Manual play--back switch. To engage manual
re--play of each HTS step, depress this key,
depress again to disengage manual re--play.
4. Step switch. The step switch is used to start, 23
pause or stop a sequence. The step switch can
also be used to insert pauses during a recording
or to pause a sequence during play--back.
NOTE: Each pause inserted during a recording will

be recognised as a sequence step by HTS.
3--24
Where HTS is used to create a recording, the

following actions or functions may, depending on
tractor specification, be included in the sequence.
 Regulate engine speed.

 Shift transmission gears up, and/or down
(Power Command).
 Raise and lower the rear three point hitch.
 Raise and lower the front three point hitch.*
 Operate electronic remote valves.
 Hydraulically adjust the top link and/or left--hand
lift rod.* 24
*Where fitted
NOTE: On tractors equipped with a factory fitted

front loader and mid--mount remote valves, the
operation of the mid--mount valves cannot be
included in a Headland Turn Sequence.
IMPORTANT: When operating with a Power

Command tractor in Field Auto Mode, activating HTS
will suspend the Auto Mode function. After
completing a headland manoeuvre sequence, HTS
will be suspended and the Field Auto Mode function
will be resumed.
In a similar way, ESM will also be disabled when HTS
is active and will be re--enabled when HTS is
suspended. However, the ESM light will still remain
illuminated while the programme is disabled.
When activated, a symbol will appear at the top of the

vertical HTS symbol bar (1).
The symbol will confirm whether HTS is in the record,

save or play--back mode.
When recording or re--playing a sequence, each

action or step will be represented by a new symbol
and description appearing in the HTS bar.
See page 3--27 for an explanation of HTS symbols

and their function. The list is comprehensive and
may include functions not available on your tractor.
25
3--25
As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol

will move down the display as the next step begins.
The symbol for the new step will appear immediately
below the record symbol. Active symbols will appear
with an orange background, recorded symbols will
have a red background.
During play--back, step symbols will scroll upwards

from the bottom of the display. When a symbol
reaches the top of the display (below the play--back
symbol) the corresponding function will begin to
operate.
A maximum of five step symbols may be displayed 26

in addition to the HTS mode symbol.
To view the full sequence select HTS Editor or

Manager screens and use the YB to scroll through
the symbols.
IMPORTANT: If a fault occurs and the error symbol

is displayed, exit and re--enter HTS to clear the fault.
Depending on the operating mode, the colour of the

HTS bar will change and will appear as shown in
following chart.
HTS Status HTS Bar

Normal Mode White
Record enabled White
Record active Red
Record paused Yellow
Record suspended Yellow
Record saving White
HTS Status HTS Bar
Play sub--sequence select White
Play enabled White
Play active Green
Play paused Yellow
Play suspend Yellow
Play halted (all symbols flashing) Yellow
HTS error Orange
3--26
Explanation of HTS Symbols

The symbols shown on the following pages are examples of those which may, depending on tractor specification
and sequence content, appear in the display when HTS is active. Descriptions identified with “ “ will appear to
the right of the symbol in the HTS display.
Switch Symbol
“Error”
Record Mode
Switch Symbol “Engine Speed Up”

Automatic Playback Mode (Power Command)
Switch Symbol “Engine Speed Down”

Manual Playback Mode (Power Command)
HTS Screen “Reversible fan“
2 Sequence Number “Up Shift”

(Power Command)
A/B Letter Symbols “Down Shift”

(Power Command)
Record Mode PTO Mode Engaged

(Auto Command)
“Pause” Cruise Mode Engaged

(Auto Command)
Save Manual Mode Engaged

(Auto Command)
Auto Playback Mode “Shuttle Forward”

(Power Command)
Manual Playback Mode “Shuttle Reverse”

(Power Command)
3--27
Explanation of HTS Symbols (continued)

“Diff Lock ON” “Rear PTO Disengaged”

(Power Command) (Power Command)
“Diff Lock OFF”

“Rockshaft Up”
(Power Command)
“Diff Lock Auto” “Rockshaft Down”

(Power Command)
“MFD ON” “Rockshaft Float”

(Power Command)
“MFD OFF” “Adjust Pitch Downward”

(Power Command) (Hydraulic top link)
“MFD Auto” “Adjust Pitch Upward”

(Power Command) (Hydraulic top link)
“Adjust Tilt Downright”

“Fast Steer Armed“ (RH Hydraulic lift rod)
“Adjust Tilt Downleft”

“Fast Steer Not Armed“ (RH Hydraulic lift rod)
“Autoguidance ON” “Remote Cylinder Extend”
“Autoguidance OFF” “Remote Cylinder Retract”
“Rear PTO Engaged” “Remote Cylinder Float”

(Power Command)
3--28
Explanation of HTS Symbols (continued)

“Remote Cylinder Neutral”
“Front Hitch Raise”
“Front Hitch Lower”
“Front Hitch Float”
“Front Remote Cylinder Extend”
“Front Remote Cylinder Retract”
“Front Remote Cylinder Float”
“Front PTO Engaged”
“Front PTO Disengaged”
3--29
Recording a Sequence
NOTE: For HTS to function, the engine speed must

be above 1000 e.r.p.m.
To start recording a Headland Turn Sequence,

depress and hold the record switch (1), for three
seconds, the light in the switch will start to flash. HTS
is now activated but remains in standby mode.
The HTS recording symbol will appear at the top of

the sequence bar and this will start to flash.
To start a recording, momentarily depress the step 27

switch (4). The recording symbol and switch light will
cease to flash indicating HTS is now recording.
NOTE: Only the controls linked to the HTS system

will be recorded. Controls not linked to HTS will be
ignored.
As each HTS linked function is activated, a new

symbol will appear in the orange section of the HTS
bar immediately below the recording symbol.
As each step is recorded the corresponding symbol

will move down the sequence bar into the red
section.
After the first HTS sequence has been completed, a

second (opposite headland) sequence may then be
recorded. It is possible to record 2 separate
sequences under one programme number providing
the total number of steps does not exceed 32.
Up to 30 sequences/programmes may be recorded

and stored in the database.
To record a second sequence within the current

programme i.e. for the opposite headland, depress
and hold the step switch (4) for three seconds. This
will suspend recording and put the system into
standby mode. 28
The recording symbol will start to flash and

’Recording Suspended’ will appear alongside the
symbol.
3--30
To begin a second sequence, momentarily depress

the step switch (4). The record symbol will cease to
flash as the second sequence commences.
NOTE: Power Command transmission shifts made

whilst the tractor is in reverse will not be recorded or
played back by HTS. A pause will be automatically
entered in the sequence at this point.
During a recording, pauses may be inserted into a

sequence by momentarily depressing the step
switch (4). Recording will be suspended and the
pause symbol will be inserted into the sequence,
depress the step switch again to resume recording.
To save a sequence, depress the record switch (1)

Figure 27. The save symbol will replace the record
symbol in the display and the sequence will be saved.
New HTS sequences are saved in the HTS controller

memory. If a new sequence with a different number
is saved, the first sequence will be moved from the
controller to the HTS database. Only the sequence
currently in play is held in the controller memory.
HTS will automatically generate a number for each

recorded sequence but this can be edited at any time
by the operator in the HTS Editor screen.
NOTE: If, during a recording sequence, the engine

is stopped (key--off) then all steps recorded up to that
point will be saved.
NOTE: Direction changes are not recorded but a

pause will be inserted into the sequence where this
occurs. A pause is counted as a sequence step.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), any

adjustments to electronically stored settings made
during tractor operation are transferred from the
operating memory to the main memory. To allow
sufficient time for the data to transfer, pause for a
minimum of five seconds before turning the key on
again.
3--31
IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote

valve operation in a HTS sequence, it is important to
allow sufficient time for the movement of the control
lever to be recorded as it passes through R, N, L and
F positions (or vice versa). Pausing the lever in each
position for approximately 1/2 second will provide
sufficient time for the step to be recorded accurately.
Moving the lever too quickly may confuse data
transfer causing the implement to respond
incorrectly on play--back.
NOTE: The maximum time permitted for a single

step in an EHR valve sequence is 12 minutes.
29
HTS and Colour Display Screens
. HTS
The HTS system has three basic operating screens,
these are the main screen, the editor screen and the
manager screen. The editor and manager screens
have a number of sub screens and pop--ups which
can be used for editing, saving and downloading
sequences.
HTS main
NOTE: The function of this screen is to display a

sequence in the record and playback modes, they
cannot be edited or saved in the main screen.
. Main
The HTS main screen provides a visual reference of
each step in a sequence as it is recorded or played
back. The number and/or description of a sequence
appears at the top of the screen under the heading
’Current sequence’.
30
Where a new sequence is being recorded the
’Current sequence’ will be shown as ’Not available’.
When the sequence is saved, HTS will automatically
generate a reference number.
Each step is identified by a symbol and a short

description, a list of these can be found starting on
page 3--27.
Up to 32 steps may be recorded in one sequence.

Where a pause has been inserted during recording
it will be recognised as a step. If an operator attempts
to record more than 32 steps a pop--up screen will
appear informing them the current sequence is full
and no more steps are available.
Where it is necessary to record more than 32 steps

for one field operation, a second sequence with a
new number will have to be generated.
3--32
HTS Editor
The Editor screen allows the operator to review HTS

sequences, change the names, add pauses and
re--save the updated sequence. Pauses added by
the operator can be removed in Editor but steps and
pauses which were recorded by HTS cannot be
changed.
Editor can only access the sequence currently held

in the HTS controller memory, sequences in the
database will need to be recalled using the manager
screen.
31
. Editor
Each sequence number appears in the Editor screen

(2). This number is generated automatically when a
sequence is saved. However, the number may be
edited by the operator to create a new description
which relates to the work in hand or to a particular
field or area.
1. . Sequence to recall an HTS sequence. The

pop--up menu will allow you to select or edit the
name of a saved sequence.
Select. Touch to access current list of
sequences.
Edit Name. Touch to display character screen.
Make the necessary changes then touch Enter to
return to the editor screen.
NOTE: Touching New will have no effect in this

screen. Sequence identification is generated
externally by the HTS system.
2. . Save to store a sequence after manually

changing the description or after adding and
removing pauses.
3. . Add Pause. To add a pause to an existing

sequence, touch Add Pause (4). A pause will be
inserted below the step and a delete box will be
added to the new pause step. Confirm the
change by touching Yes in the pop--up menu.
4. Where a sequence has more than 5 steps, use

the YB arrows to scroll through the sequence.
3--33
. Manager
In the manager screen, the operator can create a

new implement description, recall and change
exsisting sequence details and/or delete sequences
in the database.
Where an HTS sequence can be used for more than

one implement, such as a non reversible plough and
cultivator, then the same sequence can be saved
under different headings i.e. ’Plough’ and ’Cultivator’.
This can only be applied to implements working at
the same depth.
32
The manager screen also permits the operator to
recall a sequence from the database and upload it
into the controller memory for playback.
1. . Implement to open the pop--up menu.

implements.
Edit Name. Touch to display pop--up character
screen. Make the necessary changes then touch
Enter to save the new description.

screen. New sequence identification is generated
2. . Sequence to recall an HTS sequence. The

pop--up menu will allow you to select or edit the
name of a saved sequence.
sequences.
Edit Name. Touch to display character screen.
Make the necessary changes then touch Enter to
return to the editor screen.

screen. Sequence identification is generated
3--34
3. . Download. New sequences are initially

held in the HTS controller, these are then
transferred to the database when a new
sequence is recorded or an exsisting one
recalled.
Before an exsisting sequence can be

downloaded into the controller, it must be
recalled from the database. Touch Sequence to
access the database list, select the required
sequence then touch Enter.
The required number will appear in the sequence

box, touch Download to transfer the sequence 33
to the controller memory.
4. Sequences displayed in the manager screen can

viewed using the YB to scroll through the
sequence step by step.
3--35
Playback a Sequence
CAUTION
Before commencing work, it is recommended that
HTS sequences are given a ’dry run’ to ensure all
sequence steps have been retained in the memory,
and any timed EHR sequences replay correctly.
To play--back a recorded sequence, press the switch

(1) for AUTO re--play, press the switch (2) for
MANUAL re--play. Play--back will be activated but will
remain in standby mode and the light in the switch will
flash.
If a second sequence was recorded within the same

programme, the operator may now cycle between
sequences 1 and 2 by pressing and holding the
AUTO or MANUAL play--back switch. The sequence
number will appear immeadiately below the
play--back symbol.
When the correct number appears, release the 34

switch.
Before reaching the point at which the sequence is

to start, depress and hold the step switch (4) until a
’beep’ is heard. When the start point is reached,
release the switch. Play--back will start as soon as
the switch is released and the first operating symbol
in the sequence will appear below the play--back
symbol.
NOTE: To initiate play--back, the engine speed must

be above 1000 e.r.p.m.
When play--back begins, the symbol will stop

flashing.
35
As each function comes into play, the corresponding
symbol will appear immediately below the play--back
symbol.
3--36
Subsequent symbols in the sequence will appear

below the one currently in play. As each step is
completed, the corresponding symbol will move
upwards and disappear from the display to be
replaced by the next one.
If play--back is activated in MANUAL mode,

depressing the step switch (4) will only play the first
step in the sequence. When the first step has been
completed the sequence will pause until the step
switch is pressed again to re--play the next step.
In play--back, each step is re--played exactly as it was

recorded.
NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be used to

increase engine speed during HTS play--back.
If pauses were inserted into the sequence during

recording, play--back will automatically stop at each
pause point. To resume the sequence, depress and
hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The next
step will start immediately the switch is released.
By delaying the point at where the step switch is used

to re--start a sequence in AUTO mode, adjustments
can be made to the time span of a sequence or to
extend the delay between individual steps.
In play--back mode, a sequence may be stopped at

any time by depressing the step switch (4). The
sequence will pause and play--back symbol will begin
to flash. 36
3--37
IMPORTANT: If the step switch is used to suspend

a function in play, all current HTS actions, including
timed electronic remote valve sequences, will be
aborted and it may be necessary to manually
complete the paused step before re--starting HTS
play--back.
To resume sequence play--back, depress and hold

the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard then release the
switch.
IMPORTANT: During play--back, one or more of the

following actions will cause HTS to be stopped and
all automated functions, including timed EHR
sequences, to be terminated:
 The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds.
 Fender mounted 3--point hitch or P.T.O. controls
are operated.
 Hand throttle is set to idle.
 Operating one or more of the HTS linked tractor
controls to override the sequence.
NOTE: A control is not regarded as overridden by

HTS until the sequence reaches the point at which
the automated operation of that control begins. At
this time, the sequence will be stopped.
On completion of a sequence, or if HTS is halted

during play--back, electronic remote valves will not
return to float even if the relevant lever is in the float
position unless:
 The lever was in the float position when the HTS
system was activated.
 The last HTS step selected the valve float
function.
3--38
If an EHR function is in play and the step switch (4)

is used to cancel the action i.e. to stop a hydraulic
cylinder extending, then the cylinder will stop and
play--back will be suspended. The cancelled action
will be by--passed and the sequence will go to the
next step when play--back is re--started.
However, cancelled actions remain in the sequence
memory for subsequent re--plays.
To continue a sequence, depress and hold the step

switch until a ’beep’ is heard, then release the switch.
NOTE: Where an HTS sequence is suspended, the

play symbol will flash in the display until the step 37
switch is pressed to re--start the sequence.
IMPORTANT: If a sequence is halted by the operator

by leaving the seat for more than 2 seconds, the
current engine speed will be maintained until the
operator returns to the seat, the throttle setting is
changed or the HTS sequence is cancelled.
Before leaving the seat, always deactivate HTS
and apply the tractor parking brake.
Deleting HTS Sequences
Select from the main menu screen:
. Data management
. Delete
. B on the Data Type box.
A Pop--up screen will appear providing a choice of

data type to be edited. Touch Sequence, to access
the Delete screen. 38
Touch the down arrows on the right of the ’Sequence’

box and a drop down menu listing all saved
sequences will appear. All sequences will have a X
to the left of the number/description.
. None to clear all X’s then use the YB arrows

to scroll through the list until the appropriate
sequence appears.
3--39
Touch the box to the left of the sequence and X will

appear in the box. Touch Enter and the sequence
number/description will appear in the sequence box.
. Delete to clear the sequence. Another pop--up

will appear asking to Confirm Delete, touch Yes and
the sequence will be deleted from the memory.
In the case where more than one sequence is to be

deleted, a figure in the box will show the total number
of sequences to be deleted, touch Yes to delete all.
39
3--40
FAST STEER (where fitted)
The optional Fast Steer system is designed to

provide quick steering response when required i.e.
when operating with a front loader or carrying out a
headland manoeuvre.
From the straight ahead position, Fast Steer will

provide full right or left hand steering lock with less
than a 10 movement of the steering wheel.
The speed at which the front wheel angle changes is

dependent on how far the steering wheel is turned.
Turning the steering wheel 1 or 2 degrees will
produce a slow steering response although full lock
can still be achieved. Increasing the steering wheel
angle will produce a faster steering response.
Fast Steer Isolator Switch
IMPORTANT: Before travelling on the public

highway Fast Steer must be de--activated and
normal steering re--instated.
To check normal steering operation, turn the wheel
fully from lock to lock before starting your journey.
NOTE: Fast Steer will not operate if the tractor speed

is above 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH).
To activate the Fast Steer function, depress the top

of the isolator switch Figure 40.
40
A green warning light (3) Figure 41, in the instrument
panel will illuminate to confirm the system is in
standby mode.
NOTE: If Fast Steer is activated at engine key--off,

the system will not function at key--on. The green
warning light (3) will not illuminate and the yellow
indicator light (2) will flash when the centre ring is
depressed. To re--energise the system, depress the
Fast Steer button twice to de--activate and
re--activate the system.
41
3--41
Fast Steer Operation
To operate Fast Steer, depress and hold the centre

ring (4) on the steering wheel, to disengage, release
the ring. With the centre ring depressed, a yellow
indicator light (2) Figure 43 will illuminate on the
instrument panel. It will extinguish when the centre
ring is released.
Fast Steer can only be operated if the all the following

conditions are met. Attempting to use the Fast Steer
function without meeting these conditions, will cause
the yellow indicator light to flash.
1. The isolator switch is ON and the green warning 42
light is illuminated.
2. The speed of the tractor is below 10 K/mh
(6.2 MPH).
3. The transmission oil temperature is above 5 C
(41 F).
NOTE: Where the transmission oil temperature is

low and Fast Steer is to be used, it is recommended
to turn the steering wheel twice, from full lock to full
lock, before operating with Fast Steer.
NOTE: If tractor speed exceeds 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH)

with Fast Steer in operation, it will be disengage and
the green indicator light will flash.
Fast Steer will be disabled if a fault occurs. Should

the system become disabled, an audible warning will
sound and an error code will appear in the instrument
panel display. If the fault is of a critical nature, the
’STOP’ warning lamp will also flash on the instrument 43
panel, consult your authorised dealer.
To re--activate Fast Steer, depress the isolator switch

to turn the system ’OFF’, correct the fault, then
depress the switch again to re--energise the system.
IMPORTANT: To promote safe operation of Fast

Steer, it is advised that the operator become familiar
with the system before operating in the field.
3--42
REAR POWER TAKE--OFF
Description
The rear Power Take Off on your tractor is equipped

with a modulated clutch engagement system to
provide smooth transfer of power when operating
with heavy, high inertia, P.T.O. driven equipment.
Various combinations of rear P.T.O. speeds are

available, dependent upon tractor model and
country.
a) 540/1000 speeds with inter-changeable output

shafts and optional fender--mounted switches.
b) 540E/1000 speeds with inter-changeable output
shafts and optional fender--mounted switches.
c) 540E/1000 shiftable with inter--changeable
output shafts and optional fender--mounted
switches.
d) 1000E/1000 shiftable with inter-changeable
output shafts and optional fender-mounted
switches.
e) 540/540E/1000/1000E electronic shiftable with

inter--changeable output shafts and optional
fender--mounted switches.
3--43
P.T.O Switch Operation
The P.T.O. is engaged and disengaged by means of

a switch (1), on the right-hand console. The adjacent
warning light (2) will illuminate when the P.T.O. is
engaged.
To engage P.T.O. drive, depress the knob (1), lift the

collar (3), and then lift the switch upwards. P.T.O.
drive is disengaged by pushing the switch down. It is
not necessary to support the collar (3), when
disengaging P.T.O. drive.
If P.T.O. drive has been engaged using the fender 44

mounted switches, it can be stopped by either
operating the fender mounted switch again or by
depressing the top of the switch in the cab.
P.T.O. Switch Operation -- Anti--Stall Feature
If, when operating with high inertia equipment, the

P.T.O. is engaged at too low an engine speed, an
Auto Stall feature will automatically disable P.T.O.
start--up and a symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display.
The system will be disabled until the P.T.O. control is

returned to the OFF position at which time the Auto
Stall symbol will be extinguished. Re--engage the
P.T.O. at a higher engine speed.
45
3--44
PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out
To engage the PTO, depress the knob (1) then lift the
collar (3) and knob together. This movement should
be decisive in its application as hesitant or incorrect
operation of the knob or collar may cause the PTO
system to Time--Out.
Do not:
 Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 30
seconds.
 Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (3)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the 46
PTO.
 Operate the fender mounted and internal PTO
controls simultaneously or within 2 seconds of
each other.
Any or all of the above actions will cause the PTO to

become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds and
a Time--Out symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display.
Should this occur, the non--critical alarm will sound

for 4 seconds and the amber warning light on the
instrument panel will flash for 10 seconds.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
47
When the Time--Out period is complete and the
symbol disappears from the display, normal P.T.O.
operation is re--enabled.
3--45
P.T.O. Range Lever
With shiftable P.T.O., a range lever is provided to

select a suitable P.T.O. speed to match the
implement. The range lever is located at the rear of
the right-hand console. Ensure the selected speed
corresponds with the P.T.O. shaft currently installed.
With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. switch in

the disengaged position, depress the button (1), lift
the spring loaded collar (2), and move the lever to
engage the desired P.T.O. speed.
IMPORTANT: The range lever cannot be moved until

the spring-loaded collar (2) is lifted.
48
Depressing button (1) automatically releases the
P.T.O. brake providing a smoother engagement of
P.T.O. ratio.
IMPORTANT: Although P.T.O. drive may be

engaged or disengaged with the tractor moving or
stationary, do not attempt to select a different range
unless the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O.
disengaged -- switch in the fully down position.
Electronic P.T.O. Range Shift (where fitted)
On tractors with electronic P.T.O. range shift, the

range lever is replaced by a rotary control (2) located
at the rear of the right--hand fender.
Depending on tractor specification, electronic range

shift will provide two or four P.T.O. speeds.
With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

switch in the disengaged position, select the required
speed by means of the rotary control. When the
P.T.O. is subsequently engaged the shift will
automatically be made. The shift will be confirmed in 49
the P.T.O. display.
When selecting neutral from 540 or 1000 speeds, the

shift will be immediate as the control is rotated.
IMPORTANT: Attempting to shift between speeds,

or from neutral to a speed position while the P.T.O.
is engaged will disable the system. Disconnect
P.T.O. drive by moving the switch to the ’off’ position
and then re--select the required P.T.O. speed.
3--46
Electronic P.T.O. Displays
When operating the electronic P.T.O shift, a symbol

will appear in the display depending on the action
taken. The displays are as follows:
Shift to Neutral in Progress

Ratio Increase in Progress
Shift from Low to Neutral or High to
Shift from N to High or Low to High
Neutral
No Shift Allowed
Ratio Decrease in Progress
Shift attempt with P.T.O. engaged
Shift from N to Low or High to Low
Disengage P.T.O. and shift again
*P.T.O. Error (Warning buzzer)

Ratio Change OK
Shift P.T.O. to Neutral and re--select
Shift has been completed successfully
chosen ratio.
*The P.T.O. error will appear inversed (grey on black)

in the upper display (Action Required).
P.T.O. Brake Operation
An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed to stop shaft

rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is disengaged. To
avoid overstressing the P.T.O. brake, slow down the
implement by reducing engine speed before
disengaging the P.T.O. This is particularly important
with implements having a high inertia.
Such implements should, ideally, be fitted with an

overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake when
operating high inertia implements, hold down the top
of the switch (2), to disengage the brake and allow
the implement to come to rest naturally. 50
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.
3--47
P.T.O. SYSTEM INFORMATION
General Information Operating with Stationary P.T.O. Equipment
Generally speaking, P.T.O. driven equipment not Before operating static P.T.O. equipment, make sure
having a high power requirement is designed to run the tractor is safely positioned, the transmission is in
at 540 P.T.O. rev/min and will have a 6--spline female neutral, the handbrake is applied and, where fitted,
coupling. the electronic park brake is engaged.
Equipment having a high power requirement is Sitting in the seat, engage P.T.O. drive and,
designed to operate at 1000 P.T.O. rev/min and will observing the instrument panel display, set the
be provided with a 21--spline female coupling. appropriate engine speed.
With two--speed selectable P.T.O., 540 equipment NOTE: On tractors fitted with Engine Speed
with a very low power requirement may be run in the Management, it may be prudent to use the ESM
higher P.T.O. speed range but at a reduced engine function to maintain a constant speed if the load on
speed. This will promote lower fuel consumption and the P.T.O. is subject to variations.
engine wear.
On leaving the tractor seat an intermittent alarm will
Tractors with Economy P.T.O. settings have the sound for approximately 10 seconds, the amber
advantage of running 540 or 1000 P.T.O. driven warning light will illuminate and the P.T.O. symbol will
equipment at a lower engine speed. Engage the appear in the Dot Matrix Display. If the alarm sound
Economy position on the range selector. is a constant tone, check to ensure the handbrake is
firmly applied.
IMPORTANT: Implements with a high power
requirement should be operated with the 1000
rev/min. P.T.O. (21--spline shaft). If it is necessary to
use the 6--spline shaft (at 540 rev/min.) to operate
implements having a power requirement of more
than 75 horsepower, then it is strongly
recommended that the implement is fitted with a slip
clutch to avoid damage to the P.T.O. output shaft and
other tractor components.
NOTE: When required, change the P.T.O. shaft to

suit the operation and equipment in use, as
described under ‘Changing the P.T.O. Output Shaft’
on page 3--57 .
3--48
TWO--SPEED P.T.O. WITH INTER-

CHANGEABLE SHAFTS
A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
A 21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,

designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is also
supplied with the tractor.
An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm)

diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is
available from your dealer.
Operating
Select a suitable speed by inserting the correct

P.T.O. shaft into the rear transmission, see page
3--57.
With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain in the up
position and the adjacent warning light (2) will
illuminate.
51
Engine/P.T.O. Speeds with 2 Speed P.T.O.
Selector Engine Speed P.T.O. Speed

Position (rev/min) (rev/min)
540/1000* 1950/1893 540/1000
540E*/1000* 1569/1893 540/1000
* with 20 or 21 spline shaft.
Use the hand throttle to obtain the required

engine/P.T.O. speeds, the P.T.O. shaft speed can be
displayed at (1).
52
3--49
NOTE: The warning light will be illuminated when the

P.T.O. is engaged. When changing from 540 to 1000
rev/min/shaft speed, the warning light may flash (but
can be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed passes
through the 630 rev/min range. This will only occur
the first time the P.T.O. is used after changing the
speed setting.
When operating in the 1000 speed setting, the light

may also flash again at 1100 P.T.O. rev/min to
indicate that overspeeding has occurred in the 1000
rev/min P.T.O. range.
To disconnect P.T.O. drive, reduce engine speed and

press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the
Power Take Off. The warning light (2), will extiguish
when P.T.O. drive is disengaged.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure

any P.T.O. driven equipment is allowed to come to a
complete stop before leaving the seat.
DANGER
53
NOTE: If the engine is stopped with P.T.O. drive
engaged, the P.T.O. will not operate when the engine
is restarted until the P.T.O. knob (1) is reset. Return
the control knob manually to the ‘off’ position then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.
For information on changing the P.T.O. shaft, refer to

page 3--57.
3--50
MULTI--SPEED, SHIFTABLE P.T.O.
A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
A 21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,

designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is also
supplied with the tractor.
An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm)

diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is
available from your dealer.
Operating
Engage the appropriate P.T.O. speed using the

range lever or the optional electronic control as
previously described.
NOTE: The P.T.O. range lever should always be in the

1000E/1000 rev/min position when the 21--spline shaft
is installed. If you only ever operate with a 21--spline
shaft, leave the range lever in this position.
With the engine running at approximately 1000

rev/min., lift the knob on the switch (1) and move
forwards to engage the P.T.O. The warning light (2)
will illuminate to confirm engagement.
54
With the P.T.O. engaged gradually increase engine
r.p.m. using the hand throttle until the appropriate
speed is displayed at (1) Figure 55.
Engine/P.T.O. Speeds with 2 Speed P.T.O.

and Mechanical Range Shift
2 speed P.T.O. systems are available in 540E/1000

or 1000E/1000 configuration dependant on country
and tractor specification.

540E/1000* 1569/1893 540/1000
1000E*/1000* 1700/1893 1000
55
3--51
Engine/P.T.O. Speeds with 2 Speed P.T.O. and

Electronic Range Shift
2 speed P.T.O. systems are available in 540E/1000

or 1000E/1000 configuration dependant on country
and tractor specification. Select the appropriate
speed with the shift control (1).

540E/1000 1569/1893 540/1000
1000E/1000* 1700/1893 1000
56
Engine/P.T.O. Speeds with 4 Speed P.T.O. and

Electronic Range Shift

540E/540 1598/1931 540
1000E/1000* 1583/1912 1000
NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady.
When the 1000 rev/min shaft is in use, the light may
also flash (but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed
passes through the 630 rev/min range.
This will only occur the first time the P.T.O. is used
after changing the speed setting.
3--52
IMPORTANT: To prevent possible implement

damage through overspeeding of the P.T.O. when
1000E speed is selected, shaft speed is monitored
and engine r.p.m. electronically limited to provide no
more than 17% overspeed at the shaft.
To disconnect P.T.O. drive, reduce engine speed and

press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the
Power Take Off. The warning light (2), will extiguish
when P.T.O. drive is disengaged.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure

any P.T.O. driven equipment is allowed to come to a
complete stop before leaving the seat. 57
DANGER
NOTE: If the engine is stopped with the P.T.O.

is restarted until the P.T.O. control has been reset.
Return the switch (1) to the ‘off’ position then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.
3--53
Setting the Auto P.T.O. Function
The Auto P.T.O. function provides automatic

engagement and disengagement of the rear P.T.O.
drive when using the EDC raise/lower switch (1).
Operating the switch to raise the implement will
automatically disengage P.T.O. drive. Lowering the
implement with the switch will re--engage P.T.O.
drive.
The height at which the P.T.O. is engaged or

disengaged can be set using the following method.
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the 58

P.T.O. switched off before attempting this procedure.
Setting with the AUTO Switch
 With the engine running and the P.T.O. switched

off, operate the lift control to fully raise and lower
the hitch. This will ensure the hitch is
synchronised with the lift control.
 Depress and hold the AUTO P.T.O. switch (1) for

2 seconds. The central display will show ’u’
followed by two figures, for example, ’u38’. The
figure 38 representing the current height of the
hitch.
 Raise the hitch to point at which the P.T.O. is to 59

disengage. Depress the AUTO P.T.O. switch
once to capture the height setting, the central
display will show ’d xx’ (where ’xx’ is the current
height of the hitch).
 Lower the hitch to the point where the P.T.O. is

to re--engage and depress the AUTO P.T.O.
switch again. The central display will show ’End’
for two seconds and then return to the option
selected prior to entering set--up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is

disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any
time. The new settings will remain in the memory until
re--programmed.
3--54
Setting with Colour Display
. Work condition
. A. PTO
. Implement to select/add implement type.
. Work Condition to select a memorised

working condition or create a new one.
1. . to access pop--up menu for adjusting or

setting the height at which rear P.T.O. drive is 60
engaged when the 3--point hitch is lowered.
2. . to access pop--up menu for adjusting or

setting the height at which rear P.T.O. drive is
disengaged when the 3--point hitch is raised.
3. . Adjust setting for front P.T.O as described

in (1) above (where fitted).
4. . Adjust setting for front P.T.O as described

in (2) above (where fitted).
Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is

re--programmed.
Activating Auto P.T.O.
To activate the Auto function, engage the P.T.O. as

previously described and then depress and hold the
AUTO switch (1), for more than one second. The
Auto P.T.O. lamp on the instrument panel will
illuminate to confirm activation.
NOTE: For the Auto P.T.O. to function, the speed of

the tractor must be above 0.5km/h (0.31 MPH).
With the 3 point hitch in the lowered position and the

P.T.O. engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect P.T.O. drive 61
and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the
implement will re--engage P.T.O. drive, the Auto lamp
will cease to flash and will remain on.
3--55
Depressing the Auto P.T.O. switch again will

de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will
extinguish.
NOTE: The Auto P.T.O. function will be de--activated

every time the key start is switched off.
Auto P.T.O. will be de--activated should one or more

of the following occur:
 The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH)

with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
 With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed
falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds with the
3--point hitch in the raised position.
 If one of the external switches for P.T.O. or 3 point
hitch are operated.
 The P.T.O. is switched off using the internal or

external switches.
 Operating both internal and external P.T.O.
switches simultaneously.
 Ground drive P.T.O. is selected.

 The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds with Auto P.T.O. activated and the 3
point hitch in the raised position.
To re--activate Auto P.T.O., clear the error and

re--engage the function as previously described.
3--56
CHANGING THE P.T.O. OUTPUT SHAFT
Using a suitable tool, compress and remove the

circlip (1) from the P.T.O. housing and carefully
withdraw the P.T.O. stub shaft.
With the shaft removed, check the ’O’ ring seal in the
P.T.O. housing for any damage. Replace ’O’ ring if
worn or damaged.
Thoroughly clean the replacement stub shaft before

inserting it into the housing. Replace the circlip
ensuring it engages fully with the groove in the P.T.O.
housing.
62
With the circlip fully engaged in the groove, rotate the
circlip so the two lugs are opposite the flat area on the
P.T.O. shaft.
Protect the removed shaft by wrapping in a clean

cloth and place in the tool box.
EXTERNAL P.T.O. CONTROLS
An optional, fender-mounted P.T.O. switch (1), may

be installed on both rear fenders to facilitate
stationary P.T.O. operation.
With the engine running, touch the switch

momentarily to cause the P.T.O. shaft to index round.
If the switch is pressed for less than 5 seconds, the
shaft will stop turning when the switch is released.
Press and hold in the switch for more than 5 seconds

and the P.T.O. will operate continuously. Press the
switch again to stop the P.T.O. Alternatively, the 63
P.T.O. may be stopped by means of the in-cab
controls, as previously described.
NOTE: The warning light, on the P.T.O. control

panel, will illuminate when the P.T.O. is engaged,
momentarily or permanently.
NOTE: The P.T.O. may be engaged or disengaged

from the fender switch, whether the in-cab control is
in the on or off position.
3--57
NOTE: If the rotary selector was used to change the

P.T.O. speed before operating the external control,
ensure the external control is depressed for sufficient
time to allow the shift to take place or neutral will be
selected.
NOTE: Simultaneous operation, within two seconds,

of in cab and external P.T.O. controls will result in the
PTO delay symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix
Display. A 10 second delay will occur before P.T.O.
control operation will recommence.
NOTE: The soft start function will operate

irrespective of whether the P.T.O. is engaged from
inside the cab or from a fender switch. 64
3--58
ATTACHING P.T.O. DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Before attaching or detaching equipment or
changing the P.T.O. shaft:
 Firmly apply the parking brake.
 Place the shuttle lever in the Neutral or Park
Brake position.
 Disengage the P.T.O. drive and wait until the
P.T.O. and equipment stops.
 Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.
Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as

outlined in THREE--POINT HITCH on page 3--135.
With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is released

and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.
A flip-up P.T.O. guard is fitted as standard. Remove

the ’R’ clip (1) from the locating pin and slide the
guard upwards to clear the pin. Rotate the guard to
gain access to the P.T.O. shaft. A second locating pin
allows the guard to be fixed at 45 if required.
The P.T.O. guard also serves as a support for 65

drive-line shields used with P.T.O.-driven equipment
and provides for your safety. Do not modify the
guard.
NOTE: Tractors with slider type, vertically adjustable

drawbars have a flip--up P.T.O. guard plate fixed to
the slider frame.
To connect P.T.O. driven equipment to the P.T.O.

shaft, tilt the guard up for access. Pull the plastic cap
(1) from the shaft and store it in the tractor toolbox.
The plastic P.T.O. cap should always be installed

over the shaft when the P.T.O. is not in use
66
3--59
Attach the implement to the P.T.O. shaft, ensuring

that the implement driveshaft coupler lock pin (3) or
detent balls engage the groove in the P.T.O. shaft (2).
If the coupler does not have a locking arrangement,
pin the coupler to the shaft. Lower the flip-up guard
and replace the ’R’ clip.
IMPORTANT: After attaching mounted equipment,

carefully raise and lower using Position Control and
check clearances and P.T.O. shaft slide range and
articulation. When attaching trailed equipment,
ensure that the drawbar is correctly set.
67
P.T.O. Operating Precautions
WARNING
Whenever operating P.T.O. equipment, observe the
following precautions:
 Check that you are using the correct P.T.O.

speed for the implement. Follow the instructions
in the equipment operator’s manual.
 Ensure that the P.T.O. guard is installed when

using P.T.O. driven equipment.
 Do not wear loose clothing when operating

P.T.O. driven equipment.
 Firmly apply the parking brake, place the shuttle

lever in neutral and block all four wheels before
operating any stationary P.T.O. equipment.
68
 Do not approach, clean or adjust P.T.O. driven
equipment while the tractor engine is still
running. Disengage the P.T.O. (knob fully down)
and wait until the P.T.O. and equipment stops.
Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.
 With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to
aid the installation or removal of the implement
P.T.O. shaft.
69
3--60
WARNING
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
Power Take Off switches:
 Move all transmission controls to neutral.
 Disengage the P.T.O.
 Apply the parking brake.
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever
to the low idle position (fully rearwards).
The operator must only activate the external Power

Take Off switches (1) while standing to the side of the
tractor (outboard of the rear tyres). Operation of the
in cab and external P.T.O. switches should not be
carried out simultaneously.
WARNING
Before using the external Power Take Off switches,
ensure that no person or object is in the area of the
implement, 3-point hitch or P.T.O. shaft.
Never operate the external switches while standing:
 Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
70
 Between the lower links.
 On or near the implement.
 Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or

any object into the area near the 3-point hitch,
P.T.O. shaft or implement while operating the
external switch.
 Never have an assistant working the opposite set 1 1

of controls.
 When moving to the opposite set of controls,

move around the tractor or implement. Do not
cross between the implement and tractor.
71
3--61
FRONT P.T.O. AND 3--POINT HITCH

(where fitted)
Tractors with four wheel drive may be equipped with

an engine-driven P.T.O. and front 3--point hitch.
These features are available as a factory installed
option or dealer installed accessory.
FRONT P.T.O.
The front power take--off (P.T.O.) transfers engine

power directly to front-mounted equipment via a 6
spline shaft (1). The P.T.O. shaft rotates
anti-clockwise (as viewed from the front).
P.T.O. speed @ Engine Speed

Power Command 1000 P.T.O. @ 1850 e.r.p.m.
Auto Command 1000 P.T.O. @ 1850 e.r.p.m.
A plastic cap is provided to protect the P.T.O. shaft

when not in use.
NOTE: With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid 72
implement shaft alignment.
The front P.T.O. is electro--hydraulically operated

and is activated by a selector knob on the right-hand
console, similar to the rear P.T.O.
With the engine running at approximately 1000

rev/min., press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and
knob up to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain
up while the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent
warning light (2) will be illuminated.
Open the throttle to increase engine speed to 1850

rev/min and provide a P.T.O. shaft speed of 1000
rev/min. To disengage the P.T.O., press the P.T.O.
selector knob (1), down. It is not necessary to lift the
collar (3) when disconnecting P.T.O. drive.
IMPORTANT: Do not engage the P.T.O. at engine

speeds above 1200 rev/min. 73
3--62
NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 1100 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. Reduce
engine speed to provide the correct P.T.O. speed.
NOTE: If the engine is stopped with the P.T.O.

is restarted until the P.T.O. control has been reset.
Return the switch to the ‘off’ position then re-engage
the P.T.O., as previously described.
DANGER
PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out
Engagement of the PTO control should be decisive

in its application as hesitant or incorrect operation of
the knob or collar may cause the PTO system to
Time--Out.
Do not:
 Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 10
seconds.
 Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the
PTO. 74
 Operate the externally mounted and internal

P.T.O. controls simultaneously or within 2
seconds of each other (where fitted).
Any of the above actions will cause the PTO to

become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds.
Should this occur, the PTO Time--Out symbol will

appear in the display and the amber warning light will
flash for 10 seconds.
The non--critical alarm will sound for 4 seconds.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
75
3--63
FRONT P.T.O. AUTO OPERATION
The Auto P.T.O. function will automatically disen-

gage and re--engage front P.T.O. drive when raising
and lowering the front hitch.
Auto P.T.O. can be used in conjunction with the front

hitch height limiter. Raising the hitch will cause P.T.O.
drive to be dis--engaged at a predetermined point
and the hitch to continue lifting until it reaches the
maximum height set--ting.
The height at which the P.T.O. is engaged or

disengaged can be set using the following method.
76
NOTE: The tractor must be stationary and the P.T.O.
switched off before attempting this procedure.
 Depress and hold the front Auto P.T.O. switch for
2 s. The central display will show for example,
the figure 26% representing the current height of
the hitch.
 Raise the hitch to point at which the P.T.O. is to
disengage. Depress the Auto P.T.O. switch once,
the central display will show (where 28% is the
current height of the hitch).
 Lower the hitch to the point where the P.T.O. is
to reengage and depress the Auto P.T.O. switch
again.The central display will show End for 2 s
and then return to the option selected prior to
entering set--up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is 77
reprogrammed.
To activate the front function, engage the P.T.O. as
previously described and then depress and hold the
Auto P.T.O. switch for more than 1 s. The front Auto
P.T.O. lamp (1) on the instrument panel will illuminate
to confirm activation.
With the front 3 point hitch in the lowered position and

the P.T.O. engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect P.T.O. drive
and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the
implement will re--engage P.T.O. drive, the Auto lamp
will cease to flash and will remain on.
Depressing the front Auto P.T.O. switch again will

de-- activate the function and the Auto lamp will
extinguish.
NOTE: The Auto P.T.O. function will be de-- activated

every time the key start is switched off
3--64
Auto P.T.O. will be de-- activated should one or more

of the following occur:
 The tractor speed is above 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph)

with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 min.
 With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed
falls below 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 s with the front 3--
point hitch in the raised position.
 The P.T.O. is switched off.
 The operator leaves the seat for more than 2 s
with Auto P.T.O. activated and the 3 point hitch
in the raised position. 78
To reactivate Auto P.T.O., clear the error and re--
engage the function as previously described.
FRONT 3--POINT HITCH (where fitted)
The optional front hitch, consists of an adjustable top

link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2). The top
link and the lower links have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements.
The claws are equipped with self-locking latches to

ensure positive retention of the 3--point hitch to the
implement.
79
The front hitch can be operated by a rear or

mid--mount remote valve (where fitted). The height
of the hitch (1) can be shown in the Central Display
as a percentage (%) ranging from 0 (fully lowered) to
100 (full raise).
A rotary control on the armrest console can be used

to set a limit on the operating height of the hitch
where necessary.
80
3--65
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the

implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin.
The two plain ball-bushings (2) with their additional

guides (3) should be installed on the implement lower
hitch pins.
81
Operating the Front Hitch
The front hitch may be operated by mechanical rear

remote valves, electronic rear remote valves or,
where fitted, electronic mid-mount remote valves.
A height limit control permits the operator to set a

pre--determined limit on the maximum lift height of
the hitch .
Setting the Height of the Front Hitch
Height limit adjustment is set by the rotary control (1)

on the EDC console. Turn fully clockwise for maximum
height. Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the height.
The height setting will be shown in the Dot Matrix

Display as a percentage (%) between 0 (fully lowered)
and 100 (full raise).
Turn the control fully anti--clockwise to disable the

height limit function.
82
3--66
FRONT HITCH MANAGEMENT (FHM)

(WHERE FITTED)
The interface for the Front Hitch Management
feature consists of the controls shown in Figures 83
and 84 and detailed below:--
1. Incremental raise and lower switches

2. Status lamp
83
Control Description Location
Lower limit potentiometer EDC panel
Height limit potentiometer EDC panel
Drop rate potentiometer EDC panel
Lock out switch Integrated into drop potentiometer
Front hitch external incremental buttons External switches on the front hitch mechanism support
Hydraulic master switch C pillar
The front hitch management system allows operator

selection of:
System ON / OFF switch
Fast raise / lower manoeuvres
Height limit control (2)
Lower limit control (1)
Drop rate setting (3)
Float mode
84
3--67
System ON / OFF switch

Front Hitch Management can be switched OFF by
rotating the Drop rate control (3), Figure 86, fully
counter clockwise. when the FHM is switched off,
the related front EHR could be driven as a normal
EHR using its lever or joystick.
Fast raise / lower operations 2

Front Hitch fast raise/lower activations are per-
formed by depressing and holding the function
button, 2, and operating the rear EDC Fast
raise/lower switch, 1, Figure 85, once, on the
multi--functional handle.
85
A front Fast/Raise operation will bring the front
linkage to the position set by the Height Limit control
knob, 2, Figure 86. The maximum raising speed will
be fixed and NOT adjustable using EHR menus.
A front fast lower operation will bring the front linkage

to the position set by the lower limit control knob, 1,
Figure 86.
The maximum lowering speed will be defined by the

drop rate control knob setting.
The fast raise and fast lower operations can

enable/capture the front hitch. The initial movement
will be slow to allow the system to synchronize the
component settings.
IMPORTANT: Care should be taken when

attempting to activate a fast movement of the front
hitch, if the fast raise/lower switch is depressed prior
to operating the function switch, this will lead to
activating the rear hitch.
Height limit control
The height limit control knob, 2, Figure 86, limits the
height to which the hitch may be raised. Adjust this
knob to avoid the possibility of a large implement
damaging the tractor when fully raised.
NOTE: Front hitch management position control

only operates in reaction to deliberate adjustments of
the height limit potentiometer. The system will not
correct the position due to oil leakage.
86
3--68
Lower limit control

The lower limit control knob, 1, limits the minimum
working position in conjunction with the height limit
setting control.
NOTE: Ensure that the front hitch lower limit control,

1, is correctly set to avoid an implement dropping too
low and causing possible damage when the fast
lower switch is activated.
Drop rate setting

A drop rate control, 3, adjusts the speed at which the
front hitch drops during the lowering cycle. Position
87
1 selects the slowest drop and is denoted by the
tortoise symbol, position 9 provides the fastest rate
of drop.
Turning the knob fully counter clockwise, to the lock

symbol, turns off the front hitch management
system.
Float mode
Float mode is set by depressing and holding the
function button, 2, and the fast lower button, 1, for 3
seconds while the front hitch is lowering or is at the
lower limit setting position.
The float mode is activated when, lowering the front

hitch and the lower limit is reached.
2
88
When the float mode is set or cancelled the symbol
shown in Figure 89 is displayed on the instrument
cluster for 5 seconds, the display then returns to the
previous screen.
Float mode is cancelled or deactivated when one of

the following actions are applied:
 The operator depresses and holds the function

button and fast lower button for 3 secs while the
hitch is in the work mode or lowering (and float
mode is already set).
 The operator captures the front hitch using the
Lower Limit control knob.
89
 External front switches or incremental switches
are depressed.
 Drop rate control knob rotated fully counter
clockwise (Front hitch management disabled).
 Electro hydraulic remote master switch is
switched OFF (3 position rocker switch in the
middle position)
 Tractor Key start switch is cycled OFF and ON.
3--69
Float mode is deactivated when an operator asks

for a fast raise movement whilst float mode is active.
Float mode is reactivated when lowering the front
hitch and the lower limit is reached.
When the float mode is activated the instrument

panel lower panel will display ’FL’.
90
EHR Quad switch (with Front hitch
management)
Front hitch management features are only available
when front linkage hydraulics are connected into
either front remote number 1 or rear remote number
1. Depending on the machine specification, when the
machine is configured to support front hitch
management, the multi function handle EHR’s
controls are reassigned as per the table below.
Y refers to y axis (vertical axis), 1, Figure 91

X refers to x axis (horizontal axis) 2, Figure 91
91
Remote Valve Number

Multi--Function Control
F1 F2 F3 F4 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
with Rear valves 3 to 4 FHM Y X
with Rear valves 5 FHM Y X
with Rear valves 3 to 4
FHM Y X
and Mid mounts
with Rear valves 3 to 4
FHM Y X
and front loader
with Rear valves 5 and
FHM Y X
Mid mounts
with Rear valves 5 and
FHM Y X
front loader
3--70
Front Hitch Position Display

The digital display in the instrument panel indicates
the position of the front hitch, over a scale of ‘0’ to
‘100’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are fully
lowered. ‘100’ indicates they are fully raised. Select
the display using the appropriate keys on the keypad.
92
Front Hitch Disabled
If an error is detected within the system which

disables hitch movement an icon will flash on the
instrument display.
It may be possible to recover the hitch movement by

turning the drop rate control fully counter clockwise
to the lock position and clockwise to enable the
system.
If the front hitch is still disabled after cycling the drop

rate control It is recommended that an authorized
dealer investigates the cause to rectify the fault. 93
Front hitch notebook (on color displays)
Color display (where fitted) will offer the possibility to
store optimum settings for a certain implement and
in certain working condition so that those settings
can be recalled any time and front hitch controls
adjusted so to match them. This capability is
provided through specific and dedicated screens.
94
3--71
Hitch Operation with Electronic Rear Remote

Valves:
Electronic rear remote valves may be used to

operate the front hitch using the control lever (1), or
the joystick, (where fitted).
As a factory fitted option, the default valve to operate

the hitch will always be valve number 1 whether rear
mount or mid mount valves are used.
With the front hitch connected to valve number 1,

move the lever rearwards (R) to raise the hitch. Move
the lever to (N) to stop hitch movement, the hitch will 95
remain at this height. Select (L) to lower the hitch.
Moving the lever to the float position (F), will permit
the hitch to ’float’ up and down allowing the
implement to follow the ground contours.
Valve number 1 is programmed to operate in

conjunction with the front hitch height limiter
previously described.
Hitch Operation With Joystick and Electronic

Rear or Mid Mount Remote Valves:
The joystick (1), can be used to control the front hitch

using the electronic rear remote valves or, where
fitted, the mid--mount remote valves.
Where a front hitch is supplied as a factory option,

the tractor will be fitted with a joystick and electronic
mid--mount remote valves. Valve number 1 will be
used to operate the hitch.
On tractors equipped with both mid and rear

mounted electronic valves, the joystick can be used 96
to control either valve assembly.
A selector switch on the console, Figure 97, allows

the operator to switch joystick control between the
rear and mid--mount remote valve assemblies.
Repeated pressing of the switch will cycle between

the mid--mount and rear mount valves. Lights in the
switch (1) and (2), will confirm which valves are
activated.
97
3--72
Joystick Functionality Screen
On tractors fitted with the colour display, the operator

can access the joystick screen which provides
details on joystick functionality.
. Remote Valves
Use YB to scroll the through the menu until

Joystick is displayed.
. Joystick
The joystick functionality screen identifies the

number of valves controlled by the joystick and the
corresponding movement required to operate each
valve. Valves marked with a black border can be
operated by simply moving the joystick, valves with
a red border require the button to be depressed
before moving the joystick, see page 3--75.
When the button is depressed a symbol will appear

in the screen on the lower right--hand side.
As a valve is operated the white background will 98

change to orange.
When joystick operation is transferred between rear

and mid--mount valves, the valve identification will
change from R1, R2 etc. to F1, F2.
If the tractor is fitted with a front hitch the joystick

functionality screen also identifies the valve used to
operate the front hitch.
Where tractors are equipped with a factory fitted

front loader, the functionality screen will show
joystick movement for loader arm raise/lower and
bucket roll out/roll back.
NOTE: Switching the joystick from mid--mount to

rear valve operation will automatically suspend lever
operation of the rear remote valves.
IMPORTANT: Before switching joystick operation

between mid and rear valve packs or vice versa,
ensure both remote valve levers and joystick are in
the neutral position.
99
3--73
At key--off, the joystick function is de--activated. The

joystick will be reactivated when the operator is in the
seat with the engine running for more than three
seconds.
When the joystick is de--activated, the warning lights

in the front/rear selector switch will flash.
NOTE: Operation of the joystick will be disabled if the

operator leaves the seat or the tractor engine is
stopped.
Where it is required to operate the front hitch using

the rear remote valves and joystick, depress the
switch and the rear remote valve indicator lamp(1),
will start to flash.
After five seconds the rear indicator lamp will stop

flashing and will remain on, confirming joystick 100
control of the rear remote valves has been activated.
Operation of the front hitch is now controlled by the

joystick through the rear remote valves.
Both mid--mount and rear mount electronic remote

valves offer the following functions when operated by
the joystick.
Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards or

backwards to select Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float
on the front hitch.
Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to
provide oil flow through the front couplers (where
fitted).
101
3--74
Where valves 3 and 4 are fitted, the joystick functions

as follows. This applies to both rear mount or
mid--mount valves.
Remote valve 3: Depress and hold the button (1)

and move the joystick forwards or backwards to
operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float.
Remote Valve 4: Depress and hold the button (1)
and move the joystick left or right to operate Raise,
Neutral and Lower.
NOTE: The two buttons at the side of the joystick

have no function when the joystick is used to operate
a front hitch. 102
NOTE: The joystick should not be used for hydraulic

motor operation.
Move the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the

implement. When the front hitch reaches the position
set by the height limit control the hitch will stop.
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will cause the implement to lower to the ground at a
controlled rate of descent.
Further forward movement of the joystick will select

‘float’ (F) which will allow the implement to lower
under its own weight.
Float can also used to let the hitch lift cylinder extend
or retract freely allowing front mounted equipment to 103
follow ground contours.
NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a

single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for
double--acting cylinders only.
NOTE: With the joystick operating the rear electronic

remote valves, the float position for valves 2 and 4
(lateral movement of the joystick) is not available.
3--75
The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L),

to provide oil flow for equipment connected to the
optional front couplers.
By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders may

be operated simultaneously.
104
To reinstate lever control of the rear valves, depress

the selector switch to activate the mid--mount valves.
The rear indicator lamp will go out and the
mid--mount indicator lamp (1), will start to flash.
After two seconds the mid--mount lamp will stay on

confirming joystick operation has been switched
back to the mid--mount valves (where fitted).
The rear remote valves are now controlled by their

respective levers.
105
Mid Mount EHR Valve Adjustments
A number of settings and adjustments can be made

to the mid mount EHR valves. This can be done using
the rotary control or the colour display (where fitted).
Adjustments and settings will include:

1. Oil flow adjustment, retract and extend.
2. Timer period settings, retract and extend.

3. Timer on/off.
4. Valve lock or unlock. 106

5. EHR valve priority
Full details on mid mount EHR adjustments can be

found later in this section in the Electro--Hydraulic
Remote Valve section beginning on page 3--102.
3--76
Auxiliary Front Couplers (where fitted)
Two auxiliary couplers with 1/2 inch female couplings

may be fitted to the front of the hitch frame. These will
provide a double--acting hydraulic service for
equipment mounted on the front 3--point hitch.
When operated by the joystick, lateral movement of

the joystick (left or right) will provide pressurised oil
at the couplings. See page 3--73 for details.
NOTE: When the front couplers are not in use always

re--insert the protective plug into the coupler to
prevent dust or debris from entering the hydraulic 107
system.
Disconnecting Hydraulic Hoses from Front

Couplers
Before disconnecting hoses from the front couplers,

any residual pressure in the hydraulic lines must be
released. Depending on remote valve configuration,
pressure can be released by using one of the
following procedures.
NOTE: All procedures must commence with the

tractor engine running.
With Couplers Connected to Mechanical or

Electronic Rear Remote Valves:
Move the appropriate remote valve operating lever/s

to the float position and switch off the engine. Apply
the park brake and/or park lock before leaving the
tractor seat.
3--77
With Couplers Connected to Electronic Mid

Mount Remote Valves:
On tractors equipped with a joystick and 4 mid mount

remote valves, it is possible to release pressure at
the couplers in the following way. This procedure
places the valve in float so both raise and lower
couplers can be easily disconnected.
Valves 1 and 3 (where fitted):

With the engine running move the joystick forward
into the float position, then stop the engine (valve 1).
For valve 3, depress the button (2) Figure 109, and
move the joystick forward into float. Stop the engine.

With the engine running, depress and hold the button
(1), move the joystick fully to the raise position (R)
Figure 109, and then back to neutral (N). Switch off
the engine and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from
remote valve number 2.
To release the pressure in the hoses for valve

number 4 follow the same procedure but
depress/hold buttons (1) and (2) Figure 109, before
moving the joystick to the fully raise position (R).
NOTE: The above procedure can also be used to

select float on valves 2 and 4 during normal 108
operation.
WARNING
Make sure no one will be injured by moving
equipment when relieving pressure in the system.
Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment, make
sure the equipment or implement is supported
securely.
To disconnect a hose from the remote coupler, grip

the hose a short distance from the coupler and push
forward into the remote valve coupling, then quickly
pull on the hose to release from the coupler.
The above procedure can also be used to disconnect 109

hoses from rear electronic valves 2 and 4 when they
are being operated by the joystick.
To re--enable joystick operation, start the engine and

move the joystick to the raise position and back to
neutral. The joystick will now function normally.
3--78
Setting the Hitch Operating Mode
Located on the front of the hitch assembly, the two

selector levers permit the front hitch to be operated
in single--acting mode, double--acting mode, or to be
set at a fixed height.
110
Position P1:
Right--hand lever horizontal, left--hand lever vertical.
Front hitch operates in single--acting mode being

hydraulically raised but lowered using weight of
implement.
Position P2:
Both levers vertical.
Hitch operates in double--acting mode being

hydraulically raised and lowered. Operating in this
mode will provide additional penetration for ground
engaging equipment in hard soil conditions or when 111
using a front mounted scraper blade.
Lock Position:
Both levers horizontal.
With the levers in this position, both lift cylinders are

hydraulically ’locked’ preventing movement of the
lower link arms. It is recommended this mode should
be selected when transporting front mounted
equipment on the highway.
3--79
External Front Hitch Controls

(where fitted)
External raise and lower buttons are provided on the

left--hand side of the front hitch assembly. Depress
and hold the appropriate button to raise or lower the
hitch, release the button to halt movement of the
hitch.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
controls for the external front 3--point hitch.
NOTE: The external front 3--point hitch controls are

disabled when the operator is in the seat. 112

controls:
 Move the shuttle lever to the neutral or park
brake position.

WARNING
Before using the external front 3--point hitch controls,
implement or 3-point hitch.
Never operate the external controls while standing:

WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any
object into the area near the front 3-point hitch or
implement while operating the external controls.
3--80
Hitch Settings and Adjustments
Transport Position
The top link and lower links should be placed in the

transport position when not in use. Raise the top link
(1) to the vertical position and secure by sliding the
adjuster handle extensions (2) into the slots in the
support (3).
113
The lower links pivot about the pin (2). This pin
should not be removed unless it is required to
remove the lower links. To raise the lower link, extract
the pin (3) from the support assembly and raise the
link (1) to the vertical position, as shown. Re--insert
the pin through the support when the holes in the
lower link and support are correctly aligned. Before
operating the tractor ensure both pins are fully
secured using the lock pins.
114
To convert to the working position, remove the pin (3)

Figure 114 and manually lower the link down to the
operating position, as shown. Re--install the pin in
one of the holes (4) or (5), as required and secure.
When installed in the rear hole (5), the lower link will
be locked as a rigid unit. If the pin is installed in the
front hole (4), the lower link will be allowed to move
up and down freely (float) through a range of approx.
75 mm (3 in). Secure the pin using the lock pins.
Repeat on the other lower link, ensuring that both

lower links are set up the same, i.e., both are locked
as rigid units or both are allowed to float. 115
3--81
NOTE: With the lower links pinned in the float

position, the left and right-hand sides of the
implement can move up and down independently to
allow for operation on uneven surfaces. In addition,
the remote control valve float function will allow the
whole implement to move up or down as it passes
over uneven ground.
IMPORTANT: When transporting heavy front

mounted implements at speed it is advisable to install
the pivot pin in the rear hole (5) (rigid position) to help
reduce implement bounce which may affect steering
control.
116
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Start the engine. Move the remote valve lever or

joystick (where fitted) from neutral (N) to lower (L)
until the link arms are just clear of the ground.
Position the tractor so that the open claw ends are
beneath the implement hitch pins.
117
Slowly move the remote valve lever or joystick

rearward to raise the lower links until the claw
couplers engage the ball-bushings. An audible click
will be heard as the self-locking latches (1) engage
the ball-bushings (2) on the implement. The lift
control should be returned to the neutral position
before the lower links start to lift the implement from
the ground.
IMPORTANT: Before operating the tractor, ensure

the release latches (1), are fully retracted into the link
end.
118
3--82
Attach the top link to the implement, adjusting to the

correct length by rotating the threaded centre section
(1) using the handles (2) as leverage. To prevent the
centre section from rotating while in work, place the
locking latch (3) over one of the adjuster handles.
The top link has a similar claw end to the lower links.
Lower the top link claw onto the upper implement
ball-bush and press down until the latch is heard to
engage.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the front hitch.
119
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor
Using the remote lever or joystick, lower the

implement to the ground, ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the front hitch. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull back the lever on the top link to release the claw
from the implement upper hitch pin.
Lift and rotate the release lever (1) fully rearwards on

both lower links. The lever will lock in position with the
latch retracted, as shown. This will allow the links to
clear the ball-bushings on the implement lower hitch 120
pins when the links are lowered fully.
Fully lower the lower links using the remote lever or

joystick and reverse the tractor clear of the
implement.
3--83
OPERATING WITH A FRONT LOADER AND

PROPORTIONAL JOYSTICK
Where a front loader is installed as a factory option,

an electronic joystick is provided to control the
electronic remote valves (EHR’s) used for operating
the loader and attachments. Up to three remote
valves may be operated simultaneously by the
joystick.
NOTE: Where a tractor is equipped with front loader

and rear EHR’s, the joystick is dedicated to operate
the loader mid--mount valves only, it is not possible
to control the rear EHR’s using the joystick. 121
Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards (L) or

backwards (R) to raise and lower the loader boom.
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will allow the loader boom to lower to the ground at
a controlled rate of descent.
By moving the joystick fully forward into ‘float’ (F) the

loader boom will lower quickly under its own weight.
When float is engaged with the boom in the fully
lowered position, the bucket or attachment will follow
the ground contours.
IMPORTANT: When operating with a front loader

always lower the bucket to the ground before leaving
the tractor cab.
NOTE: The ’float’ position is not available on remote

valve numbes 2 and 3.
Remote Valve 2: Moving the joystick to (R) operates

bucket roll--back, moving the joystick to (L) to
operate bucket dump.
NOTE: By moving the joystick diagonally, both

loader boom and bucket actions can be operated
simultaneously.
3--84
Remote Valve 3 (where fitted): Where a third

hydraulic service is required to operate an
attachment such as a bale fork eject plate or 4 in 1
bucket jaw, switch (1) is used to control the third
valve.
The control for this valve is a progressive, self

centring rocker switch. This type of switch allows the
operator to control the speed at which a hydraulic
cylinder is extended or retracted.
By lightly depressing the switch, a minimal oil flow is

generated to provide a slow speed, depressing the
switch further will increase the flow and therefore the 122
speed.
NOTE: Switch (1) is only used in conjunction with the

advanced performance monitor (where fitted).
At key--off, the joystick function is de--activated. To

activate the joystick, the operator must be in the seat
with the engine running for more than five seconds.
When the joystick is de--activated, the warning light

(2) will flash.
NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat with the engine

running, joystick operation will be de--activated and
the warning light (1) Figure 123, will start to flash.
When the operator is re--seated, joystick operation
will be re--activated after two seconds. The warning
light will stop flashing and will remain illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Where a loader has been retro--fitted

to a tractor having the remote valves configured for
front hitch operation or front coupler operation, it is
most important the valves are re--configured by your 123
authorised dealer for loader operation.
This will provide the advanced features available
when the loader is used in conjunction with the colour
display, and will also disable the auto function so
joystick operation cannot be included in HTS
programmes.
The re--configuration procedure requires the use of
special tools and MUST be carried out by an
authorised dealer.
3--85
Hydraulic Master Switch
When travelling on the highway, both mid--mount and

rear electronic remote valves can be disabled to
prevent inadvertent lowering of the front hitch which
may cause damage to the tractor or road surface.
Electronic Remote Valves

The switch on the cab ’C’ pillar has three positions
and provides the following functions.
Depress the top of the switch to energise electronic

rear and mid--mount* remote valves (3--point hitch
locked out).
Depress the bottom of the switch to energise

electronic rear and mid--mount* remote valves and
rear 3--point hitch.
Mid position. Electronic remote valves and 3--point 124

hitch locked out.
*(where fitted)
3--86
ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL
Electronic Draft Control is an electronically controlled

hydraulic system that senses changes in the draft
loading via sensors in the lower link pins of the
3--point hitch. It also senses changes in the vertical
position of the hitch via a sensor on the cross shaft.
The system functions in Position Control or Draft
Control.
Position Control provides accurate control of

implements that operate above the ground. Once the
implement height has been set, the system will
maintain that height irrespective of any external
forces acting upon it.
Draft Control is designed for mounted or

semi-mounted implements operating in the ground.
Draft Control automatically compensates for
changes in soil resistance which cause the
implement draft loading to increase or decrease.
EDC Control Overview
1. The hitch position lever (1), is used to set

implement height, when operating in Position
Control and maximum implement depth when
operating in Draft Control.
2. The draft loading wheel (2), determines the draft

load and therefore implement working depth by
setting a force on the draft sensitivity pins. Rotate
fully forward (position 10) to provide maximum
load and therefore maximum implement depth.
125
3. Fast Raise and Lower switch. Once the 3--point

hitch has been set to the required working
position, this switch can be used to raise and
lower the hitch without affecting the draft or
position control settings. The switch also
provides for faster ground engagement, if
required. For detailed information, see text on
page 3--95.
126
3--87
4. The indicator lights (4), illuminate when the

Position Control lever is moved to raise or lower
the implement or when the incremental raise and
lower buttons are used. As draft corrections
occur during normal tractor operation, the lower
light will illuminate when the hitch lowers, the
upper light will illuminate when the hitch raises.
5. Incremental Raise and Lower buttons (5). Where

a small change in the height of the 3--point hitch
is required, depressing these button repeatedly
will alter the height of the hitch in small
increments.
6. The malfunction warning light (6), serves two 127

purposes:
 Flashing light indicates a malfunction in the

system circuits.
 Steady light, the light remains illuminated when
the hitch is not at the working height selected or
at the pre--set height set by the height limiter.
This may be caused by:
Operating the inching buttons (5), Figure 127.
3--point hitch is stopped during the raise cycle.
Operating the fender switches.
Moving the hitch controls after key--off.
The above lights will be accompanied by the hitch

error symbol appearing in the operational display. To
clear the error, cycle the hitch position lever slowly
through the full lift range.
Hitch Position Display
The digital display in the instrument panel indicates

the position of the lower links (1) over a scale of ‘0’
to ‘100’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are
fully lowered. ‘100’ indicates they are fully raised.
Select the display using the appropriate keys on the
keypad.
128
3--88
EDC Panel
To gain access to the EDC controls, lift the pad on the

right--hand armrest.
The height limit control knob (1), limits the height to

which the hitch may be raised. Adjust this knob to
avoid the possibility of a large implement damaging
the tractor when fully raised.
A drop rate control (2), adjusts the speed at which the

three--point hitch drops during the lowering cycle.
Position 1 selects the slowest drop and is denoted by
the tortoise symbol, position 7 provides the fastest 129
rate of drop.
The draft sensitivity control (3), is used to make the

system more sensitive or less sensitive to changes
in draft loading. Maximum sensitivity is obtained by
rotating the control fully clockwise.
When equipped with the optional radar sensor unit,

the slip limit control (4), enables the operator to select
a wheel slip threshold, above which the implement
will raise until wheel slip returns to the set level.
Depress the slip control switch on the armrest to

activate. A slip limit ‘on’ indicator will illuminate when
the wheel slip limit control is activated.
130
3--89
Work Condition
Tractors with the colour display have the ability to

record operational settings made to the EDC system
and 3--point hitch. These settings may be stored in
the tractor memory and recalled for future use.

changes touch X.
NOTE: Changing the descriptions for Implement or

Work Condition in any screen will automatically
update all Work Condition screens.
Implement Setup
131
. Work conditions
. Impl
The implement screen allows the operator to select,

edit or create implement descriptions and working
conditions.
. Implement (1)
Select an implement from the pop--up list, modify a

current implement description or add a new
implement to the list.
. Work Condition (2)
Select the current work condition from the pop--up

list, modify the current condition or add a new work
category to the list.
3--90
Rear Hitch Setting Display
. Hitch
The implement description and operating conditions

appear at the top of the screen. A choice of two hitch
settings are available, #1 and #2.
1. Quadrant lever setting. The red line on the bar

graph identifies the position of the lower links as
set by the EDC Position Control lever (1)
Figure 133.
2. Draft loading wheel setting. The red line shows

the amount of draft load set by the draft loading
wheel (2) Figure 133. As the load increases or 132
decreases the black fill line will move to indicate
the change.
3. Drop rate setting. As set on the 3--point hitch drop

rate control (2) Figure 134. The red line indicates
the current setting on the drop rate control.
4. Draft sensitivity level. The red line identifies the

level of draft sensitivity set on the EDC sensitivity
control (3) Figure 134.
5. Height limit setting. Shown as a percentage of

total hitch travel, the red line indicates the height
at which the lower links will stop when the fast
raise button is used to lift the hitch. Rotate the
limit setting control (4) Figure 134, clockwise to
increase height.
133
6. Wheel slip limit. The red line shows the
percentage setting on the wheel slip control (1)
Figure 134. A low setting will provide a higher
correction rate to maintain traction. However,
this setting will result in more hitch corrections
and therefore a more uneven depth control.
A higher setting will result in less corrections and
therefore a more even depth of cultivation.
7. . Save to memorise settings for Rear hitch

set. #1. To recall the settings touch Rear#1
134
3--91
Malfunction Warning Light and Display
In the unlikely event that a fault occurs in the EDC,

the malfunction warning light (3) Figure 136, will start
to flash. The warning light will be accompanied by the
appearance of the rear hitch symbol (1) and error
code (2), in the dot matrix display.
The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in

which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g. short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. Should this
occur, your tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
135
A steady malfunction warning light (3) signifies that

the hitch has been disabled and the setting of the
Position Control lever does not correspond to the
height position of the lower links.
The ‘hitch disabled’ warning will display if:

 The Position Control lever has been moved with
the engine stopped.
 One of the external hitch controls has been

operated to raise or lower the three-point hitch.
See ’Malfunction Warning Light’ on page 3--88 or
‘External 3--Point Hitch Controls’ on page 3--99.
136
To re--phase the Position Control lever with the lower

links, start the engine and move the lever slowly in
either direction until the position of the lever matches
the height of the hitch. This will be confirmed by the
’hitch disabled’ warning light going out.
Alternatively, use the fast raise and lower switch (4),

to raise or lower the hitch until the hitch disabled light
goes out. During the re--phase sequence, the lower
links will raise slowly but once the Position Control
lever and hitch height are synchronised, the lower
links will operate normally.
137
3--92
PRE--OPERATION SETTINGS
Ensure the transport lock switch is in the off position

to allow the 3--point hitch to function, see page 3--101.
Attach the implement to the 3--point hitch.
Turn the draft loading wheel (2) fully forward (position

10), this is the Position Control setting.
Start the engine and, using the Position Control lever

(1), raise the implement in stages, ensuring there is
at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the
implement and any part of the tractor. 138
Note the figure in the central display. If the reading is

less than ‘100’ it means that the implement is not fully
raised.
Adjust the height limit control knob (4) to prevent the

hitch being raised further and so avoid the possibility
of the implement damaging the tractor when fully
raised.
When the fast raise/lower switch or the Position

Control lever is used to raise the implement, it will
only raise to the height set by the limit control, as
determined in the previous step.
Adjust the rate of drop, to suit the size and weight of

the attached implement by rotating the drop rate
control knob (2). Turn the knob clockwise to speed up
the drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the drop 139
rate.
IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up

for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow
drop position (‘tortoise’ symbol).
When the raise/lower switch is used to lower the

implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as
determined in the previous step.
3--93
DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION
To ensure the best performance in the field it will be

necessary to adjust the Draft Control system to suit
the implement and ground conditions.
The position of the draft sensitivity knob (3),

determines the sensitivity of the system. Set the
knob to the mid-position before lowering the
implement into work.
The draft loading wheel (2) Figure 141, determines

implement depth by setting a required force on the
draft sensing pins. Set the wheel to the mid-position,
marked 5, prior to commencing work.
140
Drive the tractor into the field and lower the

implement into work by moving the Position Control
lever (1), forward.
Set the required implement working depth by

adjusting the setting on the draft loading wheel (2).
When the required depth has been achieved, move
the Position Control lever rearwards until the
implement starts to raise then move forward again in
small increments to set the maximum depth limit.
When adjusted correctly, the Position Control setting

will prevent the implement from ’diving’ or working
too deep if an area of soft or light soil is encountered. 141
Once the draft loading and maximum depth have

been set, raise and lower the implement using the
fast raise switch on the transmission lever or EDC
pod (3).
3--94
Observe the implement as it pulls through the soil

and adjust the draft sensitivity knob (3), until the
tendency for the hitch to raise or lower, due to
variations in soil resistance, is satisfactory. Once set,
the tractor hydraulic system will automatically adjust
implement depth to maintain an even pull (draft load)
on the tractor.
The optimum setting will be achieved by observing

the movement indicator lights (1) Figure 143. The
upper light will illuminate every time the system
raises the implement as normal draft corrections
occur. The lower light will illuminate as the implement
lowers.
142
Turn the draft sensitivity knob (3), Figure 142, slowly

clockwise. The system will respond with smaller,
quicker movements as will be seen by both the
indicator lights flickering. At this point, turn the knob
slightly anti-clockwise until either of the indicator
lights flashes once every 2 or 3 seconds or, as
required, to suit the soil conditions.
Once the required working conditions have been

established there is no need to move the position
control lever again until the work in hand is
completed.
143
Upon reaching the headland, momentarily depress

the top of the fast raise switch (1), to quickly lift the
implement to the position set by the height limit
control.
During the raise cycle, momentarily depressing the

fast raise switch will pause implement lift.
When re-entering the working area, momentarily

depress the bottom of the switch, the implement will
lower at the rate set by the drop rate control knob and
stop when it reaches the depth set by the draft
loading wheel.
144
NOTE: Depressing the fast raise switch during the lift
cycle will temporarily disable the hitch. Depressing
the switch again will re--enable hitch operation but
initial movement will be slow.
3--95
Where faster implement penetration is required, for

example, after turning at a narrow headland or where
the implement is reluctant to penetrate, press and
hold the bottom of the raise/lower switch (2). The
implement will lower at the rate set by the drop rate
control knob, until it contacts the ground.
Continue to depress the switch and the drop rate and

the Position Control settings will be overridden. The
implement will quickly penetrate the ground, rising to
the preset working depth when the switch is
released.
145
Rear Wheel Slip Limit Setting
Setting the Slip Limit with the Control Knob
The slip limit control knob (1), available only with the
optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold above which the
implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the
preset level.
Slip limit temporarily overrides the normal Draft

Control sensing signals and reduces the working
depth of the implement. As soon as the wheel slip
falls below the operating limit the implement will 146
return to it’s original working depth.
Care must be taken not to select a wheel slip limit that

is either too high or too low.
Setting the slip limit to a very low level, unobtainable

in wet conditions, may have a detrimental effect on
the work rate and depth.
NOTE: The wheel slip function does not work in

Position Control.
3--96
The slip limit ‘on’ indicator (1) will illuminate when the
slip function is activated by depressing the switch on
the armrest unit. When the slip control is in operation,
the warning light (2) will also illuminate and the
implement will raise to reduce the slip rate.
Where the amount of wheel slip approaches the

pre--set limit, a warning will also appear in the display.
To disengage the slip function depress the switch on

the arm rest unit.
147
Setting the Slip Limit with Colour Display
. Settings
. Implement. Use the pop--up screen to select,

change or add a new implement category.
. Work condition. Use the pop--up screen to

select, change or add a new category of work
condition.
1. Percentage slip figure, this will change as wheel

slip increases and decreases. 148
2. Same as (1) above but in bar graph format.
3. . to access the pop--up for setting wheel slip

alarm threshold. Set the figure using A or "
then press Enter. The selected figure will appear
in the slip alarm box.
3--97
POSITION CONTROL OPERATION
To operate in Position Control, the draft loading

wheel (2) should, ideally, be rotated fully forward to
position 10.
Use the Position Control lever (1) to raise and lower

the 3--point hitch. The implement will raise and stop
at the height set by the height limit control knob.
NOTE: The rate of lift will be adjusted automatically.

If a large movement of the position control lever is
made then the lower links will respond by moving
rapidly. As the links approach the position set by the 149
Position Control lever, implement movement will be
slower.
If it is required to raise the implement at the headland,

momentarily depress the top of the raise switch on
the EDC pod or transmission lever (3), to lift the
implement to the position set by the height limit
control knob. When re-entering the work area,
momentarily depress the bottom of the switch and
the implement will return to the height originally set
by the Position Control lever (1).
150
3--98
EXTERNAL 3--POINT HITCH CONTROLS

(where fitted)
Two external switches (1) are provided on each rear

fender assembly. Depress the upper switch to raise
the 3--point hitch, depressing the lower switch will
cause the hitch to drop.
WARNING
external 3--point hitch controls.
151
controls:
 Move all transmission controls to neutral.

WARNING
Before using the external 3--point hitch controls,

WARNING 1 1
object into the area near the 3-point hitch or
Never have an assistant working the opposite set of

controls. When moving to the opposite set of 152
controls, move around the tractor or implement. Do
not cross between the implement and tractor.
3--99
The operator must only activate the external

switches while standing to the side of the tractor
(outboard of the rear tyres).
Pressing the upper switch (1) will cause the hitch to

raise slowly. Pressing the lower switch will cause the
hitch to lower. When the lower links align with the
implement, release the switch and attach the
implement to the 3-point hitch in the normal way.
NOTE: Using the external lift control will cause the

hitch to become out of phase with the Position
Control lever in the cab.
153
To re--phase the Position Control lever with the lower
links, start the engine and move the lever (1) slowly
forward or rearward, as required, until the position of
the lever matches the height of the hitch. This will be
confirmed by the ’hitch disabled’ warning light going
out.
Alternatively, use the fast raise switch (3)

Figures 154 and 155, to raise or lower the hitch until
the hitch disabled light goes out. During the re--phase
sequence, the lower links will raise slowly but once
the lever and hitch are in phase, the lower links will
operate normally.
154
IMPORTANT: When control of the 3-point hitch is
transferred back to the lift control lever, an attached
implement may raise fully and damage the rear of the
cab. Operator’s should be aware of this and take
appropriate action to stop raising before full lift height
is reached. Adjust the height limit control knob as
described under Position Control Operation.
155
3--100
HYDRAULIC MASTER SWITCH
The 3--point hitch cannot be operated unless the

system is energised using the Master switch on the
cab ’C’ pillar. From the central position, depress the
top of the switch to energise the remote valve
electrical circuit, depress the bottom of the switch to
energise both remote valve and 3--point hitch
electrical circuits. Lights in the switch will confirm the
systems that are energised.
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch,
select the mid position on the switch. This will lock both
3--point hitch and remote valves preventing the
implement from accidentally lowering and damaging 156
the road surface. The lock symbol for the remote
valves will appear in the EHR screens.
DYNAMIC RIDE CONTROL
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch,

implement bounce can lead to lack of steering control
at transport speeds. With Dynamic Ride Control
selected, when the front wheels hit a bump, causing
the front of the tractor to rise, the hydraulic system
will immediately react to counter the movement and
minimise implement bounce to provide a smoother
ride.
To engage Ride Control, turn the draft sensitivity

knob (3), fully anti-clockwise. Depress the top of the
raise/lower switch (4) Figure 158, to raise the 157
implement to the height set by the height limit control
(1).
Turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully

anti-clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock
4
symbol).
Ride Control will only operate at speeds above 8 kph

(5 MPH). When tractor speed exceeds 8 K/mh (5
MPH), the implement will drop by 4 -- 5 points (as
displayed on the instrument panel) as the hydraulic
system makes corrections to counteract implement
bounce. When tractor speed falls below 8 K/mh (5
MPH) the implement will raise again to the height set
by the height limit control and ride control will become
inoperative.
158
3--101
ELECTRO--HYDRAULIC REMOTE VALVES

(where fitted)
NOTE: See page 3--133 for available oil quantities

when powering external hydraulic equipment.
When operating in manual mode, Electro--Hydraulic

Remote valves (EHR’s) perform in a similar manner
to mechanical valves providing Raise, Neutral,
Lower and Float functions selected by the operator.
However, where an implement requires repeated

hydraulic movements, such as extending and
retracting hydraulic cylinders, EHR’s allow the
operator to create an automated programme of
these movements.
Each programme is supported by visual displays in

the colour display screen.
159
Hydraulic Master Switch
EHR’s cannot be operated unless the electrical
circuit for the system is energised using the hydraulic
master switch.
The master switch has three positions and operates
in the following way.
Top depressed: EHR operation only, 3--point hitch
isolated.
Central Position: EHR’s and 3--point hitch isolated
(transport mode).
Bottom depressed: EHR’s and 3--point hitch
activated.
160
NOTE: Where a hydraulic service is locked out by
the master switch, a symbol will appear in the status
display on the top left side of the colour display. See
item (1) page 3--112.
NOTE: Where mid--mount EHR’s are installed, these

will also be locked out when the switch is in the
central position.
To prevent inadvertent movement of the implement

when travelling between fields or on the highway, it
is recommended that EHR and 3--point hitch
functions are disabled.
IMPORTANT:The hydraulic master switch may also

be used to quickly stop operation of the rear remote
valves. Place the switch in the central position to stop
and isolate remote valve and 3--point hitch operation.
3--102
When starting the tractor engine, all remote valve

levers and the joystick (where fitted) must be placed
in the neutral position. Any control not in neutral will
cause the corresponding valve to be disabled.
To reactivate a disabled valve, first ensure the

hydraulic master switch is in the ’ON’ position and
then manually shift the remote valve control to
neutral.
NOTE: Where a valve is not in neutral at start up, a

symbol and the corresponding valve number will
appear in the dot matrix display. Where more than
one valve is not in neutral, the display will scroll
sequentially through each valve number.
NOTE: At start up, EHR operation is disabled until

the engine speed has been detected to be over 500
rpm for approximately 3 seconds.
Should a remote valve become inoperable or stuck

in one position then that valve will be disabled until
the fault is rectified or the valve electronically
disconnected from the system. Should this occur,
consult your authorised dealer.
CAUTION
As Electro--Hydraulic Remote Control Valves have
detented lever positions, it is not recommended they
are used for front loader operation. Consult your
authorised dealer.
IMPORTANT: In the unlikely event that a remote

valve ceases to operate or respond correctly to lever
movements, the system will require the attention of
3--103
Control Lever Operation
Each remote valve lever has four positions, Raise,

Neutral, Lower and Float. In Raise and Lower
modes, the detented positions can be used for timed
remote valve functions.
In the following text lever positions may be described

as Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float or Extend,
Neutral, Retract and Float. The functionality
however, remains the same.
The ’float’ position is also used for retracting a
single-acting cylinder and is the OFF position for
operating hydraulic motors.
Pull the lever (1) back from the neutral position, (N),
to the raise position, (R). From neutral, push forward
to the lower position, (L). Push the lever fully forward
to the float position, (F). Float will permit a hydraulic
cylinder to extend or retract freely, allowing
equipment such as scraper blades to ’float’ or follow
the ground contour.
IMPORTANT: In the unlikely event that a remote

valve ceases to operate or respond correctly to lever
movements, the system will require the attention of
IMPORTANT:Care must be taken when operating in 161

the manual mode that the remote valve lever is not
left in the detented extend or retract positions when
using remote cylinders.
When the cylinder has reached the end of its stroke
the control lever must be returned to the neutral
position manually.
Failure to observe this procedure may cause
overheating of the hydraulic oil and may lead to
failure of hydraulic or driveline components.
IMPORTANT:Never use the neutral position from

the extend or retract position to stop a hydraulic
motor. Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system may
cause extensive damage to the motor. To operate
hydraulic motors ALWAYS use motor mode, see
page 3--123.
In manual mode, the oil flow through each valve can

be adjusted as described in Setting the Maximum
Flow Rate on page 3--112.
3--104
EHR Quad Switch
The Multi--Function lever incorporates a spring

centred toggle switch which can be used to operate
two Electro--Hydraulic Remote valves.
A number of hydraulic functions can be operated

using the Quad switch:
NOTE: The Quad switch operates only in the Raise,
Neutral and Lower modes. To select Float depress
the float button on the Multi--Function lever.
Option A 162
(with 3 or 4 rear valves only)
Vertical axis (1), Rear valve 1
Horizontal axis (2), Rear valve 2
Option B
(with 5th rear valve)
Option C
(with mid--mount and 3 or 4 rear mounted valves)
Horizontal axis (2), Mid valve 1
Option D
(with mid--mount and 5th rear valve)
Vertical axis (1), Mid valve 1
Option E
(with loader, mid--mount and 5 rear valves)
EHR Float Button
The float button operates in conjunction with the

Quad switch and provides a float facility for the
number 5 valve.
To engage the float facility, depress/hold the button

(1) and then depress/hold the lower (retract) side of
the Quad switch for the number 5 valve. Release the
float button.
If the float function has been activated on rear valve

number 5 (where fitted), it can be cancelled by
depressing the Quad switch twice. 163
3--105
Electronic Joystick Operation (where fitted)

IMPORTANT: The following descriptions of joystick
operating procedures refer to tractors not equipped
with a factory installed loader kit. For information on
loader functions consult the loader Operator’s
Manual.
NOTE: Where the mid--mount valves are used to

operate a factory fit front loader, it is not possible to
switch joystick operation between mid and rear
mounted valves.
The optional electronic joystick (1) can be used to

operate either mid--mounted or rear mounted EHR’s.
Where the joystick is being used to control the rear
mounted valves, the operation of the mid--mount
valves will be transferred to lever control.
With mid and rear mounted EHR’s, the switch on the

integrated control panel Figure 165, allows joystick
control of either mid--mounted or rear mounted 164
valves.
Indicator lights (1) and (2) confirm which valves are

controlled by the joystick.
NOTE: Where tractors are fitted with mid--mount

EHR’s and mechanical rear remote vales,
depressing the switch (1) will have no effect and the
light (2) will remain illuminated.
At key--on, assuming the joystick set to operate the

mid--mount valves, the indicator light (1) will be on.
To switch joystick control from mid--mount to rear
mount valves, depress and hold the switch for 2
seconds until light (1) is extinguished and light (2)
starts to flash. 165
Release the switch and light (2) will stop flashing and
will remain illuminated. Control is now transferred to
the rear mounted valves.
3--106
Before transferring joystick control between EHR’s,

it is important that all remote valves are in neutral.
Any valves not in neutral will be disabled and the dot
matrix display will identify the number and ’R’ (rear)
or ’FR’ (front). The indicator light for the new joystick
setting will continue flashing until the disabled EHR
has been reactivated.
To reactivate a valve, use the newly assigned EHR

control (lever or joystick) and cycle it through neutral
into raise or lower and back to neutral.
At key--off, the current joystick setting (mid or rear

mount control) will be retained in the EHR memory
for re--activation at key--on.
Where mid--mount valves are not fitted to the tractor,

the switch is used to select lever or joystick control
of the rear EHR’s only. Where no lights appear in the
switch, operation of the valves is by lever, when light
(2) is illuminated, operation is by joystick.
The joystick operates in two axis, forward/rearward

and side/side. Forward/rearward movement
provides Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float on valve 1,
moving the joystick sideways gives Raise, Neutral
and Lower on valve 2.
Two services can be operated simultaneously by

moving the joystick diagonally.
166
3--107
Where additional hydraulic services are required, the

joystick can offer optional functions activated by
depressing and holding the switches on the side of
the joystick.
Switch Function
Switch Functionality
Number
To operate valves 3 and 4,depress/
1
hold switch while moving joystick
2
*Operates remote hydraulic service
via relay and additional valve
167
3
*Operates remote hydraulic service
via relay and second additional valve
*Applies only to tractors equipped with factory

installed loader.
Joystick Functionality Screen
. Remote Valves
Use YB to scroll the through the menu until

Joystick is displayed.
. Joystick
The joystick functionality screen identifies the

number of valves controlled by the joystick and the
corresponding movement required to operate each
valve. 168
When joystick operation is transferred between rear

and mid--mount valves, the screen will also change
to display the new setting.
If the tractor is fitted with a front hitch the joystick

functionality screen also identifies the valve used to
operate the front hitch.
Where tractors are equipped with a factory fitted

front loader, the functionality screen will show
joystick movement for loader arm raise/lower and
bucket roll out/roll back.
3--108
Joystick Float Switch
Where it is necessary to exhaust hydraulic pressure

from valves 2 and 4, i.e. before disconnecting a
hydraulic hose from the tractor, a float switch is
provided on the armrest. The following procedure
must be carried out with the engine running.

With the engine running move the joystick forward
into the float position, then stop the engine (valve 1).
For valve 3, depress the button (2) Figure 170, and
move the joystick forward into float. Stop the engine.

With the engine running, depress and hold the button
(1), move the joystick fully to the raise position (R)
Figure 170, and then back to neutral (N). Switch off
the engine and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from
remote valve number 2.
To release the pressure in the hoses for valve

number 4 follow the same procedure but
depress/hold buttons (1) and (2) Figure 170, before
moving the joystick to the fully raise position (R).
NOTE: The above procedure can also be used to

select float on valves 2 and 4 during normal 169
operation.
To cancel float mode, move the joystick in any

direction to the Raise or Lower position and then
back to Neutral.
WARNING
Make sure no one will be injured by moving
equipment when relieving pressure in the system.
Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment, make
sure the equipment or implement is supported
securely.
170
3--109
External EHR Control
The rear fender switches (1), control valve number

3 and can be used to operate double or single acting
services. In double acting mode, depress/hold the
lower switch to extend the cylinder, depress/hold the
upper switch to retract the cylinder.
NOTE: External EHR switches are linked to remote

valve 3 only and cannot be reconfigured to operate
through a different valve.
When operating a single acting service, the lower

switch can be used to extend the cylinder but the 171
remote valve lever in the cab must be used to retract
the cylinder (float position).
The fender switches will only operate when the

tractor speed is below 0.5 km/h (0.3 MPH) and will
provide a maximum flow rate of 20 litres/min. (5.2 US
gal.min.) through the valve.
WARNING
The operator must only activate the external EHR
switches (1) while standing to the side of the tractor
(outboard of the rear tyres). Ensure there are no
other personnel in the proximity of the implement
before operating the external switches.
3--110
SAFETY INFORMATION
EXTERNAL EHR CONTROLS
Two external buttons (1) are provided on each rear

fender assembly. Depress the upper button to
extend a hydraulic cylinder, depress the lower button
to retract a cylinder.
WARNING
external remote valve controls.
172
controls:
 Move the shuttle lever to the neutral or park lock
position.
WARNING
Before using the external remote valve controls (1),

WARNING 1 1
object into the area near the 3-point hitch or
Never have an assistant working the opposite set of

controls. When moving to the opposite set of 173
controls, move around the tractor or implement. Do
not cross between the implement and tractor.
3--111
EHR SETTINGS and ADJUSTMENTS
WITH COLOUR DISPLAY
Performance Screen
When operating with EHR’s, a performance screen

depicting the flow settings, valve and timer modes for
each valve can be shown in the colour display.
. R--Flow to access the performance screen.
The information displayed is as follows:
1. Status display. When a remote valve is being

operated a symbol relating to that valve will
appear in the status display. This symbol will
continue to be displayed irrespective of the main 174
screen content. EHR symbols shown depict the
timers for valves R2 and R1 as being armed.
2. EHR valve number, location and operating mode

(Neutral or Locked).
3. Retract Mode. Maximum oil flow setting depicted

by the vertical line and instant oil flow shown in
the bargraph.
4. Timer armed or disarmed. When X is displayed

across the timer symbol (clock), the timer is
disarmed.
The figure ’10’ represents the timer period for
cylinder retract. Conversely, the figure ’15’
shows the timer period for the cylinder to extend.
All timer periods are in seconds.
5. Extend Mode. Maximum oil flow setting depicted

by the vertical line and instant oil flow shown in
the bargraph.
Instant oil flow is displayed as a solid bar moving

within the bargraph. As the oil flow increases or
decreases, the solid bar will move correspondingly.
Direction arrows above the bargraph identify the

direction in which the cylinder will travel, i.e. extend
or retract.
3--112
Setting the Flow Rate (Rear EHR)
1. . Hydraulic cylinder retract bargraph (1), and

a pop--up will appear. The flow can be adjusted
using A" to set the required percentage.
Touch Ok to save setting. 3
2. . Hydraulic cylinder extend bargraph (2), and
a pop--up will appear. The flow can be adjusted
using A" to set the required percentage.
Touch Ok to to save setting.
3. By touching the bargraph at the 80% flow

position, oil flow will automatically be set to this 175
level. To make finer adjustments from the 80%
point use the A" arrows. Touch Ok to save
setting.
The flow settings will remain in the EHR memory to

be recalled for future use or until changed.
Setting the Flow Rate (Front EHR)
The setting of the hydraulic oil flow on the front EHR’s

is exactly the same as the rear valves described
above. A maximum of four valves may be fitted.
. F--Flow to access flow setting screen.
Where valve number one is dedicated to operate the

front 3--point hitch, a hitch symbol will appear in place
of N or the lock symbol. The hitch symbol will move
as the hitch is raised and lowered.
3--113
Creating a Manual Timer Programme
Manual programming of EHR valves is carried out

using the colour display and can be applied to both
lever and joystick.
NOTE: Where a timed sequence is required for

electronic valves controlled by the the joystick, the
sequence can only be created using the colour
display.
. Remote valves
. YB to scroll through remote valve list.
176
. R--Timer to access the rear EHR timer screen,
touch F--Timer to enter the front timer screen. Both
front and rear timer setting procedures are the same.
1. Identifies the remote valve number.
2. . EHR retract box to access pop--up menu to

set time duration for the cylinder retract cycle.
Touch A or " to decrease or increase time
duration. Touch Ok to memorise setting and
return to timer screen.
By repeatedly touching A or " the fill line

can be extended the full length of the bar graph,
this is the infinity setting. In this setting the oil will
continue to flow from the valve until the lever is
returned to the neutral position manually.
3. . EHR timer button to arm or disarm the

timer. Symbol will change to confirm whether
timer is armed or disarmed (X).
4. . EHR extend box to access pop--up menu to

set time duration for the cylinder extend cycle.
Touch A or " to decrease or increase time
duration. Touch Ok to memorise setting and
return to timer screen.
For single acting services the setting procedure is

the same as double acting. However, it is
recommened that the unused timer period is set to
zero (0s).
3--114
Engaging the EHR Lock
. Lock to bring up EHR lock screen
1. Identifies the remote valve number. The

illustration shows a tractor equipped with front
and rear valves.
2. . Remote valve lock symbol to lock or unlock

the required valve.
Touch YB to access other EHR setting screens,

touch Back to return to main menu screen.
177
When the valve is locked, a lock symbol (1) will

appear in the main EHR information screen to
confirm valve status.
178
3--115
Setting EHR Valve Priority
. Priority to access valve priority screen.
. EHR box to access pop--up remote valve select

menu. Use YB to scroll through remote valve list.
Touch the # box (1) to select the required valve, this

will save the setting and return to the prority screen.
Where it is not required to have a prioritised valve

touch None.
179
NOTE: Where a tractor is equipped with both
mid--mount and rear mounted EHR;s, only one valve
can be proritised.
Where the total flow demanded by the implement

exceeds the output of the hydraulic pump at the
current engine speed, then the system will balance
the available flow between all valves currently in
operation.
However, where a valve has oil flow priority, this

valve will continue to receive maximum flow.
Should a situation arise where the demand for oil flow

through the priority valve exceeds system capacity,
then non prioritised valve/s will be electronically shut
down by placing them in neutral.
Should this occur, N will appear against the relevant

valve/s in EHR display indicating they have been
shut down. When flow demand reduces, the valve/s
which have been placed into neutral by the system
will resume their function.
3--116
WITH DOT MATRIX DISPLAY
Performance Screen
When operating with EHR’s, the Dot Matrix Display

provides details on individual valve functions as
described below.
1. Remote valve number, R (rear) or F (front).
2. Timer period, retract (in seconds).
3. Timer period, extend (in seconds).
4. EHR lock status, on (X) or off (n).

180
5. Cylinder direction,  retract,  extend).
6. Oil flow (%).
The performance screen can be accessed by

depressing the EHR button (1) on the Enhanced
Keypad.
To scroll through the valve screens, repeat/depress

the EHR button.
181
Changing the EHR Settings
The information screen displays the following

information for both rear and, where fitted, mid
mounted EHR valves:
1. Valve Number, Rear (R) or Front (F).
2. Timer period (seconds)
3. Valve lock setting.
182
3--117
4. Timer armed or disarmed. When X is displayed

next to the timer symbol the timer is disarmed,
when n is shown the timer is armed.
5. EHR Oil flow (%).
6. Highlight to save EHR setting and exit set--up.
183
EHR Function Control
The EHR function control (1) can be used to adjust

the settings for oil flow, timer period, timer on or off
and individual valve locks. Both rear and
mid--mounted EHR settings can be changed using
the selector.
Press the control to enter the EHR set--up screen in

the DMD Figure 183, then rotate clockwise to select
the appropriate function which will appear inversed
(grey on a black background). With the required
function highlighted, depress the control again to
enter the set--up screen. 184
Select the setting to be changed and depress the

control again. A black border (1) will appear
surrounding the current value.
When making a setting adjustment, rotate the control

clockwise to increase a value, anti--clockwise to
decrease a value.
With the desired function highlighted, depress the

control to enter the set--up screen,
Rotate the control clockwise to increase the value,

anti--clockwise to reduce the value. Depress again to
save the changes. 185
When the settings for the valve have been saved, a

second valve can be selected by highlighting the
valve number and depressing the control. Rotate to
select another valve and depress to access the
set--up screen for this valve.
3--118
To exit the set--up screen, rotate the control until the

exit/save symbol is highlighted (1). Depress the
control to return the function select screen.
With the function select screen displayed, rotate the

control to highlight the exit/save symbol as desribed
above. Depress the control to return to the tractor
operating display.
The above procedures can be used to select a valve

for adjustment and to make changes to oil flows and
timer periods, in both extend and retract.
186
Arming or disarming a timer, or locking/unlocking a

valve can be achieved with a single press of the
rotary control. Highlight the timer (1) or lock display
(inversed) as shown and depress the control to
change the setting.
187
3--119
CREATING TIMER PROGRAMMES
Timer operation is primarily designed for use with

hydraulic cylinders although it can be used for any
timed hydraulic operation.
NOTE: Timer operation can be disabled at any time

by moving the appropriate lever or by accessing the
performance screen and de--actvating the timer.
Timed programmes using Electro--Hydraulic

Remote valves can be created automatically or
manually.
Where a hydraulic cylinder is repeatedly used to

operate an implement function i.e., ejecting a bale
from a round baler, the timer feature allows the
operator to create a timed sequence for this action.
Once created, the sequence (or programme) can be
repeated by simply moving the EHR lever or joystick
into the appropriate extend or retract position.
Using the EHR Levers
To operate the electronic remote valves in

programmed mode, depress/hold the timer button
(2), for one second. When the the timer light (1) starts
to flash, release the button. The system is now in
standby mode ready to accept a programme
sequence.
The light will flash for ten seconds allowing the

operator sufficient time to begin the programme
sequence. If a timed programme is not started within
this period, the system will automatically
de--activate. Depress/hold the timer button again to
re--start the sequence. 188
3--120
Programming a Double Acting Service
To programme the remote valves, first ensure the

cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connected to
the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractor
engine and set at the normal operating speed in
which the cylinder is to be operated.
This is important as the programming of the control

levers is based on a time interval corresponding to
the time it takes the cylinder rod to extend and/or
retract. Any change in engine speed may have an
effect on hydraulic flow and therefore the time taken
for the cylinder to extend and/or retract.
The timed period for control lever operation remains

the same regardless of oil flow, therefore consistent
operation in respect to engine speed and travel
speed is required for the system to function correctly.
Depress the timer button (2), and the corresponding

timer light will begin to flash. While the light is flashing
move control lever (1) to extend the cylinder (R). As
the lever is operated, the light will stop flashing and
will remain illuminated.
Hold the lever until the cylinder is extended to the

desired position and then return the lever to the
neutral position. When the lever is returned to the
neutral position the timer light will start to flash again
indicating the retract phase of the timed cycle can be
programmed.
Operate the control lever (1) to retract the cylinder

(L), the timer light (2), will cease to flash and remain 189
on. Hold the lever until the cylinder has completed
the retract cycle and then return it to the neutral
position. After the second phase of the programme
has been completed the light will remain on and the
programme will be saved.
3--121
Repeat the above sequence to programme the

remaining control levers if required.
The timer programme can be made to provide varied

sequences of operation i.e. extend/retract,
retract/extend or for one movement only, extend or
retract. The maximum allowable time span for any
timed operation is 60 seconds.
At key--off, the last timed sequence is retained in the

memory and can be recalled by momentarily
depressing the appropriate timer button at key--on.
190
Programming a Single Acting Service
To programme a single acting service carry out the

same set--up procedure as previously described for
a double acting service.
With the timer light flashing (2), move the remote

valve lever (1) from neutral to the extend position (R).
When the cylinder has extended to the desired
position, manually return the lever to the neutral
position.
The timer light will flash for 10 seconds and providing

the lever is not moved from neutral within this time, 191
the timer for the second phase of the programme will
default to ’0’ seconds.
When the timer light stops flashing and remains on,

the programme has been stored.
A single acting service can be programmed to

operate in either extend or retract modes.
NOTE: When using a timed sequence for a single

acting service i.e. programmed in extend mode only,
the retract mode will not function until the programme
sequence has been deleted.
If the control lever is moved to the float position no

timed programme is possible and the control lever
must be returned to neutral manually.
3--122
Programming Motor Mode
Motor mode is available on valves one to four

inclusive and can be operated using the remote valve
lever or joystick (where fitted).
NOTE: With motor mode selected, it is not possible

to change between lever and joystick operation of the
valve. To switch control from lever to joystick (or vice
versa), cancel motor mode, change control method
and re--select motor mode.
To select motor mode, move the appropriate lever to

the float position and depress/hold the
corresponding timer button (1) for one second. The
light (2) and display will confirm motor mode is active
on the selected valve.
With motor mode selected, lever functions are as

follows.
Lower Position. Motor is powered up.
Float Position. Motor slows and stops.
NOTE: If the control lever is inadvertantly moved to

the neutral or raise positions, the EHR control
system will treat these positions as float and the 192
motor will slow and stop.
If an error occurs in the EHR operating system with

motor mode engaged, the valve will automatically
default to float and the motor will slow and stop.
NOTE: Motor speed can be controlled by adjusting

the EHR flow setting.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the joystick to operate

hydraulic motors as damage may occur to the motor
or hydraulic system if the joystick is inadvertently
moved to the neutral position.
To exit motor mode, depress the timer button (1) with

the remote valve lever in the retract or float position.
3--123
Replaying a Timed Programme
NOTE: Timed programmes can only be applied to

remote valves R1 to R4 or F1 to F4. Remote valve
R5 (where fitted) does not have a timer facility.
With Levers
Depress the timer switch for the appropriate valve

and with the timer light illuminated move the lever to
the extend or retract detent position. The timer
sequence begins as soon as the lever is moved.
On reaching the end of a timed sequence, oil flowing

through the remote valve will be halted, the remote
valve lever should now be returned to the neutral
position ready for the next operation. Throughout the
replay sequence, the timer light will remain
illuminated.
With Colour Display
A timer sequence can also be activated through the

colour display. Select the front or rear timer screen
and touch the timer symbol (3).
This will arm the timer function and the timer light will
start to flash, move the appropriate lever, joystick or
quad switch to initiate oil flow.
To disable the timer function touch the screen again.

A cross on the timer symbol will indicate the timer has
been disarmed.
193
With Joystick
Depress the timer switch on the EHR lever panel to

activate the system and, with the timer light
illuminated, move the joystick in the direction
required.
The joystick must be moved at least 90% of travel to

initiate flow, release the joystick and allow to return
to neutral. When the timed period ends, the oil flow
will stop. Move the joystick in the opposite direction
to initiate a second timed period if one has been
programmed.
The timer sequence can be cancelled at any time by

moving the joystick approximately 30% of travel in
the currently selected direction.
3--124
With Quad Switch Relieving System Pressure
On valves controlled by the Quad switch, a timer

sequence may be activated by using the switch.
WARNING
Depress the timer switch on the EHR lever panel to Before connecting or disconnecting hydraulic hoses
activate the system and, with the timer light at the remote cylinders, relieve the pressure in the
illuminated, momentarily depress the Quad switch to circuit by first starting the engine and then move the
initiate oil flow. control levers fully forward to the “float” position.
Then stop the engine. Make sure no one will be
When the timed period ends, the oil flow will stop. injured by moving equipment when relieving
Depress the opposite side of the switch to initiate a pressure in the system. Before disconnecting
second timed sequence where required. cylinders or equipment, make sure the equipment or
implement is supported securely.
The timer sequence can be cancelled at any time by Never work under equipment supported by a
depressing the Quad switch again in the same hydraulic device because it may drop if the control is
direction as currently selected. actuated (even with the engine stopped) or in the
event of hose failure, etc. always use a secure
support for equipment which must be serviced while
Disabling a Programme in the raised position. Make sure that oil contained
within the remote cylinders is clean and is of the
To disable a timed programme, depress the timer correct grade.
button or use the EHR function control to select the
timer symbol in the set--up screen. With the timer
symbol selected depress the control to disable the Operating with Headland Turn Sequence
programme (X in the display).
IMPORTANT: When including electronic remote
The timer light will extinguish but the sequence will valve operation in a Headland Turn Sequence, it is
be retained in the programme memory. important to allow sufficient time for the movement
of the control lever to be recorded as it passes
Recalling a Stored Programme through each position (R,N,L,F or vice versa).
Pausing the lever in each position for approximately
With the key--start on and all remote valve levers in 1/ second will provide sufficient time for the step to
2
neutral, momentarily depress the timer button for the be recorded accurately. Moving the lever too quickly
EHR required. The light will illuminate confirming the may confuse data transfer causing the implement to
stored timer sequence has been re--activated. respond incorrectly on playback.
Alternatively, access the timer screen in the colour

display and re--activate the timer manually.
To clear a timer sequence and record a new one,

depress and hold the switch.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic

programme settings made during tractor operation
are transferred from the operating memory to the
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.
3--125
Connecting Single-Acting Cylinders
Connect the hose (2) from a single-acting cylinder to

the lower coupler (1) Figure 195, on the remote
control valve.
To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever (1) back to the extend position (R).
Manually return the lever to the neutral (N) position

to stop the cylinder when it has reached the desired
position.
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever

fully forward to the float (F) position. 194
NOTE: In single acting timer mode the remote lever

will lock in the extend position and will not
automatically return to the neutral position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the “float” position to

retract a single-acting cylinder. The lower or “retract”
position is for double-acting cylinders only.
195
3--126
Connecting Double-Acting Cylinders
To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever rearwards, to the raise (R) position.
To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control

lever forward, past neutral (N) to the lower (L)
position.
Place the lever in the neutral (N) position to stop all

cylinder movement.
Further forward movement of the lever will select

float (F) which will allow the cylinder to extend or 196
retract freely. This feature is of material assistance
when carrying out work with equipment such as
scraper blades and loaders.
Connect the pressure hose (2) from a double-acting

cylinder to the lower coupler (4) on the remote control
valve. Connect the return hose (1) to the upper
coupler (3) on the same valve.
197
3--127
Operating Continuous Flow Hydraulic

Equipment
IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flow

equipment, the remote control valve lever must not
be moved rearward to the neutral (N) or raise (R)
positions as damage to the equipment may result.
Always select the motor mode function when
operating with hydraulic motors.
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic

motors) should be connected to the valve couplers
with the pressure hose (1) connected to the upper
coupler (3) and the return hose (2) connected to the 198
lower coupler (4) of the same valve. Alternatively, the
return hose may connected to the low pressure
return circuit (see page 3--130, ’Return Oil Line’).
The oil flow should be adjusted to regulate the motor

speed. If the flow is too high, the 3-point hitch and
other remote valves may slow down or stop.
Controlling the flow in this way will ensure that the
hydraulic system will only supply the oil required by
the motor.
With the remote control valve lever (1) fully forward

in the float (F) position, the motor will be stationary.
The hydraulic motor will operate if the lever is pulled
back to the retract position (L). To stop the motor,
move the lever from the retract position to the float
(F) position. In the float position the motor will come
to a stop slowly, which will prevent possible damage
the motor.
To further protect the tractor and equipment observe

the following:
 Do not open any bypass valve in the equipment
or motor. Adjust the oil flow through the valve to
regulate the rate of flow or speed of the motor. 199
 To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operate
continuous flow equipment at the highest flow
setting and lowest engine speed that will give the
required machine performance and speed.
3--128
 It is recommended that a temperature gauge, Bleeding Remote Cylinders

where available, is installed in the remote circuit
when using hydraulic motors for continuous When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a
operation. If over-heating occurs, stop the new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
hydraulic motor until the oil cools. Ensure the flow that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
control setting is at maximum and the engine necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
speed at a minimum, appropriate to machine
performance.
With the hoses connected to the remote control valve
If operating conditions are normal and high couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
temperatures persist, install an oil cooler in the motor cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
return circuit. The maximum recommended and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the
operating temperature of the oil is 125C (257F). remote control valve operating lever.
Your authorised dealer can supply a suitable oil
cooler and the necessary fittings or make the Check the rear axle oil level before and after
installation for you. operating a remote cylinder.
Operating Several Remote Valves IMPORTANT: All hydraulic hoses should have a
Simultaneously or Remote Valves and minimum temperature rating of 125 C (257 F).
Hydraulic Lift Simultaneously Pressure and sensing hoses should be rated at 295
bar (4278 psi) working pressure.
If operating two or more remote control valves
simultaneously or remote valves and the hydraulic
lift, the flow through the valves should be adjusted
using the enhanced keypad to provide a partial flow,
as previously described in Setting the Maximum
Flow Rate. If not so adjusted, all the available flow
may be directed to the full flow circuit when the
pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other
circuits in use.
NOTE: For equipment using more than one remote

valve, the hydraulic service with the highest priority
should be connected to the valve that has been set
to provide oil flow priority, see page 3--116.
3--129
HYDRAULIC POWER BEYOND PORT for

EXTERNAL SERVICES
NOTE: See page 3--133 for available oil quantities

when powering external hydraulic equipment.
For implements or attachments requiring continuous

or high oil flow from the tractor hydraulic system,
provision is made to connect directly into the main
hydraulic circuit at the rear of the tractor.
To operate correctly the implement must be fitted

with a closed centre hydraulic valve system that will,
through a sensing line, control oil flow from the main
tractor hydraulic pump.
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove any

blanking plugs or attach pipework, ensure the areas
around the plugs and pipe connections are
thoroughly clean to prevent contamination of the
tractor hydraulic system.
Power Beyond Ports
Return Oil Line (1)

The return oil line from the implement control valves
should be connected to the M27 x 2/19 (ISO 6149)
port (1) using a ’T’ connector available from your
authorised dealer. This will permit the oil to return
directly back into the tractor hydraulic system.
200
Alternative Return Oil Line (4)

Where access is difficult to port (1) and it is not
possible to utilise a ’T’ connector, the return oil line
from the implement control valves should be
connected to port (4) using a straight connector with
a 3/4 x 14 (B) thread and O--ring seal available from
Where the return line has been disconnected, the

port should be sealed using a cap nut and O--ring
available from your authorised dealer.
IMPORTANT: When returning oil into the

transmission it is important the correct ports are 201
used. This will avoid the possibility of oil being blown
out of the transmission breather.
3--130
Pressure Line (2)

To connect the implement pressure line, remove the
plug (2) from the external services ’power beyond’
port on top of the remote valve manifold. Using a
suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5 (ISO 6149),
attach the implement supply line to this port. With the
implement control valve in neutral, a low standby
pressure of 21 to 24 bar (305 to 348 lbf. in.) will be
maintained in the pressure line connected to this
port.
NOTE: Ensure the hoses have a suitable capacity to

accommodate the required oil flow, and that both the
sensing line and hoses are sufficiently long enough 202
to allow for implement movement or articulation
when in work.
Load Sensing Line (3)

Connect the sensing line from the M12 x 1.5/11.5
(ISO 6149) port (3), to the implement control valve.
It is the sensing line which generates and controls the
oil pressure and flow from the tractor hydraulic pump.
When an implement control valve is operated, the
low standby pressure from port (3), is diverted down
the sensing line to ’switch on’ the tractor hydraulic
pump. In operation, the load sensing line constantly
monitors pressure and flow to ensure supply never
exceeds demand.
IMPORTANT: To ensure correct operation of the

system, the implement control valve, when in
neutral, must be capable of directing the pressure
from the load sensing line back to sump through the
return oil line.
3--131
ISO Power Beyond Couplings
Where an oil supply from the Power Beyond ports is

required on a frequent basis, it is recommended that
dedicated ISO Power Beyond couplings are fitted to
your tractor. These are available from your
authorised dealer as an accessory.
The ISO coupling consists of three ports.

1. Return oil line.
Coupling size: 25
Port size: M30 x 2/19
2. Oil supply (pressure) port.
Coupling size: 19
Port size: M27 x 2/19
203
3. Load sensing port.
Coupling size: 6.3
Port size: M14 x 1.5/11.5
The maximum flow available through the ISO

pressure port will depend on the output from the
tractor hydraulic pump. Full flow will be available
from a 120 litre pump assuming there are no other
hydraulic demands on the system.
With the high capacity pump, up to 140 litre/min is

available.
IMPORTANT: Always relieve hydraulic pressure in

remote cylinders before connecting or disconnecting
hydraulic hoses.
3--132
REAR AXLE and HYDRAULIC OIL LEVELS

WHEN USING REMOTE HYDRAULIC
EQUIPMENT
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good

practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark in
the sight glass with the tractor parked on level ground
and the three--point hitch in the fully raised position.
However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to
the remote control valves it should be remembered
that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and
could seriously lower the oil level. Operating the
tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the
rear axle and transmission components.
NOTE: Before connecting remote cylinders, stop the
engine and thoroughly clean the connections to
prevent oil contamination.
With the rear axle oil level at the Normal,
Intermediate or Extra marks in the sight glass, the
following maximum oil volumes may be taken from
the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment without
the need to further top up the system:
Operating Parameters
a) Operating while driving in normal conditions,

including long periods of use.
b) Operating while driving in normal conditions

(flat fields) for short periods only.
c) Operating stationary equipment on level ground.
Maximum Oil Volumes, All Transmissions

Extra Level (1)
a) 23 litres (24.3 U.S. qts.)
b) 27.5 litres (29.0 U.S. qts.)
c) 33 litres (34.8 U.S. qts.)
Intermediate (max) Level (2)

a) 12.5 litres (13.2 U.S. qts.)
b) 17.5 litres (18.4 U.S. qts.)
Normal Level (3)

a) 8 litres (8.4 U.S. qts.) 204
b) 12 litres (12.6 U.S. qts.)
3--133
Addititional Oil Reserves

Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be
added to the rear axle above the level indicators is 7
litres (7.3 U.S. qts.). With this quantity added to the
rear axle, the quantities stated may be increased by
the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts.), but no
more.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid or diesel oil escaping under pressure
can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
 Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a
piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
 Stop the engine and relieve pressure before
connecting or disconnecting lines by moving the
remote control valve lever(s) fully forward to the
‘float’ position then back to neutral.
 Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising lines.
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
attention immediately or gangrene may result.
WARNING
Never work under or allow anyone near raised
equipment as it will drop when relieving pressure in
the system or in the event of hose failure, etc. Before
disconnecting cylinders or equipment ensure the
equipment or implement is supported securely.
Always use a secure support for equipment which
must be serviced while in the raised position.
3--134
THREE-POINT HITCH
NOTE: Before attaching equipment to the

three--point hitch, read the following text, carefully.
ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Before attaching equipment, adjust lift rods IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating
and select the correct top link hole for the implement equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where
and work to be carried out. fitted) are locked in the operating position.
Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers or sway blocks 3. With the engine stopped and parking brake
are installed and correctly adjusted. Remove the engaged, adjust the top link until the implement
swinging drawbar, if close-mounted equipment is mast pin can be inserted through the mast and
being attached. top link.
IMPORTANT: Always select Position Control or set 4. Connect remote equipment, where applicable.
the draft loading wheel to position 10 when attaching
equipment, transporting equipment, when no 5. After attaching implement and before actual
equipment is attached or at any time when not operation check that:
operating in Draft Control.
 No interference occurs with tractor
components.
NOTE: See also ‘External Power Lift Control’ on
page 3--99 for more details.  The top link does not contact the PTO guard
with the implement at its lowest position.
Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as
follows: IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven
equipment, check to make sure that the PTO
1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch driveline will not over-extend so as to become
points are level with and slightly ahead of the disengaged, bottom out or be at an excessive angle.
implement hitch pins. Ensure that the driveline shield does not contact the
PTO guard or drawbar. See ‘Attaching P.T.O.--Driven
2. Attach the implement to the lower links, as Equipment’ on page 3--59.
described in ‘Flexible Link Ends’ on page 3--140 or
’Quick Hitch’ on page 3--141. IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or
semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or
CAUTION when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
Engage the parking brake before leaving the tractor hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
to make the connections. It is essential to have the between the implement and the tractor.
engine running to operate the external Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere
fender-mounted switches when making lower link with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
connections. If your tractor does not have these steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or
switches or when making other connections, stop the stabilisers.
engine.
3--135
IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE When attaching mounted equipment to the

three-point hitch, the following adjustments may be
CAUTION made to ensure satisfactory operation:
Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may
interfere with or damage the cab. You may be injured  Set the lift rods in the front hole in the lower links.
by broken glass or the cab ROPS may be damaged This will reduce the lift height (dependent upon
if equipment interferes with the cab. the lift rod length).
 Lengthen the lift rods.

To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:
 Connect the top link to the upper hole in the top
 Attach the equipment as outlined previously. link attachment bracket and use the lowest
possible equipment mast hole.
 Rotate the draft loading wheel to select full
position control. Check for adequate clearance  Make only the minimum adjustments required to
by slowly raising the equipment with the 3--point clear the cab. If equipment performance is
hitch lift control. If any part of the equipment unsatisfactory, it may be necessary to modify the
comes closer than 100 mm (4 in.) to the cab, equipment, consult your authorised dealer.
adopt one of the following options:
Removing Equipment
Where the tractor is equipped with Electronic Draft
Control, adjust the height limit control knob to limit When removing equipment, the procedure is the
upward movement. reverse of attaching. The following information will
make disconnection easier and safer.
If Draft Control is needed or if insufficient ground
clearance is obtained with adequate cab clearance,  Always park the equipment on a firm, level
you can adjust the lift linkage, open the cab rear surface.
window, or modify the equipment to clear the cab.
 Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall
NOTE: Linkage adjustments, while increasing cab when detached from the tractor.
clearance, may have an adverse effect on the
implement operating characteristics  Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote
cylinders by selecting the float position before
disconnecting.
3--136
LIFT RODS, LOWER LINKS AND TOP LINK

(mechanical adjust)
CAUTION
Before attempting to adjust a mechanically operated
lift rod or the top link, lower attached equipment to the
ground, apply the parking brake and stop the engine.
Before removing any securing pin, ensure that
attached equipment is correctly supported and that
no residual pressure remains in the hydraulic
system.
Top Link Adjustment
The top link has a threaded centre section (1) , which,

when rotated, will shorten or lengthen the top link, as
required. Lift up the spring retainer (2) to allow the
centre section to rotate. To ease adjustment, lift the
handle (3) and use it as a lever. Alternatively, rotating
the link end (4) will permit limited adjustment of top
link length.
To lock the sleeve after adjustment, push the spring

retainer down so that it holds the handle (3) flush
against the sleeve.
205
When not in use, the top link can be removed and
stored in the tractor or left in an upright position and
retained by hooking the ball end of the handle (2) into
the bracket (1) on the rear axle housing.
206
3--137
Lift Rod Adjustment
The lift rods are adjusted by rotating the upper part

of the lift rod by means of the handle (1) on the
turnbuckle.
Before the turnbuckle can be rotated, it is necessary

to lift the handle to disengage it from the lock (2)
Figure 208, on the lower section of the lift rod. Rotate
the turnbuckle to lengthen or shorten the lift rod
assembly.
When adjustment is satisfactory, allow the

turnbuckle to lower into position. Ensure that the 207
turnbuckle is fully down and engaged with the lock to
prevent unintentional rotation.
Each lower link has two holes for attaching the lift
rods. Attach the lift rods to the front hole (nearest the
tractor) for maximum lift height. Use the rear hole for
maximum lift capacity.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or

semi--mounted equipment to the 3--point hitch or
when coupling trailed equipment to the drawbar or
automatic pick--up hitch, ensure that there is
adequate clearance between the implement and the
cab or rear window in any open position.
208
Hitch Float
The float facility allows a limited amount of vertical
movement on the lower link when operating with
wide implements or equipment which requires to
move independently of the lower links.
Remove the lower link retaining clip and lock plate

(1). Withdraw the pin (2) Figure 209, from the lift rod
to permit the outer lock plate to be rotated into the
vertical position. Replace the pin, inner lock plate and
retaining clip as shown. The hitch is now in the float
position.
IMPORTANT: When travelling on the road with a 209
heavy implement mounted on the 3--point hitch,
ensure that both lift rods are connected to the lower
links in the FIXED position to prevent excessive
implement bounce.
3--138
TOP LINK AND RIGHT-HAND LIFT ROD

(hydraulic adjust)
The hydraulic adjust top link (1) is available for your

tractor. This may be fitted in conjunction with a
hydraulic adjust right-hand lift rod (2). Both the top
link and the lift rod incorporate a double--acting ram
cylinder connected into the tractor hydraulic system.
Four switches located on the Control Panel operate

the hydraulic top link and right--hand lift rod.
210
Depress/hold switch (2) to retract the top link,

depress/hold switch (3), to extend the link.
Depress/hold switch (1) to extend the hydraulic

cylinder and lower the link arm, depress/hold switch
(4), to retract the cylinder and raise the link arm.
Automatic check valves on the top link and lift rod

cylinders will prevent them from ’creeping’.
211
3--139
TOP LINK BRACKET

(all models)
Two holes are provided in the bracket for attachment

of the top link.
Insert the pin (2) through the upper hole, as shown,

for maximum lift capacity and the greatest implement
to cab clearance. Use the lower hole (3) for the best
ground penetration and greatest implement to
ground clearance (when the implement is raised).
To relocate the top link, pull out the ‘R’ clip (1) and
extract the securing pin. Relocate the top link and 212
pin, as required, ensuring that the tang on the end of
the securing pin handle locates in the other hole.
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with an automatic

pick--up hitch, the pin may foul the hitch lift rods
during removal. If necessary, raise or lower the hitch
until the pin can be easily withdrawn.
FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS

(where fitted)
A release ring (1) is provided on the upper surface of

each link end. Pull up the ring to release the latch and
slide the link end rearwards. With the link ends
released, connection to the implement will be easier.
The link end (4) is shown in the extended position.
The link end (2) is shown in the closed (operating)
position.
With both link ends extended, as at (4), connect the

link ends to the equipment and secure with lynch
pins. Start the engine and carefully inch the tractor 213
rearwards until the latches lock in the detent (3) on
each link arm. Stop the engine and apply the
handbrake.
Attach the top link and adjust accordingly.
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the

equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are
locked in the operating position. Remove the
drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted
equipment.
3--140
QUICK HITCH
The Quick Hitch consists of an alternative pair of

lower links (2) and an adjustable top link (1). The
lower links and the top link have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements
without leaving the cab. The claws are equipped with
self-locking latches to ensure positive retention of
the tractor hitch to the implement. Cables are
provided for attachment to the latches.
An adjustable spacer spring is available as an

accessory. The spacer spring can be adjusted to set
the width of the lower links to match that of the 214
implement hitch points.
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the

implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin. The two plain ball-bushings (2) with their
detachable guides (3) should be installed on the
implement lower hitch pins.
215
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Adjust the stabilisers to maintain the tractor lower links

at the correct distance apart so they align with the
ball-bushings installed on the implement lower hitch
pins.
Place the top link in the transport position. With the

link arms fully lowered and the self-locking latches in
the operating position (1), reverse the tractor until the
link ends are beneath the implement hitch pins. The
combination of large claw openings and the guides
on the implement ball-bushings make precise
alignment of tractor to implement unnecessary. 216
3--141
Raise the lower links until the claw couplers engage

the ball-bushes. An audible click will be heard as the
self-locking latches engage the implement
ball-bushes. Lower the top link claw onto the upper
implement ball-bush and press down until the latch
is heard to engage. Increase or decrease top link
length, as necessary.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the 3-point hitch.
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor
Using the hydraulic lift control lever, fully lower the

implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the tractor. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull the release cable on the top link to release the

claw from the implement hitch.
Pull the release cable (2) on both lower links. The

lever will lock in position with the latch retracted (1).
This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on
the implement lower hitch pins when the links are 217
lowered fully. Fully lower the lower links and drive the
tractor forward, clear of the implement.
NOTE: Ensure the release cables do not foul wheels,

or moving parts of the 3--point hitch or implement.
When not in use, secure the cables to the rubber
strap on the rear right-hand side of the cab frame.
3--142
LINKAGE STABILISERS
CAUTION
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
telescopic stabilisers are installed and correctly
adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement.
ROUND SECTION SCREW TYPE
Telescopic stabilisers control the side to side

movement (sway) of the lower links and attached
equipment when in work or when being transported.
This is especially important when operating on
slopes or near fences, walls or ditches and with
certain implements. Check your implement
Each stabiliser consists of a fabricated tube (2) with

a coupling at each end. The end with the pin (4) is
attached to the 3--point hitch. The screw thread (3)
screws into the rear end of the tube to provide
adjustment. The ball end (6) is attached to a
mounting bracket (1) bolted to the outer end of the
rear axle housing. This ball end is a loose, sliding fit
within the tube. The pin (5) may be passed through
drillings in the tube and rod, as shown, to lock the
assembly as a unit.
In practice, the locating pin (5) should be removed

from both stabilisers and the implement attached to
the 3--point hitch. To remove the pin, pull back the
218
securing clip. When the implement is satisfactorily
aligned, the tube should be rotated until the holes in
the front end of the tube and the sliding ball end are
aligned. The locating pin should then be passed
through the holes and the securing clip replaced.
With the pins inserted in this manner, both stabilisers

will be locked as a rigid unit and the implement will be
prevented from swaying both in work or in the
transport position.
3--143
Under certain conditions or when using equipment

such as ploughs etc., it may be desirable to allow the
3--point hitch (and implement) to sway from side to
side.
If the pin is removed from the front hole, a limited

degree of sway will be permitted. The pin should be
re-inserted through the rear hole, as shown at (1).
The pin will act as a stop to limit the degree of sway.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length,

particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that
there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the
stabilisers or lower links. 219
NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick--Up Hitch,

ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide
adequate clearance between the lower links and the
hitch.
3--144
AUTOMATIC STABILISERS
Automatic telescopic stabilisers may be fitted in

place of the standard telescopic stabilisers,
described previously.
WARNING
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.
Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube

assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The
tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket
bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing.
An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the

lower links. The threaded rod engages with the
screwed thread in the tube assembly and the overall
length of the assembly is determined by screwing the
rod in or out, as required.
An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to

the rear cab support and at the other end, via a
spring, to a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part
of the stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of 220
the stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.
When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack

when the lower links are raised from the operating
position, so allowing the cover to drop down over the
lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down, as
shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset length.
The lower links are, therefore, retained at a set
distance apart, preventing them (and attached
equipment) from moving from side to side (swaying).
However, when the 3--point hitch is lowered into the
work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the
cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope
freely. The stabilisers (and implement) will then sway
when engaged in the ground. This feature is useful
as it provides greater implement control when turning
on the headlands of a field.
3--145
Adjusting the Stabilisers

In practice, the implement should be attached to the
3--point hitch with the cover (4) on both stabilisers
raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to telescope
freely.
Lift the locking/adjusting lever (2) up over the peg (1)
so that the lever is at right-angles to the stabiliser. Turn
the telescopic section, by means of the lever, so that
the threaded section (3) screws into or out of the
stabiliser. When the length is satisfactory, i.e., the notch
in the cover aligns with the lug on the stabiliser, lower
the lever back down over the peg and close the cover.
221
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the
appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the
cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement
is lowered into work.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to

provide sideways movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or
lower links.

hitch.
3--146
SWAY BLOCK STABILISERS
Sway block stabilisers may be installed as an

alternative to telescopic stabilisers and will control
the side to side movement (sway) of the lower links
and attached equipment when in work or when being
transported. This is especially important when
operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches
and with certain implements. Check your Implement
WARNING
stabilisers are installed and correctly adjusted to
prevent excessive lateral movement.
Sway blocks consist of reversible blocks (1) bolted to

either side of the drawbar hanger. A steel wear pad 1 1
(2) bolted to the inner surface of each lower link,
contacts the sway block to prevent excessive sway
(lateral movement) of the lower links. The thickness
of the pad (and therefore the degree of sway) is
controlled by two spacer shims of 8 mm and 10 mm
thickness, respectively.
The positioning of the shims relative to the pad

depends upon the required width setting of the lower
links (to suit the attached implement) or the degree
of sway required.
222
Shim/Wear Pad Position
The left-hand side of Figure 222 shows both spacer

shims (3) and (4) installed between the wear pad (2)
and the lower link (1). This will increase the distance
between the lower links to suit a wider implement.
The right-hand side of Figure 222 shows the 8 mm

shim (4) on the outer surface of the lower link with the
10 mm shim (3) installed between the pad and the
lower link. Alternatively, the shims may be omitted
altogether to reduce the distance between the lower
links when operating with a narrower implement.
3--147
Sway Block Position
To allow lateral movement of the lower links (and

attached equipment) in both the operating and
transport positions, attach both sway blocks (1) so
that the flat surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown
in the right-hand side of Figure 223.
When it is desirable to have sideways movement of

the equipment in the operating position, but remain
rigid in the transport position, remove the bolts
securing the sway blocks to the drawbar hanger and
relocate the sway blocks (1) so that the curved
surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown in the 223
left-hand side of Figure 223.
This will allow the implement to sway when the lower

links are lowered into the working position but
become rigid when raised.
IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to

provide lateral movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the lower links or implement contacting
the rear tyres. Ensure that there is sufficient
clearance between the wear pads and the sway
blocks to allow the 3-point hitch to raise and lower
without the possibility of the lower links binding or
becoming bent.

hitch.
3--148
DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS
IMPORTANT: Before attaching trailed equipment to

the tractor, read the following text carefully.
Maximum Permissible Towing Weights
The Product Identification Number plate, located on

the rear of the cab, provides important information on
tractor and towed equipment weight combinations.
The figures shown are the maximum permissible

vehicle and towing weights and should not be
exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of
the tractor.
224
Towing Speeds For towed equipment without brakes
Your tractor may be capable of operating at speeds Do not tow equipment that does not have brakes,
that exceed the maximum allowable transport speed
for most towed equipment.  At speeds over 32 km/h (20 MPH); or
 That, when fully loaded, has a mass (weight)

Before transporting towed equipment, read the over 1.5 metric tonnes (3300 lbs.) and more than
Operator’s Manual for the equipment. Ensure that 1.5 times the mass (weight) of the tractor.
equipment is correctly installed, know how to
transport it safely, and determine the maximum  When trailer brakes are required by law.
permissible transport speed. Ensure that the
combination of tractor and towed equipment is in  That has a mass (weight) that exceeds the
compliance with local and national legislation. values declared on the tractor Product
Identification Number plate (as applicable).
Never transport at speeds that exceed the
equipment’s maximum transport speed. Exceeding For towed equipment with brakes
the equipment’s maximum transport speed may
result in reduced braking performance and/or loss of Do not tow equipment that has brakes,
control of the tractor and its towed equipment.
 At speeds over 40 km/h (25 MPH); or
Unless otherwise specified by the equipment  That when fully loaded has a mass (weight) more
manufacturer or legislation, observe the following than 2.5 times the mass (weight) of the tractor.
when towing.
 That has a mass (weight) that exceeds the
values declared on the tractor Product
Identification Number plate (as applicable).
3--149
ATTACHING/DETACHING TRAILED
EQUIPMENT
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require DRAWBAR SAFETY

brakes on towed equipment when operating on the
public highway. Before travelling on public roads, WARNING
make sure you comply with the legal requirements Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
for your country. the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for
To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn
implements: rearwards.
1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height.

NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar
2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not
implement hitch to align. exceed the maximum static downward load or the
rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see
3. Apply the handbrake and stop the engine. Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
Section 3).
4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer
is in the latched position. IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the
highway it is recommended that a safety chain
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of
semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or the implement be installed between the tractor and
when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or implement hitch. See Safety Chain on page 3--155.
hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
between the implement and the tractor.
Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere
with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or
stabilisers.
NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions

or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store
the clevis and hitch pin.
Always use a safety chain installed between the

tractor and implement hitch when transporting
equipment on the highway. See page 3--155.
3--150
SWINGING DRAWBARS
Two types of swinging drawbar are available. The

sliding type is illustrated in Figure 225. This drawbar
may be installed as part of a tow hitch or as an
independent unit.
The roller type, shown in Figure 228, is

recommended when heavy draft, trailed equipment
is used for extended periods. This drawbar is
mounted on rollers and offers additional turning ease
when compared with the sliding type.
Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar
The drawbar (2) pivots about a single pin at the front

end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to swing
the full width of the hanger. By inserting the swing
limiter pins (1) in the appropriate holes, restricted
movement of the drawbar is permitted.
Alternatively, the drawbar can be pinned in any one

of three positions by insertion of the pins in the
appropriate holes. In Figure 225, the drawbar is
shown pinned in the central position to prevent
swinging.
225
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling
equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment.
Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground

engaging equipment which does not require
accurate positioning. This will make steering and
turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.
3--151
All Countries Except North America
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of three

holes in the drawbar to vary the P.T.O. shaft to hitch
point distance. See Figure 226 and the following
table:
Hole (see P.T.O. Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 226) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1440 kg (3175 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1680 kg (3700 lb.)
226
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 2575 kg (5675 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2300 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 1305 kg (2875 lb.)
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.
When towing equipment exerting high static

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use the close-coupled position -- hole 3, with the
clevis in the uppermost position..
3--152
North America only
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of four

point distance. See Figure 227 and the following
table:
Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 227 ) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 1000 kg (2204 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 1215 kg (2678 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1620 kg (3571 lb.) 227
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1900 kg (4188 lb.)
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 780 kg (1719 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 885 kg (1951 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)

downward forces, such as two--wheeled trailers,
etc., use the close-coupled positions -- holes 3 or 4
with the clevis in the uppermost position.
3--153
Roller Type Swinging Drawbar
The drawbar (2) Figure 228, pivots about a single pin

at the front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar
to swing the full width of the hanger.
By inserting the swing limiter pin (1) in the

appropriate hole and through the drawbar, the
drawbar can be pinned in any one of seven positions.
Alternatively, the drawbar may be allowed to swing
the full width of the hanger (3).
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling

equipment which requires accurate positioning and 228
when transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to
swing when pulling ground engaging equipment
which does not require accurate positioning. This will
make steering and turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of two

point distance. See Figure 229 and the
accompanying table.
3--154
Hole (see P.T.O. Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 229) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1360 kg (2995 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1630 kg (3590 lb.)
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations. 229

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use hole 2 with the clevis in the uppermost position.
SAFETY CHAIN
When towing implements on public roads, use a

safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or
greater than the gross weight of the implement to be
towed. This will control the implement (1) in case the
drawbar (3) and implement become disconnected.
After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by

driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short
distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If
necessary, re-adjust to eliminate a tight or loose
chain.
230
Check the implement operator’s manual for
implement weight and attaching hardware
specifications.
Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide

are available from your authorised dealer.
3--155
REAR TOW HITCH
Description
Various rear tow hitch options are available. All

versions consist of a fabricated steel frame bolted to
the rear axle centre housing. A tow pin or ball is
provided, adjustable for height.
The slider type frame is is equipped with rotating pins

that engage in notches in the frame to secure the
hitch at the required height.
With this type of frame, a second, fixed tow pin (piton)

is available as an option. The piton is installed at the
bottom of the assembly.
Four types of hitch assembly are available :--
 Heavy duty non-swivelling tow pin.

See Figure 231.
 Swivelling tow pin -- auto operation.

See Figure 233.
 Swivelling tow pin -- manual operation.

See Figure 235.
 K 80 ball.
See Figure 239 .
A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part of

the assembly. See ‘Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar’
on page 3--151 for details of drawbar operation.
NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use

with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. Observe the
maximum static downward loads quoted in the text.
3--156
Slider Frame with non-swivelling Tow Pins

(where fitted)
The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, non-swivelling, tow pin assembly.
Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (5) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame. Using both hands on the handle (5) lift or lower
the tow pin assembly (4), as required.
When at the required height, support the tow pin with

one hand and lower the handle to the horizontal 231
position. The pins will rotate and re-engage the notches
in the frame. Lower the P.T.O. guard (6).
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (3) from the tow pin and lift out using the
handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes
through the eye of the trailer drawbar. Replace the ‘R’
clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed the rear tyre load capacity or the following
values, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and
Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
Category D3 tow pin 2500 kg (5500 lb.)
NOTE: A Category D3 tow pin is standard equipment

on your tractor. A Category D2 pin and housing is
available as a dealer installed accessory.
Category D2 tow pin 2000 kg (4400 lb.)
3--157
Slider Frame with Swivelling Tow Pins

(where fitted)
The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height

adjustable, swivelling tow pin assembly with manual
or auto operation.
With reference to Figure 232, adjust the height of the

tow pin assembly, as follows:
Grasp the handle (2) with the right hand. Press and
hold in the button (1) to release the locking mechanism.
Pull the handle (3) down to the horizontal position with
the left hand and release the push button to lock the 232
handle (3) in the horizontal position. Lowering the
handle will rotate the pins and disengage them from the
frame.
Using both handles, lift or lower the complete tow pin

assembly. When at the required height, hold in the
push button and lift the left-hand handle up to the
vertical position, as shown in Figure 232. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower
the P.T.O. guard (4).
WARNING
Before attaching a trailer, ensure that the pins are
fully engaged in the notches, i.e. the handle (3)
Figure 232, is in the vertical position. The tow pin
assembly must not rest on the P.T.O. guard or on the
bolt heads at the end of the slider guides.
3--158
Swivelling Tow Pin -- Auto Engagement
The tow pin (2) Figure 233, is spring-loaded in the

engaged (down) position, as shown. To attach a trailer
to the tow pin, lift the release lever (1) to the vertical
position to retract the tow pin up into it’s housing.
The release lever is connected by the cable (4) to a

handle in the cab. This will permit trailer attachment
without leaving the cab. Pull up the handle (1) Figure
234 to actuate the cable release and retract the tow
pin up into it’s housing.
233
The pin will stay in the raised position until the trailer
drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the drawbar
will contact the trip lever (3) Figure 233 and cause
the pin to drop down into the engaged position.
Alternatively, the tow pin will drop down into the
engaged position if the lever (1) is pulled down.
WARNING
Do not attempt to trip the lever by hand as the fingers
may be trapped by the action of the spring-loaded
tow pin.
234
Swivelling Tow Pin -- Manual Engagement
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (1) Figure 235, from the tow pin and lift out
using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it
passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar.
Replace the ‘R’ clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
235
3--159
Swivel Lock
The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening

the socket-headed screw (1) Figure 236 on the
underside of the tow pin assembly. This feature will
permit a trailer with a non-swivelling drawbar to
articulate relative to the towing tractor.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor tow pin to

swivel if the trailed equipment is equipped with a
swivelling tow pin connector.
236
Fixed Tow Pin (Piton)
An optional fixed tow pin (piton) may be provided at

the bottom of the assembly.
To attach a trailer to the piton, remove the lynch pin

(2) and withdraw the retaining pin (4). Lift the security
latch (1) and lower the eye of the trailer drawbar over
the piton (3). Drop the security latch down, re-insert
the retaining pin and secure with the lynch pin. The
security latch will ensure that the trailer cannot
become accidentally detached from the piton
237
NOTE: The static downward load on the piton must

not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
238
3--160
Slider Frame with K 80 Ball
The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly.
Remove the securing clip (2) and lift the handle (1) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame.
Using both hands on the handle, lift or lower the tow ball
assembly as required. When at the required height,
support the tow ball with one hand and allow the handle
to lower to the horizontal position. The pins will rotate 239
and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the
P.T.O. guard.
NOTE: When setting the height of the tow ball, it

should be adjusted to the lowest position relative to
the correct operating height of the implement
drawbar.
To attach a trailer, lift up the retaining catch (2) and

pull out the locking pin (3). This will allow the security
latch (1) to pivot upwards toward the tractor. When
the implement drawbar has been securely attached,
replace the locking pin so it passes through the
security latch and re--insert the ’R’ clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow ball in

its lowest operable position must not exceed 3000 kg
(6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is
lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads
at the end of Section 3).
240
3--161
AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH AND DRAWBAR

(where fitted)
The automatic pick--up hitch on your tractor is a

hydraulically extending, drop down type which is
raised and lowered using the 3--point lift. It is fully
self-supporting when locked in the operating (raised)
position. .
The pick--up hitch is equipped with interchangeable

hook and clevis drawbars.
241
Raising and Lowering the Hitch
Rotate the thumb wheel (2) fully forward to position

10. Move the Position Control lever (1) fully
rearwards until the 3-point lift is supporting the weight
of the hitch.
To unlock the hitch, pull up and hold the release

handle (1) Figure 241. Move the Position Control
lever forward to lower the hitch. When the hitch has
cleared the locking latches, allow the release handle
to lower.
The extendible pick--up hitch can be hydraulically 242

extended to aid visibility when attaching towed
equipment.
Operated through one of the rear remote valves, the

hitch is extended or retracted using the remote valve
lever. The hoses should be connected in such a way
that moving the remote valve lever to E (Extend) will
extend the hitch, moving the lever to R (Retract) will
retract the hitch.
Lower the hitch until it is clear of the locking latches

and then extend the hook or clevis rearwards by
moving the remote valve lever to (E). With the
drawbar extended continue to lower the hitch until it
is just above the ground.
243
3--162
Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is

beneath the eye of the implement drawbar and, using
the Position Control lever, raise the hitch until the
implement drawbar is just clear of the ground.
Fully retract the pick--up hitch by moving the remote

valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the hitch
release the tractor brakes to allow movement of the
tractor towards the implement.
With the hitch in the fully retracted position raise it

slowly until an audible click indicates the locking
latches (1) have engaged the cross tubes (3).
Re--apply the handbrake before leaving the tractor 244
seat.
IMPORTANT: The hitch must be fully retracted

before it will latch correctly. If difficulty is experienced
in latching or unlatching the hitch, refer to Section 4
for adjustments to the latching mechanism.
Push the position control lever forward so that the

weight of the pick--up hitch (and attached implement)
is supported by the locking latches.
CAUTION
Before operating the tractor, visually check to ensure
the locking latches fully support the pick--up hitch by
slightly lowering the 3--point hitch.
NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the

hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg (6610 lb.)
1
To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the
pick--up hitch, extract the securing pin (2) and
withdraw the hook assembly.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the front pin (1) as this

retains the hydraulic cylinder inside the hitch slider
frame. 2
Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with

pin (2).
245
3--163
Maximum Permissible Drawbar Load
P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
406 mm (16 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)
IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total weight
on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
downward load or the rear tyre load capacity,
whichever is the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and
Loads at the end of Section 3).
Storing the Drawbar
When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may be

stored in a bracket which is located at the rear of the
tractor or on the right--hand step support. Ensure the
clamp screw is fully tightened to retain the drawbar
in the bracket.
If the hydraulic hitch pressure lines are disconnected

from the remote valve, ensure the male couplings
are protected from contamination and the pressure
lines secured to the tractor to avoid possible
damage.
3--164
TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS

(where fitted)
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

(except Italy)
Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the

hydraulic system via a quick--release coupling (1) at
the rear of the tractor.
NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling may

vary slightly from that shown, dependent upon the
type of remote control valves installed.
246
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling
the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are

locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
WARNING
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure cannot
be applied to the trailer braking system. When
parking the tractor/trailer combination apply the
tractor and trailer parking brakes while the engine is
still running. With the footbrakes locked together
apply the parking brake, stop the engine and
immediately block the wheels. Always lock the brake
pedals together when a hydraulically braked trailer is
attached to the tractor.
NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap (2) in place when

the trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
3--165
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

(Italy only)
The hydraulic trailer braking system on tractors for

the Italian market function in a slightly different way
to the universal system previously described.
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling

the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor or when
the tractor parking brake is applied when the engine
is running. When the engine is switched off, the trailer
brakes will remain applied.
247
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are
locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
To release hydraulic pressure and free the trailer

brakes, start the engine, depress both brake pedals
and release the tractor parking brake.
NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap (2) in place when

the trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
NOTE: The light (1), on the instrument panel will

flash, accompanied by critical alarm, to indicate that
hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is low.
Stop the engine and investigate the cause.
ATTENTION: Should the trailer brake warning light

commence to flash, the trailer brakes will apply
automatically. 248
3--166
AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKES

(except Italy)
WARNING The couplers installed at the back of the tractor may

Single line pneumatic trailer braking systems are be connected to single or dual line trailer braking
designed for use up to a maximum speed of 25 km/h systems. Either or both types may be installed. The
(15 MPH). Tractor/trailer combinations with dual line air lines connected to the couplers are colour-coded
braking systems may be used at a higher speed but black, red and yellow. The black line is used for a
must at all times comply with local legal single line system, the red and yellow lines are used
requirements. Gross train weight, i.e., tractor plus for dual line systems.
trailer(s) and/or individual trailer weight must not
exceed that laid down in local regulations governing NOTE: Single line systems (black coupler) are only
the use of trailers. available as a dealer installed accessory.
IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate

The following text covers operation of the air- when both tractor brake pedals are applied.
operated trailer braking systems that may be Therefore, always lock the brake pedals together
installed as an alternative, or in addition to, when a trailer is attached to the tractor.
hydraulically-actuated trailer brakes.
NOTE: The tractor parking brake is connected to the
The system consists of an engine-driven air main control valve. Whenever the parking brake is
compressor, two air reservoirs, a pressure gauge, applied, the trailer brakes are activated.
control valves, two or three couplers and related
pipework.
A filter/dryer unit in the braking system extracts

moisture from the pressurised air helping to avoid
components in the implement braking system from
freezing in low temperatures. Any moisture collected
is automatically exhausted through the system
unload valve.
IMPORTANT: In extremely humid conditions, or

where the filter/drier unit has not been serviced
correctly, the air brake reservoirs should be manually
drained on a daily basis. To drain the reservoirs,
grasp the ring on the drain valve below the tank and
move laterally. This will allow any accumulated water
to be exhausted from the reservoir.
3--167
Operation
When starting the engine with a trailer connected into

the tractor air brake system, chock the wheels and
release the parking brake and footbrakes. The
warning light (1) Figure 249, will illuminate until air
pressure builds up to 4.5 -- 5.5 bar.
The pressure will continue to rise, as indicated by the

air pressure bargraph in the Dot Matrix Display,
Figure 250. To select the air pressure bargraph, use
the CAL/SEL switch or, where fitted, the enhanced
keypad.
249
The air tank(s) should reach operating pressure

within 3 minutes of start--up but may take longer,
dependent upon the size of the trailer brake
reservoir(s).
Once required pressure has been reached a loud

‘pop’ will be heard, signifying that the unload valve
has opened to allow excess pressure to escape to
atmosphere.
IMPORTANT: Apply the footbrakes several times,

ensuring that the pressure, as indicated by the
gauge, drops as the brakes are applied and rises
again when they are released. Never drive the tractor 250
with the trailer brake warning light on.
IMPORTANT: When the footbrakes are applied ,with

the parking brake off, ensure that the front wheel
drive indicator light (1) Figure 251 illuminates and
that all stop lights are functional.
IMPORTANT: Various types of trailer braking

systems are available. Check the trailer
manufacturers’ instruction manual before making
connections to the tractor air brake system.
Clean the trailer and tractor connectors before

coupling up the hose(s). Ensure that connections are
secure. Check the trailer brakes regularly to ensure
that they are functioning correctly. 251
CAUTION
Do not over use the brakes on steep down hill
gradients. Use the same gear going down hill as you
would use for going up the same hill.
3--168
Dual Line System
For a trailer with a dual line braking system, connect

the supply line hose to the red coupler (2) and the
control line hose to the yellow coupler (1).
IMPORTANT: The dual line system will only operate

if both the red and yellow lines are connected.
Yellow line (control line) -- (1): As the tractor

brakes are applied, increasing air pressure is
supplied, via the yellow coupler, to the control valve
on the trailer until full system pressure is generated.
Application of the trailer brakes is proportional to the 252
pressure applied to the tractor brake pedals.
Red line (brake supply line) -- (2): Air is supplied to

the red coupler at full system pressure. This is the
brake supply line and charges the reservoir(s) on the
trailer. If the trailer braking system is disconnected
from the tractor for any reason, the air pressure will
fall to zero and the trailer brakes will be applied.
253
Single Line System
(where fitted)
If the trailer has a single line system an additional

coupler is supplied. Connect the hose to the black
coupler.
A pressure of 5.5 bar is available at the coupler at all

times when the tractor brake pedals and parking
brake are released. Application of the tractor brakes
causes the pressure to drop to zero allowing the
trailer brakes to be applied.
3--169
AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

(Italy only)
This system operates in a similar manner to the dual

line system, previously described, except that a
combined dual coupler is utilised. Please read all the
previous text relating to pneumatic trailer brakes plus
the following:
The coupler is protected by a metal cover. To remove

the cover, press the handle (2) down. The handle is
held in position by a stiff spring and some pressure
is required to move it down to release the cover (1).
254
Connections
The lines to the couplers are colour-coded for ease

of use. The supply line to the left-hand coupler (1) is
red and the control line to the right-hand coupler (2)
is yellow. The trailer hoses will have a male dual
coupler. Press down the handle (3) and insert the
trailer coupler. When the handle is released, it will
lock the trailer and tractor couplers together.
255
3--170
TRACTOR/TRAILER BRAKE BIAS CONTROL
When the tractor leaves the factory, this control is set

to allow maximum available braking effort to the
trailer. Under most conditions, the control will remain
in this position and will give well balanced braking.
Occasionally, with some trailers this setting may

provide a greater braking bias to the trailer than is
ideal. In this case the braking force to the trailer may
be reduced slightly by turning the adjuster (1) in an
anti--clockwise direction.
To turn the valve, it is first necessary to pull the knob 256

upwards. After adjustment, push the knob
downwards to lock the setting. The adjuster must be
reset to the fully clockwise position when a different
trailer is used.
WARNING
The trailer brake bias adjustment is extremely
sensitive and should not be rotated more than one
half turn before testing with the attached trailer fully
loaded. If further adjustments are required, they
should be carried out following the same procedure.
Failure to do this may result in an imbalance between
tractor and trailer braking forces if the valve is rotated
too far in the anti--clockwise direction.
Auxiliary Air Supply Connector

(where fitted)
An auxiliary air supply is available for the purpose of

inflating tyres, etc. The air supply operates at full
system pressure -- 7 or 8 bar (100 or 115 lbf. in2) --
dependent upon system installed. When not in use,
ensure protective dust cap is fitted.
Always use a proprietary inflating gun, with gauge,

when inflating tyres. Connect the air hose to the air
outlet (1), located on the left-hand side of the rear
axle.
257
3--171
FRONT WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

1
IMPORTANT: Fitment of dual wheels to the front
axle is not permitted. Damage to the front axle or
axle components caused by the use of dual wheels
will not be covered under warranty.
CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting
regulations when operating or travelling on the public
highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before 258
travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall
2
tractor width does not exceed the maximum
permitted in your country.
Front wheel track adjustment is effected by changing

the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim
and/or the disc relative to the axle hub or by
inter--changing the wheels.
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and
cause injury. 259
3
There are three different designs of centre disc
dependent upon tyre size and tractor model. The
centre discs shown are as follows:
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1)
Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2)
Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 3)
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track

setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your 260
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and
Figure 275 to see the wheel rim and disc positions
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1 and 2), are not
available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
3--172
WARNING
With a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractor
supported on a stand, never attempt to rotate the
wheel or start the engine. This may cause the rear
wheels to move resulting in the tractor falling from the A
stand. Wheels should always be supported such that
the tyres are only just clear of the ground.
Front wheel drive tractors have fixed axle

assemblies. However the track width is fully
adjustable by changing the wheel rim relative to the B
centre disc, the rim and/or disc relative to the axle
hub or by inter-changing both front wheels. (The
track width is the distance between the centre of
each tyre at ground level).
The sectioned drawings shown illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various C
track settings. The track widths available are as
follows:
Track Settings
Adjustable Rim (Types 1 and 2)

D
Setting Track Width
A 1552 mm (61.1 in.)

B 1664 mm (65.5 in.)
C 1758 mm (69.2 in.)
E
D 1869 mm (73.6 in.)
E 1952 mm (76.9 in.)
F 2064 mm (81.3 in.)
G 2158 mm (85.0 in.)
H 2269 mm (89.3 in.)
F
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 261, are nominal
and may vary by up to 25 mm (1 in.) dependent upon
tyre size.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and G
at the recommended intervals. Owners should
ensure that all steering components are maintained
in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe
operation and comply with legal requirements.
261
3--173
Track Setting -- 50 Km/h Models
Tractors equipped with a 50 Km/h (31 MPH)

transmission will have fixed front wheels offering a
choice of two track settings. To alter the track width, A
interchange both front wheels to provide a narrow (A)
or wide (B) track setting as required.
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tread at the
top of the tyre remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
B
262
Track Settings
4WD Front axle type -- Position All Models
Standard -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Suspended -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
SuperSteer -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Refitting the Front Wheels
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts

to the following torques then re-check after driving
the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 10
hours operation.
Disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf.ft.)

Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with front fenders,

ensure there is adequate clearance under all
operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops and
or fender position, as necessary.
IMPORTANT: At the narrower track settings a foul

condition may occur between the tyre or fender and
the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full lock
position particularly when the axle is fully articulated.
To avoid this condition, adjust the fenders and/or
steering stops.
3--174
Front Wheel Alignment
After resetting the track width, the front wheel

alignment may require adjustment. For correct
operation, the front wheels should be parallel.
Measure the distance (1) between the wheel rims at

hub height at the front of the wheels. Rotate both 1
front wheels 180 and check the measurements
again, this time at the rear of the wheels (2). This will
eliminate wheel rim run--out errors. The correct
setting is 0 +/ -- 3.0 mm (0+/ -- 0.12 in.).
2
Should it be necessary to adjust the front wheel
alignment, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Before loosening or removing the track rod

(1), note the position of the offset on the centre
section in relation to the front axle and axle support.
This position must be maintained to ensure adequate 263
clearance between track rod and axle when turning.
Loosen the lock nut (1) on the left--hand track rod

end, then remove and discard the self-locking nut (2)
securing the track rod end in the steering arm.
Extract the track rod end from the steering arm.
Screw the track rod end into or out of the track rod (3)
to shorten or lengthen the assembly, as required.
Re-insert the track rod end and, when the alignment

is correct, secure with a new self-locking nut.
Tighten the nuts to the following torques:
Model Self--locking Locknut 264

nut (2) (3)
All 118Nm 196Nm

(87 lbf. ft.) (145 lbf. ft.)
3--175
STEERING STOPS
Two steering stops are incorporated in the axle, one

at each end. The stops are adjustable and should be
set to provide a minimum clearance of 20 mm (0.75
in.) between the tyres and any part of the tractor on
full left and right lock with the axle fully articulated.
To adjust, slacken the locknut (1) and turn the stop

bolt (2) anti-clockwise to reduce the steering angle of
the wheels or clockwise to increase the steering
angle. Tighten the locknut to 150 Nm (110 lbf. ft.).
IMPORTANT: After adjusting both steering stops, 265

recheck clearance between the tyres and any part of
the tractor with the front wheels on full lock and the
axle fully articulated.
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with Dynamic

Front fenders, the adjustment of the fender stops
must be checked to ensure excessive force is not
applied to them when the steering is at full lock. See
page 3--179.
FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION STOPS

(Standard Axle Only)
Axle oscillation stops are installed, one each side of
the axle. Each stop consists of a plate (1), secured
to the underside of the front axle support by two flush
fitting, socket head screws.
Oscillation of the axle causes the stop plate to
contact the projection (2) on the axle casing, so
preventing further movement. With the stop plates in
position, as shown, axle oscillation is 8.
Extract the screws and remove the stop plates to
increase axle oscillation to 12.
266
IMPORTANT: If the oscillation stops are removed,
ensure that there is adequate clearance between the
front tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle
fully articulated.
NOTE: Where front fenders are fitted, ensure

adequate clearance is maintained between front
fender and the tractor chassis or hood with the
steering on full lock and the axle at maximum
oscillation. See front fender adjustment on page
3--177.
3--176
DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS

(where fitted)
Two types of optional front fender are available, both

offering a full range of adjustment to suit varying tyre
sizes and track widths. The method of adjustment is
very similar for both, but the following text describes
the setting of the Dynamic steerable fender. Ensure
all fixing bolts are re-tightened after adjustment.
Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels as the

tractor is steered. As the steering angle increases, a
spring centered pivot in the fender mount restricts
the turn angle of the fenders.
This prevents interference with the tractor hood or

loader frame while allowing the wheels to continue
turning beneath the fender. As a result, tighter turns
can be achieved that would not be possible with a
conventional fender, particularly at narrower track
settings.
IMPORTANT: With certain options and/or tyre sizes,

the smaller track settings may not be attainable due
to minimal clearance between tyre or rim and any
part of the fender or attaching hardware.
Where a combination of narrow track settings and
maximum turn angles are required, it may be
necessary to adjust the fender stops or remove the
fenders to prevent damage to the fenders or tractor.
Steerable fenders are available in four widths, 420,

480, 540 and 620 mm.
FRONT FENDER ADJUSTMENT
A fender may be moved laterally, towards or away

from the tractor, vertically up or down, and may be
tilted forwards or rearwards.
Lateral Adjustment, Fender Support
To move the complete fender assembly laterally,

loosen the two clamp bolts securing the fender
support, (1) to the mounting bracket, (3). Move the
support to the desired position and re--tighten the
bolts.
267
3--177
Vertical Adjustment
The fender may be moved vertically by relocating the

bolts, (2) in the appropriate holes in the fender
support. A number of the holes are elongated
allowing the fender to be tilted forward or rearward.
268
Lateral Adjustment, Fender

The fender support bolt, (1) and bracket attachment
points, (2) beneath the fender, provide further lateral
adjustment allowing the fender to be centered over
the tyre.
NOTE: A second fender support bolt (not shown) is

located on the opposite end of the support bracket.
269
3--178
Fender Turn Stop Adjustment
An adjustable stop bolt, (4) is fitted to both fender

mounting brackets. When turning, the bolt contacts
a fixed stop on the axle housing restricting the angle
at which the fender will turn while allowing the wheels
to continue turning beneath the fender. The stop
bolts may require adjusting if the track width or tyre
size is changed.
Where the axle steering stops are to be adjusted to

provide more lock, the fender stops should also be
reset to prevent excessive force being applied to
them on full lock. 270
 With the front wheels in the straight ahead

position, loosen the fender stop bolts and screw
fully inwards.
 Adjust the axle steering stops to provide the

required steering angle as described on page
3--176.
 With the axle stops adjusted, carefully turn the

steering wheel until the front wheels are on full
RH lock and the axle stop bolt is in contact with
the pad on the front axle.
NOTE: During this procedure the fender may come

into contact with the tractor. Do not move the tractor.
 Adjust the fender stop bolt outwards until there is

sufficient clearance between the fender and the
tractor. Tighten the lock nut. Re--check the
clearance with the axle on full lock and full
oscillation. If necessary re--adjust to provide
adequate clearance.
Repeat the above procedure on the left--hand fender.
3--179
REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

1
(Flange Type Axle -- where fitted)
With a fixed flange type axle rear wheel track

adjustment is effected by changing the wheel rim
relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or the disc
relative to the axle hub or by inter--changing the rear
wheels.
CAUTION
the initial factory position then you may be required 271
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to 2
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before
CAUTION
cause injury.
There are four different designs of centre disc 272

dependent upon tyre size and tractor model. The
centre discs shown are as follows: 3
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1)

Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2)
Cast centre disc -- variable track (Type 3)
Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 4)
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 and 3), are

not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track

setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and 273
Figure 275 to see the wheel rim and disc positions 4
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
WARNING
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals.
274
3--180
The sectioned drawings shown, illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings.
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts A
to the following torques then re--check after driving
the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and
again after 10 hours operation.
Rear disc to hub nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Rear disc to rim nuts
B
M16 nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Track Settings -- Adjustable Rim

(Types 1, 2 and 3)
Track Disc types 1, 2 and 3
setting Figures 271, 272 and 273
Figure 275
C
A 1530 mm (60.2 in.)
B 1632 mm (64.2 in.)
C 1712 mm (67.4 in.)
D 1834 mm (72.2 in.)
E 1930 mm (75.9 in.)
F 2032 mm (80.0 in.) D
G 2130 mm (83.8 in.)
H 2232 mm (87.8 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 275 are nominal

and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel
and tyre size. E
NOTE: With the larger tyre sizes, the narrower track

settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyres and fenders or equipment.
The dimensions shown in the chart relating to
Figure 275 are nominal and should be used as a
guide only. Track settings may vary dependent F
upon wheel type and tyre size.
275
3--181
Fixed Rim (Type 4)
A minimal track adjustment of approximately 102mm

(4.0in.) each side, may be achieved by interchanging
wheel assemblies. A
Track Disc type 3

setting (18.4 x 38 tyre)
Figure 276 Figure 273
A 1840 mm (72.4 in.)
B 1834 mm (75.7 in.)
NOTE: Depending on rim type, the above settings B

may vary by approximately 10.0mm (0.4 in.).
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tread at the 276
top of the tyre remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
3--182
REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

(Bar Type Axle -- where fitted)
With bar axles, the same method of adjustment

applies but with the added advantage of being able
to move the wheel hub on the axle shaft. This
provides an infinite range of adjustment between the
narrowest and widest settings.
CAUTION
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before
Tractors equipped with a bar axle may have a steel

or cast centre disc (2) Figure 277 mounted on a cast
iron hub (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle (1).
With a cast centre disc, the hub is an integral part of
the disc.
Three bar axle lengths are available -- 2490 mm (98

in.), 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.). The
wheel may be moved along the bar to provide a range
of track widths. Depending on tyre size, a range of
190 mm (7.5 in.) per wheel or 380 mm (15 in.) overall
is available with the 98 inch axle. If the 112 inch axle
is installed, the range is increased to 735 mm (29 in.)
and with the 119 inch axle, 914 mm (36 in.) overall.
277
Track width adjustment is effected by moving the
complete wheel/hub assemblies in or out on the axle
shaft. Additionally, repositioning the wheel rim on the
centre disc and/or the rim on the axle hub or by
inter-changing the rear wheels provides a greater
range of adjustment.
NOTE: Variable track wheels are not available on

tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
Tractor wheels are very heavy so it is recommended

that you do not remove them to reposition the rims
on the disc unless the track setting required is
outside the slide range of the bar axle.
3--183
Moving a Wheel on the Axle Shaft
Block the front wheels and jack up and support the

rear axle.
Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by sliding

the complete wheel/hub assembly on the axle shaft.
Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1)Figure 278,

approximately 12 mm (0.5 in.). Remove the four
outer wedge bolts (2).
Clean the threads on the four bolts and the threaded

holes in the wedges before lubricating and installing
the removed bolts at (1) Figure 279. These bolts are
used to push against the wheel or hub to withdraw or
’jack’ the wedges from the hub. Tighten these bolts
evenly until the wedges loosen in the hub and the
wheel assembly can be moved on the axle shaft.
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than

407Nm (300 lbf.ft)) on the jack bolts. The use of 278
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft
and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.

Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the
original holes (2) Figure 278.
279
3--184
Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments of

68 Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until the final torque setting is
achieved.
6 x M20 Bolts (Cast centre) 300Nm (221 ft.lbs.)

6 x M22 Bolts Steel centre) 500Nm (369 ft.lbs)
IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened

evenly.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making

sure that both rear wheels are the same distance
from the ends of the axle shafts.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts

on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200 m
(200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation.
WARNING
3--185
WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT
The sectioned drawings illustrate the wheel rim and

disc positions at various track settings. In each table,
two track width settings are quoted, these are the
minimum and maximum achievable with both wheel
assemblies moved fully in (toward the tractor) and
fully out (away from the tractor).
with 98” Bar Axle and Adjustable Wheels

Wheel Disc types 1 and 2
setting Figures 271 and 272
A 1524--1830 mm (60.0--72.0 in.)
B 1727--2030 mm (68.0--80.0 in.) A
C 1930--2235 mm (76.0--88.0 in.)
D 2133--2438 mm (84.0--96.0 in.)
with 98” Bar Axle and Fixed Wheels

Wheel Fixed Wheel, Disc type 3 280
setting Figure 273
A 1780--2180 mm (70.0--85.8 in.)
D 1864--2264 mm (73.3--89.1 in.)

B
A 1524--2180 mm (60.0--86.0 in.)
B 1727--2388 mm (68.0--94.0 in.)
C 1930--2540 mm (76.0--100.0 in.) 281
D 2133--2794 mm (84.0--110.0 in.)

Wheel Fixed Wheel, Disc types 3
setting Figure 273
C
A 1860--2180 mm (73.2--85.8 in.)
D 1944--2264 mm (76.5--89.1 in.)

setting Figures 271 and 272 282
A 1524--2388 mm (60.0--94.0 in.)
B 1727--2590 mm (68.0--102.0 in.)
C 1930--2744 mm (76.0--108.0 in.)
D 2133--2998 mm (84.0--188.0 in.)
D
setting Figure 273
A 1860--2530 mm (73.2--99.6 in.)
D 1944--2614 mm (76.5--102.9 in.)
283
3--186

A
A 1550--2220 mm (61.0--87.4 in.)
B 1650--2320 mm (64.9--91.3 in.)
C 1754--2424 mm (69.0--95.4 in.)
D 1854--2524 mm (72.9--99.3 in.)
E 1950--2620 mm (76.7--103.1 in.)
F 2050--2720 mm (80.7--107.0 in.) B
G 2154--2824 mm (84.8--111.1 in.)
H 2254--2924 mm (88.7--115.1 in.)

setting Figure 273
A 1860--2530 mm (73.2--85.8 in.)
C
H 1944--2614 mm (76.5--89.1 in.)
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be

possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender.
D
284
3--187
Rear Wheel Hardware Torque Values
-- with Steel Centre disc

Disc to Hub Fixings
10 x M22 Bolt 500Nm ( 369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Nuts
All wheels (M16) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts

6 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft)
-- with Cast Centre disc

Disc to Rim Nuts
All wheels (M16 nuts) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts

CAUTION
cause injury.
WARNING
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts

to the following torques then re--check after driving
the tractor for 1 hour and 50 hours operation and
thereafter at the 50 hour service intervals.
3--188
Track Adjustment Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2438 mm (60 -- 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.)
285
Wheels with cast centre disc
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 285 are nominal When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel to the following torques then re--check after driving
and tyre size. the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 10
hours of operation.
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings Wheel Hardware Torque Values
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. (with Cast Centre disc)
CAUTION Disc to Rim Nuts

Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and All wheels (M16 nuts) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
cause injury. Split Wedge Bolts
WARNING
3--189
286
DUAL REAR WHEELS

(where fitted)
Dual rear wheels are available as a factory installed Figure 286 shows a typical wheel installation. The
option or dealer installed accessory, in conjunction inner (cast) wheel (4) is clamped onto the bar axle
with the 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.) bar (5). The outer (steel) wheel (1) is attached to the hub
axles equipped with cast iron or steel wheels. The by eight bolts (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle
dual wheel kit consists of an additional pair of steel by the four bolts (2) in a similar manner to the cast,
wheels, hubs and wheel-to-hub attaching hardware. inner wheel.
Customers may wish to mount their existing wheels When mounting wheels, the clearance between the
to make a dual wheel installation. In this instance, tyres on the inner wheels and the closest part of the
provided that the existing wheels have the same tractor must be no less than 100 mm (4 in.).
mounting dimensions, they will only need to obtain
the hub assembly. Additionally, a minimum clearance of 100 mm (4 in.)
must be maintained between the closest points of the
IMPORTANT: Dual wheels are intended for flotation. tyre walls. The clearance should be checked with the
Use of dual wheels under heavy traction tractor correctly ballasted and the attached
conditions could cause severe transmission implement in the raised position.
overload and is not approved.
Before the outer wheels can be installed, the inner

wheels must be adjusted to the minimum attainable
track width, as described in the previous text.
3--190
Moving the Outer Wheel on the Axle Shaft
Each wedge is retained in the hub by two M22 bolts

which pass through the hub and screw into the
wedge on the inside of the wheel. To loosen the
wedges, remove the bolts from their clamp position
(1) and replace in the threaded holes (2). Tighten the
bolts evenly until the wedges are loosened enough
to allow the wheel to be moved on the axle shaft.
After moving the wheel, replace the bolts in their
original positions (1) and re--tighten to clamp the
wheel to the axle shaft.
Tighten all wedge retaining bolts in increments of 287

68Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until a final torque of 500Nm (369
lbf.ft.) is achieved.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making
sure that both wheels are the same distance from the
outer ends of the axle shaft.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts

on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200m
(200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation.
(112 and 119 in. Axle)
Disc to Hub Fixings
10 x M22 Bolt 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts
4 x M22 Bolt 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Bolts
All wheels (M16 nuts) 250Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407

Nm (300 ft.-lbs.) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft
and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
3--191
BALLASTING AND TYRES
GENERAL Factors Affecting Tyre Performance
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon  Correct air pressure for the load
proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum
efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is  Correct wheel slip
correct for the application.
 Correct tyre size for expected load
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to
support the weight of the tractor and equipment and
 Correct fill of liquid ballast
must also be able to provide adequate traction to
utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful
drawbar horsepower.  Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on
a given axle.
Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre
to carry the load. Do not over inflate tyres. Selecting Ballast
NOTE: Radial tyres will work with lower air pressures When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum
and will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or bulge weight of the tractor will change. This means that
when correctly inflated. ballast may have to be added or removed to maintain
the best tractor performance. Proper ballast will
greatly improve tractor operation and ride.
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
The amount of ballast required is affected by:
IMPORTANT: On tractors fitted with front axle
suspension, correct ballasting is essential to
optimise suspension operation, particularly when  Weight of tractor
using heavy rear mounted equipment. For this
application, sufficient front ballast must be added by  Soil and traction conditions
the use of wafer weights in preference to liquid
ballast in the tyres.  Type of implement: fully-mounted, semi-
In certain conditions, with insufficient front weight mounted or trailed
added, suspension operation may become disabled
and a five digit error code beginning with 1000? will  Working speed
be displayed.
Stop the tractor, switch off the engine and restart  Tractor horsepower load
again to clear the error code and re--enable the
suspension. If the error code re--occurs, then further  Type and size of tyres
front weight should be added ensuring maximum
axle and vehicle weights are not exceeded.  Tyre pressures
Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast

should be removed when it is not required.
3--192
Too little ballast: For optimum performance and efficiency, two wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so that
 Rough ride approximately one third of the total tractor weight
(less implement) is on the front wheels. Four wheel
 Excessive wheel slip drive tractors should be ballasted so the weight on
the front wheels is approximately 40 -- 45% of the
 Power loss total tractor weight.
 Tyre wear Add additional front end ballast, as required, for

stability during operation and transport. Ballasting of
 Excessive fuel consumption the front end may not always provide adequate
stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on
 Lower productivity rough terrain. Reduce tractor speed and exercise
caution under these conditions.
Too much ballast:
 Higher maintenance costs When using front mounted implements it may be

necessary to add weight to the rear wheels to
 Increased driveline wear maintain traction and stability.
 Power loss Ballast Limitations
 Increased soil compaction Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or

tractor capacity. Each tyre has a recommended
 Excessive fuel consumption carrying capacity which should not be exceeded,
(see page 3--201).
 Lower productivity
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction,
For maximum performance in heavy draft conditions larger tyres should be used.
weight should be added to the tractor in the form of
liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a combination of
both. Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weights
or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tyres.
Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended because
Front end ballast may be required for stability and they can easily be removed when not needed.
steering control when weight is transferred from the
front to the rear wheels as rear mounted implement
is raised by the tractor 3--point hitch. IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross
vehicle weight shown on the following page. This can
cause an overload condition that may invalidate the
When a rear mounted implement is raised to the warranty and may exceed the load rating of the tyres.
transport position, the weight on the front wheels The maximum recommended gross vehicle weight is
should be at least 20% of total tractor weight. the weight of the tractor plus ballast plus any
mounted equipment such as sprayers, tanks etc. in
CAUTION the raised position. See the following tables:
Additional front ballast may be needed when
transporting large 3-point mounted equipment.
Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter
how much front ballast is used.
3--193
Maximum Vehicle Weights and Axle Loads
Gross Vehicle Weight IMPORTANT: For four wheel drive vehicles, the
figures shown in the foregoing table are for
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight continuous operation. For intermittent operation, the
kg lb front axle loading (including loaded loader bucket)
may be increased to the following levels, provided
All Models 13000 28659
that ground speed does not exceed 8 km/h (5 MPH)
and the track width settings are maintained within the
IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some countries limits shown:
may impose lower gross vehicle weight limits for road
transport than the figures quoted in the above table. Maximum Front Axle Loading -- 4WD
(Restricted Operation)*
Individual axles (front and rear) are also subject to
Track Setting
weight limitations, as follows:
kg lb mm in
Rear Axle All
9000 19841 1727 -- 2032 68 -- 80
Models
Maximum Rear Axle Loading
kg lb *Maximum track width 1829 mm (72.0in.).
NOTE: Total rear axle weight is measured with only

the rear wheels on the scales inclusive of liquid and
cast iron ballast and with mounted equipment in the
raised position.
4WD Front Axle
Maximum Front Axle Loading --

4WD and SuperSteer Models#
(Continuous Operation)
kg lb
# Includes a front end loader in the raised position but

with no load in the bucket.
3--194
CAST IRON WEIGHTS

(where fitted)
CAUTION
Cast Iron weights are very heavy, use only certified
lifting equipment to remove or install the weights on
the tractor. Ensure the hardware securing the
weights to the tractor is correctly installed and clamp
bolts are fully tightened before operating the tractor.
Rear Wheel Weights
IMPORTANT: These are recommended weights and

should not be increased as this may exceed the load
ratings for the tyres, rear axle or the gross vehicle
weight.
Rear wheel weights are mounted on the outside of

the wheels and are available in sets as described
below.
IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to fit rear

wheel weights on tractors operating at speeds in
excess of 40 k/mh (25 MPH). 288
2 x 91 kg (200 lbs.), Total 182 kg (400 lbs.)

2 x 91 kg (200 lbs.), plus 2 x 250 kg (551 lbs.)
Total 682 kg (1503 lbs.)
(with 18.4 x 42 tyres only)

3--195
Front Weight Assemblies
IMPORTANT: Before adding front weight see

reference to front axle suspension on page 3--192.
Front end weights are available in sets as described

below.
With standard and suspended 4WD axle:

10 weights, including carrier 494 kg. (1089 lb.)
and tow hook.
and tow hook. 289
With Supersteer 4WD axle:

and tow hook.
and tow hook.
Installing Front Weights
The weights are clamped together by means of the

long through bolts (1) and (3) and secured to the
carrier by the clamp bolts (2).
The weights may be removed as a complete set with

the aid of suitable lifting gear. Loosen the clamp bolts
(2) and slide the clamp assembly sideways out of the
weight pack. With a lifting bar passed through the
central hole in the weights, the complete weight set
may now be lifted off the carrier.
Alternatively, the weights can be removed 290

individually after loosening the clamp bolts and
removing all four through bolts (1) and (3).
CAUTION
The tractor must not be operated unless all four
through bolts and the clamp bolts are in position with
the bolts tightened to 125 lbf.ft. (169 Nm). Recheck
the bolt torques after 50 hours of operation if the bolts
have been disturbed for any reason.
3--196
A towing facility is built into the weight carrier.

However, if the weights are installed a tow pin (1) is
available that clamps onto the front of the weight
pack.
Front tow hook adds 7.0 kg (15 lbs.) to the total

weight
291
In addition to the wafer weights, a 450 kg (992 lb.)
chassis weight may be fitted below the front of the
tractor behind the wafer weights.
The chassis weight is not compatible with

SuperSteer models.
292
Where front weights or weight carrier are not

installed, a tow pin is available for bolting directly to
the front axle support.
Front tow hook adds 5.0 kg (11 lbs.) to the total

weight
293
3--197
LIQUID BALLAST
Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a

convenient method of adding weight. A solution of
calcium chloride and water is recommended. This
gives a low freezing point and provides a higher
density than plain water.
IMPORTANT: In some countries it is illegal to use

calcium chloride as a ballast solution for tyres.
Ensure that you comply with the legal requirements
of your country. Use cast iron weights as an
alternative to liquid ballast.
NOTE: When filling a tyre with calcium
chloride/water solution the valve should be at the
highest point on the wheel. The valve should be at
the lowest point when checking or adjusting air
pressure if the tyre contains liquid ballast. Special
equipment is required to water ballast tyres. See
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for details.
The following tables show the quantity of calcium

chloride and water required for each tyre size option
and is based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride per litre of
water. The figures in the table will give a 75% fill of
the tyre. This calcium chloride/water solution will give
protection from freezing down to an ambient
temperature of --50C (--58F).
WARNING
When mixing the ballast solution it is imperative the
calcium chloride flakes are added to the water and
the solution stirred until the calcium chloride is
dissolved.
Never add water to calcium chloride as considerable
heat is generated. If the flakes should contact the
eyes, wash the eyes immediately with clean, cold
water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a doctor as soon
as possible.
NOTE: Liquid ballasting of front tyres on a 2WD

installation is not recommended.
3--198
Front Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
16.9R -- 28 219 131 350 58 290 774
480/70R -- 28 222 133 355 59 294 785
540/65R -- 28 257 154 411 68 340 907
600/65R -- 28 344 206 550 91 454 1213
14.9R -- 30 174 104 278 46 231 616
16.9R -- 30 230 138 368 61 304 812
480/70R -- 30 234 140 374 62 309 825
540/65R -- 30 273 163 436 72 361 965
600/60R -- 30 309 185 494 82 409 1092
14.9R -- 34 193 115 308 51 255 680
320/85R -- 34 136 81 217 36 180 481
380/85R -- 34 188 112 300 50 248 663
420/85R -- 34 270 162 432 71 357 952
320/85R -- 38 116 69 185 31 154 411
Rear Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
20.8R -- 38 429 257 686 113 567 1513
580/70R -- 38 467 280 747 124 617 1648
650/65R -- 38 510 306 816 135 674 1800
650/75R -- 38 591 354 945 156 781 2285
710/70R -- 38 648 388 1036 171 856 2174
18.4R -- 42 352 211 563 93 465 1241
20.8R -- 42 453 271 724 120 599 1599
580/70R -- 42 420 252 672 111 555 1481
620/70R -- 42 496 297 793 131 655 1749
650/65R -- 42 526 315 841 139 694 1853
710/60R -- 42 577 346 923 153 763 2036
14.9R -- 46 245 147 392 65 324 865
420/80R -- 46 244 146 390 65 323 862
480/80R -- 46 359 215 574 95 474 1265
520/85R -- 46 439 263 702 116 580 1548
18.4R -- 46 395 237 632 104 522 1393
320/90R -- 50 153 91 244 40 202 539
320/90R -- 54 162 97 259 43 214 571
3--199
TYRE INFLATION
Upon receiving your tractor, check the air pressure  Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or
in the tyres and re--check every 50 hours or weekly. seriously under-inflated until it has been
The tyres fitted to your tractor may be of the tubed or inspected for damage by a qualified person.
tubeless type.
 Torque wheel to axle nuts to specification after
re--installing the wheel. Check nut tightness daily
When checking tyre pressures, inspect the tyres for
until torque stabilises.
damaged tread and side walls. Neglected damage
will lead to early tyre failure.  Refer to tractor weighting section before adding
ballast to the tyres.
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that
a tyre may carry.  Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.
 Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift your
Do not exceed the recommended load for the tyre tractor.
pressures in use, see the following page for details.
Do not over or under inflate the tyres.  Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to
support the tractor while repairing tyres.
DANGER  Do not put any part of your body under the tractor
Inflating or servicing tyres can be dangerous. or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.
Whenever possible, trained personnel should be
called in to service or install tyres. In any event, to  Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow
the safety precautions below:  Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or
damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or
use a damaged rim.
 Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road or  Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on
highway. the tractor or is secured so that it will not move
if the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
 Do not inflate steering tyres above the
manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on  When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip--on
the tyre or beyond the maximum shown in the valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows
Tyre Pressure and Load tables if the tyre is not the operator to stand clear of the tyre while
marked with the maximum pressure. inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.
3--200
TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

(Radial tyres) 1
Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load Index

and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating 141 A8 138
commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 294 B
shows typical markings to be found on the side wall
2 3
of radial ply tyres.
NOTE: Radial tyres will have a speed symbol of ‘A8’ MAX LOAD AT 40 KM/H
4 2575 KGS AT 1.6 BAR
and/or ’B’ which identifies the maximum speed rating
for that tyre. Tyres marked with the A8 symbol are REPLACES 10 P.R. 5
suitable for speeds up to 40km/h (25 MPH), those
marked with a ’B’ symbol may be operated at speeds
of 50k/mh (31 MPH). 294
The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre is 1. Load Index
dependent upon the Load Index shown on the side 2. Speed Symbol for 40 km/h (25 MPH)
wall. In the following charts the loads given are for 3. Speed Symbol for 50 km/h (31 MPH)
individual tyres operated at speeds up to 40 or 50 km/h 4. Maximum load/inflation pressure at
40 km/h (25MPH)
(25 or 31 MPH). The two right--hand columns indicate 5. Old ply rating mark
the maximum permissible load per tyre at speeds of
40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH).
WARNING
When operating at high road speeds, tyre pressures
and maximum load capacities advised by the tyre
manufacturer should be strictly adhered to. Consult
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for the correct
pressures and loads for the tyres fitted to your
tractor.
Inflation Pressure -- bar

Tyre Load 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 40 50
Size Index k/mh k/mh
Load Capacity per TYRE (kg) -- 30k/mh
153A8 - - - - 2210 2410 2460 2865 3140 3350 3350 -

20.8R x 38 (150B) - - - - 2430 2650 2900 3150 3450 3650 3650
155A8 3095 3355 3615 3875 - - - - - - 3875 -

580/70R38 (155B) 3095 3355 3615 3875 - - - - - - 3875
169A8 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200 -

650/75R38 (169B) 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200
171A8 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150 -
710/70R38 (171B) 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150
155A8 - - - - 2275 2550 2800 3050 3320 3550 3550 -

20.8R x 42 (152B) - - - - 2500 2800 3075 3350 3650 3875 3875
158A8 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250 -

18.4R x 46 (158B) 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
3--201
Inflation Pressure -- lbf/in2

Tyre Load 15 17 20 23 26 29 31 35 37 40 25 31
Size Index MPH MPH
Load Capacity per TYRE (lbs.) -- 18.6 MPH
153A8 - - - - 4872 5313 5423 6316 6922 7385 7385 -

20.8R x 38 (150B) - - - - 5357 5842 6393 6944 7605 8046 8046
155A8 6823 7396 7969 8542 - - - - - - 8542 -

580/70R38 (155B) 6823 7396 7969 8542 - - - - - - 8542
169A8 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 - - 13668 -

650/75R38 (169B) 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 - - 13668
171A8 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 - - 13558 -
710/70R38 (171B) 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 - - 13558
155A8 - - - - 5015 5621 6172 6723 7319 7826 7826 -

20.8R x 42 (152B) - - - - 5511 6172 6779 7385 8046 8542 8542
158A8 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369 -

18.4R x 46 (158B) 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
SYMBOL MARKED RADIAL TYRES

(North America Only)
Conventional sized radial agricultural tractor drive

tyres are marked with *, **,or *** symbols. The
maximum load rating for tyres marked with a * is
calculated at 18 psi inflation pressure. Tyres marked
with ** or *** have maximum load carrying capacities
at pressures of 24 psi and 30 psi respectively.
For information regarding specific inflation pressures

and load carrying capacities for the tyres fitted to
your tractor, consult your authorised dealer. 295
1. Load symbol
2. Maximum recommended load at marked pressure
3. Maximum load at 20 MPH
4. Previous ply ratings
3--202
SECTION 4
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION WARNING SYMBOLS
This section gives full details of the service A number of maintenance items are represented by
procedures necessary to maintain your tractor at symbols that may appear in the displays. For more
peak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenance information refer to Sections 2 and 5 of this manual.
chart on page 4--15 provides a ready reference to
these requirements, each operation being numbered CONTENTS
for easy reference.
The subjects covered in this section are as listed
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS below. A full index is provided at the back of this book.
Read and observe all safety precautions listed in Page Subject

‘Servicing the Tractor’ in the Introduction section at
the front of this Manual.
First 50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly. Fuelling the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--3
Protective guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11
CAUTION Lubricants and coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--13
Do not check, lubricate, service or make adjustments
to the tractor with the engine running. Lubrication and maintenance chart . . . . . . . . . 4--15
Lubricants and coolant specifications . . . . . . . 4--17
DURING THE FIRST 50 HOURS OPERATION When the warning symbol appears . . . . . . . . 4--18
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--21
In addition to the regular maintenance operations 50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--22
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or
daily during the first 50 hours of operation: 100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--33
 Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level 300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--34

600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--39
 Wheel nuts for tightness
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--49
 Front axle hub oil levels
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--58
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--65
where applicable, extend all cylinders before General maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . 4--68
checking oil levels. With some wheel equipment
fitted, it may be necessary to raise the front or rear Reversible Engine Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . 4--66
of the tractor to ensure it is level before checking the Cleaning the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--90
oil.
Protecting electronic and electrical Systems . 4--91
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--92
4--1
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
THE FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE IMPORTANT: At the first 50 Hour service the
hydraulic charge filter (3) MUST be changed for the
At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the service larger capacity service replacement filter. Do NOT
operations are carried out by your authorised dealer. replace with one of the same size as this may reduce
The items are listed in the ‘First 50-Hour Service’ hydraulic system performance.
checklist in Section 8.
Filter Dimensions Length Diameter
 Check engine oil level
Original (factory fit) 204mm 94.3mm
 Change hydraulic oil filters (all models)
Service replacement filter 254mm 116.8mm
 Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
 Clean front P.T.O. filter (where fitted)
 Check front P.T.O. oil level (where fitted)
 Check FWD differential oil level
 Check FWD axle hub oil level
 Check and adjust parking brake
 Check all engine air intake connections
 Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts 1

 Inspect Poly V-belt
 Check and adjust compressor drive belt tension

(air operated trailer brakes--where fitted)
 Tighten all cooling system hose connections
 Check torque of safety cab or frame mounting

bolts
 Check torque of front end weight clamp bolts

(where fitted)
Both 50 Hour Service sheets should be signed by

yourself and your dealer and one copy retained by
the dealer for their records (Dealer’s copy).
IMPORTANT: Items listed in the first 50-hour check

are important. If not performed, early component
failure and reduced tractor life may result.
4--2
PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION FUELLING THE TRACTOR
To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters, CAUTION

etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level When handling diesel fuel, observe the following:
and drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal.
Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no
contained within them is clean, has not degenerated circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or
due to long storage and is of the correct grade. dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be
added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do
grease from the fitting after greasing. not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not
approved due to possible inadequate lubrication of
FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS the fuel injection system.
The intervals listed in the lubrication and  Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.
maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when
operating in normal working conditions.  Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce
overnight condensation.
Adjust the intervals for environmental and working  Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine
conditions. Intervals should be shortened under running.
adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty)
working conditions.  Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the
fuel tank.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
 Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for
expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost,
The chart on page 4--15 lists the intervals when replace it with a genuine original equipment
routine checks, lubrication, service and/or cap and tighten securely.
adjustments should be performed. Use the chart as
a quick reference guide when servicing the tractor.
 Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
The operations follow the chart.
FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE
The fuel injectors on your tractor are electronically

controlled and therefore do not require periodic
servicing or adjustment.
4--3
DIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The engine in your tractor is of an advanced design Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5%
capable of providing dependable performance and requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the
good fuel economy. In order to maintain this maintenance schedule.
performance, it is important that tractor maintenance
schedules are carried out at the correct intervals. The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above
1.3% is not recommended.
NOTICE: Diesel approved for your engine must
comply with the Specification Standard ASTMD975 For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel
(North America) or EN590 (Europe) or equivalent. whenever temperatures allow.
Be aware that the use of Diesel not complying with
the above mentioned Specification Standard could Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below
lead to severe damage to the engine and to the fuel --7 C (20 F). The cold temperatures will cause the
system. Be aware that the use of none approved fuel fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from
may void the Warranty cover. running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)
The quality of fuel used is an important factor for To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties,
dependable performance and satisfactory engine enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The
life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier
non-corrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use as well as the fuel user.
fuel of a known quality from a reputable supplier.
STORING DIESEL FUEL
Use Number 2-D in temperatures above --7 C (20 F).
Take the following precautions to ensure that stored
Use Number 1-D in temperatures below --7 C (20 F).
fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine

 Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized
wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the
tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel
application and property requirements outlined in the and form compounds that will contaminate the
following ‘Diesel Fuel Selection Chart’. injection pump and injectors.
DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART  Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
General Final Cetane Sulphur sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
Fuel Boiling Rating Content the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
Classification Point (max) (min) (max)
 To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,
288 C
No. 1-D 40* 0.3% provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
(550 F)
opposite the outlet pipe.
357 C
No. 2-D 40 0.5%
(675 F)  If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
conditions below 0C (32F) are encountered or filler neck when refuelling.
when continuously operating at an altitude above
5,000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel.  Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
are not held over and used in winter.
*When continually operating at low temperatures or
high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is
required.
4--4
BIODIESEL FUELS
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester Biodiesel (Biodiesel Fuel) Biodiesel fuel has several positive features in
consists of a family of fuels derived from vegetable comparison with diesel fuel:
oils treated with methyl esters.
 Biodiesel fuel adds lubricity to the fuel, which is
NOTICE: Biodiesel Fuel blends are approved for beneficial in many circumstances, particularly as
your engine only if they comply with Specification sulfur and aromatics are removed from the fuel.
standards EN14214 or ASTM 06751.  Biodiesel has a greater cetane number and
burns cleaner.
NOTICE: It is imperative that you check which blend  Biodiesel produces less particulate matter and
is approved for your engine with your local dealer. reduces smoke emissions.
Beware that the use of Biodiesel Fuel that does not
comply with the Standards mentioned above could  Biodiesel is fully biodegradable and non--toxic.
lead to severe damage to the engine and fuel system
of your machine. The use of fuels that are not
approved may void Warranty coverage. Diesel and biodiesel fuel specifications
Diesel fuel specifications are covered by the
Biodiesel Fuel Usage Conditions following:
 Europe: EN 590 -- Specification of Diesel fuel.

(10ppm sulfur maximum).
Introduction to Fatty Acid Methyl Ester (FAME)
biodiesel  United States: ASTM D975--08A, Standard
FAME biodiesel, called biodiesel fuel in the following Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils. (15ppm sulfur
section, consists of a family of fuels derived from maximum).
vegetable oils treated with methyl esters.
Biodiesel blends are covered by:
There are two main biodiesel fuel types: Rapeseed
Methyl Ester (RME) and Soybean Methyl Ester  European Diesel Fuel Specification EN 590
(SME). RME is a blend of rapeseed and sunflower allows up to 7% biodiesel since 2009. European
methyl ester, and is the preferred crop in Europe. fuel suppliers are allowed to use up to 7%
SME is the preferred crop in the United States. biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the network.
Biodiesel fuel is a renewable alternative fuel source.  United States Diesel Fuel Specification ASTM
Its use and development is promoted worldwide, D6751--09A allows up to 7% biodiesel since
especially in Europe and in the United States. 2009. United States fuel suppliers are allowed to
use up to 7% biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the
NOTICE: Your Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) network.
system is compatible with up to 7 % biodiesel fuel  United States Biodiesel Fuel Specification
(B7). Be aware that the use of biodiesel fuel that does ASTM D7467--09A provides specifications for
not comply with the standards mentioned in this diesel and biodiesel blends from B6 to B20.
section could lead to severe damage to the engine
and fuel system of your machine. The use of Before raw oil can be converted into usable biodiesel
non--approved fuels may void Warranty coverage. fuel, it must undergo transesterification to remove
glycerides. During the transesterification process,
Biodiesel fuel can be used to run diesel engines as the oil reacts with an alcohol to separate the
pure biodiesel fuel or when blended with standard glycerine from the fat or vegetable oil. This process
diesel fuel: leaves behind two products: methyl ester (the
chemical name for biodiesel) and glycerine (a
 B7: indicates the blend of 7% biodiesel and 93% byproduct usually sold for use in soaps or other
diesel fuels. products).
 B20: indicates the blend of 20% biodiesel and NOTICE: Biodiesel fuels approved for use in New
80% diesel fuels. Do not use. Holland equipment must be transesterified and
 B100: indicates pure biodiesel, or 100% comply with the European Standard EN14214, North
biodiesel fuel. Do not use. America Standard ASTM D6751.
4--5
NOTICE: Cold Pressed Biodiesel, Cold Pressed Oil, It is highly recommended that you use biodiesel from
Straight Vegetable Oil (SVO), or more generally BQ 9000 accredited suppliers to maintain the quality
unrefined vegetable oils used as motor fuel, are fuels and consistency of the fuel. The BQ 9000 quality
that are normally made from Rapeseed oil or similar management program is accredited by the National
high oil content crops. These kinds of fuel are not Biodiesel Board for producers and marketers of
transesterified, so they do not fulfil the EN14214, or Biodiesel fuel. See the National Biodiesel Board
the ASTM D6751 requirements. There is no website at www.biodiesel.org for more information.
recognized quality standard available for these types
of fuel. Therefore the use of Cold Pressed Biodiesel, Biodiesel fuel must be pre--blended by the supplier.
Cold Pressed Oil, Straight Vegetable Oil (SVO), or Mixing biodiesel fuels on--site can result in an
more generally unrefined vegetable oils used as incorrect mixture that could damage the engine
motor fuel are NOT APPROVED at any blend in any and/or fuel system.
New Holland product.
NOTICE: Your warranty may be void if the problem
NOTICE: Any engine and fuel injection equipment is associated with poor fuel quality due to improper
fitted to a vehicle found to have run with any blend of blending. It is the responsibility of the fuel supplier
NON--APPROVED fuel (fuel not fulfilling the and/or the customer to ensure the right type of fuel
specification described in the requirement EN14214 and blend is delivered and used.
for Europe, or ASTM D6751 for the United States will
no longer be covered by Warranty. Maintenance intervals
The use of biodiesel fuel affects engine performance No change to maintenance intervals is required
as follows: when using biodiesel blends up to B7.
 Up to B7: no effect on performance. Blends

above B7 are not approved for your after--treat-
ment system.
 Up to B20: up to 5% reduction in power /torque
 Up to B100: up to 12 % reduction in power /
torque.
Biodiesel fuel usage conditions

The biodiesel fuel usage conditions must be
stringently followed by the customer. Incorrect
application of the biodiesel fuel usage conditions
could lead to severe damage to both the engine and
the fuel injection equipment.
The main concerns related to operation with
biodiesel fuels are:
 Filters and injector blockage caused by poor fuel

quality.
 Wear and corrosion of internal components due
to water content, which affects lubricity.
 Deterioration of some rubber sealing com-
pounds in the fuel system.
 Biodiesel oxidation, which can lead to the
formation of deposits that can harm the fuel
injection system.
NOTICE: Any problem in the engine fuel injection
equipment associated with non--compliance to the
following conditions for biodiesel fuel handling and
maintenance will not be covered by Warranty.
Purchase biodiesel fuel from a trusted supplier who

understands the product and maintains acceptable
fuel quality.
4--6
4--7
FUEL STORAGE
Take the following precautions to ensure that stored
fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
 Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized
tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel
and form compounds that will contaminate the
injection pump and injectors.
 Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
 To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,
provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
opposite the outlet pipe.
 If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
filler neck when refuelling.
 Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
are not held over and used in winter.
Storage, handling, and transport

NOTICE: Storage temperatures above 30C (86F) greatly reduce the shelf life of DEF/AdBlue.
DEF/AdBlue has a typical shelf life of 6--12 months. Refer to the SHELF LIFE table below. In order for
DEF/AdBlue to remain in a useable condition, storage requirements need to be met.
 Store between --11C (12F) and 30C (86F).

 Use only an approved DEF/AdBlue container. Contact your dealer to obtain proper storage container(s).
 Keep container tightly closed.
 Keep container in a cool, well--ventilated area.
 Keep away from heat and direct sunlight.
Thawing
 Your machine is equipped with an internal tank heater to thaw frozen DEF/AdBlue. Your machine will still
function until the DEF/AdBlue begins to flow. The SCR system will then function normally.
 Do not heat DEF/AdBlue for long periods of time at temperatures above 30C (86F). This causes the
solution to decompose, which very slowly decreases the expected shelf life.
NOTICE: Do not use an anti--gelling or freeze point improver in your DEF/AdBlue. The 32.5 % solution is
specifically designed to provide the optimum NOx reduction properties. Any further blending or adjusting of the
DEF/AdBlue mixture will lessen its ability to perform correctly and may cause damage to the SCR components.
Handling and supply of additives, if any.

 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is not required under normal conditions. If splashing is likely, wear eye
protection. For prolonged or repeated contact, impervious gloves are recommended. Follow the precautions
listed in the SAFETY INFORMATION chapter when handling any service fluid.
 No additives are required.
NOTICE: Contaminated DEF/AdBlue can affect the performance of your machine. Follow all instructions in
this manual when handling DEF/AdBlue.
4--8
Shelf life
Constant ambient storage temperature Maximum shelf life
Less than or equal to 10C (50F) 36 months
Less than or equal to 25C (77F) 1 18 months
Greater than 35C (95F) -- 2
1To prevent decomposition of DEF/AdBlue, prolonged transportation or storage above 25C (77F) should
be avoided.
2 Significant loss of shelf life: check every batch before use. See your dealer for more information on
testing.
NOTE: The main factors taken into account to define the shelf life in the table above are the ambient storage
temperature and the initial alkalinity of DEF/AdBlue. The difference in evaporation between vented and
non--vented storage containers is an additional factor.
NOTE: The information in this table is for reference only and has been provided by the International Organization
for Standardization, Document number ISO 22241--3 Diesel engines -- NOx reduction agent AUS 32 -- Part 3:
Handling, transportation and storage.
Disposal
 Dispose of DEF/AdBlue and any filter accumulations in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and
local laws governing waste disposal.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue refilling

The DEF/AdBlue tank is located on the left--hand
side of the machine, next to the diesel filling port (1).
The DEF/AdBlue tank cap (2) can be identified by

the “blue” color of the cap. A fitting under the cap
prevents the insertion of a diesel fill nozzle.
NOTICE: If any DEF/AdBlue spills or contacts any

surface other than the storage tanks, immediately
clean the affected surface with clear water.
DEF/AdBlue will cause corrosion on painted and
unpainted metallic surfaces, and may distort some
2
plastic and rubber components.
It is recommended that DEF/AdBlue filling equipment should be used having a fill nozzle/pump with the correct
length and diameter, triggered by the magnet in the tank filler neck and with overfill flow cut out.
This will ensure that:
 The screen in the filler neck will not be damaged.

 Impurities are not entering the DEF/AdBlue tank. The standardized DEF/AdBlue nozzle matches the filler
neck diameter.
 The DEF/AdBlue tank is not overfilled, as the DEF/AdBlue pump will stop when the DEF/AdBlue tank
is full.
4--9
 DEF/AdBlue is not pumped in the fuel tank, as the DEF/AdBlue nozzle cannot pump when the magnet
is not sensed.
NOTICE: Refilling with a funnel is not recommended as this may lead to damage of the screen in the filler neck.
NOTE: The information above has been provided by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO),
Document number ISO 22241--4 Diesel engines -- NOx reduction agent AUS 32 -- Part 4: Refilling interface.
FILLING THE FUEL TANK

1. Clean the area around the fuel cap, 1, to prevent
dirt from entering tank and contaminating the
fuel.
2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area during
refuelling. The cap is attached to the fuel tank by
a chain to prevent loss.
3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel
cap.
FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap on your tractor is of the vented type,
3
should it become lost or damaged always replace it
with one of the same type. Consult your authorized
dealer.
FUEL CAPACITY
395 liters (104 U.S. gal).
DEF/AdBlue CAPACITY
48 liters (12.7 U.S. gal), and is sufficient for
approximately two fuel tank fills.
4--10
PROTECTIVE GUARDS
CAUTION
Guards are fitted for your protection, if they are
removed for access to service items, they must be
replaced before operating the tractor.
Engine Hood
For safety the hood must be closed and correctly

latched before operating the tractor.
The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access

to the engine area for routine maintenance. Two gas
struts (located under the hood) assist in raising the
hood to either of two positions. A safety stay holds
the hood in the selected position.
To open the hood, depress the release button (2),

and raise the hood using the grab handle (1). The gas
struts will take over and raise the hood to the first
position secured by the nylon retaining strap located 4
at the front of the hood. All routine maintenance
operations may be performed with the hood raised to
this position.
Additional guards are provided to prevent the fingers

being trapped by the fan/air conditioner drive belt
when the hood is lowered to the operating position.
Should it become necessary to raise the hood to its

full extent, unclip the retaining strap (1) from its
anchor bracket and, holding firmly onto the strap,
allow the hood to raise fully on the gas struts.
NOTE: Raising the hood to full height is only

necessary for service requirements that are best left
to your dealer.
To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the

retaining strap has been re--fitted to the anchor
bracket. An audible click will signal engagement of
the locking catch. Check that the hood is properly
closed. 5
NOTE: Depending on the day of manufacture the

described hood opening mechanism could be
replaced already by a new mechanism which
requires unlocking by the use of a standard tool.
4--11
Engine Side Panels
The engine side panels are secured by two turn lock

screws (1). Using a screwdriver with a broad blade,
turn the screws 1/4 turn anti--clockwise to release.
Hold the panel at the centre, pull outwards and slide
towards the front of the tractor until it clears the front
and rear support pins.
To refit the side panels, reverse the above procedure

ensuring both screws are locked before operating
the tractor.
Right--Hand Footsteps
The right-hand footsteps on your tractor are secured

by six retaining bolts and cover the battery.
For access to the battery, remove the six retaining

bolts.
When replacing the steps, ensure the six retaining

bolts are tightened securely.
7
RELAY AND FUSE PANEL COVERS
The moulded panel on the right-hand side of the cab
may be easily removed for service. Remove the two
retaining screws, 1, then ease the cover forward and
slide it to the left removing the two retaining tongues,
2, from their recess and allowing access to the fuses
and relays.
4--12
Maxi Fuses (Starter Motor)

To access the maxi fuses, remove the cover, (2),
from the starter motor. Loosen and remove the
13mm nut, (1), then lift the cover from the starter
motor.
After replacing a fuse ensure the cover and nut are

re--placed to prevent a build up of dust or debris
around the fuses.
LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS --30 C --25 C --15 C +20 C +40 C

Lubricants
The correct engine oil viscosity grade is dependent SAE 5W--30

upon ambient temperature. Refer to the chart on the
right when selecting oil for your tractor engine.
SAE 10W--30
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme
temperatures are encountered, local lubricant
practices are acceptable; such as the use of SAE
5W30 in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in SAE 15W--40
extreme high temperatures.
--22 F --13 F +5 F +68 F +104 F
Biodegradable Transmission and Hydraulic Oil
A biodegradable oil has been approved for use in the

transmission, 4WD front axle and hubs, and the
hydraulic system of your tractor. Although the oil is
90% biodegradable, it is important to follow safe
handling and disposal practices.
Ambra Multi Bio oil is available from your authorised

dealer.
4--13
Biodegradable oil should not be used in conjunction

with other oils. Use the following procedure to
replace standard oil with biodegradable lubricant.
1. Operate the tractor until the oil that is being

changed reaches a temperature greater than
60C (140F).
2. Stop the engine and immeadiately drain the oil as

outlined later in this section.
3. Replace all transmission and hydraulic filters.
4. Add the biodegradable oil to the correct level and

run the tractor to circulate the oil.
5. Check for oil leaks and re--check the oil level.
Sulphur in Fuel
The engine oil and filter change period are shown in

Section 4. However, locally available fuel may have
a high sulphur content, in which case the engine oil
and filter change period should be adjusted as
follows:--
Sulphur Content % Oil Change Period
Below 0.5 Normal
From 0.5 -- 1.0 Half the normal
Above 1.0 One quarter normal.
NOTE:Theuseof fuelwithasulphurcontent above
1.3% is not recommended.
Coolants
To reduce the amount of deposits and corrosion, the

water used in the cooling system must comply with
the following values.
Total Hardness: Chloride: Sulphate:

300 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
IMPORTANT: See Operation 32, page 4--58,

regarding use of coolant inhibitor where the above
mentioned antifreeze is not available. In those hot
countries where antifreeze is not available, use clean
water only.
NOTE: See Operation 32, page 4--58, for further

details before topping up or changing the engine
coolant.
4--14
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
C C L C A D
Service Operation
h l u h d r Page
Interval No.
Maintenance Requirement e e b a j a
c a e n u i No.
k n g s n
e t
When a 1 Engine air cleaner outer element X X 4--18

warning symbol
appears 2 Fuel filter/water separator X X 4--19
3 Engine coolant level X X 4--20
Every 10 hours
or daily 4 Engine oil level X X 4--21
5 Windscreen washer reservoir fluid level X X 4--21
6 Radiator, intercooler, oil cooler, air conditioner X X 4--22
condenser cores and SCR cover
7 Cab air filters X 4--24
Every 50 hours
8 All grease fittings X 4--26
9 Front and rear wheel nut torque X X 4--32
10 Tyre pressures and condition X X 4--32
Every 100 11 Air brake compressor drive belts (where fitted) X 4--33
hours
12 Battery electrolyte level (tropical climates) X X X 4--34
13 Poly V--belt X 4--35
Every 300 14 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil level X X 4--35
hours 15 Parking brake and electronic park lock (EPL) (where X X 4--37
fitted)
16 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level X X 4--38
*17 Engine oil and filter X 4--39
18 Charge pump and vane pump (where fitted) oil filters X 4--41
19 Engine air cleaner outer element X 4--43
20 Engine air intake connections X 4--43
Every 600
hours 21 Transmission oil cooler pipe quick release couplings X 4--45
22 Pre--fuel and secondary fuel filter elements X 4--46
23 4WD front axle and hub oil levels X X 4--47
24 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil and filter X X 4--48
25 DEF/AdBlue In Line Filter X 4--48
26 Cab air filters X 4--49
27 Main filter cartridge, charge pump and vane pump X 4--50
(where fitted) oil filters
Every 1200
hours or 28 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil X 4--52
annually 29 FWD axle differential oil X 4--54
30 FWD axle hub oil X 4--55
31 Battery electrolyte level (temperate climates) X X X 4--56
* Oil change interval will be reduced if fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in extremely cold
temperatures.
4--15
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART (continued)
C C L C A D
Service Operation
h l u h d r Page
Interval No.
Maintenance Requirement e e b a j a
c a e n u i No.
k n g s n
e t
32 Engine coolant X 4--58

Every 1200 33 Engine air cleaner inner element X 4--62
hours or two 34 Engine valve tappet clearances X X 4--63
years
35 Engine breather filter X 4--63
36 Air brake dryer reservoir X 4--64
Every 3600 37 Main DEF/AdBlue Filter X 4--65
hours / 2 years
Every 3 years 38 Air conditioning system X X X 4--65
39 Reversible engine fan X 4--66
40 Fuel system pre--filter and water trap X X X 4--67
41 Bleeding the fuel system X X 4--68
42 Transmission calibration X X 4--69
43 Footbrakes X X 4--75
44 Automatic pick-up hitch X X 4--76
General
maintenance 45 Remote control valve drain bottle(s) X 4--77
46 Cab suspension adjustment X X 4--78
47 Headlight and worklamp adjustment X X 4--79
48 Bulb replacement X 4--80
49 Fuse replacement X 4--83
-- Cleaning the tractor X X 4--90
-- Storing the tractor X X X 4--92
4--16
LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND New Holland International Approximate

APPLICATIONS Specification Specification Quantities
Engine Oil ACEA E7/E5
Ambra Mastergold HSP (15W--40) NH 330 H API CI--4CH--4
15 Litres (3.96 U.S. gals.)
Ambra Mastergold HSP (10W--30) NH 324 H CUMMINS
CES20078/77/76/72
Transmission, Rear Axle and
Hydraulic System Oil
Ambra Multi G NH 410 B API GL4, ISO 32/46
-- Power Command 82 Litres (21.6 U.S. gal)
-- Auto Command 84 Litres (22.2 U.S. gal)
Front Wheel Drive Oil
Ambra Multi G
-- Axle (All models) NH 410 B API GL4, ISO 32/46 11 Litres (11.6 U.S. qts.)
-- Hubs (w/out brakes, per hub) 2.3 Litres (2.4 U.S. qts.)
-- Hubs (with brakes, per hub) 3.8 Litres (4.0 U.S. qts.)
Front P.T.O. Gearbox Oil
Ambra Multi G NH 410B API GL4, ISO 32/46 3.05 Litres (3.2 U.S. qts.)
Engine Radiator Coolant
System Capacity 22.5 Litres (5.94 U.S. gal.)
*Water 50%
Ambra Agriflu NH 900 A Ethylene Glycol 50%
Air Conditioning Compressor Oil
Low Viscosity Oil SP10 n/a PAG--E13, ISO100 Viscosity As Required
Grease Fittings and Bearings
Ambra GR9 NH 710 A NLGI 2 As Required
*NOTE Use antifreeze (50%) plus clean, soft water (50%). In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water used
in the cooling system should not exceed the following limits:
4--17
WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL APPEARS
OPERATION 1
REPLACE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER
OUTER ELEMENT
Replace the outer element when the restriction
indicator symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display or
every 600 hours, whichever comes first. If the
symbol appears, perform the replacement within one
hour of operation.
NOTICE: Replace the outer element only when the

restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning of the
filter is not recommended.
10
The dry air cleaner, which is located under the
left-hand side of the hood, consists of an inner and
outer paper element contained within an easily
accessible housing. See Figure 10.
1. Unlatch the three retaining clips, 1, Figure 10,

and lift off the air cleaner assembly cover.
2. Remove the outer element, 1, Figure 11, from
the air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the
end of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal.
Then pull the filter straight out of the housing, not
at an angle, ensuring the inner element remains
in place.
11
NOTICE: Do not disturb or remove the inner
element.
3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using

a damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not
damage the inner filter element. Ensure that the
inner end of the housing is clean and smooth, to
ensure a good seating for the rubber seal on the
element.
4. Ensure the inner element, 1, is located correctly
in the air cleaner assembly before installing the
outer element. Refit the end cover and securely
latch the three retaining clips.
12
4--18
OPERATION 2
DRAIN FUEL SYSTEM WATER SEPARATOR
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.
If the symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display, this

signals the presence of water in the fuel sedimenter,
drain the fuel filter and sedimenter assembly, as
follows:
1. Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter

assembly by rotating the collar (1) approximately
180 on the water sensor switch. Contaminated
fuel will drain from the tube (2).
NOTE: To loosen the drain tap (1) it may be 13
necessary to remove the sensor wire from the
terminal to allow the knob to rotate.
2. Allow contaminated fuel to drain until only clean

fuel runs out. Catch the fuel in a suitable
container and dispose of properly. Close the
drain tap.
The fuel system is self bleeding and should not
require priming after draining the sedimenter. If
priming is required, turn to page 4--68 for details on
priming the fuel system.
NOTE: See also page 4--67 Fuel System Pre--Filter

and Water Trap.
4--19
EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(whichever occurs first)
OPERATION 3
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the recovery tank (2) when

the engine is cold. The coolant level should be above
the bottom line (3) on the recovery tank. If coolant is
required, remove the cap (1) and add a 50/50 water
and antifreeze mixture as specified on page 4--13 of
this Manual.
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the pressure cap on the coolant
expansion tank. It is dangerous to remove the cap
while the system is hot. When the system has
cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the pressure cap
slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to 14
escape before fully removing the cap. Never remove
the cap from the top of the radiator unless the
expansion tank pressure cap has first been
removed.
CAUTION
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the coolant filter and
antifreeze container.
NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank,

the coolant level must be checked in the radiator.
Check the system for leaks and repair as required.
Remove the radiator filler cap when the system is

cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to just
below the top of the filler neck. Install the cap and add
coolant to the recovery tank, as described above.
4--20
OPERATION 4
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a

level surface and after the engine has been stopped
for a minimum of five minutes.
1. Remove the dipstick from the left-hand side of

the engine, wipe clean and re-insert fully.
2. Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.
The oil level should fall between the high and low
level notches on the dipstick.
3. If more oil is required, remove the filler cap and add

fresh oil until the level is between the two notches
on the dipstick. The quantity of oil represented by
theupperandlowernotchesisapproximately4.0 15
litres (4.2 U.S.qts).
NOTE: Do not fill above the upper notch on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower
notch.
4. Re-install the filler cap.
See page 4--13 for the correct oil specification and

viscosity.
OPERATION 5
CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR
(where fitted)
The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located

beneath the rear of the cab on the left-hand side. The
same reservoir is utilised for both front and rear
windscreen washers.
Lift off the cap (1) and fill with washer solvent solution
up to the bend in the filler neck. In cold weather, use
a solvent with anti-freeze properties.
16
4--21
EVERY 50 HOURS
Complete the preceding operations plus the following:
OPERATION 6
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, INTERCOOLER,
OIL COOLERS, AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER CORES AND SCR COVER
AIR DUCTS (POWER COMMAND)
Check all cores and SCR cover air ducts, 1, Figure
17, for chaff accumulation or blockage. If any is
noted , clean as follows:
17
CAUTION
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.
1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2).
2. The air conditioner condenser (1) Figure 18, is

located in front of the engine intercooler and
transmission oil cooler. To gain access to the rear
of the condenser first release the fasteners (2) by
pulling forwards as shown, then swing the 18
condenser outwards.
3. Access to the rear of the intercooler and oil cooler
is gained by releasing the spring clip (3) and,
using the grab handle (4), pulling both coolers
upwards and outwards. The coolers will ’lock’ in
the raised position.
4. Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the
air conditioner condenser and, finally, the
driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any bent
fins.
5. To lower the intercooler and oil cooler grasp the

handle, 3, and pull upwards, simultaneously
19
pushing in the top of the intercooler. As the
coolers begin to lower allow the grab handle to
drop. Attach the spring clip to the hook and clamp
securely.
NOTICE: If the cores are blocked with any oily

substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
it with a pressure washer and check for leaks.
4--22
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, INTERCOOLER, OIL

COOLERS AND AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER CORES AND SCR COVER AIR
DUCTS (AUTO COMMAND)
Check all cores and SCR cover air ducts, 1, Figure

20, for chaff accumulation or blockage. If any is
noted, clean as follows:
CAUTION
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.
20
NOTE: Tractors with front P.T.O. will have a small
additional oil cooler fitted.
NOTE: See also Reversible Engine Fan, page 4--66.
1. For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2).
2. The air conditioner condenser (1) Figure 21, is

located in front of the engine intercooler and
transmission oil cooler. To gain access to the rear
of the condenser first turn the fasteners (2) a 1/4
turn anticlockwise to release them then swing the
condenser outwards.
21
3. Access to the rear of the intercooler and oil cooler
Figure 22 is gained by releasing the spring clip
(3) and, using the grab handle (4), pulling both
coolers upwards and outwards. The coolers will
’lock’ in the raised position.
4. Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the
air conditioner condenser and, finally, the
driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any bent
fins.
5. To lower the intercooler and oil cooler grasp the

handle (3) and pull upwards, simultaneously
pushing in the top of the intercooler. As the 22
coolers begin to lower allow the grab handle to
drop. Re--attach the spring clip to the hook and
clamp securely.
Care must be taken not to damage the oil cooler

pipes (3) below the radiator at all times while carrying
out this operation.
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily
substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
it with a pressure washer.
4--23
OPERATION 7
CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTERS
Air drawn into the cab by the blower fan passes

through three filters, two externally mounted, and
one recirculation filter located inside the cab.
Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower and

close the roof hatch, all windows and one door.
Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back
pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the
underside of the external filters.
NOTE: In humid conditions, do not switch on the

blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles
drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove.
23
External Filters
To remove the external filter, loosen the thumbscrew

(1) Figure 23, at the front end of the filter housing.
Allow the housing to drop downwards and lift out the

filter element (2).
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.
24
The filter consists of two elements, a foam pre--filter
and electrostatic main element that traps fine dust
particles.
The pre--filter may be cleaned using low pressure

compressed air, or by washing. If the filter is washed,
ensure it is completely dry before re--fitting to the
tractor.
NOTE: By cleaning the pre--filter on a regular basis,

the life of the main element will be extended.
25
4--24
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the upper surface through the element to the
underside. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm)
from the element to prevent damage to the filter
media
NOTE: The main element should not be cleaned by

washing as this will cause damage to the filter
material.
Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Re--install the filter elements with the clean side
uppermost and re-install the covers.
Internal Filter
To remove an internal filter, loosen the retaining

screws (1) anti clockwise and remove the filter cover.
26
Remove the cover (1) and extract the filter from the
housing.
NOTE: The filter (2) is made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the clean surface through the element to the dirty
side. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from
the element to prevent damage to the filter media.
27
4--25
OPERATION 8
ALL GREASE FITTINGS
Oil all pivots and apply a grease gun to the lubrication

fittings, as shown in Figures 28 to 47 inclusive.
See page 4--13 for the correct grease specification.
Right and Left-hand Lift Arm
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as

shown.
28
Right and Left-hand Lift Rod
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as

shown.
NOTE: Tractors equipped with a hydraulically

adjusted lift rod on the right--hand side will not have
this lubrication fitting.
29
Top Link

shown.
30
4--26
2WD Axle, Outer Steering Components and

Front Hubs

shown. (Wheel removed for clarity).
NOTE: The illustration identifies the right side

lubrication fitting, this is repeated on the right side of
the axle.
31
2WD Axle, Centre Steering Components

shown.
32
Front Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)

shown.
33
Rear Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)

shown.
34
4--27
Front Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

shown.
35
Rear Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

shown.
36
Lower Swivel Bearing (Supersteer 4WD Axle)

shown.
37
Front Trunnion Pin, Suspension Upper and
Lower Damper Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)

shown.
38
4--28
Panhard Rod Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)

shown.
39
Suspension Arm (suspended 4WD axle)
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting at the rear

of the suspension arm, located beneath the tractor,
in front of the transmission.
40
4WD Steering Cylinders and Track Rods

shown (Supersteer axle illustrated).
NOTE: The left-hand end of the axle is shown. There

are similar grease fittings on the left-hand steering
cylinder and track control rod.
41
4WD Hub Steering and Swivel Bearings

shown (Supersteer axle illustrated).
NOTE: The left-hand hub is shown. There are similar

grease fittings on the right-hand hub.
IMPORTANT: Tractors with steering angle sensor

have a sealed bearing on the right--hand upper
swivel and therefore do not have a grease fitting.
42
4--29
Rear Tow Hitch (auto engagement type)

shown.
43
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame)

shown.
44
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and swivel
coupling)

shown.
45
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and K 80mm
ball)

shown.
46
4--30
Heavy Duty Roller Drawbar

shown.
Automatic Pick--Up Hitch and Drawbar

47
This Pick Up Hitch is a hydraulically extending drop
down type. It comes with the slide strips (1)
impregnated with lubricant and pre--greased.
Checks should be made to ensure the slide strips
maintain their correct thickness and that no bolt
heads are protruding.
Ensure the spring tension (2) is correct and the hook

correctly latches (3). Regularly check for any wear.
At all times care must be taken to avoid overloading

the pick up hitch when extended.
48
Integrated Front Hitch
The front hitch comes with “Gliding” bushes which

require minimum maintenance. Periodic checks
should be made on all the hitch components to
ensure it is working correctly.
49
Rear Axle Shaft Bearing

shown.
NOTE: The left-hand axle grease point is shown.

There are similar grease fittings on the right-hand
axle.
50
4--31
OPERATION 9
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS
Check the front and rear wheel nuts for tightness

using a torque wrench (with a torque multiplier,
where necessary).
The specified torque figures are shown in the

accompanying table:
Two wheel drive --

Front disc to hub bolts 210Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Four wheel drive -- Adjustable front wheels
Front disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Front disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
51
Manual adjust rear wheels -- Flanged axle
Disc to hub nuts 260 Nm (190 lbf. ft.)
Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Bar axle
Split wedge bolts
with cast wheel centre 300 Nm (220 lbf. ft.)
with 10 bolt hub 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to hub nuts

with 10 bolt hub 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
52
Disc to rim nuts (all) 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
OPERATION 10
CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE
CONDITION
Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures.

Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage.
Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being

carried. See ‘Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads’
in Section 3.
NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium

chloride/water solution, use a special tyre gauge as
the solution will corrode a standard-type gauge. 53
Check pressure with the valve stem at the bottom.
4--32
EVERY 100 HOURS

Carry out the following checks :
OPERATION 11
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT TENSION (Air
operated trailer brakes -- where fitted)
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.
Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys

and check that the belt tensioner is operating
correctly.
54
4--33
EVERY 300 HOURS

Carry out the preceding checks plus the following:
OPERATION 12
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CHECK
NOTICE: This operation applies to the battery on

tractors operating in tropical climates. Tractors
operating in temperate climates should have the
battery electrolyte level checked every 1200 hours or
12 months.
To gain access to the battery, remove the six bolts

retaining the right hand foot step.
55
CAUTION
If the battery is being removed, disconnect the
battery leads before proceeding further. Always
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal,
first, place in a safe position and then
disconnect the positive (+) lead.
1. Remove the two nuts retaining the battery clamp.
Remove the battery cables.
2. Using the handle on the end of the battery,
withdraw the battery a sufficient amount to gain
access to the vent plugs. Unscrew and remove
the six vent plugs from the top of the top of the
battery. Check the electrolyte level is above the 56
top of the separator plates in each cell.
If necessary, top up with distilled or de-mineralized
water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals

should be cleaned and lightly coated with petroleum
jelly (vaseline or similar)
NOTICE: In the event of the battery being severely

discharged, such that the terminal voltage is below
7 volts, recovery will require a special charging
procedure. See your authorized dealer.
57
4--34
OPERATION 13
INSPECT POLY V--BELT
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.
Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys

and check that the belt tensioner is operating
correctly.
58
OPERATION 14
CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE AND
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL (POWER COMMAND)
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level

surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.
Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand
side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the the oil
level is between the marks (2) and (3), in the sight
glass.
NOTE: For normal operation, do not fill above the

mark (2).
59
If necessary , remove the filler cap (1) and add oil, as

required.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,

where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
checking the oil.
See page 4--13 for the correct oil specification.
60
4--35
CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/

HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL (AUTO COMMAND)
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level

surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.
Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand
side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the oil level
is between the marks (2) Max and (3) Min, in the sight
glass.

Max mark (2).
61
If necessary, remove the filler cap (1) and add oil, as

required.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,

where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
checking the oil.
62
4--36
OPERATION 15
ADJUST HANDBRAKE
Block the front wheels, jack up the rear of the tractor

and support the rear wheels just clear of the ground.
Unlatch the brake pedals.
Apply the parking brake so that the 4th. notch of the

ratchet is engaged. Remove or ease back the rubber
boot, loosen the locknuts (1) and turn the adjuster
nuts (2) on the operating cables until both wheels
start to lock. Release the parking brake and ensure
that both wheels are free to rotate. Re--apply the
parking brake to ensure that the system operates
freely. Tighten the locknuts.
Road test, using the parking brake to stop the tractor. 63

The tractor should stop in a straight line if the cables
have been correctly adjusted.
ADJUST ELECTRONIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
An electronic park brake (EPB) is fitted to Auto

Command units and available as an option on Power
Command units.
IMPORTANT: Any adjustment of the manual

handbrake or EPB must be carried out by an
authorised dealer.
NOTE: In the event the EPB should fail to release at

anytime, a tool (2) is provided with the tractor that can
be used to manually release the EPB (1). See Fig
65. For further details, refer to section 2 of this
manual.
64
NOTE: The tractor may be driven a short distance
with the park lock engaged, however the speed will
be limited to a maximum of 2km/h (1.2MPH).
4--37
OPERATION 16
CHECK FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL LEVEL
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug.
65
4--38
EVERY 600 HOURS

ENGINE OIL CHANGE
IMPORTANT: Operation 22 depicts the normal 600

hour engine oil and filter change period. However,
the oil change period may be affected by other
factors:
Cold Temperature Operation

Engines operating in temperatures below -- 12  C
(10  F) or in arduous conditions should have the oil
changed every 300 hours of operation. (The oil filter
need only be changed at the normal 600 hour service
interval).
Diesel Fuel Sulphur Content

In some countries, locally available diesel may have
a high sulphur content, in which case the oil and filter
change period should be adjusted, as follows:
 Sulphur content between 0.5 and 1.0%

-- change engine oil every 300 hours.
 Sulphur content between 1.0 and 1.3%

-- change engine oil every 150 hours.
OPERATION 17
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Warm the engine to operating temperature. Stop the

engine, remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 66 and
catch the oil in a suitable container. Unscrew and
discard the oil filter (1).
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.
If the engine oil is extremely hot, allow it to cool to a
moderately warm temperature before proceeding.
To change the oil and filter:
1. Remove the engine oil drain plugs which are 66

located at the rear of the sump on either side of
the engine. Catch the oil in a suitable container
and dispose properly.
2. Replace the drain plugs after the oil has drained.
4--39
3. Clean the oil filter area. Unscrew the oil filter (1)
and discard. Catch any residual oil in a suitable
container and dispose of properly.
4. Clean the new filter mounting surface.
5. Apply a thin coat of oil on the new filter sealing

ring and install the filter. Turn until the sealing ring
contacts the mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten.
6. Remove Dipstick/Filler cap and fill with the

correct amount of fresh oil as indicated below.
Ensure the oil is of the correct grade and
viscosity. 67
7. Start the engine and run for 3 minutes at idle

speed then stop the engine.
8. Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for

leaks.
9. Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain into the

crankcase, then check the oil level on the
dipstick. The oil level should fall between the
‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ on the dipstick. Add more oil as
required.
NOTE: Do not fill above the ‘MAX’ indicator on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not 68
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower
notch.
10. Re--install the dipstick/filler cap.
Oil Capacity (including filter):
All models: 15.0 litres (3.96 U.S gals.)
4--40
OPERATION 18
CHANGE CHARGE PUMP OIL FILTER
(POWER COMMAND)
All the filters are installed under the right-hand side

of the cab floor.
There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a
replaceable cartridge, and the charge pump filter (1)
which is a disposable type.
IMPORTANT: The main filter cartridge (3) as shown

in Figure 69, should be changed at the 1200 hours
service period and is covered in Operation 27.
Before changing the charge filter (1), clean the area

around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew
and discard safely.
69
Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter
mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of
the new filter and install on the tractor.
Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a

further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten.
4--41
CHANGE CHARGE PUMP AND VANE PUMP

OIL FILTERS (AUTO COMMAND)

of the cab floor.
There are three filters, the main filter (1) which has
a replaceable cartridge, the vane pump filter (2) and
the charge pump filter (3) which are both disposable
types.
IMPORTANT: The main filter cartridge (1) as shown

in Figure 70, should be changed at the 1200 hours
service period and is covered in Operation 27.
70
Before changing the disposable filters for the vane

pump (2) and the charge pump (3), clean the area
around the mounting plate and filters, then unscrew
and discard safely.
Clean the inlet channel and the face of each filter

each new filter and install on the tractor.
71
Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a

further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten.
72
4--42
OPERATION 19
CHANGE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Remove the outer element (1) as described in

Operation 1 and discard it.
Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a

damp lint--free cloth on a probe, taking care not to
damage the inner element. Install a new outer
element.
NOTICE: Replace the outer element only when the

restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning of the
filter is not recommended.
73
OPERATION 20
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS
Working from both sides of the engine, check all

intake system connection clamps for tightness.
From the left--hand side of the engine, check the air

cleaner intake connections at points (1) and (3) and
the intake pipe support bracket bolts at (2). Do not
overtighten.
74
Also check the clamps at points (1) where the

aspirator tube connects to the underside of the air
cleaner intake chamber.
75
4--43
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the

intercooler to inlet manifold connections at points (1)
and (2). Do not overtighten.
It is essential that the clean air side of the filtration

system is sealing correctly at the connections (3).
Also ensure clamp (4) is tightened correctly.
76
NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine

hoses, to check the clamp for tightness it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner.
Use a pair of pliers to carefully pull off the alloy cover,
this will expose a conventional screw head. Turn
clockwise to tighten.
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the

exhaust aspirator connections at points (2) where
they connect to the exhaust muffler.
77
4--44
OPERATION 21
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER PIPE QUICK
RELEASE COUPLINGS (AUTO COMMAND)
The transmission oil cooler delivery and return pipes,

below and behind the cooler radiator have quick
release connections fitted. Make sure these are
sealed correctly and there are no signs of oil leaks.
78
Two more quick release connectors can be found in

the transmission oil cooler delivery and return pipes
beside the engine block. Make sure these are sealed
correctly and there are no signs of oil leaks.
79
4--45
OPERATION 22
CHANGE FUEL PRE--FILTER AND SECONDARY
FUEL FILTER ELEMENTS
FUEL PRE--FILTER
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.
The primary (3) and secondary (4) fuel filters are both
of the disposable type. The primary filter
incorporates a water drain on the base of the filter.
1. Unscrew and remove the drain tap (1) at the base

of the primary filter/sedimenter. Allow the fuel to
drain out (2). Catch the fuel in a suitable
container and dispose of properly
NOTE: To allow removal of the drain tap it may be 80

necessary to remove the sensor wire.
NOTE: See also page 4--67 Fuel System Pre--Filter

and Water Trap.
2. Unscrew and remove the filter from the filter head

and dispose of properly.
3. Before installing the new filter lightly coat the filter

gasket with oil.
4. Install a new filter to the head assembly.
5. Rotate the filter until the filter gasket is touching

the filter head. Then give the filter a further 3/4
turn to tighten to correct torque (15 Nm). Do not 81
overtighten.
6. Remove and replace the secondary fuel filter in

the same manner without step 1.
After replacing the fuel filters it will be necessary to

prime the fuel system before starting the engine. See
Operation 41, page 4--68.
4--46
OPERATION 23
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LUBRICATION
Front Axle
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) Figure 82

and ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening. If necessary, top up through the opening
with clean oil and replace the plug.
82
Front Hub
Position a front wheel with the combined level/filler

plug (1) at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
Remove the level/filler plug and ensure that the oil

reaches the bottom of the opening. If necessary, top
up through the opening with clean oil until oil just
overflows from the opening. Re-install the plug.
Repeat on the other front wheel.

83
4--47
OPERATION 24
CHANGE FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL
Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park

brake.
1. Place a suitable container below the gearbox and

remove the level plug (1) and drain plugs (3).
Allow the oil to completely drain into the container
then replace the drain plugs. Dispose of oil
properly.
2. Remove the snap ring (2) and loosen the M8 bolt

(4) on the filter cover. Withdraw the cover and
filter from the P.T.O. gearbox and clean using a
suitable solvent. Dry the filter and refit to the
gearbox ensuring the cover seal is undamaged.
84
3. Refill the gearbox through the combined
level/filler plug until the oil reaches the bottom of
the opening. Start the tractor and run the P.T.O.
for a short period, stop the engine and re--check
the oil level.

OPERATION 25
CLEAN IN--LINE DEF / AdBlue FILTER
It is recommended that cleaning of the DEF / Adblue

inline filter be performed by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Figure 85 shown for reference with SCR

Dosing unit removed from machine.
85
4--48
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (whichever occurs first)

OPERATION 26
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERS
External Filters
To remove the external filter, loosen the thumbscrew

at the front end of the filter housing. Allow the housing
to drop downwards and lift out the filter element (2).
Dispose of the filter elements properly.
The filter consists of two elements, a foam pre--filter

and electrostatic main element that traps fine dust
particles. Clean both filter chambers with a damp,
lint--free cloth.
Install new filter elements. A flow direction arrow is

moulded into the side of the filter. Install the filters 86
with the arrow pointing upwards. Re--install the
covers.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the element during

installation.
Internal Filter
The internal filter is located in the panel behind the

operators seat. To remove the internal filter turn
captive screws (1) until the cover is loose.
Remove the filter cover (1) and the filter element (2)
Figure 88. Dispose of the filter element properly.
Clean the filter chamber with a damp lint--free cloth.
87
Install the new filter element making sure that the
arrow on the filter points to the rear of the tractor.
Re--install the filter cover.
88
4--49
OPERATION 27
CHANGE MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE AND
CHARGE PUMP FILTER (POWER COMMAND)

of the cab floor.
There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a
replaceable cartridge, and the charge pump filter (1)
which is a disposable type. The charge pump filter (1)
should be replaced every 600 hours and is also
covered in Operation 18.
Before changing the charge filter (1), clean the area

around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew
and discard safely.
Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter

mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of 89
the new filter and install by screwing up until the faces
just meet, then tighten a further 3/4 of a turn. Do not
overtighten.
Access to the main filter cartridge (3) in Figure 89,

is gained by first removing the three 19mm bolts
retaining the guard plate below the filter as shown in
Fig 90.
Before changing the main filter cartridge (3) in Figure

91, first release the air bleed valve (2) by unscrewing
fully. This will allow air into the filter so that most of
the oil can drain back into the hydraulic system.
90
Wait a few moments and then remove the 19mm plug

(5) from the filter casing and allow the oil to drain out.
Using a 41mm socket or ring spanner, remove the
filter support plate by turning approximately 45 to
the left. Both plate and filter can now be removed
from the tractor.
Ensure the support plate is clean before installing the

new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring and refit the
assembly to the tractor. Ensure the plate locks into
place and the lug (4) aligns correctly with the arrow
on the filter casing.
91
4--50
CHANGE MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE, CHARGE

PUMP AND VANE PUMP OIL FILTERS (AUTO
COMMAND)
of the cab floor.
There are three filters, the main filter (1) which has
a replaceable cartridge, the vane pump filter (2) and
the charge pump filter (3) which are both disposable
types. The charge pump filter (3) and vane pump
filter (2) should be replaced every 600 hours and is
also covered in Operation 18.
Before changing the disposable filters for the vane

pump (2), and the charge pump (3) clean the area
around the mounting plates and filters, then unscrew
and discard safely.
92
Clean the inlet channel and the face of each filter

each new filter and install on the tractor by screwing
up until the faces just meet, then tighten a further 3/4
of a turn. Do not overtighten.
Before changing the main filter cartridge (3) in Figure

94, first release the air bleed valve (2) by unscrewing
fully. This will allow air into the filter so that most of
the oil can drain back into the hydraulic system
93
Wait a few moments and then remove the 19mm plug

(5) from the filter casing and allow the oil to drain out.
Using a 41mm socket or ring spanner, remove the
filter support plate by turning approximately 45 to
the left. Both plate and filter can now be removed
from the tractor.
Ensure the support plate is clean before installing the

new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring and refit the
assembly to the tractor. Ensure the plate locks into
place and the lug (4) aligns correctly with the arrow
on the filter casing.
94
4--51
OPERATION 28
CHANGE TRANSMISSION / REAR AXLE /
HYDRAULIC OIL (POWER COMMAND)
Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate

the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the
tractor on level ground, lower the 3-point hitch and
stop the engine. Apply the parking brake and block
wheels on both sides.
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is
extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm
temperature before proceeding.
There are two drain plugs for the oil reservoir, one
below the transmission and one below the rear axle.
To ensure the reservoir is completely drained, both 95
drain plugs should be removed using a hexagon key.
To change the oil:

1. Remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 95 and
completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of the oil properly.
2. Re-install both drain plugs (1) after the oil has

drained.
IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 27 (change

transmission rear axle and hydraulic oil filters) before
refilling with oil.
3. Remove the filler plug cap (1) Figure 96 and refill

with new oil. 96
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic

system. Fully extend all of the cylinders.
5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while

checking the system for leaks.
6. Check the oil level by means of the sight glass.

Add oil as required until the oil level is between
the marks (2) and (3).

max mark (2).
Oil Capacity:
Power Command: 82.0 litres (21.6 U.S. gal.)

See page 4--13 for the correct oil specification. 97
4--52
CHANGE TRANSMISSION / REAR AXLE /

HYDRAULIC OIL (AUTO COMMAND)
Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate

the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the
tractor on level ground, lower the 3-point hitch and
stop the engine. Apply the parking brake and block
wheels on both sides.
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is
extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm
temperature before proceeding.
There are two drain plugs for the oil reservoir, one
below the transmission and one below the rear axle.
To ensure the reservoir is completely drained, both 98
drain plugs should be removed using a hexagon key.
To change the oil

1. Remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 98 and
2. Re-install both drain plugs (1) after the oil has

drained.
IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 18 and Operation
27--where fitted-- (change transmission rear axle and
hydraulic oil filters) before refilling with oil.
3. Remove the filler plug cap (1) Figure 99 and refill

with new oil. 99
4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulic

system. Fully extend all of the cylinders.
5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes while
checking the system for leaks.
6. Check the oil level by means of the sight glass.

Add oil as required until the oil level is between
the marks (2) and (3).

mark (2).
Oil Capacity:
Auto Command: 84.0 litres (22.1 U.S. gal.)
See page 4--13 for the correct oil specification. 100
4--53
OPERATION 29
CHANGE 4WD DIFFERENTIAL OIL

brake.
To change the oil:
1. Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 101 and

2. Re-install the drain plug. Remove the level/filler

plug (1) Figure 102.
3. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the

level/filler plug hole. Re-install level/filler plug. 101
Oil Capacity:
All models: 11 litres (11.6 U.S. qts.)
102
4--54
OPERATION 30
CHANGE 4WD PLANETARY HUB OIL

brake.
To change the oil:
1. Position the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug (1)

is at the lowest point. Remove the plug and
2. Rotate the wheel so that the combined level/filler

plug (1) is at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
3. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the 103
bottom of the level/filler plug hole (3). Install the
plug.
4. Repeat the process on the other hub.
Oil Capacity (each hub):
W/out brakes 2.3 litres (2.4 U.S. qts.)

With brakes 3.8 litres (4.0 U.S. qts.)
4--55
OPERATION 31
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CHECK AND
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Checking the Electrolyte

NOTICE: This operation applies only to batteries on
tractors operating in temperate climates. Tractors
operating in tropical climates should have the battery
electrolyte level checked every 300 hours. See
Operation 12.
To gain access to the battery, remove the six bolts

retaining the right hand foot step.
104
CAUTION
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal,
withdraw the battery a sufficient amount to gain
access to the vent plugs. Unscrew and remove
the six vent plugs, from the top of the top of the
battery. Check the electrolyte level is above the 105
top of the separator plates in each cell.
If necessary top up with distilled or de-mineralized
water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals

should be cleaned and lightly coated with petroleum
jelly (Vaseline or similar).
NOTICE: In the event of the battery being severely

discharged, such that the terminal voltage is below
7 volts, recovery will require a special charging
procedure. See your authorized dealer.
106
4--56
Battery Removal
CAUTION
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal
carefully withdraw the battery, ensure the battery
is supported and using the other handle carefully
lift and remove the battery from the carrier.
3. Slide the battery out of the carrier. 107
Tractor batteries are very heavy, ensure the

battery is safely supported during the removal
process.
To refit the battery, reverse the above procedure.

Ensure battery leads and cables are positioned so
they do not become trapped or chafe on a sharp
edges.
NOTICE: When installing the battery leads, always

connect the Positive lead before the Negative.
Refit the battery cover.
4--57
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS (whichever occurs first)

carry out the preceding checks plus the following:
OPERATION 32
COOLING SYSTEM
During manufacture, the engine cooling system is

filled with a high quality antifreeze and water solution.
The antifreeze contains a chemical inhibitor. This
inhibitor increases and extends the protection
offered by conventional antifreezes.
The inhibitor will:

 Increase rust prevention.
 Reduce scale formation.
 Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
 Reduce foaming of the coolant.
The chemical inhibitor must be replenished, at

intervals, to maintain the optimum protection level.
This protection is provided by draining and flushing
the system and refilling with a 50% solution of Ambra
Agriflu antifreeze or, where this antifreeze is not
available, with a measured dosage of chemical
inhibitor. See the following text.
Draining and Refilling the Cooling System
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1). It is
dangerous to remove the pressure cap while the 108
system is hot. When cool, use a thick cloth and turn
the cap slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure
to escape before fully removing the cap. Coolant
should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the precautions
outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor containers,
where used. Never remove the cap from the top of
the radiator unless the expansion tank pressure cap
(1) Figure 109 has first been removed.
When cold the coolant level in the recovery tank (2)

should be above the bottom line (3).
IMPORTANT: It is essential that an approved

pressure cap is used. If the cap is mislaid or
damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer. 109
4--58
1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximum

heat position (fully clockwise).
110
2. Remove the recovery tank cap and radiator cap.

This will also increase the drainage rate.
3. Disconnect the radiator lower hose and drain all

the coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of
the coolant properly. It may be necessary to
remove the guard to gain access to the hose.
NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine

coolant hoses, to loosen the clamp it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner. Using a pair of pliers, carefully
pull off the alloy cover, this will expose a conventional
screw head. Turn anti--clockwise to loosen.
111
4. Remove the coolant drain plug located on the

right hand font of the engine block near the oil
filter. Drain all the coolant into a suitable
container. Dispose of the coolant properly.
5. Flush the system with a commercial cooling

system cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied
with the cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the
engine cool.
IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot

engine. The difference in temperature could cause
the the block or head to crack.
112
4--59
6. Re--install the radiator lower hose. Using Plain water
7. Fill the system with clean water and run the If you reside in a country where antifreeze is not
engine for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. available, use clean water premixed with 5%
Allow the engine to cool. chemical inhibitor. The inhibitor is available from your
authorised dealer and is supplied in 16 fl. oz. (473 ml)
8. Fill the system with a blend of antifreeze and bottles, the side of the bottle being marked in 1 fl.oz.
clean soft water. Add coolant slowly through the increments.
radiator filler neck until the coolant reaches the
bottom of the filler neck.
Mix three complete bottles of inhibitor with 28.5 litres
(7.5 U.S. gal.) of clean water. This will provide more
9. Replace the radiator cap and top up the system
coolant mixture than is actually required. The excess
through the coolant recovery bottle, replace the
coolant should be kept in a specially marked
cap.
container and used for top up purposes.
NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the
radiator as slowly as possible thereby allowing any WARNING
air pockets to disperse. Inhibitor solution is irritating to eyes and skin. It
contains buffered potassium hydroxide.
The coolant to be used is dependent upon local  Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged or
availability. See the following text: repeated skin contact.
Using Ambra Agriflu antifreeze (NH900 A)  Wear protective eyewear when using.
 In case of contact with eyes, flush with water for
Use a solution of 50% clean water and 50% 15 minutes and obtain medical attention.
antifreeze. The inhibitor already in this antifreeze is
sufficient to protect your engine for a further 1200  Wash skin with soap and water after use.
hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
 Keep out of reach of children.
NOTE: See page 4--14 for coolant specifications
4--60
After Refilling the System -- All Coolant

Solutions
1. Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

for leaks.
2. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill mark

(1) and replace the cap.
3. Start the engine and run it until normal operating

temperature is reached.
NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is

pumped around the system.
113
4. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.
5. Remove the radiator cap (2) and add coolant to

2
the radiator to bring the coolant level to the
bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiator cap.
Add coolant to the recovery tank as required to

bring the level up to the cold mark (1) Figure 113
then replace the cap.
NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated

immediately following this coolant change, run the
engine for one hour to ensure that the antifreeze
and/or chemical inhibitor is dispersed throughout the
cooling system. Allow the engine to cool and make 114
a final check to ensure that the coolant level is
satisfactory. Turn the heater control knob (1) Fig 108
and heater blower fully on to ensure the cab heater
is operating correctly and there are no air locks in the
system.
Coolant Capacity Chemical Inhibitor
All models 22.5 litres (5.94 U.S. gal.) There are three part numbers for the inhibitor. The
content of each bottle is identical, only the
Clean Water Specification: instructions on the label differ, by language:
Part No. Languages on Label
Total Hardness 300 parts per million
Chlorides 100 parts per million
83958743 English, French, Spanish,
Sulphates 100 parts per million
Portuguese and Greek
Antifreeze:
83958744 English, French, German,
Italian and Dutch
Ambra Agriflu Anti--Freeze (NH 900A) is available
from your authorised dealer in the following
83958745 English, Danish, Norwegian,
quantities.
Finnish and Swedish
Part No. 2715 1502 (4x5 litre)
2715 1900 (20 litre)
2715 1100 (200 litre)
4--61
OPERATION 33
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER
ELEMENT
The air cleaner is accessible from the right--hand

side of the engine
1. Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 115, and

lift off the air cleaner assembly cover.
115
2. Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 116 from the

air cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end
of the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
NOTE: Examine the inside of the outer element. If

dust is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.
116
3. Pull the inner element straight out of the housing

and dispose of properly.
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using

a damp lint--free cloth.
5. Install a new inner element and a new outer

element (if required). Ensure both elements are
correctly seated before replacing the housing
cover.
IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter

element properly could result in engine damage.
Therefore it is recommended that the element be
installed by an authorised dealer. 117
4--62
OPERATION 34
CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE
It is recommended the valve tappet clearance be

checked and adjusted by your authorised dealer as
it entails the use of special tools to rotate the engine
crankshaft to the correct position before the valve
lash can be checked.
OPERATION 35
CHANGE ENGINE BREATHER FILTER
With the engine cold, loosen the retaining clamp and

ease the ventilation tube from the valve rocker cover.
Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve cover.
Remove the breather pipe elbow by turning 1/4 turn

anti--clockwise and withdrawing from the valve
cover. Loosen and remove the thumb screw (1) to
release the filter assembly from inside the valve
cover.
NOTE: Should severe oil staining appear around the

pressure regulator (2), it would indicate the breather
filter requires replacing.
118
Remove the three screws (3) holding the pressure

regulator (2) and extract both regulator and filter (1)
from the valve cover.
Thoroughly clean the valve cover before fitting the

new regulator, filter and breather pipe. Tighten the
regulator retaining screws (3) to 5 Nm (3.6 lbf. ft.).
Replace the valve cover on the engine using a new

gasket and tighten the retaining nuts to 25 Nm (18.4
lbf. ft.).
119
4--63
OPERATION 36
CHANGE AIR BRAKE DRIER RESERVOIR
Removing the protective guard
1. A protective guard (1) now fitted over the drier

reservoir (3) will have to be released before
removing the drier reservoir. The guard is
retained by a clamp around the axle secured with
two bolts. Loosen the bolts (2) and position the
the guard clear of the drier reservoir.
120
Removing the Drier Reservoir
Before attempting to change the drier reservoir (1),

thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir to
prevent debris from entering the air braking system.
1. Exhaust all air pressure in the system by opening

the drain tap on the main air tank/s located in
front of the rear axle.
2. Using a filter release tool, unscrew and remove

the drier reservoir. Dispose of properly according
to local regulations.
121
Installing a New Drier Reservoir
1. Clean the seal flange on the drier body and the

threaded pin, check for damage to the pin and
the seal contact surface of the flange.
2. Lightly grease the sealing ring on the reservoir

and the threaded pin on the drier body.
3. Screw the reservoir onto the drier body until the

seal touches the contact surface of the flange.
Tighten a further half--turn by hand. DO NOT
overtighten.
4. Pressurise the reservoir and check for leaks. If 122

further tightening is necessary, depressurise the
system before tightening.
5. Re--pressurise the air braking system and check

again for leaks.
4--64
EVERY 3600 HOURS OR 2 YEARS carry

out the following:
OPERATION 37
CHANGE DEF / AdBlue FILTER
It is recommended that replacement of the DEF /

Adblue filter be performed by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Figure 123 shown for reference with SCR

Dosing unit removed from machine.
123
EVERY 3 YEARS
Carry out the following:
OPERATION 38
SERVICE THE AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
After 3 seasons, the performance of the air

conditioner may to be reduced. At this time it is
recommended to have the receiver/drier changed
(1), and the complete system checked by your
authorised dealer using specialised equipment.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12  C (10  F).
 Never expose any part of the air conditioner
system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
 Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the 124
air conditioner system. escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
 If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the
same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38  C
(90 --100  F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
 If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the
eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. consult a doctor immediately.
4--65
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
(to be performed as when required)
OPERATION 39
REVERSIBLE ENGINE COOLING FAN
The optional reversible engine cooling fan allows the

operator to reverse the air flow through the
radiator/coolers and front grille to remove dust and
debris.
Operation of the reversible fan may be included in a

Headland Turn Sequence programme.
Depress the switch to rotate the fan blades through

180 on the hub. This will reverse the flow of air
through the radiator and cooler cores.
The complete process takes approximately 30

seconds and during that time the light will illuminate 125
in the switch.
NOTE: As the engine fan generates a considerable

air flow, it is recommended the engine speed be
reduced when reversing the fan. This will prevent
unnecessary strain on the Poly--V belt as the air flow
is reveresed.
At the end of the process the fan blades will

automatically return to their normal working position
and the light will extinguish.
The process can be stopped at any time by

depressing the fan switch again.
4--66
OPERATION 40
FUEL SYSTEM PRE--FILTER AND WATER
TRAP
The fuel system on your tractor is protected by a
pre--filter and water trap. If water appears in the
glass bowl of the pre--filter (1), stop the engine and
clean out the filter bowl. To remove the bowl, loosen
the knurled clamp screw (2), and swing the retaining
clip out of the way.
With the retaining clip out of the way, the glass bowl
and filter can be removed by pulling downwards.
Empty the contents of the bowl into a suitable
container and dispose of properly.
Clean the glass bowl and wash the filter gauze in

clean fuel to remove the contaminants. Check the
sealing ring in the filter head for damage and replace 126
if necessary. Refit the filter into the glass bowl and
re--attach the assembly to the filter head ensuring the
raised boss on the filter is correctly located in the
housing.
Re--tighten the knurled clamp screw.
After this operation, should it be necessary to prime

the system see Operation 41.
4--67
OPERATION 41
BLEEDING THE FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
To Bleed the Fuel System
It may be necessary after carrying out maintenance

work on the fuel injection system or, after running out
of fuel, to purge the system of air to allow the engine
to start.
If the engine fails to start after several turns, after one

of the above situations has occurred, bleed the
system using the following procedure:
1. Ensure the tractor has adequate fuel and the

battery is fully charged.
2. Unscrew the primer pump knob and proceed to

pump until a high resistance is felt when pushing
the pump downwards.
3. Slowly push the plunger down against the

resistance until the pump knob can be screwed
fully home into the filter head.
The fuel injectors and fuel injection pump are of the

self bleed type and therefore any air remaining in the
system will be purged as the engine is cranked to
start.
127
4--68
OPERATION 42
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CALIBRATION
(POWER COMMAND)
The Power Command transmission has a number of

clutch packs that may require periodic calibration to
compensate for wear. Calibration of the clutches
should be performed at the 50 Hour Service and
thereafter only if a deterioration in gear shift quality
is noted.
NOTE: During the calibration procedure the

electronic management system detects precisely the
point at which the clutches start to engage. The
engagement is detected by a reduction in engine
speed. During calibration it is essential that no action
is taken to to cause the engine speed to vary. Be sure
that the air conditioner and all electrical equipment is
128
switched off.
Do not operate the steering wheel, footbrakes, PTO
or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot
throttle.
Preparing the Tractor for Calibration Error Codes for Power Command
Transmission
NOTE: Clutch calibration should be carried out when
the transmission oil temperatures are between: Code Meaning
20 C (68 F) and 50 C ( 122 F).
U16 Engine speed reduced too early during clutch
calibration.
Park the tractor on level ground, away from
obstacles (in case of unexpected tractor movement). U17 Operator seat switch not depressed.
U19 Oil temperature below 10 C (50 F).
Place the transmission shuttle lever in neutral and U20 Handbrake not applied.
apply the parking brake. Switch off all electrical U21 Engine RPM below 1100.
equipment and air conditioning. Lower hydraulic
equipment to the ground, place all remote levers in U22 Engine RPM above 1300.
neutral and stop the engine. U23 Shuttle lever not in forward drive position.
U26 Clutch pedal not fully released.
With the operator in the seat, depress and hold down
U31 Tractor wheel movement detected.
the clutch pedal. With the key start in the off position
depress and hold both transmission upshift and U36 Clutch calibration value exceeded.
downshift buttons, Figure 128. Start the engine and U55 PTO engaged.
release the buttons to initiate the calibration mode.
U58 PTO sensor open circuit.
Carefully release the clutch pedal.
U59 PTO sensor short circuit.
NOTE: In ’automatic calibration sequence’ the seat U75 Clutch fill calibration value too high.
switch is constantly monitored, if the operator leaves U76 Clutch fill calibration value too low.
the seat the sequence will be stopped.
U77 Damper calibration value too high.
U78 Damper calibration value too low.
4--69
The transmission oil temperature is now displayed in

the upper Central Display and will be shown in
degrees centigrade. Depress the upshift button
twice and If the temperature is between 10C and
60C, ’CL’ will be displayed.
If ‘U19’ is displayed calibration will not be possible

and the oil will have to be warmed before proceeding.
If the temperature is too high, above 105C, ‘‘CH” will

be displayed.
With ’CL’ shown in the display, depress the upshift

control again and a calibration value will appear in the 129
display.
Depress the upshift button again and the display will

change to ’Dt’.
Depress the clutch pedal and move the shuttle lever

into forward drive. Release the clutch pedal slowly.
Momentarily depress the auto switch, the engine

speed will increase to 1200 r.p.m. and the calibration
sequence will start. The clutches will now calibrate
one by one automatically. A sequence of letters and
numbers will appear in the display as each clutch is
calbrated.
NOTE: On tractors without the Auto Shift feature,

depress the clock minute button to initiate the
calibration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not operate the steering wheel,

footbrakes, PTO or any hydraulic lever or move the
hand or foot throttle. 130
If an error occurs while in auto mode the sequence

is stopped and the relevant code displayed. Press
the auto function push button or the upshift/downshift
button to clear the error.
4--70
When the clutch calibration sequence is complete,

’End’ will appear in the Central Display and the
engine speed will reduce to idle.
Key off the engine and wait for 10 seconds to allow

the calibration to be stored in the memory. The
tractor is now ready for normal operation.
CAUTION
The tractor is drivable even if calibration has not been
completed. Pay attention in this condition as the
tractor could be jerky or sluggish. Always pull away
using the clutch pedal very carefully.
131
4--71
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CALIBRATION

AUTO COMMAND
The Auto Command transmission has hydraulic

clutch packs requiring periodic calibration to
compensate for wear. Calibration of the clutches
should be performed at the 50 Hour Service and
thereafter only if a deterioration in gear shift quality
is noted.
NOTE: During the calibration procedure the

electronic management system detects precisely the
point at which the clutches start to engage. The
engagement is detected by a reduction in engine
speed. During calibration it is essential that no action
is taken to to cause the engine speed to vary. Be sure
that the air conditioner and all electrical equipment is
132
switched off.
Do not operate the steering wheel, footbrakes, PTO
or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot
throttle.
Preparing the Tractor for Calibration Error Codes for Auto Command Transmission
NOTE: Clutch calibration should be carried out when Code Meaning

the transmission oil temperatures are between:
60 C (140 F) and 105 C (221 F). U16 Engine speed reduced too early during clutch
calibration
Park the tractor on level ground, away from U17 Operator seat switch not depressed
obstacles (in case of unexpected tractor movement). U19 Oil temperature below 10 C (50 F)
U20 Handbrake not applied
Place the transmission shuttle lever in Park and
U21 Engine RPM below 1100, increase throttle
apply the manual handbrake. Switch off all
electrical equipment and air conditioning. Lower U22 Engine RPM above 1300, decrease throttle
hydraulic equipment to the ground, place all remote U23 Shuttle lever not in forward drive position
levers in neutral and stop the engine.
U26 Clutch pedal not fully released
U31 Tractor wheel movement detected
NOTE: The Electronic Park Brake (EPB) will be
disengaged during the calibration. It is important to U36 Clutch calibration value exceeded
ensure the manual handbrake is applied. U75 Quick fill calibration too high
U76 Quick fill calibration too low
With the operator in the seat, depress and hold down
the clutch pedal. With the key start in the off position U77 Damper calibration value too high
depress and hold both the speed range increase U78 Damper calibration value too low
and decrease buttons while starting the engine to U79 PTO twist sensor not plausible
enter the calibration mode Fig 132. Carefully release
the clutch pedal. U106 Park lock error during calibration
U107 Clutch not working
NOTE: In the calibration mode the engine speed U108 Damper torque not readable
may vary to match the current calibration being
U109 Hydro not in position
processed .
NOTE: In ’automatic calibration sequence’ the seat

switch is constantly monitored, if the operator leaves
the seat the sequence will be stopped.
4--72
Upon entering the calibration mode the central LCD

will change to show the transmission oil temperature.
If a four--digit number beginning with 2 is displayed

at any time during the calibration, it is a standard
error code. The fault condition must be corrected
before calibration can be performed.
NOTE: If the value of the oil temperature is far too low

or far too high check for a fault with the temperature
sensor. If the value of the oil temperature displayed
is -- 30  C then this may indicate an open circuit on
the oil temperature sensor.
133
NOTE: While in calibration mode the transmission
drive is disabled however it is possible some tractor
movement or creep may occur.
Push down the clutch pedal, put the shuttle lever into
forward and release the clutch pedal.
Pressing the forward or reverse button will change

the display to show the transmission oil temperature
status. If “U19” is displayed, calibration will not be
possible and the oil will have to be warmed before
proceeding. If the start up procedure was incorrect,
or if the oil is at the incorrect temperature, a ‘U‘ code
will be dispalyed. See ‘U‘ code listing.
If ’CL’ (10  C to 60 C) or ’CH’ (above 105  C) is

displayed, the tractor may be operated to obtain the
correct transmission oil temperature. If it is not
practical to wait for the oil temperature to change,
press either the forward or reverse button while ’CL’
or ’CH’ is being displayed until ‘Syn‘ is indicated on
the display. When the display shows ’Syn’,
calibration can proceed.
If the oil temperature is within the correct range for

the calibration the display will show ‘Syn‘ and
calibration can proceed. The transmission is now
ready for calibration.
4--73
To calibrate clutches automatically.
When the display is showing ‘Syn‘ press and release

the ACCELERATION RATE CONTROL button (1)
on the Integrated Control Panel to start the automatic
calibration procedure.
In turn the synchronisers, flywheel torque PTO twist

and clutches A and B will be calibrated.
When the procedure is complete the display will
return to show ‘Syn‘.
If an error occurs while in this auto mode the

sequence is stopped and relevant code displayed. 134
Once the calibration is complete turn the key switch

off for at least 2 seconds to store the calibration
values.
NOTE: The transmission output speed, seat switch,

handbrake switch and clutch pedal position are
constantly monitored. Calibration cannot proceed
unless the tractor is stationary and the clutch pedal
released
IMPORTANT: Do not operate the steering wheel,

footbrakes, PTO or any hydraulic lever or move the
hand or foot throttle.
CAUTION
The tractor may still drive even if calibration has not
been completed. Pay attention in this condition as
the tractor could be jerky or sluggish. Always pull
away using the clutch pedal very carefully.
4--74
OPERATION 43
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL LATCHING/UNLATCHING
CAUTION
Owners should be aware of local regulations
concerning the braking system. Regularly maintain
the brakes to ensure compliance with the law and
ensure your safety. If in doubt, contact your dealer.
The hydraulically actuated brakes require no

adjustment. However, if any part of the brake pedal
linkage or the master cylinder assembly is replaced
or if the pedal latch will not readily engage the hole
in the right--hand pedal shank, adjust the pedal as
follows:
135
Adjust the clevis by loosening the locknut . The

distance from the bulkhead to the centre of the clevis
hole should be 147mm (5.7 in.). Adjust both pedals
and ensure pedal latch engages properly.
147
136
4--75
OPERATION 44
AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH LIFT ROD
ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the locknuts (3) and turn the adjuster (2) on

each lift rod equally. Ensure that both hitch lift arms
are supporting the hitch equally at the start of the
raise.
Check the hitch latches fully support the hitch at (4)

when the hitch is in the working position. Latch and
unlatch the hitch to make sure of smooth operation.
NOTE: On hydraulically extending hitches (as

shown) ensure the drawbar is fully retracted before
carrying out any adjustment procedures.
When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system 137

relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods are
not under tension. Both these symptoms indicate
that the hitch lift rods are too short.
Tighten the locknuts to 100 Nm (72 lbf. ft.).
With the hitch latched in the raised position, adjust

the operating cable by means of the adjuster nuts (1)
to remove all slack from the inner cable.
To check operation of the pick--up hitch, place a load

on the hook, a trailer or implement is suggested, and
check the hitch will latch and unlatch satisfactorily.
If adjustment of the latching mechanism is required,

the calibration of the 3--point hitch should also be
checked to ensure maximum height of lift is being
achieved on the pick--up hitch. See Section 3,
Electronic Draft Control.
4--76
OPERATION 45
CHECK REMOTE CONTROL VALVE DRAIN
BOTTLES
Every time a hydraulic hose is connected or

disconnected, a small amount of oil is discharged
from the remote control valve coupler. Drain bottles
are located below each remote control valve to catch
the discharged oil.
Visually check the oil level in the bottles. If necessary,

unclip the bottle (2) by releasing the spring catch (1),
remove the cap and empty the oil into a suitable
container. Re-install the bottle, ensuring it is correctly
seated below the valve.
138
4--77
OPERATION 46
CAB SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENT
(where fitted)
On tractors with a suspended cab the pre--load on

the suspension unit (1) Figure 139, may be adjusted
to suit heavier or lighter weights carried in the cab.
NOTE: Depending on track setting, the tractor rear
wheel may need to be removed for easy access to
the cab suspension adjuster.
Suspension Setting
The pre--load adjuster is used to set the cab

suspension so it operates in the optimum comfort
zone for normal driving conditions. Position II
provides the ideal setting for a 68kg (150 lbs.)
operator plus additional equipment weighing 22kg 139
(48 lbs.) carried in the cab.
NOTE: To provide optimum suspension

performance, the weight of any heavy items carried
in the cab (tow chains, linkages, toolboxes etc.) must
always be taken into consideration when adjusting
the suspension.
The cab suspension adjustment has five pre--load

settings which can be ’clicked’ into position by
rotating the upper pre--load adjuster. Each setting is
identified by vertical markings (2) on the lower collar.
When adjusted correctly, the arrow on the upper
collar (1) will align with the vertical markings on the
lower collar.
Select position I for operators having a lighter body

weight than 68kg (150 lbs.), positions III and IIII are
used for operators with a heavier body weight. With
two people in the cab, positions IIII and IIIII should be
used.
140
IMPORTANT: For correct suspension operation it is
vital that both suspension units are adjusted to the
same setting. An imbalance in adjustment will cause
unnecessary wear on the suspension units.
A ’C’ spanner is included in the tractor tool kit for

adjusting the cab suspension. Engage the ’C’
spanner in the slot of the pre--load adjuster and rotate
to the desired position.
NOTE: Use only the special tool provided to carry out

any pre--load adjustment, using alternative
equipment may damage the adjuster components.
4--78
OPERATION 47
HEADLIGHT AND WORKLAMP ADJUSTMENT
To avoid blinding on coming drivers, adjust the angle

of the headlight beams.
Each headlight is adjusted by rotating the two

adjusters,1,clockwiseorcounter-clockwiseaccord-
ing to the amount of correction required.
141
Work Lamps
Dependant upon model and specification, adjustable
work lamps may be installed on the front and rear of
of the cab roof, low down at the front of the cab or on
the rear fenders. Non-adjustable work lamps are
mounted on the front of the hood , adjacent to the
headlights.
Cab roof mounted work lamps are fully adjustable by

moving the light unit on its fixing axis, downwards,
upwards or sideways.
142
The rear cab roof mounted worklamps are fully
adjustable by moving the light unit on its fixing axis,
1, downwards, upwards or sideways.
143
4--79
OPERATION 48
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights and Hood-mounted Work Lamps
NOTICE: All headlights and work lamps have
halogen bulbs. Never touch a halogen bulb with the
fingers. Natural moisture in the skin may cause the
bulb to fail prematurely when switched on. Always
use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen
bulbs.
The headlights and two non-adjustable work lamps

are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front
hood assembly. All bulbs are accessible from the
rear of the lamp unit inside the hood area.
144
To remove bulb from front headlight assembly, raise
hood as previously described in this section. Press
the retaining clip, 1, to unhinge the rear part of the
headlight. Detach the retaining spring and remove
the bulb, 2.
To remove the bulb from the integral work lamp

simply rotate the bulb holder assembly, 2,
counter-clockwise approximately 20 degrees. The
bulb can then be removed by pressing in the bulb and
then releasing it.
145
Adjustable Work Lamps
Grabrail and Cab Mounted Work Lamps
To replace the bulbs in the work lamps, remove the
two retaining screws, 1. Pull out the lens housing
from the main lamp housing.
146
4--80
Squeeze together the ends of the wire retaining clip,

1, and pull the bulb holder from the assembly.
Remove the bulb making sure to use a clean cloth or
tissue.
147
Turn/Position Lights
To gain access to the lower rear turn/position bulbs
remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens.
To remove the bulbs, 1, rotate counter-clockwise.
148
The front turn/position lamps are located on the
grabrails. Remove the two retaining screws.
Remove the lens. To remove the turn indicator bulb,
1, or the position bulb, 3, rotate counter-clockwise.
When re-fitting the lens ensure the sealing rubber, 2,
is fully seated in the lamp housing.
149
4--81
Puddle Lights
Remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens
housing assembly, 1, from the cab roof. Disconnect
the harness connector and remove the light
assembly. To remove the bulb housing, 3, rotate the
harness connector counter-clockwise. To remove
the bulb, 2, rotate counter-clockwise.
150
Rocker Switch Bulbs
Rocker switch assemblies are retained by a sprung
tag, 1, at either end. Use a small screwdriver to pry
one end of the rocker switch from its housing and
withdraw the switch assembly.
Various rocker switches are internally illuminated.
Should the light fail the rocker switch assembly

should be replaced.
151
Rear Number Plate Lights
The light unit is retained by spring clips (1) one

located each side. It can easily be removed by
gripping the unit firmly and pulling assembly out from
its housing. The bulb housing (2) can then be
removed by rotating it counter clockwise giving
access to the bulb which can also be removed by
rotating it counter clockwise.
152
4--82
Interior Light
To replace the bulb the lens is clipped in each side of
its housing. It can be eased out giving access to the
bulb.
To change the bulb turn it counter-clockwise to

remove. When removing the bulb form the holder,
make sure to use a clean cloth or a tissue.
153
OPERATION 49
FUSES AND RELAYS
The relays and fuses are located together in the
lower right hand front console just above floor level
behind a panel on the front side.
To check or change the relays or fuses, remove the

two screws, 1, securing the panel to the console, pull
it outwards then slide it to the left to remove the two
tongues, 2, on the right hand side. The fuses and
relays are shown diagrammatically in Figures 157
and 158. In addition to the main fuses there are
additional ‘maxi’ fuses which are provided to protect
the main fuses and electrical circuit shown on
Figure 159.
There is provision for 62 fuses although they may not 154

all be fitted to your tractor. In addition, certain items
of equipment may not be installed on your tractor.
However, the fuses for these features are still fitted
and may be used as spares.
NOTICE: Do not replace a blown fuse with another

of a different rating.
The fuses are numbered and color-coded. Their

position and ratings are shown in the charts on the
following pages.
155
4--83
Relay Descriptions 1-22
Relay Function
K1 Front Windscreen Wiper Module
K2 Rear Window Wiper Module
K3 Ignition Relay
K4 Side Lamps and Lighting
K5 Starter
K6 Blower Motor
K7 Dip Beam Headlights
K8 Stop Lamps
K9 Main Beam Headlights
K10 Hydraulic Trailer Brake Power Supply
K11 Electronic Park Brake
K12 Pneunatic Trailer Brake Power Supply
K13 Not Used
K14 Get U Home
K15 Worklamp Hood
K16 Worklamp C--Pillar
K17 Power Supply Ign. ECU’s
K18 Electronic Battery Isolator
K19 Air Conditioning
K20 Power Supply Electro Hydraulic
Remotes
K21 Battery Isolator 4 minute Timer
Power Supply Electronics
K22 Heated Mirror Timer
K44 Front Heated Screen
K45 Rear Heated Screen
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System

Relay
Located behind the right hand step the Relay is for

the SCR system (Ignition ON).
156
4--84
Relay Locations 1-22
157
4--85
Mini Fuses 1-60
No. Amps Circuit No. Amps Circuit

1 10 Interior and Puddle Lights + 36 15 Roof Add On Headights
Parking Brake Lamp
37 15 Roof Add On Headights
2 25 Cigar Lighter + Power Studs
38 15 Roof Add On Headights
3 10 A/C Clutch
39 Not Used
4 10 Accessory Sockets Power Studs
40 10 Radio
5 30 Blower Motor
41 Not Used
6 10 Radio KAM + Worklamp ECU
7 20 Main Lights + Hazard Switch 42 Not Used
8 20 Starter Switch 43 10 Electronic Engine ECU Ign.
9 25 Loader Power 44 25 Front Implement Power Socket
10 30 Rear Accessory Socket 45 25 8 Amp Socket, C--Pillar left hand
11 15 Front Windscreen Wiper 46 15 Electronic Engine ECU B+
12 10 Rear windscreen wiper and Front 47 10 Not Used
and rear windscreen washer
48 5 SCR system
13 15 Stop Lamps
49 Not Used
14 15 Main Light Switch + Flasher Unit
50 15 Reversible Fan
15 20 Stop Lamp Switch + Pedal Latch
51 25 Elecronic Park Brake
16 15 Trailer Brake
17 25 IGN+ to Accessory Sockets 52 10 Instrument Cluster Ignition
18 15 Blower motor, Seat, Armrest adjust 53 15 Transmission Control Supply
19 15 Heated Mirrors 54 10 PTO Rear
20 10 Radar Socket + ADIC KeyPad + 55 10 Supply Ignition Fast Steer, EHR
Radar Fender switch, A/C Pressure
21 15 Water In Fuel Sensor + Brake Fluid Switch, CCU, ACU
Level Switch 56 15 PTO Front, ARU, EHR’s
22 15 Sidelamps RH 57 Not Used
23 15 Sidelamps LH and Licence plate 58 Not Used
24 10 Gear display Illumination, cigar 59 Not Used
lighter, VT
60 10 Timer Relay Battery Isolator
25 15 Dip Beam Headlamps, Get U
Home 61 5 Universal controller (UCM)
26 15 Main Beam Headlamps 62 Not Used
27 30 Front Worklamps (Hood) 63 5 Universal controller (UCM)
28 20 Worklamp Roof Rear 64 5 Universal controller (UCM)
29 30 Worklamp Roof Front + Grabrail 65 5 Universal controller (UCM)
30 15 Worklamps C--Pillar 66 5 Universal controller (UCM)
31 15 Beacon ECU 67 5 Universal controller (UCM)
32 15 Flasher Unit 68 5 Universal controller (UCM)
33 25 Diagnostic Connector 1 + 2 69 5 Universal controller (UCM)
34 10 Instrument Cluster & Handbrake 70 5 Universal controller (UCM)
switch 91 10 Non isolator keep alive memory
35 10 Electronic controller 92 10 Battery isolator control
4--86
Mini Fuses 1-60
158
4--87
Maxi Fuses 1-8
No. Amps Protected Components

No. Amps Protected Components
MF1 80A Supply to F9 to F21, F45,F48, F50
MF2 30A Supply to F29, F30, F46, F47, F91, K5
MF3 80A Supply to D19, F30, K5, K13
MF4 80A Supply to F27, F28
MF5 80A Supply to F26, F31, F51, F32, F25
MF6 80A Supply to F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F44
MF7 30A Supply Heated Wind Screen Front
MF8 20A Supply Heated Wind Screen Rear
159
4--88
Mega and Power Fuses
In addition to the fuses in the internal fuse box, there

are also extra fuses located on the starter motor and/
or battery tray. A 250A (PF1) ’MEGA’ fuse (1)
protects the main electrical system, a 30A (PF2) fuse
(2) protects the cab electronics and a 30A (PF9) fuse
(3) protects the SCR system.
The 10A fuse, F100 (A), protects the keep-- alive

memory (K.A.M.) circuit. This circuit provides power
for electronic memory functions when the battery
power isolator is used.
Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No. 160
F100 10A Keep Alive Memory (K.A.M.)
PF1 250A Power B+ Main Supply
PF2 30A Power B+ Electronic Supply
PF9 30A Power B+ Front Implement
Socket
To access the fuses, remove the cover (2) from the

starter motor. Loosen and remove the 13 mm nut (1)
then lift the cover from the starter motor.
After replacing a fuse ensure the cover and nut are
replaced to prevent a build up of dust or debris
around the fuses.
161
4--89
ISO BUS Power Fuses (where fitted)
Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No.
PF4 30 ISO BUS Implement socket Rear
PF5 30 ISO BUS Implement socket Rear
PF6 30 ISO BUS DIA Front Implement
socket.
PF7 30 ISO BUS DIA Front Implement
socket.
Located behind the right hand step are a further two

30A fuses to protect the rear implement ISO BUS
circuit
PF4 and PF5, 1, are for the rear ISO BUS implement
circuit plug (where fitted). Provision for 2 more ISO
BUS implement circuit plug fuses (PF6 and PF7) are
provided should the option for the front ISO BUS
circuits be required.
162
CLEANING THE TRACTOR

Cab Interior
When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes
dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and squeeze out as much
of the water as possible.
The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water

to flow out through the open doors. Wash the
covering carefully and allow to dry naturally. Avoid
getting water under the mat.
NOTICE: When operating with chemical sprayers,

clean the interior of the cab on a more frequent basis 163
to prevent a build up of chemical residue.
4--90
Cleaning the Seat and Seat Belt coat. Paint and primer are available from your
The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do authorized dealer.
not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these -- When fully dry, apply a good quality polish and
chemicals will weaken the webbing. buff to a shine.
Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying, Maintenance of the paintwork is normally carried out
damage or general wear. by washing, at intervals that depend on the
conditions of use and the environment. In areas
Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Use only warm prone to atmospheric pollution and coastal zones,
water with a little detergent added or a proprietary washing should be carried out more frequently,
brand of automotive upholstery cleaner. Avoid whereas if organic or chemical substances are
wetting the seat more than is absolutely necessary. present, wash immediately after the tractor is used.
Use a low pressure water spray, sponge down with
Cleaning the Exterior of the Tractor a solution of automotive shampoo and water, rinsing
In the event of abrasions or deep scratches that the sponge frequently. Rinse the tractor thoroughly
expose the metal under the paintwork, the area and dry off.
concerned will need to be retouched and treated
immediately with specified original products as Avoid washing the tractor if it is hot or has been
follows: standing in the sun. This will help to protect the shine
on the paintwork.
-- Rub down the immediate area surrounding the
damage with fine abrasive paper. NOTICE: When carrying out operations involving
-- Apply a coat of primer. materials or crops which may become airborne,
-- Leave to dry and then rub down with fine abrasive frequently check the tractor for build up of debris
paper to ‘key’ the surface. around the radiator, engine and exhaust system to
prevent overheating or the possibility of catching fire.
-- Apply the paint. For best results apply several
light applications of paint rather than one heavy
PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING BATTERY

CHARGING OR WELDING
Precautions 7. If welding is to be carried out in close proximity

To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical to a computer module, then the module should
systems, always observe the following: be removed from the tractor. It is recommended
that this procedure be carried out by an
1. Never make or break any of the charging circuit authorized dealer.
connections, including the battery connections,
when the engine is running. 8. Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or
across any electrical wiring or electronic
2. Never short any of the charging components to component while welding is in progress.
ground.
9. Always disconnect the negative cable from the
3. Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts batteries when charging the batteries in the
nominal voltage. tractor with a battery charger.
4. Always observe correct polarity when installing
the batteries or using a slave battery to jump start WARNING
the engine. Follow the instructions in the Batteries contain sulfuric acid. In case of contact
operator’s manual when jump starting the with skin, flush the affected area with water for
tractor. Connect positive to positive and negative five minutes. Seek medical attention immediate-
to negative. ly. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
5. Always disconnect the ground cable from the Wear eye protection when working near
batteries before carrying out arc welding on the batteries.
tractor or on any implement attached to the
tractor. NOTICE: Failure to disconnect the two ground cable
6. Position the welder ground cable clamp as close connections at the battery prior to charging the
to the welding area as possible. batteries or welding on the tractor or attached
implement will result in damage to the electronic and
electrical systems.
4--91
STORING THE TRACTOR
The following text is given for your information and PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER
guidance. For further information concerning long STORAGE
term storage of your tractor, please consult your After extended storage, prepare the tractor for
authorized dealer.
further use, as follows:
TRACTOR STORAGE  Inflate the tires to the correct pressure and lower
the tractor to the ground.
Before storing the tractor for an extended period, the
following precautions should be taken:  Refill the fuel tank(s).
 Clean the tractor.  Check the radiator coolant level.
 Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and  Check all oil levels.
refill with clean oil.
 Install fully charged batteries.
 Drain the fuel tank(s) and pour approximately
two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the  Remove the exhaust pipe covering.
tank. Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to  Start the engine and check that all instruments
ensure complete distribution of the calibrating and controls are functioning correctly. Using the
fuel throughout the injection system. See the tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, fully
next item before running the engine. raise the 3-point hitch and remove the supports.
 Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is  Check operation of heating and air conditioning
within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush systems (where fitted).
and refill the system. See Operation 32 in
Section 4. Run the engine for one hour to  Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it
disperse the coolant throughout the system. is operating satisfactorily.
 Lubricate all grease fittings.

 Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position
Control, raise the 3-point hitch and support the lift
arms in the raised position.
 Lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods
with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder
rams, lift assist rams, spool valves, etc.
 Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry
atmosphere. Recharge periodically.
 Raise the tractor and place supports under the
axles to take the weight off the tires.
 Cover the exhaust pipe opening.
4--92
SECTION 5
FAULT FINDING
INTRODUCTION
The following information is intended as a guide to
assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor
malfunctions and fault conditions.
The information provided is as follows:
 ERROR CODES
 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES
Your tractor makes extensive use of electronics to

control and monitor major components within the
driveline, electrical and hydraulic systems. In the
unlikely event of a fault occurring in one of these
areas, the malfunction will be identified with a symbol
and a four or five digit error code in the instrument
panel displays. The first digit(s) of each number
provide the general location of the fault and the
subsequent numbers confirm the exact nature of the 1
fault.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING
type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. Each
error code will be supported by the relevant symbol The following information lists possible problems,
displayed above the number. their cause and corrective action. The systems are
listed as follows:
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become
disabled, an error code will be displayed in the Subject Page
instrument panel. If this should happen and you are
unable to rectify the fault yourself, contact your Fault codes and symbols 5--2
authorised dealer and report the error code
Engine 5--4
displayed.
Transmission 5--7
Hydraulics 5--8
3-point hitch 5--9
Brakes 5--10
Cab 5--10
Electrical 5--11
5--1
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT
-- 1------ Electronic hitch control.
-- 2------ Transmission.
-- 3------ Engine.
-- 4------ Rear electronic remote valves.
-- 45------ Front electronic remote valves.

F
-- 5------ Rear PTO system.
ACTION
-- 6------ Front wheel drive. The system fault symbols relate
to an operational fault in one or
more of the tractors main
components, either electrical,
-- 7------ Rear differential lock. mechanical or hydraulic.
The appearance of a fault

symbol may be accompanied by
-- 8------ Front PTO system. a four or five digit fault code.
Consult your authorized dealer.

-- 9------ Front 3--point hitch.
-- 10------ Front suspension.
-- 12------ Electronic park lock
-- 15------ Turn Assist system.
-- 16------ Cab auto temperature control
-- 18------ Armrest controller
Selective Catalytic Reduction

-- 19------
(SCR)
5--2
FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION
-- 140---- Instrument cluster.
-- 140---- Electronic system malfunction.
-- 140---- Data network system.
140----
-- Steering sensor.
141----
-- 140---- 5 volt supply voltage.

The system fault symbols relate
to an operational fault in one or
more of the tractors main
-- 140---- Starter motor power supply. components, either electrical,
mechanical or hydraulic.
-- 140---- Fuel level sensor. The appearance of a fault

symbol may be accompanied by
a four digit fault code.
140----
-- Air brake system fault. Consult your authorised dealer.
141----
-- 141---- Alternator lamp not working.
141----
. 143---- Electronic locking park brake.
149----
149---- CODI missing (VA)
149---- Configuration error
AFS 200 monitor present but

-- 141---- Configure to ’ON LINE’ status.
not configured ’ON LINE’.
5--3
ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Engine will not start Incorrect starting procedure. Review starting procedure.
or is difficult to start
Low or no fuel. Check fuel level.
Air in fuel lines. Bleed fuel system.
Low ambient temperature. Use cold starting aid.
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Malfunctioning fuel pump See your authorised dealer.

or injectors.
Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or See your authorised dealer.

solenoid relay.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use correct viscosity oil.
Incorrect fuel for operating Use correct type fuel for temperature
temperature. conditions.
Slow starter speed. See slow starter speed in Electrical.
Engine runs roughly Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
and/or stalls
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted. See your authorised dealer.
Fuel cap vent blocked. Wash cap in clean fuel oil.
5--4
ENGINE (continued)
Engine lacks power Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning fuel injection See your authorised dealer.

pump.
Maximum ‘no--load’ speed set See your authorised dealer.

too low.
Leaking air intake boost pipes or Check and rectify or see your authorised
exhaust manifold. dealer.
Turbocharger malfunctioning. See your authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
Engine knocks Fuel injection pump timing. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine oil pressure. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Engine overheats Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine coolant level. Fill coolant recovery tank. Check cooling
system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s). Check thermostat(s).
Dirty/blocked radiator core. Clean.
Excessive engine overload. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.
5--5
ENGINE (continued)
Engine overheats Faulty radiator pressure cap. Replace cap.
Cooling system blocked. Flush cooling system.
Loose or worn fan belt. Check tension, adjust or replace belt

if worn.
Leaking hose or connection. Tighten connection and/or replace hose.
Malfunctioning temperature See your authorised dealer.

gauge or sender.
Malfunctioning vistronic fan. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operat- Malfunctioning thermostat(s). Replace thermostat(s).

ing temperature
Vistronic fan locked up. See your Authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pres- Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
sure
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Excessive engine oil Engine oil level too high. Reduce oil level, as required.
consumption
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
External oil leaks. Repair leaks.
Worn valve guides/seals. See your authorised dealer.
Excessive fuel con- Low engine operating See Low engine operating temperature.
sumption temperature.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
5--6
ENGINE (continued)
Excessive fuel con- Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
sumption
(continued) Malfunctioning fuel injection pump. See your authorised dealer.
Leaking air intake or exhaust Check and rectify or see your authorised
manifold. dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
TRANSMISSION
Tractor does not Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see your
drive in any gear malfunction. authorised dealer.
Gear shift sequence Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see your
incorrect or gears malfunction. authorised dealer.
missing
Jumping out of gear Worn synchronisers/couplers. Recalibrate the transmission or see your
or holding in gear authorised dealer.
Poor inching control Transmission clutches require Perform transmission clutch calibration
when using inching calibration. procedure or see your authorised dealer.
pedal (clutch pedal)
or jerky gear shifting
High transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

operating tempera-
ture Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Dirty or blocked transmission Clean.

oil cooler.
Low transmission oil Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

pressure
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Blocked transmission oil filter. Replace filter.
Noisy transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Worn bearings or failed parts. See your authorised dealer.
5--7
HYDRAULICS
Hydraulic system Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
does not operate malfunction.
Hydraulics oil level very low. Add oil, as required.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Hydraulic oil over- Hydraulics oil level too low or Adjust oil level, as required.
heats too high.
Hydraulics oil cooler blocked. Clean.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Flow control incorrectly adjusted. Allow to cool, adjust flow control before
operating again.
Hydraulic load not matched to See your authorised dealer.

tractor.
Remote control valve Detent release pressure set too low. Adjust detent pressure or see your
detent disengages authorised dealer.
prematurely
Remote equipment Flow control incorrectly set. Adjust flow control.

cylinder operates too
fast or too slowly
Remote equipment Hoses not correctly connected. Attach hoses correctly.

does not operate
Load exceeds system capacity. Reduce load or use correct size cylinder
(see your authorised dealer).
Remote control valve lever Adjust cables or see your authorised

movement restricted. dealer.
5--8
THREE--POINT HITCH
3--point hitch does Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
not move when con- malfunction.
trol lever is moved
Hitch not in phase with the control Put lift control lever back in phase with
lever. lower links.
Fast raise switch in external control Put switch in correct position.

position.
Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.

positioned.
External power lift Fast raise switch not in external Centralise switch (external control
control does not op- control position. position).
erate
3--point hitch does Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.
not raise fully positioned.
3--point hitch drops Drop rate control incorrectly Adjust drop rate control.
slowly positioned.
3--point hitch slow to Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.

respond to draft adjusted.
loads
Drop rate too slow. Adjust drop rate control.
Implement not functioning properly. See implement operator’s manual.
3--point hitch too re- Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
sponsive to draft adjusted.
loads
3--point hitch status Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
light flashes continu- adjusted.
ally
5--9
BRAKES
Pedal(s) feel spongy Air in system. System requires bleeding. See

Excessive brake Brake piston seal leaking. See your authorised dealer.
pedal travel
Brake bleed valve leaking. See your authorised dealer.
Leakage in brake valve(s) See your authorised dealer.
Worn brake discs. See your authorised dealer.
CAB
Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter Check seal condition.
element(s).
Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.
Defective filter. Replace filter.
Damaged seals around Replace seal(s).

doors/windows or roof hatch.
Low pressuriser air Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.

flow
Heater or evaporator core blocked. See your authorised dealer.
Air conditioner does Heater control turned on. Turn temperature control knob fully anti-
not produce cool air clockwise.
Condenser blocked. Clean radiator, condenser and oil cooler.
Drive belt slipping, worn or Check automatic belt tensioner and belt
damaged. condition.
Low refrigerant level. See your authorised dealer.
5--10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical system Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.

completely inopera- connections.
tive
Sulphated batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for
minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.
Starter speed slow -- Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.
engine cranks slowly connections.
Low battery output. Check battery open circuit voltage for

Incorrect viscosity engine oil. Use correct viscosity oil for ambient
temperature.
Starter inoperative Loose or corroded battery or Clean and tighten connections.

starter motor connections.
Dead batteries. Charge or replace batteries.
Starter safety switch(es) operative. Place all gear shift levers in neutral and
fully depress clutch pedal.
Alternator light stays Low engine idle speed. Increase engine idle speed.
on with engine run-
ning Broken/loose drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

authorised dealer.
Batteries will not Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

charge authorised dealer.
Loose or corroded terminals. Clean and tighten connections.
Loose or worn drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Replace belt, if required.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

5--11
5--12
SECTION 6
ACCESSORIES
This section of the Manual describes the function Subject Page

and operation of a selection of additional features
that are available for your tractor as dealer installed ISO Connector 6--2
accessories. Unless otherwise stated, these
features may also be available as factory fitted Auto Guidance 6--2
options.
Rotating Beacon 6--3
Maintenance requirements for these features will be
found in Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance. Auxiliary Headlights 6--3
Battery Isolator Switch 6--4

This subjects covered in this section are shown on
the right. A comprehensive index is provided at the
end of this book.
A comprehensive range of optional equipment is

available to enhance the versatility of your tractor,
consult your authorised dealer for more information.
6--1
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES
ISO CONNECTOR
Implements equipped with an ISO standard

electronic control unit/s can be connected to the
monitor via one of the multi--pin ISO connectors.
AUTO GUIDANCE CONTROL
Where a tractor is equipped with Auto Guidance, the

master switch to energise the system is on the
right--hand cab ’C’ pillar.
The switch has two positions, central (as shown) will

disconnect power from the system, depressing the
top of the switch will energise the system and a light
in the switch will illuminate to confirm activation.
When the system is not in use, it is recommended the

master switch is turned off.
3
With the system energised, depressing the

activation switch on the armrest unit will engage Auto
Guidance. A light in the switch will illuminate to
confirm engagement.
To disengage the Auto Guidance function depress

the switch again or manually turn the steering wheel.
6--2
ROTATING BEACON
The beacon switch is located in the control panel in

the roof. Press in the button identified with the
beacon symbol to provide power to the rotating
beacon socket outlet.
NOTE: Less cab models will have the beacon switch

located on the main switch panel on the right--hand
control console.
The roof beacon kit consists of a rotating beacon,

support bracket and fitting hardware to attach to the
roof of the tractor. 5
A socket connected to the tractor electrical circuit (1),

is provided each side of the cab at the rear of the
tractor. When not in use, ensure the socket cover is
replaced to prevent water ingress.
AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS
A set of additional dipping headlights are available for

use with front mounted equipment. Located on the
upper right and left--hand grab rails, the headlight
beams pass over front mounted equipment to
illuminate the road ahead.
To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the

switch on the left--hand ’C’ pillar in the cab. When
switched on the auxiliary headlight beams may be
dipped using the multi--function switch on the left of
the steering column.
7
6--3
BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH
Before disconnecting battery power with the isolator,

ensure the key--start and any other electrical
switches are turned OFF.
IMPORTANT: After turning the tractor key--start off,

wait for 60 seconds before isolating the battery
power. This will permit any unsaved information in
the tractor electronic processors to be memorised.
An inbuilt power reserve will maintain a small amount

of power to supply the electronic processors and
radio memories when the tractor battery is isolated.
The solenoid operated battery isolator is controlled

by a switch (1) located on the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar.
Depress the top of the switch to disconnect battery

power, an audible warning will sound for
approximately 5 seconds. Depress the bottom of the
switch to re--connect battery power.
IMPORTANT: When in the ’ON’ position, the isolator

switch solenoid consumes a small amount of
electrical power. If the tractor is left for an extended
period of time with the isolator on, battery power may
be reduced. Always turn the battery isolator switch
’OFF’ when the tractor is not in use. 8
NOTE: The key--start switch must be in the ’OFF’ or

’ACCESSORIES’ position to operate the battery
isolator, it will not function with the key--start in the
’ON’ (run) position.
6--4
SECTION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
General Information Subject Page
General Dimensions 7--2
The specification figures in this section are provided
for your information and guidance. For further Vehicle Weights 7--6
information concerning your tractor and equipment,
consult your New Holland dealer. Lubricant and Fluid Capacities 7--8
Engine 7--9
New Holland policy is one of continuous
improvement and the right to change prices, Fuel System 7--9
specification or equipment at any time without notice
is reserved. Cooling System 7--10
Transmission Options 7--10
All data given in this manual is subject to production
variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate Maximum Operating Angles 7--11
only. The illustrations do not necessarily show
tractors in standard condition or imply that these Rear Power Take Off 7--11
features are available in all countries. For exact
information about any particular tractor, please Front Power Take Off 7--12
consult your New Holland dealer. Hydraulic System 7--12
Rear 3--Point Hitch 7--12

Remote Control Valves 7--17
Front 3--Point Hitch 7--17
Front Remote Valves 7--17
Brakes 7--18
Steering 7--18
Electrical Equipment 7--19
Hardware Torque Tables 7--20
7--1
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS ALL MODELS
NOTE:The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown.
Allowance must be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions:
T7.220, T7.235, T7.250, T7.260 and T7.270
4WD
(Standard, Suspension and SuperSteer Axles)
The following dimensions are based Front 480/70R30

on tractors with tyre sizes shown: Rear 580/70R42
A. Width across rear fenders

Narrow standard fenders All models, 2158 mm (84.9 in.)
Wide fenders All models, 2334 mm (91.8 in.)
Wide fenders + 75 mm extensions All models, 2484 mm (97.7 in.)
Wide fenders + 174 mm extensions All models, 2682 mm (105.5 in.)
7--2
T7.220, T7.235, T7.250, T7.260 and T7.270

GENERAL DIMENSIONS
4WD
(Standard, Suspension and SuperSteer Axles)
B. Maximum ground clearance All models, 613 mm (24.1 in.)

below front axle
C. Front track setting

Adjustable rims All Models, 1560 -- 2258 mm (61.4 -- 88.8 in)
Fixed rims All Models, 1840 -- 1980 mm (72.4 -- 77.9 in)
D. Rear track setting*

-- with flange axle
and adjustable rims All models, 1528 -- 2236 mm (60.1 -- 88.0 in)
and fixed rims All models, 1840 -- 1926 mm (72.4 -- 77.4 in)
-- with 98 in. bar axle All models, 1870 -- 2168 mm (73.6 -- 85.4 in)
E. Height to top of exhaust All models, 3164 mm (124.5 in)
F. Height to top of cab All models, 3090 mm (121.6 in)
G. **Ground clearance below drawbar

Swinging drawbars All models, 398 -- 523 mm (15.6 -- 20.5 in)
Tow hooks All models, 314 -- 392 mm (12.3 -- 15.4 in)
H. Front hitch projection

Links horizontal All models, 716 mm (28.1 in)
Links in transport position All models, 316 mm (12.4 in)
*Rear track settings calculated with steel wheels.

**Ground clearance below the swinging drawbar or tow hook will be dependent on type of drawbar and tyre size.
The figures shown are for guidance only.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--3
T7.220, T7.235, T7.250, T7.260 and T7.270

GENERAL DIMENSIONS
4WD
Standard and Suspension Axles SuperSteer Axle
J. Wheelbase 2884 mm (113.5 in) 2977 mm (117.2 in)
K. Overall length to end of 5017 mm (197.5 in) 4918 mm (193.6 in.)

lower links
Minimum turn radius

(refer to illustration below)
L. Turning Radius
-- without brakes at 61.0 in. 6.59 mtr (21.6 ft.) 5.94 mtr (19.4 ft.)
front track setting
front track setting
M. Turnaround Diameter
front track setting
front track setting
Minimum Turn Radius
(L) SAE Turning Radius. Measured from the centre

point of the circle to the centre of the tread on the
outside front tyre.
(M) Turnaround Diameter. Measured from the centre

point of the rear axle, in line with the drawbar.
NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and steering stops adjusted to provide 20 mm
(0.78in) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0 front axle oscillation.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--4
T7.220, T7.235, T7.250, T7.260 and T7.270
GENERAL DIMENSIONS
Axle Width -- Flange to Flange

Front axle
-- 4WD 1900 mm (74.8 in.)
Rear axle
-- Flange type 1870 mm (73.6 in.)
Hub Dimensions
(refer to illustration below)
Front axle
-- 4WD A 362 mm (14.2 in.)
B 405 mm (15.9 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 210 Nm (154.8 lbs.ft.)
Rear axle
-- Flange axle A 281 mm (11.0 in.)
B 335 mm (13.1 in.)
(T7.220 and T7.235) C 10, M25x2.5 -- 500 Nm (368.7 lbs.ft)
(T7.250, T7.260 and T7.270) C 10, M22x2.5 -- 500 Nm (368.7 lbs.ft)
-- Bar axle A All models, 281 mm (11.0 in.)
B All models, 335 mm (13.1 in.)
(T7.220 and T7.235) C 10, M25x2.5 -- 500 Nm (368.7 lbs.ft)
(T7.250, T7.260 and T7.270) C 10, M22x2.5 -- 500 Nm (368.7 lbs.ft)
A Diameter of clearance hole (hub)

B Stud to stud diameter (centre to centre)
C Stud number, dimension and torque
7--5
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

TYPICAL OPERATING WEIGHTS
4WD -- with cab, standard axle

with Power Command transmission
On front axle 3184 kg (7019 lbs) --
On rear axle 4116 kg (9074 lbs) --
Total weight 7300 kg (16093 lbs) --
4WD -- with cab, SuperSteer axle

4WD -- with cab, Suspended axle

4WD Maximum Permissible Weight

Total weight at 50 Km/h (31.0 MPH) 13000 kg (28659 lbs) --
NOTE:The above weights are approximate and are based on standard production tractors with full fuel
tank, but without driver, or additional equipment.
7--6
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

TYPICAL OPERATING WEIGHTS
4WD -- with cab, standard axle

with Auto Command transmission
On front axle 3336 kg (7354 lbs)
On rear axle 4314 kg (9510 lbs)
Total weight 7650 kg (16865 lbs)
4WD -- with cab, SuperSteer axle

4WD -- with cab, Suspended axle

4WD Maximum Permissible Weight

Total weight at 50 Km/h (31.0 MPH) 13000 kg (28659 lbs)
NOTE:The above weights are approximate and are based on standard production tractors with full fuel
tank, but without driver, or additional equipment.
7--7
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

CAPACITIES
Fuel tank (Total, both tanks)

Power Command 395 litres (104 US gals) --
Auto Command 395 litres (104 US gals)
(NOTE: Before using Biodiesel fuels, refer to Section 4)
DEF/AdBlue tank 48 litres (12.6 US gals)
Cooling system 22.5 litres (5.9 US gals)
Engine 15 litres (3.96 US gals)

(including filter)
Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics
Power Command 82.0 litres (21.6 US gals) --
Auto Command 84.0 litres (22.1 US gals)
Front P.T.O. 3.05 litres (3.2 US qts)
4WD Front hubs (w/o brakes) 2.3 litres (2.4 US qts)

(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front hubs (with brakes) 3.8 litres (4.0 US qts)

(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front axle differential 11.0 litres (11.6 US qts)

(All axles)
Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the dipstick
with the tractor parked on level ground. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote control
valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the
oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in. damage to the rear axle and transmission
components. See page 3--133 for further details.
7--8
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

ENGINE
Engine power (unboosted) Kw 123 136 147 158 168
at rated speed, (ECE R120) cv 167 185 200 215 228
at rated speed, (ECE R120) bhp 165 182 197 212 225
Engine power (boosted) Kw 151 162 173 181 192
at rated speed, (ECE R120) cv 205 220 235 246 261
at rated speed, (ECE R120) bhp 202 217 232 243 257
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders
Valves per cylinder 4 valves per cylinder
Aspiration Turbocharged and air to air intercooled
Bore 104 mm (4.0 in)
Stroke 132 mm (5.19 in)
Displacement 6728 cm3 (410 in3)
Compression ratio 16.5 : 1
Firing order 1.5.3.6.2.4
Rated engine speed All Models, 2200 e.r.p.m.
Idle speed All Models, 850 +/ -- 50 e.r.p.m.
Maximum no--load speed All Models, 2375 e.r.p.m.
Valve tappet clearance (cold)

-- Intake 0.25 mm (0.009 in)
-- Exhaust 0.51 mm (0.020 in)
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Electronically controlled, high pressure common rail
Dynamic timing (BTDC) 3.4 5.5 6.3 6.3 6.3
7--9
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

COOLING SYSTEM
Type Pressurised, with full flow bypass and recovery tank
With Vistronic fan

-- Number of blades 9 blades
-- Diameter 620 mm. (24.4 in)
With Reversible fan

-- Number of blades 9 blades
-- Diameter 620 mm. (24.4 in)
Thermostat
-- Begins to open at C 81 degrees
F 178 degrees
-- Fully open at C 96 degrees

F 205 degrees
Radiator pressure cap 1.0 bar (14.5 lbf.in2)

Description Full Powershift with Power Shuttle
17 x 6 -- 4WD 30 km/h (18.4 MPH)* --
18 x 6 -- 4WD 35 km/h (21.7 MPH)* (T7.220, T7.250 Japan only)
18 x 6 -- 4WD 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 Economy -- 4WD 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 -- 4WD 50 km/h (31.0 MPH)*
(with front brakes & suspension)
Creeper Gears
34 x 12 -- 4WD 0.29 -- 30 km/h (0.18 -- 18.4 MPH)*
36 x 12 -- 4WD 0.29 -- 35 km/h (0.18 -- 21.7 MPH)*
36 x 12 -- 4WD 0.29 -- 40 km/h (0.18 -- 24.8 MPH)*
Creeper Gear Operation Electronic switch
*Approximate speeds depending on tyre size
7--10
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

Description Continuously Variable Speed with Power Shuttle
35 km/h (T7.220, T7.250 Japan only) 0.03 -- 35 km/h (0.01 -- 21.7 MPH)*
40 km/h 0.03 -- 40 km/h (0.01 -- 24.8 MPH)*
40 km/h Economy 0.03 -- 40 km/h (0.01 -- 24.8 MPH)*
50 km/h (with front brakes & suspension) 0.03 -- 50 km/h (0.01 -- 31.0 MPH)*
*Approximate speeds depending on tyre size
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE

Front end up Power Command 32 / Auto Command 30
Rear end up Power Command 30 / Auto Command 23
Right side up Power Command 35 / Auto Command 30
Left side up Power Command 35 / Auto Command 30
REAR POWER TAKE OFF

-- Standard 1000E/1000 shiftable, independent
-- Optional 540E/1000 shiftable, independent
-- Optional 540/540E/1000/1000E electronic shift, independent
-- Optional 540/1000 non--shiftable, independent
Engine speed @ PTO speed
-- 540 (non--shiftable) 1950 e.r.p.m.
-- 540E (shiftable and non--shiftable) 1569 e.r.p.m.
-- 1000 (shiftable and non--shiftable) 1893 e.r.p.m.
-- 1000E (shiftable) 1700 e.r.p.m.
With Electronic Shift

-- Optional Electronic shift, independent 2 or 4 speeds
-- 4 Speed 540/540E/1000/1000E
-- e.r.p.m. 1931/1598/1912/1583
-- 2 Speed 540E/1000 or 1000/1000E
-- e.r.p.m. 1583/1893 or 1893/1700
Rear fender mounted PTO controls Standard
7--11
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

FRONT POWER TAKE OFF*
Type Single speed, fully independent
-- Shaft 6 or 21 Spline 39.4mm (1.375 in.)
-- Actuation Elecro--hydraulic, Proportional control
-- Direction of rotation Anti--clockwise (viewed from the front)
Engine speed @ PTO speed

Power Command
-- 1000 rpm only All Models, 1850 e.r.p.m. --
Auto Command
-- 1000 rpm only All Models, 1850 e.r.p.m.
Maximum Power Output All Models, 96.9 Kw (130 Hp)
*Not SuperSteer models
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Type Variable displacement hydraulic pump with Electronic
Draft Control (EDC)
Maximum system pressure

at 2100 e.r.p.m. rated engine speed 215 +/ -- 5 bar (3117+/ -- 72 lbf.in2)
Flow at rated engine speed

Power Command
-- with standard pump 120.0 l/min (31.7 US gal/min) --
-- with optional ’Hi--Flow’ pump 150.0 l/min (39.6 US gal/min) --
Auto Command
-- with standard pump 150.0 l/min (39.6 US gal/min)
-- with optional ’Hi--Flow’ pump 170.0 l/min (44.9 US gal/min)
THREE POINT HITCH

Linkage Category
-- with EDC, standard Category II/III w/quick attach link ends
-- with EDC, Optional Category II/III w/flexible link ends
7--12
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

LIFT CAPACITY
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:
with 2 x 90mm assist rams
-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4874 (10745)
5037--5364
- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) - - -
(11106--11825)
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
pressure, links horizontal:
5598--6547
(12342--14433)
- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) - - 5282--6618 (11645--14590)
NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--13
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

LIFT CAPACITY
(continued)
-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 6885 (15178)
7--14
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

LIFT CAPACITY
(continued)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link
ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:
5292--5364
(11668--11825)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum
hydraulic pressure, links horizontal:
6445--6547
(14208--14433)
7--15
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

LIFT CAPACITY
(continued)
7--16
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
With mechanical remote valves

-- Power Command only Std. Configurable valves, 3 Std. 4 Opt. --
With electronic remote valves

-- Power Command Opt. 3 Std, 4 or 5 Opt. --
-- Auto Command Std. 3 Std, 4 or 5 Opt.
Maximum pressure at 200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 psi)

rated engine speed
Maximum flow through one 95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3US gal/min)

valve at rated engine speed
ISO Power Beyond couplers Opt. Compatible with configurable and electronic valves
FRONT 3--POINT HITCH

Linkage Category Category III L
Lift capacity through full lift range:

@ ball ends 3785 kg. (8344 lbs)
@ 610 mm (24 in)in front of ball ends 3620 kg. (7980 lbs)
FRONT REMOTE VALVE COUPLERS

With electronic mid mount 2, 3 or 4 optional
remote valves and joystick
Maximum flow through one 95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3 US gal/min)

valve at rated engine speed
7--17
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

BRAKES
Service brake Self adjusting, oil immersed disc acting on differential
shafts with power assistance
Number of discs per side 2 friction and 2 steel
Front brakes (optional 4WD) Oil immersed disc in each hub
Handbrake Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft

-- Engagement Mechanical lever
-- Number of discs 6 discs
Electronic Park Brake (where fitted) Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft
-- Engagement Electronic (via shuttle lever)
-- Number of discs 6 discs
STEERING
Type Hydrostatic with tilt/telescoping steering wheel
Turns from lock to lock

-- 4WD All Models 5.1 turns
-- 4WD with Fast Steer 10 left or right from the sraight ahead position
Maximum angle of turn

-- 4WD standard/suspension axles All Models 55 degrees
-- 4WD SuperSteer axle All Models 65 degrees
Front wheel alignment

-- All 4 wheel drive 0 +/-- 3 mm (0 +/-- 0.12 in.)
7--18
T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260 T7.270

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Alternator 12 volt, 150 amp (Std), 200 amp (Opt)
Battery Minimum maintenance 12 volt 176 Ah (1300 cca)
-- Electronic battery isolator Optional, All Models
Starting motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated

4.2 kw -- geared reduction
Cold starting aid Optional inlet manifold grid heater, fuel heater,
transmission and engine oil heaters
Bulb rating and type

-- headlights 60/55W -- H4
-- parking lights (front) 5W -- R5W
-- parking lights (rear) 5W -- P21/5W
-- work lights (hi--mount) 55W -- H3
-- work lights HID (hi--mount) 35W HID DIS
-- work lights HID (hood--mount) 35W HID DIS
-- work lights (auxiliary) 50W -- GE866
-- turn indicators (front) 21W -- PY21W
-- turn indicators (rear) 21W -- R21W
-- stop lights 21W -- P21/5W
-- licence plate lights 5W -- R5W
-- rotating beacon 55W -- H1
-- SMV lights (N America only) 21W--P21W
and extremity lights
7--19
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES
IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS

NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C
SIZE or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8)
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20)
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35)
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57)
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88)
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125)
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172)
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (305)
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494)
1.0 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE SAE SAE

GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8
REGULAR SAE SAE
NUTS GRADE 5 GRADE 8
HEX NUTS NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFRETIAL NOTCH GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFRENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE C SIX MARKS
MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
GRADE IDENTIFICATION AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C
7--20
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES
IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT

CL.8
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED w/CL8.8
SIZE w/ZnCr w/ZnCr w/ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
IDENTIFICATION
HEX CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING
7--21
7--22
SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Dealer’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j All operative checks are to be performed with the
tractor at normal operating temperature.
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . j
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16  C (60  F) j 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . j 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
(air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . j adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . . j 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
6. Hydraulic System:
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . j
Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
9. Clean front P.T.O. filter (where fitted) . . j Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . j
10. Check front P.T.O. oil level (where fitted) j Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
11. Check front axle differential 7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
12. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . . j 8. Calibrate Power Command
transmission clutches (see page 4--69) . j
13. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . . j
14. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
15. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . j
16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
17. Front wheel track alignment . . . . . . . . . . . j
4. Differential lock engagement and
18. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
19. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . j 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
20. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . . j 6. All optional equipment and accessories j
21. Check air intake and intercooler
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . . j
22. Check cooling system hose connections j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . j
23. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts . j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
SERVICE PERFORMED
Tractor Model Tractor Serial Number
Owner’s signature Date Dealer’s signature Date
8--1
8--2
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Owner’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:
1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j All operative checks are to be performed with the
tractor at normal operating temperature.
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . j
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16  C (60  F) j 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . j 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
(air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . j adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . . j 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
6. Hydraulic System:
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . j
Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
9. Clean front P.T.O. filter (where fitted) . . j Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . j
10. Check front P.T.O. oil level (where fitted) j Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
11. Check front axle differential 7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
12. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . . j 8. Calibrate Power Command
transmission clutches (see page 4--69) . j
13. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . . j
14. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
15. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . j
16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
17. Front wheel track alignment . . . . . . . . . . . j
4. Differential lock engagement and
18. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
19. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . j 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
20. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . . j 6. All optional equipment and accessories j
21. Check air intake and intercooler
SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . . j
22. Check cooling system hose connections j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . j
23. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts . j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
SERVICE PERFORMED
Tractor Model Tractor Serial Number
Owner’s signature Date Dealer’s signature Date
8--3
8--4
SECTION 9 - INDEX
A Cleaning the tractor, 1-1

Console light, 2-12
Accessories, 6-1
Coolant temperature gauge, 2-37
Auxiliary headlights, 6-3
Battery isolator switch, 6-4 Cup holder, 2-21
ISO connector, 6-2
Rotating beacon, 6-3
D
Adjustable air vents, 2-13
Differential lock operation, 2-133
Air conditioner control, 2-13
Dot matrix display, 2-41
Air-operated trailer brakes, 3-167
Drawbars and towing attachments, 3-149
Airborne noise emission, 1-25
Automatic pick-up hitch, 3-162
Alarm functions, 2-74 Rear tow hitch, 3-156
Analogue and digital instrument cluster, 2-37 Safety chain, 3-155
Armrest Colour Display, 2-43 Swinging drawbars, 3-151
Audible alarms, 2-74 Dual wheels, 3-190
Auto Command Transmission, 2-112
Automatic cab temperature control, 2-15 E
Automatic engine shutdown, 3-13
Ecology and the environment, 1-6
Electrical power connectors, 2-22
B External power connectors, 2-24
Internal power connectors, 2-22
Ballasting and tyres, 3-192
Ballast charts, 3-199 Electrical switch panels, 2-4
Front weights, 3-196 Electro-hydraulic remote valves, 3-102
Liquid tyre ballast, 3-198 Connecting remote cylinders, 3-126
Rear wheel weights, 3-195 Control levers, 3-104
With front axle suspension, 3-192 External EHR controls, Safety information,
3-111
Bar type rear axle, 3-183
Operating continuous flow equipment, 3-128
Track adjustment, 3-184
Relieving system pressure, 3-125
Biodiesel fuels, 4-5 Timed programme operation, 3-120
Brake controls and operation, 2-84 Double acting service, 3-121
Exhaust brake, 2-87 Replaying a timed programme, 3-124
Footbrakes, 2-88 Single acting service, 3-122
Handbrake, 2-84 Transport lock, 3-102
Electronic draft control, 3-87
External 3-point hitch controls, 3-99
C Electronic hitch control
Cab air filters, 2-17 Draft control operation, 3-94
EHC control panel, 3-89
Cab air recirculation, 2-17
Hitch position display, 3-88
Cab Introduction, 2-5 Position control operation, 3-98
Cab pressurisation monitor, 2-18 Pre-operation settings, 3-93
Centre display (LCD) , 2-41 Ride control, 3-101
3-Point hitch position, 2-42 System malfunction warning, 3-92
Power take off speed, 2-42 Transport lock, 3-101
Rear wheel slip, 2-41
9-1
SECTION 9 - INDEX
Electronic park brake, 2-84 Full Powershift transmission, Transmission

operation, Ground speed charts, 2-107
Engine power management, 3-15
Engine speed management, 3-18
Engine tachometer, 2-37 H
Enhanced keypad and performance monitor, 2-51 Hazard warning lights switch, 2-35
Clock, 2-53
Headland turn sequence, 3-22
Ground speed display, 2-54
HTS symbols, 3-27
Error codes and warnings
Heater blower control, 2-12
Transmission error codes, 2-106
with Colour Display, 2-76 Heater temperature control, 2-12
with Enhanced Keypad, 2-75 Hydraulic power beyond port, 3-130
External rear view mirrors, 2-11
I
F Implement cable/harness routing, 2-21
Fast Steer Operation, 3-41 Implement monitor installation, 2-20
Fault finding, 5-1 Important information, 1-1, 2-1, 3-1
Brakes, 5-10 Before operating the tractor, 3-1
Cab, 5-10 In cab storage, 2-21
Electrical system, 5-11 Indicator and warning lights, 2-38
Engine, 5-4
Instructional seat, 2-32
Error codes, 5-1
Hydraulics, 5-8 Integrated Control Panel (ICP), 2-2
Powershift transmission, 5-7 Interior light, 2-12
Three-point hitch, 5-9 International symbols, 1-24
First 50 hour service, 1-1
Flange type rear axle, 3-180
K
Follow you home lights, 2-35
Key-start switch, 2-33
Four wheel drive, 2-135
Operating precautions, 2-136
Front 3-point hitch, 3-65 L
External controls, 3-80
Hitch operating mode, 3-79 Lubrication and maintenance
Hitch settings and adjustments, 3-81 4WD axle oil level, 4-47
Adjust handbrake, 4-37
Front axle oscillation stops, 3-176
Adjust headlamp/worklamp beam, 4-79
Front axle suspension, 2-137 Adjust pick-up hitch latching, 4-76
Front fenders (4WD), 3-177 Air brake drier reservoir, 4-64
Front P.T.O., 3-62 Bleed fuel system, 4-68
Front P.T.O. and 3-point hitch, 3-62 Cab air filters, 4-24, 4-49
Cab suspension adjustment, 4-78
Front tow hitch, 3-197
Calibrate transmission clutches, 4-69, 4-72
Front wheel alignment, Four wheel drive, 3-175 Change 4WD axle oil, 4-54, 4-55
Front wheel track adjustment, Four wheel drive, Change engine breather filter, 4-63
3-172 Change fuel filters, 4-46
Fuel level gauge, 2-37 Check battery, 4-34, 4-56
9-2
SECTION 9 - INDEX
Check brake pedal latch, 4-75 Every 36 months of operation, 4-65

Check drive belt tension, 4-33 Every 50 hours of operation, 4-22
Check engine air intake connections, 4-43 Every 600 hours of operation, 4-39
Check engine valve tappet clearance, 4-63 General maintenance, 4-66
Check wheel nut torque, 4-32 When the warning symbol appears, 4-18
Diesel fuel requirements, 4-4
Drain cooling system, 4-58
Drain remote valve reservoir, 4-77 O
Engine air cleaner, 4-43, 4-62 Operating in cold temperatures, 3-4
Engine coolant level, 4-20 Cold start aid, 3-11
Engine oil and filter change, 4-39 Coolant immersion heater, 3-7
Engine oil level, 4-21 Fuel heater, 3-7
First 50 hour service, 4-2 Transmission oil heater, 3-8
First 50 hours of operation, 4-1
Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level, 4-37, 4-38,
4-48 P
Fuel pre-filter and water trap, 4-67
Fuel system water separator, 4-19 Panel light dimming control, 2-42
Fuelling the tractor, 4-3 Performance monitor
Fuse and relay locations, 4-83 with Colour Display, 2-67
General information, 4-1 with Enhanced Keypad, 2-58
Inspect poly V-belt, 4-35 Area Accumulator, 2-59
Lubricant and coolant specification, 4-17 Area Hour Forecaster, 2-58
Biodegradable transmission oil, 4-13 Odometer, 2-58
Lubricants and coolants, 4-13 Power Command transmission, 2-89
Lubricate grease fittings, 4-26 Pre-operation checks, 3-2
Lubrication and maintenance chart, 4-15 Pressure washing the tractor, 3-2
Safety precautions, 4-1
Product identification, 1-3
Service air conditioner, 4-65
Transmission and rear axle oil level, 4-35 Programming the Displays
Tyre pressures, 4-32 with Colour Display, 2-71
Setting implement width, 2-71
Windscreen wash reservoir, 4-21
with Enhanced Keypad, 2-60
Audible beep, 2-61
M Calibrating for wheel slip, 2-63
Programming a service reminder, 2-65, 2-73
Mid mounted remote valves, 3-72 Setting implement width, 2-62
Setting slip alarm point, 2-72
Operating with a front loader, 3-84
Programming tractor functions, 3-1
Multi-function light switch, 2-34
Protective guards, 4-11
N
R
Numerical Listing, 4-18
Every 10 hours of operation, 4-20 Radio/cassette player, 2-19
Every 100 hours of operation, 4-33 Rear power take-off (PTO), 3-43
Every 1200 hours or 12 months of operation, Attaching equipment, 3-59
4-49 Auto PTO function, 3-54
Every 1200 hours or 24 months of operation, Changing the output shaft, 3-57
4-58 External PTO controls, 3-57
Every 300 hours of operation, 4-34
9-3
SECTION 9 - INDEX
General information, 3-48 Top link bracket, 3-140

Operating precautions, 3-60 Three-point linkage, Removing equipment, 3-136
Two speed shiftable PTO, 3-51
Towing the tractor, 3-3
Two-speed with interchangeable shafts, 3-49
Tractor noise level information sheet, 1-26
Right-hand footstep access, 4-12
Tractor Specification
Running in procedure, 3-2
Brakes, 7-18
Capacities, 7-8
S Cooling system, 7-10
Electrical equipment, 7-19
Safety decals, 1-16 Engine, 7-9
Driving the tractor, 1-9 Front 3-point hitch, 7-17
Safety precautions, 1-8 Front power take off, 7-12
Diesel fuel, 1-15 Front remote control valves, 7-17
Operating the P.T.O., 1-12 Fuel system, 7-9
Operating the tractor, 1-10 General dimensions, 7-2
Personal safety, 1-8 Hardware tightening torques, 7-20
Prevention of fire, 1-13 Hydraulic system, 7-12
Servicing the tractor, 1-12 Maximum operating angle, 7-11
The tractor, 1-8 Rear power take off, 7-11
Using chemical sprays, 2-17 Remote control valves, 7-17
Steering, 7-18
Seat belt, 2-32
Three-point hitch, 7-12
Seats, 2-26 Transmission, 7-10
Deluxe air suspension seat, 2-28 Weights, 7-6, 7-7
Standard air suspension seat, 2-26
Trailer braking systems, 3-165
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR), 1-37
Transporting the tractor, 3-2
Service parts, 1-2
Tyre inflation, 3-200
Starting the engine, 3-10 Tyre pressures and permissible loads, 3-201
Steering column adjustment, 2-33 Tyre symbol markings, 3-201, 3-202
Steering stops, 3-176
Stopping the engine, 3-13
U
T Using battery booster, 3-9
Using Biodiesel fuels, 1-2
Three-point hitch, 3-135 Using remote hydraulic equipment, 3-133, 7-8
Attaching equipment, 3-135
Automatic stabilisers, 3-145
Flexible link ends, 3-140 W
Hitch float, 3-138
Warning and advisory symbols, 2-77
Lift rod adjustment, 3-138
Hydraulic adjust, 3-139 Warranty, 1-2
Quick hitch, 3-141 Windscreen wash/wipe control, 2-36
Sway block stabilisers, 3-147 Worklamp/beacon switch panel, 2-19
Telescopic stabilisers, 3-143
Top link adjustment, 3-137
Hydraulic adjust, 3-139
9-4
xx
Dealer’s stamp
CNH Europe Holding S.A. reserves the right to make improvements in design and changes in specifications
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold.
Specifications, descriptions, and illustrative material herein are as accurate as known
at time of publication, but are subject to change without notice.
Availability of some models and equipment builds varies according to the country
in which the equipment is being used. For exact information about any particular product,
please consult your New Holland dealer.
Your success - Our specialty
Printed in France
Copyright © 2011 CNH Europe Holding S.A. All Rights Reserved. New Holland is a registered trademark of CNH Europe Holding S.A.
13 Rue Aldringen 13, L-118 Luxembourg

New Holland T7.235 (EN)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Holland T7.235 (EN)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS - according to Directives 2006/42/EC, Annex I 1.7.4.

Part Number 84411172

1 -- General Information and Safety

2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance

8 -- First 50 hour Service Forms

Represented by Giuseppe Gavioli,

Name and signature of the authorised per-

HEALTH AND SAFETY RELATED STANDARDS APPLIED TO YOUR TRACTOR

Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Section 3 -- Field Operation

Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance

Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1

Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1

RECOMMENDED SI (METRIC) UNITS IMPERIAL UNIT

PRESSURE or STRESS (FORCE PER AREA)

degrees Celsius C degrees Fahrenheit F

TORQUE (includes BENDING MOMENT, MOMENT OF FORCE, and MOMENT OF A COUPLE)

VOLUME PER TIME (includes DISCHARGE and FLOW RATE)

SOUND POWER LEVEL and SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

TO THE OWNER CLEANING THE TRACTOR

GENERAL Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with

OPERATORS MANUAL Ensure that each piece of non-New Holland

IMPORTANT: It is important the 50 hour service is WARRANTY

It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the

Tractor identification data must be supplied to the

The following provides the locations of the

Vehicle Identification Plate

The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 2 is

The serial number and model identification

The engine serial number and date of manufacture

Engine Serial No.

The details are repeated on the information plate

Further information relating to engine adjustments

NOTE: The details displayed on the engine

Power Command Transmission

The serial number plate (1) is located on the

Driveline Serial No.

Auto Command Transmission

A serial number plate (1) is located on top of the

The plate can be found adjacent to the rear of the

Driveline Serial No.

The cab serial number and other information is on the

Cab Serial No.

Product Identification Plate

The Product Identification Number plate provides

The figures shown are the maximum permissible

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

NOTE: The engines installed on the tractors

ASAE S441.3 FEB04

VERSION -- FEB ’08

IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on

2. When driving on public roads, have

3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at

5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other